QSS3001 Service Manual

www.minilablaser.
com
QSS-3001 Digital
QSS-3001SM Digital
QSS-3011 Digital
QSS-3011SM Digital
Service Manual
for service personnel only
www.minilablaser.com
CHAPTER DESCRIPTION
1.Cautions for work

2.Replacement and adjustment of parts
3.Mode
4.Troubleshooting
5.Operation sequence
6.Electrical parts
7.Setup for service personnel
8.Appendix
Notes to service personnel

Be sure to read this manual carefully to gain a thorough understanding of the correct procedures before servicing the
machine.
The printer processor uses both tapping truss head screws and spike truss head screws. When attaching the screws once
removed, make sure they are on their original positions. These screws are used for the place where grounding is required.
Tapping truss head screw
Spike truss head screw (green)
Washer head screw (for ground)

SCREW
This system consists of the following combination.

QSS-3011 Digital
QSS-3001 Digital
S-1200 (Film scanner)
LPP-1200 (Laser printer processor)
LPP-1200 (Laser printer processor)
QSS-3011SM Digital
QSS-3001SM Digital
LPP-1200SM (Laser printer processor)
LPP-1200SM (Laser printer processor)
System program: Ver. C
! It is prohibited to show, provide, lend or transfer this manual without the service personnel.
! The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
! Illustrations in this manual may vary depending on the model or manufacturing lot.
Microsoft, MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
"UNLHA(32).DLL" is Mr. Micco's free software.
digital ICE is a trademark of Applied Science Fiction, Inc.
Other product and company names mentioned here in may be the trademarks of their respective owners. Symbols of
trademarks, and , are not added.
Explanation of manual
Described for each specification
This manual contains the maintenance procedure for all the specifications.
The procedure for each specification may differ.
For the different procedures depending on the specifications

The specification mark is mentioned for the procedure.
Specification
Mark
Normal specification
[N]
SM specification
[SM]
There is no specification mark for the procedure which is same for all the specifications.
About the chapters

" 1. Cautions for work
Contains information on how to achieve safety in service operations. Be sure to read precautions thoroughly and
carefully.
" 2. Replacement and adjustment of parts
Describes how to remove or replace component parts and units, and how to adjust each part in replacement.
" 3. Mode
Shows the service mode transition the structure chart.
" 4. Troubleshooting
Describes how to solve the troubles.
" 5. Operation sequence
Describes the operation sequence of machine.
" 6. Electrical parts
Describes the PCB's used in this machine.
" 7. Setup for service personnel
Describes the setup procedures for service personnel.
" 8. Appendix
Describes the wiring diagram.
Marks and symbols used in this manual

Definitions of the marks and symbols used in this manual are as follows:
This is called the alert symbol mark.

Text following this mark contains particularly important information concerning safety. Be sure to heed this information.
This mark is used in conjunction with the words DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION, according to the extent of
influence (injury) on persons or damage to physical property.
This indicates operations or procedures requiring caution, instructions which should be followed, supplementary
explanations, etc.
This indicates the manual or section which should be referred to.
This indicates functions or instructions which are convenient to know.
iii
Abbreviations for processing solutions used in this manual

The names of the processing solutions in this manual are indicated as shown below. Some types of processing solutions may
have other names.
Processing solutions
Abbreviations
Color Developer
CD
Bleach Fixer
BF
Stabilizer
STB
iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Notes to service personnel
Explanation of manual ........................................................................................................................... iii
Described for each specification .................................................................................................... iii
About the chapters ......................................................................................................................... iii
Marks and symbols used in this manual ........................................................................................ iii
Abbreviations for processing solutions used in this manual ...........................................................iv
1. Cautions for work

Description of warning (signal words) ...................................................................................... 1001
Description of warning (signal words) ...................................................................................................................1001
Location of warning labels ........................................................................................................ 1002

Location of warning labels ...................................................................................................................................1002
For safe operation .................................................................................................................... 1003

For safe operation ...................................................................................................................................................1003
Countermeasure for the static electricity when replacing and maintaining the electrical parts .............................1004
Laser Precautions ....................................................................................................................................................1005
2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Removing covers ..................................................................................................................... 2001
Removing covers (Printer/Processor section) .......................................................................................................2001
Removing covers (Scanner section) .......................................................................................................................2005
Removing covers (film carrier section) ..................................................................................................................2007
Adjusting the belt tension ......................................................................................................... 2011

Adjusting the belt tension (printer section) ............................................................................................................2011
Adjusting the belt tension (processor section) ......................................................................................................2012
Adjusting the belt tension (film carrier section) .....................................................................................................2013
Display monitor section ............................................................................................................ 2031

Replacing the display monitor ................................................................................................................................2031
Scanner section ....................................................................................................................... 2061

Removing the scanner unit .....................................................................................................................................2061
Replacing the filter wheel unit ................................................................................................................................2063
Removing the light guide unit ................................................................................................................................2064
Adjustment after replacing S-1200 .........................................................................................................................2065
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC) .......................................................................................... 2070

Replacing the film carrier .......................................................................................................................................2070
Removing the advance unit ....................................................................................................................................2071
Replacing and adjusting the film advance motor ...................................................................................................2072
Replacing and adjusting the spool key motor, the clutch and the damper .............................................................2073
Replacing and adjusting the light lock door drive axis ...........................................................................................2074
Replacing and adjusting the light lock door motor .................................................................................................2075
Replacing and adjusting the magnetic head unit ....................................................................................................2076
Adjusting the VEI detection timing ........................................................................................................................2077
Adjusting the light lock door drive timing .............................................................................................................2078
MMC auto focus section adjustment ......................................................................................................................2085
Table peripheral section ........................................................................................................... 2111

Replacing the colorimeter and the calibration plate ...............................................................................................2111
Adjusting the height of the colorimeter ..................................................................................................................2112
Personal computer control section ........................................................................................... 2151

Opening/closing the personal computer control unit ..............................................................................................2151
Removing the personal computer control unit ........................................................................................................2152
Paper supply section A ............................................................................................................ 2518

Removing paper supply unit A ...............................................................................................................................2518
Removing the paper cutter unit and its right angle adjustment ..............................................................................2522
Adjusting the paper hold timing of the arm ............................................................................................................2524
Adjusting the imprint pressure of the CVP .............................................................................................................2525
Paper supply section B ............................................................................................................ 2541

Removing and adjusting the position of the paper supply unit B ...........................................................................2541
Adjusting the height and the position of the paper magazine mount B ..................................................................2542
Adjusting the paper zigzagging in paper supply unit B ..........................................................................................2543
Exposure advance section ....................................................................................................... 2581

Removing the exposure advance unit .....................................................................................................................2581
Banding shooting ....................................................................................................................................................2582
Engine section .......................................................................................................................... 2601

Replacing and adjusting the position of the laser unit ............................................................................................2601
Paper advance section ............................................................................................................. 2651

Removing the paper advance unit ...........................................................................................................................2651
Standard adjustment of the paper advance unit ......................................................................................................2652
Removing the processor loading unit .....................................................................................................................2653
Dryer Section ........................................................................................................................... 2722

Removing the dryer rack ........................................................................................................................................2722
Removing the dryer fan ..........................................................................................................................................2723
Replacing the dryer net ...........................................................................................................................................2724
Adjusting the backlash of the dryer rack drive gear and torque release .................................................................2725
Order Classification Section ..................................................................................................... 2741

Removing conveyor units 1 and 2 ..........................................................................................................................2741
Replacing the belt in conveyor unit 1 .....................................................................................................................2742
Slide adjustment of conveyor unit 1 .......................................................................................................................2743
Replacing the belt in conveyor unit 2 .....................................................................................................................2744
vi
Replenishment package unit .................................................................................................... 2781

Replacing the replenisher pump and the water supply pump [SM] .......................................................................2781
Replacing the probe [SM] .....................................................................................................................................2782
Adjusting the sensitivity of the replenisher solution sensor [SM] ........................................................................2783
3. Mode
Passwords ................................................................................................................................ 3001
Passwords ...............................................................................................................................................................3001
Mode structure chart ................................................................................................................ 3003

Mode structure chart (Order Display) .....................................................................................................................3003
Mode structure chart (Judgment Display) ..............................................................................................................3004
Mode structure chart (Menu display) .....................................................................................................................3011
Mode structure chart (Setup) ..................................................................................................................................3013
Mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [N] .......................................................................................................3015
Mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [SM] ....................................................................................................3015
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [N] ...................................................................................................3016
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM] ................................................................................................3016
Mode structure chart (Maintenance) .......................................................................................................................3017
Daily Totals .............................................................................................................................. 3031

Total Counter ..........................................................................................................................................................3031
Setup ........................................................................................................................................ 3061

Service Parameters ..................................................................................................................................................3061
Paper Specification Registration/Setup ..................................................................................................................3062
Magazine Registration/Setup ..................................................................................................................................3063
Monitor setup ..........................................................................................................................................................3064
NCE mode ..............................................................................................................................................................3065
Data Initialization ...................................................................................................................................................3066
Light Source Registration .......................................................................................................................................3067
Area Registration ....................................................................................................................................................3068
Processor Settings ................................................................................................................... 3101

Refilling Water Amount Setting [N] ....................................................................................................................3101
Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM] .................................................................................................................3101
Cleaning Water Amount Setting .............................................................................................................................3102
Pump Output Amount Setting [SM] .....................................................................................................................3111
Total Replenishment Amount Display [N] ...........................................................................................................3112
Total Replenishment Amount Display [SM] ........................................................................................................3112
NMC Setting ............................................................................................................................. 3131

NMC Setting ...........................................................................................................................................................3131
Operator Selections ................................................................................................................. 3141

Operator selections [N] .........................................................................................................................................3141
Operator selections [SM] ......................................................................................................................................3141
Maintenance ............................................................................................................................. 3151

Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (135/240 AFC) .......................................................................................................3151
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (120 AFC) ..............................................................................................................3152
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (135/240 MMC) .....................................................................................................3154
vii
Maintenance ............................................................................................................................. 3155

Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (135/240 AMC) ......................................................................................................3156
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment .................................................................................................................................3157
Thermosensor Calibration ......................................................................................................................................3158
Input Check (Printer) ..............................................................................................................................................3162
Input Check (Processor) [N] .................................................................................................................................3163
Input Check (Processor) [SM] ..............................................................................................................................3163
Output Check (Printer) ...........................................................................................................................................3167
Output Check (Processor) [N] ..............................................................................................................................3168
Output Check (Processor) [SM] ...........................................................................................................................3168
Reading and Writing Data ......................................................................................................................................3169
System Version Check ............................................................................................................................................3171
Software Upgrade ...................................................................................................................................................3172
Operation Information ............................................................................................................................................3176
Machine Specification [N] ....................................................................................................................................3181
Machine Specification [SM] .................................................................................................................................3181
Printer Mechanical Adjustment ................................................................................................ 3201

Reverse Unit Correction .........................................................................................................................................3201
Paper Advance Length Correction ..........................................................................................................................3202
Arm Unit Zigzagging Correction ............................................................................................................................3203
Exposure Center Correction ...................................................................................................................................3204
Exposure Image Correction ....................................................................................................................................3205
Exposure Start Timing Correction ..........................................................................................................................3206
Paper pressure operation correction ........................................................................................................................3207
Exposure Position Correction .................................................................................................................................3208
Exposure Zoom Rate Correction ............................................................................................................................3209
Exposure Zoom Rate Fine Adjustment ...................................................................................................................3210
Scanner Unit Adjustment ......................................................................................................... 3226

Scanner Filter Position Adjustment ........................................................................................................................3226
Laser Unit Adjustment ............................................................................................................................................3227
Swing and Tilt Adjustment .....................................................................................................................................3231
Light Axis Adjustment ...........................................................................................................................................3232
Focus Adjustment ...................................................................................................................................................3233
About PC .................................................................................................................................. 3701

BIOS setting (QSS-3001) .......................................................................................................................................3701
BIOS setting (QSS-3011) .......................................................................................................................................3701
Procedure for recovery ...........................................................................................................................................3801
Procedure for installing the QSS software ..............................................................................................................3850
Procedure for installing the profile data .................................................................................................................3860
Installing the SCSI driver .......................................................................................................................................3861
Procedure of installing the DVD-RAM driver .......................................................................................................3870
Check the drive assignment ....................................................................................................................................3871
Procedure for installing the FB scanner driver .......................................................................................................3872
Installing the Zip driver ..........................................................................................................................................3873
viii
4. Troubleshooting
Attention message: Processor ................................................................................................. 4001
No. 0500 [N]
Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. ........................................................................................4001
No. 0501 [N]
The replenisher switch is turned on. ..............................................................................................4001
No. 0502 [N]
Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. ................................................................4002
No. 0503
Empty the Effluent Tank. .....................................................................................................................4002
No. 0504 The Effluent Concentration Tank is full. ..............................................................................................4003

No. 0507 Close the Processor Top Cover. ............................................................................................................4004
No. 0508 Paper remains in the processor. Are you sure you want to turn the drive off? .....................................4005
No. 0515 Set the Rack Stopper. ............................................................................................................................4010
No. 0516 Remove the prints from Conveyor Unit 2. ...........................................................................................4010
No. 0517 Attach Conveyor Unit 1. .......................................................................................................................4011
No. 0518 Set the Dryer Cover. .............................................................................................................................4011
Attention message: SM replenishment .................................................................................... 4041

No. 0700-## [SM]
Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# .....................................................4041
No. 0701-## [SM]
Attach the Replenishment Package.P-# ................................................................................4041
No. 0702 [SM] Add water to the Water Supply Tank. ........................................................................................4042
No. 0705-## [SM]
Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# .....................................................4043
ix
Attention message: Printer ....................................................................................................... 4101

No. 1000 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A .....................................................................4101
No. 1001 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B .....................................................................4101
No. 1002 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper magazine A ...............................................4101
No. 1003 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper magazine B ...............................................4101
No. 1004 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A ..................................................................................4102
No. 1005 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B ..................................................................................4102
No. 1010 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A .................................................................................4104
No. 1011 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B .................................................................................4104
No. 1012 The print channel is not set. Confirm the print channel. ......................................................................4104
No. 1013 Outputting. . . ........................................................................................................................................4105
No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . ........................................................................4105
No. 1015 One moment please. . . ..........................................................................................................................4106
No. 1017 Would you like to stop printing? ..........................................................................................................4107
No. 1027-## Profile data was not found. ..............................................................................................................4114
No. 1028 More than 3 correction keys of low, middle or high density area. Execute correction? ......................4115
No. 1029 The measurement failed. Measure it again. ..........................................................................................4115
No. 1030 Wait until printing is complete. ............................................................................................................4116
No. 1031 Paper Specification Registration Setup was not completed. .................................................................4117
No. 1032 One moment please. . . ..........................................................................................................................4117
No. 1035 Paper Magazine Registration Setup is not completed. .........................................................................4119
No. 1036 Paper type for the attached magazine is not set. Paper Magazine A ...................................................4120
No. 1037 Paper type for the attached magazine is not set. Paper Magazine B ...................................................4120
No. 1038 Paper type for the magazine is not set. .................................................................................................4121
No. 1039 Paper type specification is not set. ........................................................................................................4121
No. 1040 Press the [ORDER] key. .......................................................................................................................4122
No. 1041 No more printing can be done for this order. Order will count up. .....................................................4122
No. 1043 Laser temperature is being adjusted. One moment please. . . ..............................................................4123
No. 1045 Close the Paper Advance Door. ............................................................................................................4124
No. 1046 Change the Paper Magazine. ................................................................................................................4125
No. 1047 Close the printer door. ..........................................................................................................................4125
No. 1048 Press the [ORDER] key. Wait until output has completed. .................................................................4126
No. 1049 Execute Auto Tuning. ...........................................................................................................................4126
Attention message: Scanner .................................................................................................... 4132

No. 1302 Would you like to stop scanning? .........................................................................................................4132
No. 1305 Photometry Section may be dirty. .........................................................................................................4134
No. 1306 Update the light source. If film remains in the Film Carrier, remove it. .............................................4134
No. 1307 Scanner Light Source is weak. ..............................................................................................................4135
No. 1308 Execute the light source registration. If film remains in the Film Carrier, remove it. .........................4135
No. 1312 Close the Lamphouse Cover. ................................................................................................................4137
No. 1313 The Focus Adjustment was not completed yet. ....................................................................................4137
Attention message: Film carrier ............................................................................................... 4150

No. 1400 Lock the Film Carrier. ..........................................................................................................................4150
No. 1401 Attach the Film Carrier. ........................................................................................................................4151
No. 1402 Attach the 135/240 AFC. ......................................................................................................................4151
No. 1403 Undeveloped cartridge. Cannot print. ...................................................................................................4153
No. 1404 The IX frame data is incomplete. ..........................................................................................................4153
No. 1405-## Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. ...................................................................................4154
No. 1409 Set the lane for the Film Carrier. ..........................................................................................................4156
No. 1410 Confirm the film stop position in the Film Carrier. ..............................................................................4156
No. 1412 The film is upside down. Would you like to continue printing? ..........................................................4158
No. 1413 Input the frame number .........................................................................................................................4158
No. 1414 The FID number was not detected. .......................................................................................................4159
No. 1416 Select the 240 lane. ...............................................................................................................................4160
No. 1417 Close the Mount Insertion Cover. .........................................................................................................4160
No. 1420 Select the DX code. ..............................................................................................................................4164
No. 1421 Confirm the stop position of all the frames to be printed. ....................................................................4164
No. 1422 Select the 135 lane. ...............................................................................................................................4165
No. 1423 Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment. Remove the film from the Film Carrier. ..............4165
No. 1424 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is being executed. .................................................................4165
No. 1425 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is complete. ..........................................................................4165
No. 1426 Attach the 110 AFC. .............................................................................................................................4166
No. 1427 Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment. If film remains in the Film Carrier, remove it. ....4166
No. 1428 Remove the mount from the Film Carrier. ...........................................................................................4167
No. 1429 Make sure that the mount is placed correctly. ......................................................................................4167
No. 1430 Confirm the frame size. ........................................................................................................................4168
No. 1432 Attach the MMC. ..................................................................................................................................4169
No. 1433 Attach the AMC. ...................................................................................................................................4170
No. 1435 Insertion direction of film is different. Insert the film from the rear end (end with largest frame number).
.................................................................................................................................................................................4171
xi
Attention message: Disk/Media ................................................................................................ 4181

No. 1501 The media is write protected.#### ........................................................................................................4181
No. 1502 Replace the media.#### ........................................................................................................................4182
No. 1503 The appropriate file was not found.#### ..............................................................................................4182
No. 1510 Read the data. Set the media. ...............................................................................................................4188
No. 1511 Write the data. Set the media. ..............................................................................................................4188
No. 1512 Data was not read from the media. .......................................................................................................4189
No. 1513 Data was not written to the media. Format the media? .......................................................................4189
No. 1514 Set the template media then select the media type. ..............................................................................4190
No. 1515 Data is too large to write. ......................................................................................................................4190
No. 1516 Data is too large to read. .......................................................................................................................4191
No. 1517 Invalid image format. Failed to read. ....................................................................................................4191
No. 1518 Output media is the same as Input media. Select different one. ..........................................................4192
No. 1519 Data was not written to the media. Format the media? .......................................................................4192
No. 1520 Select the template. ...............................................................................................................................4193
No. 1521 Template information does not match to make the Album Print. .........................................................4193
No. 1522 Are you sure to print the previous frame except selected one? ............................................................4194
No. 1523 It was not registered as an option. .........................................................................................................4194
No. 1527 Write the data. Set the media. ........................................................................................................ 4195-01
No. 1528 Registered Print Channel is not for normal printing. ...................................................................... 4195-01
No. 1532 Write the data. ................................................................................................................................. 4195-03
No. 1533 Data was saved to the storage media. ............................................................................................. 4195-04
No. 1534 Data was not written to the Hard Disk. Would you like to delete the image file(s)? .................... 4195-04
No. 1540 Data is being saved to the storage media. One moment please. . . ......................................................4196
No. 1547 Data was saved to the storage media. Remove the media. ..................................................................4197
No. 1548 Hard disk is full. Would you like to delete the image file(s)? .............................................................4197
No. 1549 Data is too small to read. ......................................................................................................................4198
Attention message: Colorimeter ............................................................................................... 4201

No. 1550 Register the Calibration Plate Data. ......................................................................................................4201
No. 1551 The calibration plate data is out of range. Register the data? ...............................................................4201
No. 1552-## The paper in the Colorimeter is too short. It cannot be measured. ..................................................4202
Attention message: Pricing unit ................................................................................................ 4221

No. 1600-## Reload the Pricing Unit. ..................................................................................................................4221
No. 1601-## Turn on the Pricing Unit. .................................................................................................................4221
No. 1602-## The rest 10 order could be kept by the Pricing Unit. .......................................................................4222
No. 1603-## The rest 2 order could be kept by the Pricing Unit. .........................................................................4222
No. 1604-## Pricing Sheet Print Out Check .........................................................................................................4223
Attention message: NMC ......................................................................................................... 4225

No. 1620 New mail has arrived. ...........................................................................................................................4225
Attention message: Software Upgrade .................................................................................... 4228

No. 1801-#### Execute software upgrade. ...........................................................................................................4228
xii
Attention message: Main .......................................................................................................... 4250

No. 1900 It was not registered as an option. .........................................................................................................4250
No. 1901 Selected optional function is not available. If you need to use, Install it. ...........................................4251
No. 1902 Adobe Photoshop is being used. To enter Menu, Quit the Adobe Photoshop. ....................................4251
No. 1903-#### Proceeding. One moment please. . . ............................................................................................4252
No. 1904-#### Proceeding. One moment please. . . ............................................................................................4252
No. 1905 Program timer was not set. ...................................................................................................................4253
No. 1907 Select one frame. ...................................................................................................................................4254
Attention message: Edit ........................................................................................................... 4401

No. 4001 Are you sure about deleting? ................................................................................................................4401
No. 4002 Red Eye Correction cannot be executed no more. ................................................................................4401
No. 4003-## Image cannot be inserted into the specified position. ......................................................................4402
No. 4006 Prints cannot be made with this Print Channel. Select a Print Channel using a larger paper width. ...4404
No. 4007 The Letter Information was not read successfully. ...............................................................................4404
No. 4009 Template file was not found. Select the folder including the files. .....................................................4405
No. 4010 Specify the image area. .........................................................................................................................4406
No. 4011 Are you sure you want to exit? .............................................................................................................4406
No. 4012 No more UNDO can be executed. ........................................................................................................4407
No. 4014 The saved data cannot be read with this version. .................................................................................4408
No. 4015 Selected file already exists. ...................................................................................................................4408
No. 4017 The head and jaw position is opposite, or the selected region is too small. .........................................4409
No. 4018 Would you like to quit the Edit Mode? .................................................................................................4409
No. 4019 If you Import, all customer information will be deleted. Are you sure you want to Import? ..............4410
No. 4020 Failed to write the file. ..........................................................................................................................4410
No. 4021 Failed to read the file. ...........................................................................................................................4411
No. 4023 Image magnification ratio or reduction ratio is out of range. ...............................................................4412
No. 4024 Select the layer. .....................................................................................................................................4412
No. 4025 This template has more than 16 layers. You cannot use this template. ...............................................4413
xiii
Error message: Processor ....................................................................................................... 4461

No. 5500 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. CD ....................................................4461
No. 5501 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. BF .....................................................4461
No. 5502 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. STB ..................................................4461
No. 5503 The dryer temperature is above the safety range. .................................................................................4461
No. 5504 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. CD ............................................4462
No. 5505 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. BF .............................................4462
No. 5506 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. STB ..........................................4462
No. 5507 The dryer temperature is below the processing range. .........................................................................4462
No. 5508 [N]
The processing solution level is too low. ......................................................................................4463
No. 5508 [SM] The processing solution level is too low. ...................................................................................4463
No. 5509 The circulation amount has decreased. .................................................................................................4464
No. 5510 Processor A/D conversion error. ...........................................................................................................4464
No. 5511 [N]
The circulation pump has stopped. CD .........................................................................................4465
No. 5513 [N]
The circulation pump has stopped. BF ..........................................................................................4465
No. 5515 [N]
The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 .....................................................................................4465
No. 5516 [N]
No. 5517 [N]
No. 5518 [N]
No. 5511 [SM] The circulation pump has stopped. CD ......................................................................................4465

No. 5513 [SM] The circulation pump has stopped. BF .......................................................................................4465
No. 5515 [SM] The circulation pump has stopped.STB1 ...................................................................................4465
No. 5516 [SM] The circulation pump has stopped. STB2 ..................................................................................4465
Error message: Processor ....................................................................................................... 4466

No. 5519 Thermosensor error. CD .......................................................................................................................4466
No. 5520 Thermosensor error. BF ........................................................................................................................4466
No. 5521 Thermosensor error. STB .....................................................................................................................4466
No. 5522 Dryer thermosensor error. .....................................................................................................................4466
No. 5523 Inner Thermosensor error. ....................................................................................................................4467
No. 5524 Refilling water operation error. CD-W .................................................................................................4467
No. 5525 Refilling water operation error. BF-W .................................................................................................4467
No. 5526 Refilling water operation error. STB1-W .............................................................................................4467
No. 5530 The Processor Top Cover is open. ........................................................................................................4468
No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. ..................................................................4468
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. .........................................................................................4469
No. 5535 Paper has jammed in the processor section. .........................................................................................4470
No. 5537 The Rack Stopper is not set. .................................................................................................................4472
No. 5538 Backup data error. Processor ...............................................................................................................4473
No. 5540 Print Conveyor 1 operation error. .........................................................................................................4475
No. 5541 Print Conveyor 1 was removed. ............................................................................................................4476
No. 5542 Laser Unit Thermosensor error. ............................................................................................................4476
No. 5543 The dryer cover is removed. .................................................................................................................4477
No. 5544 Failed to turn ON the PC when the machine started up. .......................................................................4477
xiv
Error message: SM replenishment ........................................................................................... 4521

No. 5700-## [SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. CD-A ........................................................................4521
No. 5701-## [SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. CD-B ........................................................................4521
No. 5702-## [SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. CD-C ........................................................................4521
No. 5703-## [SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. CD-W .......................................................................4521
No. 5704-## [SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. BF-A .........................................................................4521
No. 5705-## [SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. BF-B .........................................................................4521
No. 5706-## [SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. STB ..........................................................................4521
No. 5710 [SM] Refilling water operation error. CD-W ......................................................................................4522

No. 5711 [SM] Refilling water operation error. BF-W .......................................................................................4522
No. 5712 [SM] Refilling water operation error. STB1-W ...................................................................................4522
xv
Error message: Printer ............................................................................................................. 4607

No. 6012-## Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A ...........................................................................................4607
No. 6013-## Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B ...........................................................................................4607
No. 6014-## Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A .......................................................................................4607
No. 6015-## Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B .......................................................................................4607
No. 6016-## Paper Cutter operation error. ...........................................................................................................4608
No. 6017-## Paper has jammed in the printer section. .........................................................................................4608
No. 6021-## Paper remains in the printer section. ...............................................................................................4611
No. 6034-## Paper has jammed in the Paper Advance Section. ..........................................................................4619
No. 6054 The Initial Setup was not executed. ......................................................................................................4626
No. 6056 Printer system error. ..............................................................................................................................4627
No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error. ....................................................................................................................4644
No. 6074 B Laser control error. ............................................................................................................................4644
No. 6075 G Laser control error. ............................................................................................................................4644
No. 6076 Polygon Mirror control error. ...............................................................................................................4645
No. 6080 Paper Magazine is different. .................................................................................................................4649
No. 6081 Backup data error. Printer ....................................................................................................................4649
No. 6082-### Setup error. ....................................................................................................................................4650
No. 6083 Setup data error. ....................................................................................................................................4651
No. 6084 Setup data error (High density area). ....................................................................................................4651
No. 6086 Setup print error. ...................................................................................................................................4652
No. 6090-## R Laser Thermosensor error. ...........................................................................................................4659
No. 6091-## Arm Unit operation error. ................................................................................................................4660
No. 6092-## Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. ......................................................................................4660
No. 6095-## Reverse Unit (Left) Horizontal operation error. ..............................................................................4661
No. 6096-## Reverse Unit (Right) Horizontal operation error. ............................................................................4661
No. 6097-## Reverse Unit (Left) Elevator operation error. .................................................................................4662
No. 6098-## Reverse Unit (Right) Elevator operation error. ...............................................................................4662
No. 6100-## Paper Advance Door is open. ..........................................................................................................4663
No. 6101-## Paper Hold Motor operation error. ..................................................................................................4663
No. 6104 Printer Door is open. .............................................................................................................................4665
No. 6105 B Laser light source status error. ..........................................................................................................4665
No. 6106 G Laser light source status error. ..........................................................................................................4665
No. 6107 R Laser temperature is out of range. .....................................................................................................4666
No. 6111 Auto Tuning error. ................................................................................................................................4668
xvi
Error message: Scanner .......................................................................................................... 4681

No. 6300 Scanner Light Source Section Safety Thermostat was activated. .........................................................4681
No. 6302-## Scanner Filter operation error. .........................................................................................................4682
No. 6303-## Scanner Zoom 1 operation error. .....................................................................................................4682
No. 6304-## Scanner Zoom 2 operation error. .....................................................................................................4682
No. 6305-## Scanner Focus operation error. ........................................................................................................4683
No. 6306-## Scanner Iris operation error. ............................................................................................................4683
No. 6307 Scanner Measurement Value error. ......................................................................................................4684
No. 6308-## Scanner light source registration error. ...........................................................................................4684
No. 6309-## Scanner change of light error. .........................................................................................................4685
No. 6310-## Scanner area registration error. ........................................................................................................4685
No. 6311-## Scanner data error. ...........................................................................................................................4686
No. 6313-## CCD check error. .............................................................................................................................4687
No. 6314 Setup Filter dispersion correction error (Negative). .............................................................................4688
No. 6315 Setup Filter dispersion correction error (Positive). ...............................................................................4688
No. 6316 Light source registration error (Negative). ...........................................................................................4688
No. 6317 Light source registration error (Positive). .............................................................................................4688
No. 6318 CCD output characteristics error. .........................................................................................................4690
No. 6319 Backup data error. Scanner AFC .........................................................................................................4690
No. 6321 Focus auto adjustment error. .................................................................................................................4692
No. 6322-## Scanner input balance error. ............................................................................................................4692
No. 6324 F stop value range error. .......................................................................................................................4693
No. 6326 The Lamphouse Cover is open. ............................................................................................................4694
xvii
Error message: Film carrier ...................................................................................................... 4731

No. 6400-## Perforation Sensor error.#### .........................................................................................................4731
No. 6401-## Loading Sensor error.#### ..............................................................................................................4731
No. 6402-## Ready Sensor error.#### .................................................................................................................4732
No. 6403-## 135 film has stopped at the Film Carrier. ........................................................................................4732
No. 6407-## Spool Key operation error. ..............................................................................................................4734
No. 6408 The Film Carrier is unlocked. ...............................................................................................................4735
No. 6409-## The 240 Head Cleaning Leader has stopped. ..................................................................................4735
No. 6410-## Film Sensor error.### ......................................................................................................................4736
No. 6411-## Film Carrier Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment was not executed. ......................................................4736
No. 6412-## 135 DX Sensor 1 error. ....................................................................................................................4737
No. 6423 Auto focus error. ...................................................................................................................................4740
No. 6424-## Mount Unit operation error. ............................................................................................................4740
No. 6425-## Mount detection error. .....................................................................................................................4741
No. 6426 The lane is out of position. ....................................................................................................................4741
No. 6429 System error (AFC / Scanner control PCB). .........................................................................................4742
No. 6431 Auto focus error. ...................................................................................................................................4744
No. 6432-## Mount Unit operation error. ............................................................................................................4745
No. 6433-## Mount detection error. .....................................................................................................................4745
No. 6434-## Mount detection (inlet) error. ..........................................................................................................4746
No. 6435-## Mount insertion operation error. ......................................................................................................4746
No. 6436 Mount elevator operation error. ............................................................................................................4747
No. 6437-## Mount eject operation error. ............................................................................................................4747
No. 6438-## 135 Cleaning Leader has stopped. ...................................................................................................4748
No. 6439-## The film strip is too short to be printed. ..........................................................................................4748
Error message: Disk/Media ...................................................................................................... 4782

No. 6503 Formatting could not be executed. ........................................................................................................4782
No. 6504 Backup data could not be read. .............................................................................................................4782
No. 6505 Backup data could not be written. ........................................................................................................4783
No. 6506-## Hard disk is full. Delete the unnecessary image file(s). .................................................................4783
Error message: Colorimeter ..................................................................................................... 4801

No. 6551-## Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit. ....................................................................................4801
No. 6552 Backup data error. Colorimeter Unit ...................................................................................................4801
Error message: Pricing unit ...................................................................................................... 4831

No. 6600-## Pricing Unit communication error. ..................................................................................................4831
No. 6601-## Pricing Unit operation error. ............................................................................................................4831
No. 6602-## Pricing Unit Printer operation error. ................................................................................................4832
No. 6603 Backup data error. PU ..........................................................................................................................4832
Error message: Software upgrade ........................................................................................... 4854

No. 6803 Language version of message data is incorrect. Message display in English. .....................................4854
xviii
Error message: Image processing PCB ................................................................................... 4861

No. 6820-## Image Processing PCB operation error. ..........................................................................................4861
No. 6821 Print data error. .....................................................................................................................................4861
Error message: Communication ............................................................................................... 4870

No. 6900-## Main control system error. ..............................................................................................................4870
No. 6901-#### ARCNET communication error.######### ...............................................................................4871
No. 6902-#### LVDS communication error.######### .....................................................................................4871
No. 6903-#### Serial communication error.########## ....................................................................................4872
No. 6904-#### SCSI communication error.########## .....................................................................................4872
No. 6906-#### Failed to change the mode. Enter to the next mode? ..................................................................4874
No. 6907-#### The appropriate file was not found. .............................................................................................4874
No. 6908-#### Processing communication error. ................................................................................................4875
No. 6909-#### CPU was reset. Abort the process. .............................................................................................4875
No. 6913 System was shut down forcibly. Restart the system. ...........................................................................4877
Error message: Edit ................................................................................................................. 4971

No. 9000-## Edit mode System error. .................................................................................................................4971
No. 9001-## Edit mode Information file error. ...................................................................................................4971
No. 9002-## Edit mode Image data error. ...........................................................................................................4972
No. 9003-## Edit mode Image read error. ...........................................................................................................4972
5. Operation sequence
Film advance operation (135) .................................................................................................................................5101
Film feed operation (MMC) ...................................................................................................................................5151
Film advance operation (AMC) ..............................................................................................................................5155
Paper path diagram .................................................................................................................. 5501

Paper path diagram .................................................................................................................................................5501
Paper advance operation ......................................................................................................... 5511

Paper loading operation ..........................................................................................................................................5511
Paper advance operation (before exposure) ............................................................................................................5521
Exposure operation .................................................................................................................................................5541
Paper advance operation (after exposure: lane is not selected) ..............................................................................5551
Paper advance operation (after exposure: lane is selected) ....................................................................................5552
Paper rewind operation ...........................................................................................................................................5561
Paper splicing operation .........................................................................................................................................5571
Paper end operation ................................................................................................................................................5581
Fogged paper operation ..........................................................................................................................................5591
6. Electrical parts
Power specification .................................................................................................................. 6001
Changing the power supply specifications (Japan) ................................................................................................6001
Changing the power supply specifications (Outside Japan) ...................................................................................6002
Changing the frequency ..........................................................................................................................................6003
xix
Cables ...................................................................................................................................... 6011

Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable .....................................................................................................6011
Handling the flat cable ............................................................................................................................................6012
Installation position of the field ground (Scanner section) .....................................................................................6021
Installation position of the field ground (Printer section) .......................................................................................6022
Installation position of the field ground (Processor section) ..................................................................................6023
Power ON/OFF ........................................................................................................................ 6031

System starting ........................................................................................................................................................6031
Disposition and description of electrical parts .......................................................................... 6107

Scanner section (disposition and description of electrical parts) ............................................................................6107
135/240 AFC (disposition and description of electrical parts) ...............................................................................6111
120 AFC (disposition and description of electrical parts) ......................................................................................6112
135/240 MMC (disposition and description of electrical parts) .............................................................................6114
135/240 AMC (disposition and description of electrical parts) ..............................................................................6116
Printer main body (disposition and description of electrical parts) ........................................................................6151
Paper supply section (disposition and description of electrical parts) ....................................................................6156
Exposure advance section (disposition and description of electrical parts) ...........................................................6157
Paper advance section (disposition and description of electrical parts) .................................................................6158
Laser unit (disposition and description of electrical parts) .....................................................................................6159
Personal computer section (disposition and description of electrical parts) (QSS-3001) ......................................6161
Personal computer section (disposition and description of electrical parts) (QSS-3011) ......................................6161
Disposition (QSS-3011) ...................................................................................................................................6161
Processor section (disposition and description of electrical parts) [N] ................................................................6181
Processor section (disposition and description of electrical parts) [SM] .............................................................6181
Disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply ..................................................................... 6301

Scanner section (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply) .....................................................................6301
135/240 AFC (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply) .........................................................................6311
120 AFC (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply) ................................................................................6312
MMC (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply) .....................................................................................6314
AMC (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply) .....................................................................................6316
Printer section (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply) .......................................................................6351
Processor section (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply) [N] ..........................................................6381
Processor section (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply) [SM] .......................................................6381
xx
Description of PCB (printer section) ......................................................................................... 6401

PCI-LVDS conversion PCB (J390343) ..................................................................................................................6401
PCI-ARCNET conversion PCB (J390342) ............................................................................................................6402
Keyboard connecting PCB (J390645) ....................................................................................................................6403
Memory (I090231, I090232) ..................................................................................................................................6404
Image processing PCB (J390577) ..........................................................................................................................6405
D-ICE PCB (J390572) ............................................................................................................................................6408
LVDS connecting PCB (J390651) ..........................................................................................................................6410
Keyboard switch PCB (J390510) ...........................................................................................................................6441
System control PCB (J390642) (QSS-3001) ..........................................................................................................6442
System control PCB (J390739) (QSS-3011) ..........................................................................................................6442
PS2 PCB (J490281) ................................................................................................................................................6443
Printer I/O PCB 1 (J390590) ..................................................................................................................................6460
Printer I/O PCB 2 (J390574) ..................................................................................................................................6461
AFC/scanner control PCB (J390546) .....................................................................................................................6501
AFC/scanner driver PCB (J390721) .......................................................................................................................6502
Colorimeter control PCB (J390551) .......................................................................................................................6506
PU control PCB (J307103) .....................................................................................................................................6516
SW/LED PCB (J390643) ........................................................................................................................................6517
ATX mother board (W408266), DIMM (I090236) (QSS-3001) ...........................................................................6521
ATX mother board (W408721), RIMM (I090302) (QSS-3011) ...........................................................................6521
SCSI card (I090228) (QSS-3001) ..........................................................................................................................6524
Video board (I090301) (QSS-3011) ......................................................................................................................6525
ATX power supply (I038337), Battery pack (I085024) (QSS-3001) ....................................................................6526
ATX power supply (I038354), Battery pack (I085024) (QSS-3011) ....................................................................6526
Hard disk drive (I090238, I090291) (QSS-3001) ..................................................................................................6527
Hard disk drive 1, 2 (I090303) (QSS-3011) ..........................................................................................................6527
Each media drive (QSS-3001) ...............................................................................................................................6528
Each media drive (QSS-3011) ...............................................................................................................................6528
Printer control PCB (J390578) ...............................................................................................................................6551
Processor control PCB (J390592) [N] ..................................................................................................................6552
Processor control PCB (J390592) [SM] ...............................................................................................................6552
Laser control PCB (J390640) .................................................................................................................................6571
Clock PCB (J390639) .............................................................................................................................................6572
Laser I/O PCB (J390641) .......................................................................................................................................6573
B laser driver and G laser driver (J390656) ............................................................................................................6574
Laser temperature connecting PCB (J390742) .......................................................................................................6575
CVP PCB (J306324) ...............................................................................................................................................6581
Dual paper magazine PCB (J306820) .....................................................................................................................6582
Hard disk drive (I090233) ......................................................................................................................................6583
xxi
Description of PCB (film carrier section) .................................................................................. 6601

Connecting PCB 1 (J390481) .................................................................................................................................6601
Connecting PCB 2 (J390482) .................................................................................................................................6602
Connecting PCB 3 (J490255) .................................................................................................................................6603
Driver PCB 1 (J390368) .........................................................................................................................................6604
Driver PCB 2 (J390519) .........................................................................................................................................6605
Sensor PCB (J390560) ............................................................................................................................................6606
Power PCB (J390380) ............................................................................................................................................6607
Magnetic head PCB (J390497) ...............................................................................................................................6608
Connecting PCB 4 (J390579) .................................................................................................................................6609
Connecting PCB (J390371) ....................................................................................................................................6621
Sensor PCB (J390385) ............................................................................................................................................6622
Connecting PCB (J390372) ....................................................................................................................................6631
Sensor PCB (J390394) ............................................................................................................................................6632
MMC connecting PCB (J390483) ..........................................................................................................................6636
MMC sensor PCB (J390389) ..................................................................................................................................6637
135 AFC connecting PCB (J390708) .....................................................................................................................6638
135 AFC sensor PCB (J390709) .............................................................................................................................6639
AMC connecting PCB (J390700) ...........................................................................................................................6640
Description of PCB (processor section) ................................................................................... 6701

Processor I/O PCB (J306946) [N] ........................................................................................................................6701
Processor I/O PCB (J306946) [SM] .....................................................................................................................6701
Main relay PCB (J390644) .....................................................................................................................................6702
Processor relay PCB (J306816) ..............................................................................................................................6703
SM I/O PCB (J390534) [SM] ...............................................................................................................................6741
Description of power supply ..................................................................................................... 6801

Power supply ..........................................................................................................................................................6801
Description of PM driver ........................................................................................................... 6851

Description of PM driver ........................................................................................................................................6851
AOM driver (I124001-00) ......................................................................................................................................6861
Replacing the computer ........................................................................................................... 6901

Replacing the computer ..........................................................................................................................................6901
7. Setup for service personnel

Setup during installation flow ................................................................................................... 7001
Setup during installation (Works to do until completing the temperature adjustment) ..........................................7001
Setup during installation (Works after completing the temperature adjustment) ...................................................7002
Other works after installation (Language setting except English and Japanese) ....................................................7004
Check the processor setting [N] ............................................................................................................................7005
Check the processor setting [SM] .........................................................................................................................7005
8. Appendix
Periodically replaced parts ....................................................................................................... 8011
Periodically replaced parts [N] .............................................................................................................................8011
Periodically replaced parts [SM] ..........................................................................................................................8011
Positions of paper jam release labels ...................................................................................... 8021

Positions of paper jam release labels ......................................................................................................................8021
xxii
Service personnel tool list ........................................................................................................ 8031

Service personnel tool list [N] ..............................................................................................................................8031
Service personnel tool list [SM] ...........................................................................................................................8031
Operation keyboard correspondence list ................................................................................. 8101

Operation keyboard correspondence list ................................................................................................................8101
Condition list for replenishment solution sensors ..................................................................... 8151

Condition list for replenishment solution sensors [SM] .......................................................................................8151
Table of wiring diagrams .......................................................................................................... 8900

Table of wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................................................8900
xxiii
This page is intentionally blank.
xxiv
Cautions for work

Description of warning (signal words) .................................................................................... 1001
Description of warning (signal words) ................................................................................................................1001
Location of warning labels ..................................................................................................... 1002

Location of warning labels ................................................................................................................................1002
For safe operation ................................................................................................................. 1003

For safe operation ................................................................................................................................................1003
Countermeasure for the static electricity when replacing and maintaining the electrical parts ..........................1004
Laser Precautions .................................................................................................................................................1005
1000
1/1
1 Cautions for work
1.
1000
1001
Description of warning (signal words)

The warning indications are classified by the signal words DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION according to the extent of the
danger.
The warning indications are on the important part of the machine for safe operation. If ignored, death or serious injury occurs, or the
machine breaks down. Be sure to follow the indications in the manuals or on the warning labels.
The warning indications include the signal word, the type and extent of the danger, and information to avoid danger.
Carefully read and understand the warning indications included in this manual and on the warning labels before operating the machine.
This indicates situations of impending danger leading to death or serious injury if not avoided.
This indicates situations which risk death or serious injury if not avoided.
This indicates situations which risk light or medium injury if not avoided. It is also used to indicate dangerous situations
which may only cause damage to physical property.
Example of warning label

Warning (signal word)
Symbol mark (warning

indication)
Warning text (warning

indication)
SIGNALWORD
1001
1/1
Signal words are used to classify the potential extent of injury that can occur to a person who fails to heed the messages.
1002
Location of warning labels

The following shows the locations and types of warning labels and the parts number on this machine. Heed the clearly indicated
warnings and operate safely without accidents. Do not peel the labels off. If the warning labels on the machine becomes illegible or
peel off, contact us or your place of purchase and exchange them with new labels.
2
1
4
5
6
7
16
8
15
8
15
10
6
11
12
13
11
14
This part differs depending on the machine specifications.

G057940
1002
1/4
! Location of warning labels and their types
A023473-01
A045206-01
1002
A023031-01
A045101-01
A022531-01
A022587-01
A022523-01
A023349-01
1002
2/4
1002
10
A058588-01
A023221-01
11
12
A021584-01
A045078-01
13
A234392-01
14
A234350-01
15
A515330-01
1002
3/4
1002
16
A063381-01
1002
4/4
1003
For safe operation
For safe operation
For safe operation
Prior to any part replacement or mechanical adjustment, be sure the main power supply is turned off.
Since the work which uses key operations cannot turn off the circuit breaker, mechanical operation check during it
requires particular attention.
IMPORTANT
Ground wires (green and yellow) are connected to the covers and units of the machine.
For reassembly, be sure to connect the ground wires as they were.
Be sure to perform an operation check after replacing or adjusting any parts (or units).
! Precautions for processing solutions
This machine uses non-pharmaceutical poison and toxic processing solutions which are dangerous to drink in. Direct
contact with processing solutions may irritate eyes.
When handling processing solutions, wear safety goggles.
If a processing solution has been ingested accidentally, immediately rinse the mouth out with water, and drink one or
two cups of water. Contact a physician as soon as possible, and then vomit the solution according to the physician's
instructions.
If processing solution gets into eyes, immediately rinse them under running water for at least 15 minutes, and then
contact a physician.
Direct contact with processing solutions may irritate the skin and may cause an allergic reaction.
When handling processing solutions, be sure to wear rubber gloves and clothing for workwear, to avoid direct contact.
If there is a possibility of direct or indirect exposure to a processing solution, wash with soap and rinse with lots of
water, after completion of work.
Processing solution stains on your clothing may result in discoloration or fading. When handling processing solutions,
wear clothing for workwear.
1003
1/3
! General precautions
1003
For safe operation
If any case you have to take care of wiring for the power such as moving the machine, ask a qualified professional
electrician for work. Do not forget to ground the machine.
Pay attention to avoid shocks when performing troubleshooting, wiring checking, or voltage/current measurement.
When replacing a fuse or PCB, be sure to turn off the circuit breaker and the main power supply.
! Precautions for operating rotary section
Be careful for your hands, hair, clothes, etc., not to be caught under the gear, chain, belt, roller, fan and other rotating
parts.
Do not remove the cover unless it is specified.
Be sure to turn off the circuit breaker and main power supply of this machine before performing any work.
Keep away your hands from the machine during operation.
If your hand or the like is caught and you cannot move, ask someone around you to turn off the circuit breaker at once.
! Precautions for operating heating section
The lamp for light source, processing solution heater, dryer heater, and motor generate an intense heat.
If you directly touch them during operation or right after operation, you may get burnt.
When replacement of parts or maintenance is performed, make sure that the temperature is fully lowered. Cool the
lamp for light source for 15 minutes or more after turning off the lamp.
After the temperature is fully lowered, turn off the circuit breaker and main power supply of this machine and perform
the operation.
Each cooling time of heaters and motors differs depending on the status of operation that has been performed.
If you have got burnt, cool the burn with flowing water and contact a physician as soon as possible.
1003
2/3
! Precautions against electric shock
1003
For safe operation
There is a danger of hands being caught by the open/close covers or doors, or by the movable units.
When opening and closing covers or doors, be sure to hold them firmly.
When moving a unit manually, hold the specified parts only.
When working with a unit which automatically moves, or when working around the unit, be sure to turn off the circuit
breaker and main power supply.
If your hand is caught and you cannot move, immediately call for help to turn off the circuit breaker.
! Precautions for using edged tools
There is a danger of cutting hands on edged tools.

Do not remove the covers from edged tools. Keep hands away from edged tools.
When operating near edged tools, turn off the circuit breaker and main power supply.
There is a danger of cutting hands on edged tools.

When replacing an edged tool with a new one, do not touch the edge.
1003
3/3
! Precautions for movable units
1004
For safe operation
If an electronically charged human body touches electronic parts like PCBs, it may adversely affect the electronic parts.
When handling the electronic parts, be sure to use static-dissipative tools to prevent the components on the PCB from being damaged due
to static electricity.
Also use the static-dissipative tools for maintenance of the units or engines.
Static-dissipative tool
Name
Remarks
Portable Static-Dissipative Field

Service Kit
Use this kit when replacing or installing/removing the electronic parts from the
machine. This kit is consist of four items of Static-Dissipative Work Mat, Wrist
Starp, Ground Cord, and Alligator Clips.
Static-Dissipative conductive gloves
Use this to prevent that sebum on your hand adheres when you touch a PCB.
Wrist Strap
Use this when checking the electronic parts.
When using the static-dissipative tool, be sure to turn off the circuit breaker of the unit and the main power supply, and
wait 10 seconds or more to carry out operation.
1004
1/1
Countermeasure for the static electricity when replacing and maintaining

the electrical parts
1005
For safe operation
Laser Precautions
The laser machinery is built into the printer.
Follow the instructions to avoid exposing your eyes to laser radiation.

Do not perform the operation not described in this manual.
Do not perform printing operations while the safety switch is released.
Location of laser labels

The labels for the laser are placed on this machine.
Printer section
Processor section
1
4
G061373
1005
1/2
1005
For safe operation
1005
2/2
Replacement and adjustment of parts

Removing covers ................................................................................................................... 2001
Removing covers (Printer/Processor section) ....................................................................................................2001
Removing covers (Scanner section) ....................................................................................................................2005
Removing covers (film carrier section) ...............................................................................................................2007
Adjusting the belt tension ...................................................................................................... 2011

Adjusting the belt tension (printer section) .........................................................................................................2011
Adjusting the belt tension (processor section) ...................................................................................................2012
Adjusting the belt tension (film carrier section) ..................................................................................................2013
Display monitor section ......................................................................................................... 2031

Replacing the display monitor .............................................................................................................................2031
Scanner section ..................................................................................................................... 2061

Removing the scanner unit ..................................................................................................................................2061
Replacing the filter wheel unit .............................................................................................................................2063
Removing the light guide unit .............................................................................................................................2064
Adjustment after replacing S-1200 ......................................................................................................................2065
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC) ........................................................................................ 2070

Replacing the film carrier ....................................................................................................................................2070
Removing the advance unit .................................................................................................................................2071
Replacing and adjusting the film advance motor ................................................................................................2072
Replacing and adjusting the spool key motor, the clutch and the damper ..........................................................2073
Replacing and adjusting the light lock door drive axis .......................................................................................2074
Replacing and adjusting the light lock door motor ..............................................................................................2075
Replacing and adjusting the magnetic head unit .................................................................................................2076
Adjusting the VEI detection timing .....................................................................................................................2077
Adjusting the light lock door drive timing ..........................................................................................................2078
MMC auto focus section adjustment ...................................................................................................................2085
Table peripheral section ........................................................................................................ 2111

Replacing the colorimeter and the calibration plate ............................................................................................2111
Adjusting the height of the colorimeter ...............................................................................................................2112
Personal computer control section ........................................................................................ 2151

Opening/closing the personal computer control unit ...........................................................................................2151
Removing the personal computer control unit ....................................................................................................2152
Paper supply section A .......................................................................................................... 2518

Removing paper supply unit A ............................................................................................................................2518
Removing the paper cutter unit and its right angle adjustment ...........................................................................2522
Adjusting the paper hold timing of the arm .........................................................................................................2524
Adjusting the imprint pressure of the CVP .........................................................................................................2525
Paper supply section B .......................................................................................................... 2541

Removing and adjusting the position of the paper supply unit B ........................................................................2541
Adjusting the height and the position of the paper magazine mount B ...............................................................2542
Adjusting the paper zigzagging in paper supply unit B .......................................................................................2543
Exposure advance section .................................................................................................... 2581

Removing the exposure advance unit ..................................................................................................................2581
Banding shooting .................................................................................................................................................2582
2000
1/2
2 Replacement and adjustment of parts
2.
2000
2000
Engine section ....................................................................................................................... 2601

Replacing and adjusting the position of the laser unit .........................................................................................2601
Paper advance section .......................................................................................................... 2651

Removing the paper advance unit .......................................................................................................................2651
Standard adjustment of the paper advance unit ...................................................................................................2652
Removing the processor loading unit ..................................................................................................................2653
Removing the dryer rack .....................................................................................................................................2722

Removing the dryer fan .......................................................................................................................................2723
Replacing the dryer net ........................................................................................................................................2724
Adjusting the backlash of the dryer rack drive gear and torque release ..............................................................2725
Order Classification Section .................................................................................................. 2741

Removing conveyor units 1 and 2 .......................................................................................................................2741
Replacing the belt in conveyor unit 1 ..................................................................................................................2742
Slide adjustment of conveyor unit 1 ....................................................................................................................2743
Replacing the belt in conveyor unit 2 ..................................................................................................................2744
Replenishment package unit ................................................................................................. 2781

Replacing the replenisher pump and the water supply pump [SM] ...................................................................2781
Replacing the probe [SM] ..................................................................................................................................2782
Adjusting the sensitivity of the replenisher solution sensor [SM] .....................................................................2783
2000
2/2
2 Replacement and adjustment of parts
Dryer Section ......................................................................................................................... 2722
2001
Removing covers
Removing covers
Removing covers (Printer/Processor section)

! Removing covers
NOTE
The personal computer control unit differs depending on the models.
For QSS-3011, refer to Removing covers of the personal computer control unit (QSS-3011).
G057442
Remove screws with a mark.

Loosen screws with a mark.
G057443
2001
1/5
2001
Removing covers
G057444
No.
1
Name
Screws
(Q'ty)
Control unit cover 1
Printer side cover
Panel
Table cover 1
Colorimeter cover
Printer door 1
Printer door 2
Paper advance door
Printer rear cover 1
16
11
Processor top cover
12
Sub-tank top cover
13
Processor cover
14
Processor door 1
Remarks
Remove this after first removing the panel.
Refer to Procedure for removing the panel.
15
Processor door 2
16
Dryer cover 2
Remove this after first removing the dryer top cover.

Remove this after removing the processor top cover.
17
Dryer top cover
18
Processor cover 2
19
Dryer cover 1
20
Table cover 3
21
Printer cover 3
Remove this after removing the dryer top cover and the dryer cover
2.
! Removing covers of the personal computer control unit (QSS-3011)

NOTE
This indicates only the personal computer control unit which differs from it of QSS-3001. Another units except the personal
computer control unit are same as them of QSS-3001.
2001
2/5
When the dual paper magazine unit is attached
2001
Removing covers
Loosen these screws.
G057555
No.
Name
Screws
(Q'ty)
Remarks
10
Remove this after removing Nos. 3 and 4 panels.
Remove it after first removing control unit cover 1.
Panel
Refer to Procedure for removing the panel.
PC panel
Refer to Procedure for removing the PC panel (QSS-3011).
! Procedure for removing the panel
1. Pull the full keyboard toward you.
2001
3/5
2001
Removing covers
2. Insert a standard screwdriver straight to the slot part of each side of the panel.
IMPORTANT
At this time, do not prize it open with a standard screwdriver. Doing so may damage the panel.
Standard screwdriver
Panel
Left side of the panel
Right side of the panel
Slot part
Slot part
G061937
3. Lift the side of the panel where the CD-ROM (CD-R/W) drive unit and the DVD-RAM drive unit is
installed upward as shown below and then remove it.
NOTE
Remove the side of the panel where the floppy disk drive is installed pulling it straight out toward yourself.
Panel
G061938
4. Remove the side of the panel where the floppy disk drive is installed pulling it straight out toward
yourself.
2001
4/5
2001
Removing covers
! Procedure for removing the PC panel (QSS-3011)
1. Insert a standard screwdriver straight to the slot part of each side of the panel.
IMPORTANT
At this time, do not prize it open with a standard screwdriver. Doing so may damage the panel.
Panel
Left side of the panel
Right side of the panel
Slot parts
G062830
2. Remove the PC panel by pulling it straight out toward yourself.
2001
5/5
2005
Removing covers
Removing covers (Scanner section)
Remove screws with a mark.

Loosen screws with a mark.
G057436
No.
Name
Screws
(Q'ty)
Remarks
Scanner front cover
Scanner side cover
Light guide cover
Open both left and right pawls to remove this.
Scanner upper cover
Remove this after first removing the scanner front cover and the
scanner side cover.
Lamphouse cover
2005
1/1
2007
Removing covers
Removing covers (film carrier section)

135/240 AFC
2
Screws (upper cover)
Connecting PCB 2
Cable guide
G051070
No.
Name
Screws
(Q'ty)
Remarks
Top cover
Remove it after first removing the connecting PCB 2 flat cable and
the cooling fan connector.
PCB cover
When the PCB cover is removed, the deflection of the cable guide is
released. Be careful that the screws do not pop out toward you.
Lower cover 1
Lower cover 2
Lower cover 3
120 AFC
5
2
6
4
G051071
2007
1/4
No.
2007
Name
Screws
(Q'ty)
Drive motor cover
Belt cover 1
Belt cover 2
PCB cover
Lower cover 1
Lower cover 2
Removing covers
Remarks
110 AFC
2
5
1
3
4
G052612
No.
Name
Screws
(Q'ty)
Drive motor cover
Belt cover 1
Belt cover 2
PCB cover
Lower cover 1
Lower cover 2
Remarks
2007
2/4
2007
Removing covers
135/240 MMC
1
No.
Name
G052613
Screws
(Q'ty)
Top cover
PCB cover
Bottom cover
Remarks
135 AFC
6
2
4
5
G057663
No.
Name
Screws
(Q'ty)
Drive motor cover
Connector cover
Belt cover 1
Belt cover 2
PCB cover
Lower cover 1
Lower cover 2
Remarks
2007
3/4
2007
Removing covers
135/240 AMC
G060694
No.
Name
Screws
(Q'ty)
Top cover
Front cover
Loading stocker mount cover
Remarks
2007
4/4
2011
Adjusting the belt tension
Adjusting the belt tension (printer section)
Viewed from the arrow

Paper supply section A
9
2
4,5
11
15
1
12
16
13,14
6
7
10
Exposure advance
section
Paper advance section
G057422
No.
Name
Deflection
Force
Adjusting point
Paper supply motor B belt
10.1 mm
250 g
Paper supply motor B
Paper advance motor 1 belt
10.1 mm
250 g
Paper advance motor 1
0.81 mm
100 g
Arm move motor (left) belt
4.50.3 mm
100 g
Arm move motor (left)
Arm move motor (right) belt
Illustration
Arm move motor (right)
2011
1/3
Paper supply section B
No.
2011
Name
Deflection
Force

Adjusting point
Exposure advance motor 1 belt
2.0 mm
42050 g
Exposure advance
motor 1
Pressure change motor 1 belt
2.0 mm
32050 g
Pressure change motor

1
Exposure advance driving belt
1.0 mm
120050 g
Exposure advance
motor 1
Exposure advance motor 1 belt
1.0 mm
51050 g
Tension pulley
10
2.0 mm
40050 g

2
11
1.2-1.7 mm
204 g
12
0.7-1.0 mm
204 g

3
2011
Illustration
2/3
Name
13
Elevator motor (left) belt
14
Elevator motor (right) belt
15
Horizontal advance motor (left)

left
16
Horizontal advance motor (right)

belt
Deflection
Force
Adjusting point
80.5 mm
408 g
Elevator motor (left)
Illustration
Elevator motor (right)
2.0-2.3 mm
204 g
No.
2011
Horizontal advance
motor (left)
Horizontal advance
motor (right)
2011
3/3
2012
Adjusting the belt tension (processor section)

! Belt tension adjusting point
3
G058305
No.
Deflection
Force
Dryer chain
No adjustment
Dryer net
No adjustment
Conveyor 1 belt
No adjustment
Conveyor drive belt
3.0 mm
300 g
Tension pulley
Conveyor 2 belt
No adjustment
Name
2012
Adjusting point
Illustration
1/1
2013
Adjusting the belt tension (film carrier section)

3
G051066
135/240 AFC
No.
Name
Force
Deflection
Adjusting point
405 g
0.5 mm
Attaching position of the

tension pulley
Film advance motor drive belt
16535 g
0.5 mm
Mounting position of the

motor
Film advance belt
27620 g
0.5 mm

tension pulley
Negative winding drive belt
935 g
0.5 mm

tension pulley
Film advance belt (135

insertion section)
2013
Illustration
1/4
2013
1
2
G051067
110 and 120 AFC

No.
Force
Deflection
Adjusting point

(120 AFC)
6715 g
1.0 mm

tension pulley

(110 AFC)
6715 g
1.0 mm

tension pulley
Film advance belt
287 g
0.5 mm

tension pulley
11824 g
1.0 mm

motor
Name
2013
Illustration
2/4
2013
1
2
G057664
135 AFC
No.
Name
Force
Deflection
Adjusting point
3810 g
0.5 mm

tension pulley
Film advance belt
287 g
0.5 mm

tension pulley
11824 g
1.0 mm

motor
2013
Illustration
3/4
2013
G060695
135/240 AMC
No.
Name
Loading arm drive belt
Ejection roller belt
Force
Deflection
Adjusting point
8.51.5 g
2.0 mm

motor
2013
Illustration
4/4
2031
Display monitor section
Display monitor section
Replacing the display monitor

! Procedure
1. Disconnect the connectors.

RGB connector (Monitor)
Power supply connector (Monitor)
Power supply connector
Display monitor
RGB connector
G057600
! Adjustment after replacement
1. Carry out the monitor setup.

3064
2031
1/1
2061
Scanner section
Scanner section
7. Remove the scanner unit. (two screws, two
Removing the scanner unit
adjusting screws)
! Procedure
1. Remove the film carrier.

2. Remove the scanner front cover.
2005
3. Remove the plate. (two screws)

NOTE
The plate is attached only to the old type scanner.
Ground wire
J/P63
J/P62
U-shaped spacer
Adjusting
screws
J/P60
G057602
IMPORTANT
The U-shaped spacer is attached between
the scanner unit and the machine frame. Be
careful not to lose them.
Plate
Ground wire
Screws
! Adjustment after reattaching
J/P61
Screw
Wiring cover
G057601
4. Remove the wiring cover. (two screws)

1. Adjust the plate position so that the gasket of

plate contacts with the scanner unit properly.
(Only for the old type scanner)
2. Carry out swing and tilt adjustment.

3231
J/P60 (Scanner unit)

3. Carry out light axis adjustment.
3232
4. Carry out the light source registration.
6. Remove two ground wires.
3067
NOTE
When the scanner is the old type, remove one
ground wire.
5. Carry out the focus adjustment.

3233
2061
1/1
2063
Scanner section
9. Remove four ground wires.

10. Remove the carrier mount unit. (four
Replacing the filter wheel unit
mounting nuts)
! Procedure
11. Remove the filter sensor.

NOTE
Fit the slot of the filter wheel unit to the filter
sensor position, and remove it.
1. Remove the scanner front cover, scanner

side cover and scanner top cover.
2005
2. Remove the scanner unit.

2061
3. Remove the light guide unit.

2064
4. Remove the plate. (one screw)

Screws
Plate
Filter wheel sensor

Filter wheel unit
G057439
12. Remove the filter wheel unit. (one screw)

Screw
Scanner lamp unit
! Precautions when reattaching

Adjust the height of the filter wheel unit and drive shaft
so that each surface or of the boss of the filter wheel unit
and the drive shaft is the same height.
G057437
5. Remove two screws which fix the carrier

mount unit and scanner lamp unit.
6. Remove two connectors for connecting AFC.
Drive shuft
(two screws each)
Mounting nuts
Screw
AFC
connecting
connector
Filter wheel unit

Ferrite core
G057440

Carrier mount unit
Screws
1. Adjust the position of the scanner filter.
Mounting nuts
3226
G057438

3231
J/P49 (LED PCB)
3232
J/P191 (film carrier lock sensor)

J/P468 (filter sensor)

3067
J/P475 (filter morter)
8. Remove the ferrite core. (one screw)
2063
1/2
2063
Scanner section
3233
2063
2/2
2064
Scanner section
Removing the light guide unit

! Procedure
1. Remove the light guide cover.

2005
2. Remove the LED PCB.

Light guide unit
LED PCB
G057441
3. Remove the light guide unit. (four screws)


3067
2064
1/1
2065
Scanner section
6. Carry out the sensor standard adjustment for
Adjustment after replacing S1200
each AFC.
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
When the following each AFC is set as option,

carry out the adjustment.
This label is not put to the S-1200 after replacing,

therefore prepare it.
Part No.: A061067-01 Name: Logo label
135/240 AFC
135 AFC
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment
120 AFC
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment
DX Sensor Standard DX Sensor Standard

Adjustment
Adjustment
20 mm
3151
3155
3152
110 AFC
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment
85 mm
3153
7. Adjust the position of the scanner filter.

3226
IMPORTANT
Logo label of digital ICE
The correction values for the

negative/positive filter stop position adjusted
when shipping are indicated at the following
position of the S-1200.
Scanner front cover

G057554
Logo label
When replacing the S-1200, enter the

correction values for the negative/positive
filter stop position when shipping. Then check
the stop position of the scanner filter.
G050581
! Procedure
1. Backup the data of the machine before

replacing S-1200.
3169
2. Replace the S-1200 with a new one.
Label
Refer to Installation Manual Installing the machine

and adjusting the level.
G057662
8. Check the swing and tilt of the scanner unit.

3231
3. Upgrade the software.

3172
9. Check the light axis of the scanner unit.

3232
4. Read the data of the S-1200 machine.

3169
5. Check the serial number of the S-1200 after
replacement with the rating plate and register

it on the Machine Specification display again.
3067
11. Carry out the focus adjustment of the

scanner.
3233
2065
1/2
When the digital ICE (option) has been already attached,

put the Digital ICE logo label to the following position of
the scanner front cover.
2065
Scanner section
12. Place the enclosed scanner connection

label.
31 mm
Scanner connection label

G057553
Scanner connection label
G061818
2065
2/2
2070
Replacing the film carrier
Film carrier section (135/240 AFC)
IMPORTANT
For the 110 AFC, carry out the focus
adjustment for each the magnification rate.
! Replacing the 135/240 AFC
5. Carry out the Scanning Position Auto

Correction.
1. Attach the 135/240 AFC.

2. Carry out the sensor sensitivity adjustment.
3153
6. Check the operation of the 110 AFC.
3151
3. Carry out the DX sensor standard
! Replacing the 135/240 MMC, AMC
adjustment.
3151
1. Attach the 135/240 MMC or AMC.

2. Check the Emission Lamp and Detection

3067
Sensor Position Adjustment.
3154
3156
scanner.
3233
NOTE
Check if the filament image on the emission
adjustment chart is in the center of the emission
adjustment chart. When the filament image is in
the center, the adjustment is not necessary.
IMPORTANT
For the 135/240 AFC, carry out the focus

Correction.
3151
7. Check the operation of the 135/240 AFC.

! Replacing the 120 AFC
1. Attach the 120 AFC.

3152

3067

scanner.
3233

Correction.
3152

Emission adjustment chart
Filament image

4. Check the focus adjustment of the scanner.
3153
G052617
3067
3233
3067
Correction.
scanner.
3154
3156
3233
2070
1/2
2070
6. Check the operation of the 135/240 MMC or

AMC.

3155
3. Carry out the DX sensor standard

adjustment.
3155

3067

scanner.
3233
IMPORTANT
For the 135 AFC, carry out the focus

Correction.
3155
2070
2/2
2071
Removing the advance unit

Driver PCB 2 attaching
plate
! Procedure
Screws
Driver PCB 2 cover
1. Remove the top cover.

2007
2. Remove the magnetic head PCB cover.

3. Remove the magnetic head PCB. (two
screws and one mounting spacer)

J/P1040 (Magnetic head PCB)
Screws
Magnetic head PCB cover
Mounting spacer
G051087
8. Remove the driver PCB 1 cover. (two

screws)

J/P1027 (Driver PCB 1)
J/P1056 (Relay connector)
10. Remove the wiring fixing angle bracket. (one

screw)
Magnetic head PCB
Loosen this screw.
G051086
5. Remove the driver PCB 2 attaching plate.

(four screws)
6. Remove the driver PCB 2 cover. (two

screws)

Driver PCB 1 cover
Wiring fixing angle bracket

G051088
2071
1/3
(Loosen one screw out of three screws.)
2071
11. Remove the advance unit. (six screws)
IMPORTANT
When the advance unit is turned over, be
careful not to apply excessive load to the flat
cable.
Screw B
13. Open the sensor PCB wiring cover to the
direction indicated by the arrow, and remove

the sheet cable. (Loosen one screw out of
four.)
NOTE
The end of the wiring cover can be opened by
removing a screw out of four.
Screw
Screw A
Advance unit
Screw C
G051089
12. Turn over the advance unit around the film

advance motor.
Advance unit
Wiring cover
Sheet cable
G054662
Lay down.
Reattach the sheet cable carefully to the correct direction.

6012
Reattach the advance unit by turning over it around the
advance motor. Be careful not to give pressure to the
sheet cable.
Lift.
When reattaching the advance unit, be sure to reattach it

while pushing the reference surface on the rail.
IMPORTANT
The lengths vary among the advance unit
screws. Be sure to attach the appropriate
screw.
Screw A (Cap screw M3 6)
Screw B (Cap screw M3 16)
Sheet cables
Film feed motor
G054661
2071
2/3
2071
Screw C (Cap screw M3 8)
Rail
References for pushing
Rail
G051090
After reattaching it, check that the lane is switched

smoothly. Also check that the wiring is not caught in the
lane.
2071
3/3
2072
Replacing and adjusting the film

advance motor
1. Adjust the drive belt tension.

2013
! Procedure
2. Using Output Check, check that the Film

Feed Motor operates.
3167

2007
2. Remove the PCB cover. (one screw)

4. Remove the motor unit. (two screws)

Motor mounting plate
PCB cover
G051200
5. Remove the film feed motor. (four screws)

Film feed motor
Motor mounting plate 1
Noise reduce
plate
Motor mounting plate 2
G051092

Reattach the motor mounting plate 1 first, then reattach
the noise reduce plate. Motor mounting plate 2 must be
reattached finally.
2072
1/1
2073
6. Remove the guide plate. (two screws)
Replacing and adjusting the spool

key motor, the clutch and the
damper
Guide plate
! Procedure
screws)
2. Remove the PCB cover. (two screws)

PCB attaching plate
Screws
Spool key motor
G051095
7. Remove the clutch. (one E-ring)

8. Remove the damper. (two screws)
Damper
PCB cover
Screws
G051093
4. Remove the motor unit. (four screws)

Screws
Clutch
E-ring
G051096
IMPORTANT
When removing the clutch, be careful not to
lose the thrust washer.
1. When mounting the motor unit, adjust the
position of the motor attaching plate so that

the drive transfer gear operates smoothly.
2. Using Output Check, check that the Spool

Key Motor rotates smoothly.
3167
Motor unit
G051094
5. Remove the spool key motor. (two screws)
2073
1/1
1. Remove the PCB attaching plate. (four
2074
Replacing and adjusting the light

lock door drive axis
! Procedure

2. Remove the advance unit.
2071

4. Remove the cartridge limit switch. (one
Roll plate
screw)
Spring
Cartridge guide
G051098
IMPORTANT
When removing the cartridge limit switch, be
careful not to lose the detection pin.
7. Remove the light lock door drive axis. (one

E-ring)
IMPORTANT
5. Remove the guide plate. (two screws)

6. Remove the cartridge guide. (two screws)
When removing the light lock door drive axis,

be careful not to lose the spring.
IMPORTANT
When removing the cartridge guide, be
careful not to lose the lock plate spring.
Spring
Light lock door drive axis
E-ring
Cartridge limit switch
Cartridge guide
G051099
Guide plate
Detection pin
Cartridge guide
G051097
2074
1/2
2007
2074

When reattaching the cartridge guide, check that the
cartridge guide slide and the cartridge holder are opened
and closed smoothly.
Cartridge holder
Cartridge guide
G053517
2074
2/2
2075
2. Using Output Check, check that the Light
Replacing and adjusting the light

lock door motor
Lock Door Motor operates.
3167
! Procedure

2007

3. Remove the film advance motor unit. (two

screws)
4. Remove the motor angle bracket. (three

screws)
Motor angle bracket

Film advance motor unit
G052462
5. Remove the light lock door motor. (two

screws)
Light lock door motor
G052463
1. Adjust the tension on the film advance motor

drive belt.
2013
2075
1/1
2076
7. Remove the mounting angle bracket. (one
Replacing and adjusting the

magnetic head unit
screw)
Magnetic head cover
! Procedure

2007
Plate

2071

J/P1015 (Sensor PCB)
4. Remove the magnetic head unit and the
angle bracket as one assembly. (two screws)

Magnetic head unit
Mounting spacers
Screws
Angle bracket
Mounting nuts
G052465

When reattaching the magnetic head unit, push it on the
reference surface.
Magnetic head unit
Angle bracket
G052464
Reference
surface
5. Remove the magnetic head cover and the

plate. (two screws)
6. Remove the two mounting spacers.

(mounting nut one each)
Angle bracket
G053524
2076
1/1
2077
Adjusting the VEI detection timing

! Procedure
1. Remove the lower cover 1.

2007
2. Loosen the set-screw of the detection plate.

(Loosen one set-screw.)
3. Adjust the position of the detection plate so

that the protruding part of the spool key is
aligned with the slot of the plate.
Detection plate
Set-screw
Spool key
Slot
Protrusion part
G051065
4. Check that the VEI of the 240 cartridge stops

at the fourth position.
2077
1/1
2078
7. Reattach the holder. (one screw)
Adjusting the light lock door drive

timing
IMPORTANT
Reattach it with care not to change the gear
engagement position.
! Procedure

2007

2071
3. Remove the cartridge guide.

2074
4. Remove the holder. (one screw)

IMPORTANT
When removing the holder, be careful not to
lose the nut.
5. Turn idle gear 1 in the direction indicated by

the arrow to touch the baffle.
6. While idle gear 1 is in contact with the baffle,

engage idle gear 2 with the drive axis gear
so that only one tooth is not engaged.
Holder
Drive axis gear
Leave one
tooth of the
gear open.
Idle gear 2
Idle gear 1
Cartridge guide
G051100
2078
1/1
2085
5. To check the operation, scan the mount with
MMC auto focus section adjustment

IMPORTANT
Carry out this adjustment when the auto focus error
occurs, or when the worm wheel does not swing within
the tolerance level of 4 mm ( one tooth) after adjusting
the position of the emission lamp and detection sensor.
3154

normal process.
! When the adjustment is not carried out

normally
! Procedure
! Worm wheel adjustment
1. Operate AF Motor via Output Check.

3167
NOTE
When the worm wheel operates, check that it
moves smoothly near the upper and lower death
point.
2. Loosen the screws of the LM guide

installation block. (four screws)
1. Remove the top cover, and set the MMC.
3. Adjust the installation position of the bearing
2007
2. When the worm wheel does not swing within

the tolerance level of 4 mm ( one tooth),
carry out the auto focus operation in
Detection Sensor Position Adjustment and
loosen the screws of the LM guide
installation block. (four screws)
holder so that the worm wheel moves

smoothly. (two screws)
Screws
3154
LM guide installation blocks
Bearing holder
G060704
4. Repeat the procedure 1 to 3 in Worm wheel

adjustment.
LM guide installation screws
5. Carry out Film Carrier Unit Adjustment
LM guides
G060702
3. While checking the swing of the worm wheel,
tighten the LM guide installation block so that

the swing is within the tolerance level. (four
screws)
(MMC).
3154

3233
7. To check the operation, scan the mount with

normal process.
IMPORTANT
Adjust the LM guide installation block so as
not to give pressure to the LM guide.
4. After the swing is adjusted within the

tolerance level, carry out the focus
adjustment.
3233
2085
1/1
2111
Table peripheral section
3. Remove the colorimeter advance unit.
Replacing the colorimeter and the

calibration plate
(two screws and two mounting nuts)
The procedure for replacing the colorimeter is explained here.
# Replacing the colorimeter advance unit
# Replacing the calibration plate

IMPORTANT
The colorimeter unit consists of the following things.
Colorimeter advance unit

G057604
4. Attach the plates of the new colorimeter
advance unit as shown below. (one screw for

each)
NOTE
The colorimeter advance unit is compatible with
the other type machines. The arrangement of the
plates in delivering is for the other type of
machines, so reattach the plates.
When delivering

Positioning holes
Positioning holes
Screw
Colorimeter
FD for calibration
data
Plates
Screw
Plates
When reattaching
Calibration
plate
Screw
Screw
G052734
When replacing the colorimeter advance unit, also

replace the colorimeter, calibration plate, and FD for
calibration data at the same time.
Positioning holes
When replacing the colorimeter, also replace the

calibration plate and FD for calibration data at the same
time.
When replacing the calibration plate, also replace the FD
for calibration data at the same time.
Positioning holes
G057453
5. Attach the new colorimeter advance unit.

(two screws and two mounting nuts)
6. Adjust the height of the colorimeter with the

new colorimeter advance unit.
! Procedure for replacement
2112
7. Adjust the colorimeter unit.
1. Remove table cover 1.
3157
2001

J/P180 (Colorimeter control PCB)
2111
1/2
# Replacing the colorimeter
2111
(6) Insert the new calibration plate to the
! Replacing the colorimeter
colorimeter unit.
1. Remove the connector of the colorimeter and

replace the colorimeter.
(7) Click YES: OK.

Data is updated.
(8) Remove the calibration plate.

(9) Click YES: OK.
Close Updating the Calibration Plate Data.
Check that the colorimeter data and the calibration
plate data are same.
(1) Click F: Functions, then click Confirming the

Colorimeter and Calibration Plate Data.
(2) Insert the FD for calibration data to the floppy
Connector
G052732
2. Carry out height adjustment of the
disk drive.
(3) Click YES: OK.

The confirmation display appears. Check that
the message It matches the Colorimeter Data
appears.
At this time, S/No. of the calibration plate is
registered.
colorimeter.
2112
3. Check the calibration plate data.

Check that the colorimeter data and the calibration
plate data are same.
(4) Click YES: OK.
(1) Click F: Functions, then click Confirming the

Colorimeter and Calibration Plate Data.
The display returns to the Colorimeter

Calibration display and the message Would
you like to calibrate the Colorimeter? is
desplayed.
disk drive.
(3) Click YES: OK.

The confirmation display appears. Check that
the message It matches the Colorimeter Data
appears.
At this time, S/No. of the calibration plate is
registered.
(4) Click YES: OK.

The display returns to the Colorimeter
Calibration display and the message Would
you like to calibrate the Colorimeter? is
desplayed.
! Replacing the calibration plate.
1. Update the calibration plate data.

Register the new calibration plate data to the machine.
(1) Click F: Functions, then click Updating the

Calibration Plate Data.

disk drive.
(3) Click YES: OK.

Bring up both data of colorimeter and in the
calibration data FD.
(4) Click YES: OK.

Register the data in the FD to the colorimeter.
(5) Click YES: OK.

Confirm the registration.
2111
2/2
2. Check the calibration plate data.
2112
4. Remove the upper frame.
Adjusting the height of the

colorimeter
(six screws)
Upper frame
Carry out the height adjustment when replacing the colorimeter

advance unit or the colorimeter.
1. Remove the colorimeter advance unit.

2111
2. Remove the colorimeter guide.

(three screws)
G052730
5. Adjust the height of the colorimeter so that
the measurement leading end of the

colorimeter is 0 to -0.1 mm from the upper
frame lower surface by rotating the leading
end control holder.
(Loosen one screw.)
Loosen this screw.
Colorimeter guide
G052728

J/P181
Leading end control holder
G052731 1
G052729
2112
1/2
! Adjusting procedure for when the

colorimeter is changed
2112
Colorimeter
Bottom side
Leading end of the measurement
part
Leading end control holder
G052733
IMPORTANT
If the measurement section tip is outside the
lower frame, it may damage the calibration
plate.
6. Reassemble the parts as they were.

IMPORTANT
When attaching the upper frame, attach the
screws A and B by referring A and B.
B
Upper frame
G052735
2112
2/2
2151
Personal computer control section
4. Set the stopper to table cover 2.
Opening/closing the personal

computer control unit
Personal computer control unit
Stopper
! Procedure
1. Remove the display monitor.

2031
IMPORTANT
The personal computer control unit is very
heavy. Be careful when handling it.
The printer becomes unstable if the personal
computer control unit is opened. Be sure not
to open the personal computer control unit
when the jack bolts do not touch the ground.
2. Remove the screws of the personal

computer control unit. (two screws)
Personal computer control

unit
Table cover 2
G057608
G057606
3. Put the keyborad, the mouse and the

operation keyboard in the rack.
Mouse
Operation keyboard
Full keyboard
G057607
2151
1/1
2152
5. Open table cover 2. (two screws)
Removing the personal computer

control unit
Table cover 2
! Procedure
In case of QSS-3001
2031
2. Remove the panel and control unit cover.

2001

J/P151: PCI-LVDS conversion PCB
J/P81: PCI-ARCNET conversion PCB
J/P85 and 86: PCI-ARCNET conversion PCB (PU)
J/P42: System control PCB (PU)
J/P55: System control PCB
J/P171: Keyboard switch PCB
J/P311: ATX power supply cable
J/P321: Monitor cable
J/P304, 305: PU control PCB
USB connector (flatbed scanner)
LAN cable: ATX mother board
Modem cable: ATX mother board
G057652

Stopper
4. Remove the personal computer control unit.

(Loosen four screws.)
Loosen.
Table cover 2
G057653
In case of QSS-3011

2031
2. Remove the two panels and control unit

covers 1 and 2.
2001

G057452
2152
J/P151: PCI-LVDS conversion PCB

1/2
2152
6. Open table cover 2. (two screws)

J/P85 and 86: PCI-ARCNET conversion PCB (PU)
J/P42: System control PCB (PU)
J/P171: Keyboard switch PCB
J/P311: ATX power supply cable
J/P321: Monitor cable
J/P304, 305: PU control PCB
USB connector (flatbed scanner)
LAN cable: ATX mother board
Modem cable: ATX mother board
Table cover 2
4. Remove the exhaust duct. (three screws)

G057652
Exhaust duct

Stopper

G062819

(Loosen four screws.)
Table cover 2
G057653
G062821
2152
2/2
2518
Removing paper supply unit A

! Procedure
1. Remove the paper supply unit in the
direction indicated by the arrow.
Paper supply unit A
G057603
2518
1/1
2522
Removing the paper cutter unit and

its right angle adjustment
! Procedure for right angle adjustment of

the paper cutter unit
1. Loosen two screws for each paper cutter unit

and positioning plate to adjust the right angle
of the paper cutter unit.
! Procedure for removing the paper

cutter unit
J/P412 (loading sensor)

J/P422 (cut moter)
J/P424 (cut home sensor)
J/P425 (cut end sensor)
3. Remove the loading sensor unit. (one screw)

4. Remove the paper cutter unit. (two screws)
" Point
When removing the paper cutter unit, be careful not to
remove the positioning plate for the paper cutter unit. If
the positioning plate is removed, right angle
adjustment of the paper cutter unit must be carried out
again.
Positioning plate
Loosen.
Paper cutter unit
G057512
"
Point
Check for the right angle of the paper cut section by

matching up with them as shown illustration below.
Second print
Paper
advance
direction
First print
G051111
Positioning plate
If the cutting end is as shown in A, adjust the

cutting angle by moving the positioning plate in
the direction indicated by the arrow A as shown
above.
Loading sensor unit

Screw
G057511
If the cutting end is as shown in B adjust the

cutting angle by moving the positioning plate in
the direction indicated by the arrow B as shown
above.
When attaching the paper cutter unit, tighten the screws

by pushing them in the direction indicated by the arrow.
Check that the paper has been cut vertically. If not, carry
out the right angle adjustment of the paper cutter unit.
2522
1/1
Loosen.
1. Pull out the paper supply unit A.

2524
(3) Adjust the position of the detection plate so that
Adjusting the paper hold timing of

the arm
the plate is protruded 1.70.5 mm from the

paper hold sensor. (Loosen the two set-screws.)
! Procedure
Paper hold motor

2. Remove the mounting plate of the paper hold
motor. (Loosen one of the two screws.)

Paper hold motor
Set-screw (A)
Arm
Set-screw (B)
Screw
Set-screws of the
detection plate
Cam
Detection plate
Paper hold sensor

Loosen this
screw.
Paper hold motor attaching

plate
Hexagonal screwdriver
Paper hold sensor

Viewed from this side.
G057638
3. Adjust the detection plate of the paper hold
Set-screw (A)
sensor.
(1) View the detection plate in the direction

indicated by the arrow.
(2) Rotate the detecting plate using a hexagonal

screwdriver to the right so that the bulge of the
cum faces below.
Detection plate
Cam
NOTE
Set-screws (A and B) need not be loosened.
If it is loosened, attach it as it was.
Set-screw (B)
1.70.5 mm
Set-screws (A and B) are used to fix the

cam to the paper hold motor.
Paper hold sensor

Bulge of cam
View from the direction by the

arrow
G057639
2524
1/1
2525
Adjusting the imprint pressure of

the CVP
! Procedure

2. Loosen the two CVP unit screws.
Loosen.
CVP unit
G057617
3. Set the head adjusting jig to the guide of the

paper supply unit A.
IMPORTANT
The head adjusting jig is the service
personnel tool. Refer to Service personnel
tool list.
8031
4. Loosen two lock nut and turn two adjusting
screws so that the thickness of the attaching

position of the CVP unit is the same as that
of the head adjusting jig.
Head adjustment jig
Lock nuts
Adjusting screws
G057618
5. Tighten the two CVP unit screws.

6. Make actual prints, then check the printing
density of the CVP unit.
2525
1/1
2541
Removing and adjusting the

position of the paper supply unit B
! Adjusting the position of the paper

supply unit B
1. Set the spacer plate to the paper supply unit

A.
! Procedure for removing the paper

supply unit B

J/P335 (paper supply motor B)
J/P339 (paper end sensor B)
2. Remove the light-tight cover. (Loosen two

screws.)
Light-tight cover
Spacer plate
G057622
IMPORTANT
The spacer plate is saved in the position as
shown below.
Loosen.
G057620
3. Remove the paper supply unit B. (six

screws)
Storage position
G059664
2. Loosen the mounting angle bracket 1. (two

screws)
Angle bracket 1
Paper supply unit B

G057621
Loosen.
G057623
3. Set the paper supply unit B to the mounting

angle bracket 2.
2541
1/2
J/P331 (paper supply motor A)
2541
4. Set the hexagonal socket shoulder bolts
(positioning pin) to the paper supply unit B.

(Two hexagonal socket shoulder bolts)
6. Attach the mounting angle bracket 1 by
pushing it in the direction indicated by the

arrow. (four screws)
Hexagonal socket shoulder bolts
Angle bracket 2
G057624
IMPORTANT
The two hexagonal socket shoulder bolts are
saved in the position as shown below.
G057640
7. Remove the hexagonal socket shoulder bolts

(positioning pin) to the paper supply unit B.
(Two hexagonal socket shoulder bolts)
8. Attach the light-tight cover. (two screws)

9. Remove the spacer plate of the paper supply
unit A.
IMPORTANT
Put the two hexagonal socket shoulder bolts
and the spacer plate into the vinyl bag or the
like and keep it with the adhesive tape in the
original position.
Storage position
G059664
5. Attach the mounting angle bracket 2 by
pushing it in the direction indicated by the

arrows 1 and 2. (seven screws)
Storage position
G059664
Angle bracket 2
G057625
2541
2/2
Angle bracket 1
2542
! Procedure for adjusting the position of

the paper magazine mount B
Adjusting the height and the

position of the paper magazine
mount B
1. Loosen the screws of the magazine slide

rails 1 and 2 (three screws each).
Adjust the height and the position of the paper magazine B when
the paper magazine B is not inserted to the paper supply unit B
smoothly.
Check if the paper magazine mount B is set to the positioning pin
of the paper supply unit B smoothly.
Loosen this screw.

Positioning pin
G059763
Magazine slide rail 2
G059255
2. Change the height of paper magazine mount

B and set the magazine. And continue the
confirm work of storage condition to adjust
2542
1/3
Magazine slide rail 1
2542
them. (two adjusting screws each left and

right)
! Adjusting the position of the paper

magazine mount B (front and rear)
Adjusting screws
1. Loosen four screws of the magazine slide

frame and two screws of the holder of the
positioning pin 3.
Magazine slide
frame
Adjusting screws
Positioning pin

G059257
2. After returning paper magazine mount B to
G059256
3. After the height adjustment, loosen six

screws of the magazine slide rail.
Next, adjust the position of the paper magazine mount

B.
4. After completing the adjustment, check that
the paper is not zigzagging in Adjusting the

paper zigzagging in paper supply unit B.
2543
the original position, change its position and

set the magazine. And continue the confirm
work of storage condition to adjust them.
(two adjusting screws)
NOTE
If the paper magazine mount loses the balance of
left and right, paper may meander even though the
paper magazine mount B fits on the positioning
pins 1 and 2.
Adjust the position of the paper magazine mount
keeping the balance of left and right.
Paper magazine mount B
Adjusting screws
G058248
2542
2/3
2542
3. Tighten four screws of the magazine slide

frame and two screws of the holder of the
positioning pin 3.
4. Adjust the position of the paper magazine

code sensor B.
(1) Loosen four screws of the paper magazine

sensor B, and adjust the holders 1 and 2 so that

the magazine code can be detected with the
paper magazine B inserted.
Holder 1
Holder 2
Paper magazine code sensor B

G059258
(2) Check the operation of magazine code sensor

with Input Check.
If the sensor does not operate, adjust the
position of the paper magazine code sensor B
again.
5. After completing the adjustment, check that
the paper is not zigzagging in Adjusting the

paper zigzagging in paper supply unit B.
2543
2542
3/3
2543

difference of dimensions of lines A and B is
within 1.0 mm both two prints.
Adjusting the paper zigzagging in

paper supply unit B
! Procedure
When making a test print from paper supply unit B

via Arm unit zigzagging correction, carry out the
machine adjustment in the following procedure if the
correction value is more than 2.0 mm.
1. Make prints from paper supply unit B via

Arm unit zigzagging correction.
3203
2. Measure the difference of dimensions of

lines A and B on the second test print.
Pin holder
G059763
Line A
4. After completing the adjustment, check if

paper magazine B is stored into paper
supply unit B smoothly.
Carry out the Adjusting the position of the front and

rear in Adjusting the height and the position of the
paper magazine mount B when paper magazine B is
not inserted to paper supply unit B smoothly.
2542
5. Carry out the zigzagging adjustment each

magazine of paper supply unit B.
3203
Line B
G057657
3. Loosen two screws of the pin holder and
adjust the position of pin holder so that the
2543
1/1
IMPORTANT
2581
Exposure advance section
5. Remove the power supply unit cover. (four
Removing the exposure advance

unit
screws)
! Procedure
1. Remove or open the personal computer

IMPORTANT
When the back space of the machine is as
follows, remove the personal computer
control unit.
QSS-3001: 90 to 190 mm
QSS-3011: 90 to 460 mm
2152
Wiring cover
Power supply unit cover
When the back space of the machine is

extensive than above, open the personal
computer control unit.
2151
G058588
6. Disconnect the ground wire. (one screw)

J/P382, 383, 384, 387, 981 (relay connector)
Stopper
8. Remove the power supply unit. (two screws)
Power supply unit
Ground wire
G058589 01

J/P458, 491, 499 (relay connector)
Table cover 2

G057608
2. Remove the paper supply unit A.

2518
3. Remove the paper advance unit.

2651
2581
1/3
control unit.
2581
11. Remove the light-tight cover. (Loosen two of
13. Remove the exposure advance unit by
the four screws.)
sliding it in the direction of the arrow.

IMPORTANT
Light-tight cover
Be careful when removing the exposure

advance unit. It may fall down if it comes out
of the stopper.
Loosen this screw.
Stopper
Loosen this screw.
G057609
12. Remove the exposure advance unit. (four
Exposure advance unit
screws)
G057646

Put the exposure advance unit on the stopper.
Adjust the position of the exposure advance unit to the
attaching hole of the laser unit by moving the exposure
advance unit finely.
Attaching holes
Attaching holes
G057610
IMPORTANT
The exposure advance unit is very heavy. Be
careful when handling it.
Remove the exposure advance unit by
holding its handle.
Laser unit
G057647
IMPORTANT
Be careful not to drop down the exposure
advance unit when moving it.
G057611
2581
2/3
Stopper
2581
When tightening four screws of the exposure

advance unit, tighten the screw 1234 in
the same turns in this order.

For checking exposure center correction master A/B
For checking the main scanning
images
2
3
G057610
! Check after attaching

1. Check the Exposure Center Correction,
Exposure Position Adjustment and Exposure

Zoom Rate Fine Correction.
Carry out Test Print (Confirmation) in Functions of

Exposure Position Adjustment, and check if it is
normal for the following three points. If it is out of the
standard, adjust it.
NOTE
The following example is 203 mm test printing.
Bringing up the display
Extension Maintenance Various Adjustment
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
For checking the exposure
zoom rate fine adjustment
For checking the sub scanning

images
G057541
(1) Check that the measured length (A) of exposure

center correction master A/B is half of the paper
width.
For adjustment, refer to 3208.
(2) Check the Exposure Position Adjustment.

Check that each line makes a straight line in the
marks of exposure position adjustment 1 to 4
in the test prints.
(3) Check the Exposure Zoom Rate Fine

Adjustment.
Check that the lines (cyan, magenta and yellow)
make a straight line in the most outside chart for
checking the exposure zoom rate fine
adjustment in the test prints.
2581
3/3
2582
Banding shooting
Exposure position
150 mm
103 mm
22
74 mm
90 mm
Reverse unit
17 mm
25

30
G057669
! Banding shooting
Print condition
All
Banding position
Status
Corrective
action
Refer to
Front margin: Around 90

mm
Adjusting failure of the stop

position of the reverse unit
Adjust the stop

position of the
reverse unit.
3201
Rear margin: Around 17

mm
Adjusting failure of the paper

pressure operation correction of
pressure roller 2 of the exposure
advance unit
Carry out the

paper pressure
operation
correction.
3207
Whole part of the print

(68 mm cycle)
Adjusting failure of the belt

tension of the exposure advance
drive belt
Adjust the belt

tension.
2011
Whole part of the print

(no cycle)
The screws of the exposure

advance unit are loosened.
Tighten the
screws of the
exposure advance
unit.
2581
It is given a vibration from

outside.
All jack bolts are effective or

not.
The strength of the floor is

insufficient.
2582
1/1
2601
Replacing and adjusting the

position of the laser unit
Engine section
Engine section
J/P812 (R AOM driver)

J/P851, 852, 854 (Laser termperature control relay
PCB)
J/P855 (Laser unit heater)
! Procedure for removing the laser unit
8. Remove the PCB plate. (four screws)

Ground wires
1. Backup all the data.

2152
3. Remove cover 1. (two screws)
Ground wires
PCB plate
G057614
9. Remove the laser unit. (four mounting nuts

and four washers)
Cover 1
G057654
4. Remove the exposure advance unit.

2581
5. Disconnect the ground wire. (four wires)

6. Remove cover 2. (two screws)
Cover 2
Laser unit
G057615
G057655

J/P111, 112, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 128,
129, 130, 131, 133, 134, 155 (Laser I/O PCB)
J/P816 (B laser driver)
J/P821 (G laser driver)
J/P132 (laser control box cooling fan 1)
J/P804 (B AOM driver)
J/P808 (G AOM driver)
2601
1/3
3169
2601
Engine section
! Wiring after replacement
IMPORTANT
When replacing the laser unit, remove the
stopper and attach the stopper to a new laser
unit. (two screws)
1. Return the connectors and grounds of each

cable to the original condition.
IMPORTANT
Do not wire the flat cable (between the B and G

laser drivers and the laser unit) over the laser I/O
PCB. Wire it in the following route.
B laser driver
G laser driver
Viewed from back
Stopper
G057651
Laser unit
Laser unit
! Procedure for adjusting the laser unit

position
1. Set the positioning pin to the laser unit.

2. Adjust the position of the laser unit so that
the positioning pin moves up and down
smoothly. (four mounting nuts and four
washers)
Connect to the B laser

driver.
Connect to the G laser

driver.
IMPORTANT
The positioning pin is one of the service
personnel tools. Refer to Service personnel
tool list.
8031
G057552

When the original laser unit is reattached
1. Carry out the daily setup.

When a new laser unit is attached
Positioning pins
IMPORTANT
Return the original laser unit and FD with the
backup data.
1. Initialize the laser operation history.

3176
G057616
2601
2/3
2601
Engine section
2. Carry out the Exposure Zoom Rate

Correction.
3209
3. Carry out the Exposure Position Adjustment.

3208
4. Carry out the Exposure Zoom Rate Fine

Adjustment.
3210
5. Check that the slippage of the main scanning

direction of the Exposure Position
Adjustment.
3208
6. Carry out the initial setup.
2601
3/3
2651
Removing the paper advance unit

! Procedure
1. Pull out the paper advance unit. (Loosen one

screw.)
Paper advance unit
Screw
(Loosen.)
G058397
2. Remove the paper advance unit. (one screw

and one spacer for each)
IMPORTANT
When removing the screw, be careful not to
lose the spacer.
NOTE
The three parts (bottom of the unit and the upper
and lower parts of the back side) are hung on the
pins.
Spacer
Pin
Pin
G057513

The paper advance unit is regulated with the positioning
pin. No need for adjusting when attaching.
2651
1/1
2652
Standard adjustment of the paper

advance unit
! Reference position adjustment

(horizontal) of the reverse unit
Work flow

(vertical) of the reverse unit
Adjust the size between the frame and the reverse unit
350.5 mm
Removing the reverse unit

Checking the left and right reverse units if they are in a line
(in the front and the rear direction) using the scale or the
like
B
Adjusting the moving plate (vertical) so that it is parallel
(0.5 mm) to the frame (reference surface)
No
A
Adjusting the moving plate (horizontal) so that it is

parallel (0.5 mm) to the frame (reference surface)
! Adjustment in the Reverse Unit

Correction display
Attaching the reverse unit
Carrying out Reverse Unit Stop Position Correction (left and

right)
Checking if the reverse unit and the frame (reference

surface) are parallel (0.5 mm) and adjusting them using
the moving plates (vertical and horizontal)
Carrying out Reverse Unit Upper Stop Position Correction

(left and right)
Checking the left and right reverse units if they are in a line
(in the vertical direction) using the scale or the like
No
Carrying out Paper Stop Position Correction
2652
1/5
2652
! Adjusting the position relation between

the reverse unit and the processor
loading unit
2. Adjust the moving plate (vertical) so that it is

parallel (0.5 mm) to the frame (reference
surface). (four screws)
Frame (reference surface)
Checking if there are any gaps of the processor loading unit

referring to the reverse unit guide
No
B
Moving plates (vertical)
Adjusting the attaching position of the processor loading unit
Screws
This is the work flow for the adjustment.

For details, refer to the explanation below.

(vertical) of the reverse unit
The illustrations below mainly explain the right side of the
reverse unit. Adjust the left side in the same procedure.
G057627
NOTE
Check if they are parallel using the block or the
like which has parallel surface.
1. Lift up the reverse unit to remove it. (two

screws)
G057628
Reverse unit
Screws
G057626
2652
2/5
2652

unit again and continue the adjustment and
the check.
3. Adjust the moving plate (horizontal) so that it

is parallel (0.5 mm) to the frame (reference
surface). (four screws)
Rotation block
Reverse unit
Moving plate (vertical)
Moving plate (horizontal)

Screw
G057641
Screws
NOTE
Check if they are parallel using the block or the
like which has parallel surface.
Screws
Moving plate
(horizontal)
G057630
5. Move the reverse units (left and right) to the
center and check that both units are in a line

shown in the illustration below. If the
adjustment is required, go to the step 4 and
continue the adjustment and the check.
G057629
4. Check if the rotation block of the reverse unit

is parallel (0.5 mm) to the frame (reference
surface). If adjustment is required, remove
the reverse unit again and adjust the
attaching position of the moving plates
(vertical and horizontal). Attach the reverse
NOTE
Check it using the 300 mm scale or the like which
has the accurate straight line.
Scale or the like
Reverse units
G057631

(horizontal) of the reverse unit
The procedure and illustrations below mainly explain the right
side of the reverse unit. Adjust the left side in the same
procedure.
2652
3/5
2652
1. Adjust the position of the reverse unit so that

the distance from the frame is 51.50.5 mm.
(two screws each)
! Adjustment in the Reverse Unit

Correction display
1. Adjust the paper receiving position, upper
stop position and the paper stop position in

Reverse Unit Correction.
51.50.5 mm
! Adjusting the position relation between

the reverse unit and the processor
loading unit
Frame
Lift both left and right reverse units with Reverse Unit (Left)
Test Operation in Reverse Unit Correction, and check the
gaps (the front and rear/left and right) between the processor
loading unit.
1. Check the gap (front and rear).

Check that the "K" and "H" surfaces (left and right) of
the reverse unit match the "L" and "I" surfaces of the
processor loading unit.
IMPORTANT
If not, attach the reverse unit (left and right) or
adjust the attaching position of the processor
loading unit.
Reverse unit
Surface L
Screws
Surface I
Processor loading
unit
G057632
Surface F
2. Move the reverse units (left and right) to the
Surface H
center and check that both units are in a line

shown in the illustration below. If the
adjustment is required, go to the step 1 and
continue the adjustment and the checks
below.
NOTE
Check it using the 300 mm scale or the like which
has the accurate straight line.
Surface H and I are in

a line.
Reverse unit
Reverse unit (right)

Surface K and L are in
a line.
Reverse unit (left)
G057531
Scale or the like

G057633
2652
4/5
3207
Reverse unit
2652
2. Check the gap (left and right).
6. Adjust the backlash of the sprocket unit
when the adjustment is carried out in Step 5.

(two adjusting screws)
Check that the projection of the paper advance unit

guide is in the center of the slot of the processor
loading unit roller.
Check that the projection of the guide is in the

center of the slot on the roller.
Adjusting screws
G057637
G057635
3. If there is any gap (front and rear/left and

right) referring to the reverse unit guide,
carry out the reference adjustment of the
paper advance unit again.
4. If there is no problem with the reference
adjustment of the paper advance unit, carry

out Step 6 and Step 5.
5. Adjust the position of the processor loading
unit (front and rear/left and right) referring to

the reverse unit guide. (five screws)
NOTE
Usually, this adjustment is not required.
Two of the five screws are LH small screws.
Processor loading unit
LH small screws
G057636
2652
5/5
Sprocket unit
2653
Removing the processor loading

unit
! Procedure
1. Open the processor top cover.

2. Remove the rack stopper.
3. Remove the sprocket unit. (three screws)
Sprocket unit
G058399

5. Remove the processor loading unit. (three
screws)
Ground wire

G058400

The position of the processor loading unit is adjusted by
the LH small screw using the jig. Be sure not to touch any
part except for the attaching screws.
The position of the processor loading unit and the
sprocket unit is adjusted with the positioning pins. No
need for adjusting when attaching.
2653
1/1
2722
Dryer Section
Dryer Section
Removing the dryer rack

! Procedure
1. Remove the dryer top cover.
2001

J/P740 (print sensor)
3. Move the stopper of the dryer rack in the
direction indicated by the arrow to remove

the dryer rack.
Dryer rack
Stopper
G058308

None
2722
1/1
2723
Dryer Section
7. Remove the fixing angle of the dryer fan,
Removing the dryer fan
then remove the dryer fan. (five screws)
! Procedure
Fixing angle
bracket
1. Remove the dryer top cover, the dryer cover

1 and the dryer cover 2.
2001

J/P655 (dryer heater)
J/P651 (dryer heater)
J/P389 (dryer temparature sensor)
J/P744 (dryer fan)
J/P733 (tank cooling fan 3)
Dryer fan
3. Remove the holder of the dryer temparature
Fixing angle
bracket
sensor. (one screw)
G058310
Dryer thermosensor
Tank cooling fan 3

Dryer heater
Condenser
G058309
4. Remove the dryer heater with its holder. (two

screws)
5. Remove the tank cooling fan 3 with its duct.

(two screws)
6. Remove the condenser of the dryer fan. (one

screw)
2723
1/1
2724
Dryer Section
4. Remove the chain from the dryer rack and
Replacing the dryer net
remove the drive sprocket. (one E-ring)
! Procedure for removing the dryer net
1. Remove the dryer rack.
Chain
2722
2. Remove the paper guide and the duct cover.

There are four paper guides.
The duct cover is fixed with one screw.
E-ring
G057516
5. Remove the drive sprocket, gear and spacer.

The drive sprocket is fixed with C-ring.
Drive sprocket, gear and
spacer
Paper guides
Duct cover
G057514
C-ring
3. Remove the lubrication holder and the chain

support
Loosen two screws to remove the lubrication holder.

Release the lock and slide the chain support to remove.
Lubrication holder
G057517
6. Remove the fixing shaft. (two screws)
Loosen.
Chain support
Fixing shaft
Lock (slide the lubrication holder in

the direction indicated by the arrow
while pressing here)
G057520
G057515
2724
1/5
Drive sprocket
2724
7. Remove the screw of the duct. (twelve
Dryer Section
10. Remove the E-ring and bearing.
screws)
Bearing
Duct
G058318
11. When removing the shaft and the bearing, be

G058315
careful not to drop them down.
8. Remove the E-ring and the bearing on the
Pin
right side of the dryer rack, then pull the shaft

out with the drive sprocket and the bearing.
E-ring
Bearing
Shaft
G057522
12. Remove the roller.

Bearing
Shaft
Bearing, drive
sprocket
Roller
G058316
9. Remove the roller.

Dryer net
Dryer net
G057523
13. Lay the dryer rack and pull the dryer net with
Roller
the duct.
Dryer net
G057521
Duct
G057524
14. Replace the dryer net.
2724
2/5
E-ring
2724
Dryer Section
4. Attach the pin and bearing to the shaft, them
! Procedure for assembling the dryer

rack
insert the shaft to the roller. Check that the

pin fits in the groove of the roller.
1. Check that the painted metal plate is inserted
Pin
to the unpainted metal plate of the duct as

shown below.
Bearing
Shaft
Painted metal
plate
G057522
G058322
2. Put the dryer net and insert it to the dryer

rack.
5. Attach the bearing and the E-ring.

E-ring
Dryer net
Bearing
G058318
Duct
G057524
6. Insert the roller to the dryer net.
3. Face the groove side of the roller to the drive

sprocket, and insert the roller to the dryer
net.
Dryer net
Nonskid line
Roller
G057521
Groove
Net
Roller
G058324
IMPORTANT
The roller has the line to prevent from slipping
on its surface.
2724
3/5
Unpainted metal
plate
2724
7. Attach the shaft, bearing and drive sprocket.
Dryer Section
10. Attach the spacer, the gear and the drive

sprocket.
Drive sprocket, gear

and spacer
E-ring
C-ring
Shaft
Bearing, drive
sprocket
Bearing
G057517
11. Attach the drive sprocket and the chain.

The joint of the chain must be attached in the proper
direction.
G058316
8. Fix the duct with the screw. (twelve screws)
Chain
Chain joint
Duct
Drive sprocket
G058315
E-ring
G057518
9. Attach the fixing shaft. (two screws)
12. Attach the lubrication holder and the chain

support.
Fix two screws to attach the lubrication holder.

Slide the chain support in the direction indicated by the
arrow.
Screws
Fixing shaft
Lubrication holder
G057520
Chain support
G057519
2724
4/5
2724
Dryer Section
13. Attach the paper guide and the duct cover.
Paper guides
Fix a screw to attach the duct cover.
Duct cover
G057514
2724
5/5
2725
Dryer Section
Adjusting the backlash of the dryer

rack drive gear and torque release
! Procedure
1. Remove the dryer top cover.
2001
2. Loosen the mounting nut fixing the drive gear

of the dryer rack, and move the drive gear in
the direction indicated by the arrow.
Adjust the backlash 0.5 mm of the torque releaser.
Dryer rack
Drive gear
0.5 mm
Nut
Torque releaser
(drive section)
Dryer rack frame

G058334
IMPORTANT
Also adjust the backlash of the dryer rack
drive gear and the drive sprocket 0.5 mm.
Dryer rack
Drive gear
Drive sprocket
0.5 mm
Drive gear
G058335
Each dryer rack or the machine itself has the

margin of error. When replacing the dryer rack, be
sure to adjust the backlash of the dryer rack drive
gear and the torque releaser in the drive section.
2725
1/1
2741
Order Classification Section
Removing conveyor units 1 and 2
1. Release the rock of the conveyor unit 1, and

lift the conveyor unit by sliding it in the
direction indicated by the arrow.
5. Remove the conveyor unit 2. (six screws)

(five caps)
IMPORTANT
Three screws (A) are fixed with nuts. Be
careful not to lose them.
Conveyor unit 1
Screws (A)
Conveyor unit 2
G058339
Lock
G058336
! Procedure for removing the conveyor

unit 2
1. Remove the conveyor unit 1.

Wiring cover
G058337
3. Remove the processor top cover and remove

the wiring cover. (two screws)
Wiring cover
G058338
2741
1/1
! Procedure for removing the conveyor

unit 1
2742
Replacing the belt in conveyor unit

1
5. Remove the tension pulley of the conveyor
motor 1 and remove the belt. (one mounting

nut)
! Procedure
1. Remove the conveyor unit 1 and turn over it.
Nut
2741
2. Remove the mounting angle bracket of the

rail and the crank shaft. (eight screws)
Belt
Conveyor motor 1
Tension pulley
G058342
6. Remove the mounting angle bracket of the

conveyor motor. (four screws)
Rails
Crank shaft attaching angle bracket
G058340
3. Remove the connecting connector and
remove the angle bracket. (four screws)

Connecting
connector
Conveyor motor 1 mounting angle

bracket
G058343
7. Remove both E-rings of left and right, and
pull the shaft about 10 mm in the direction

8. Lift both fixing plates of left and right, and

remove the spring. (two E-ring)
Angle
Remove these screws first.
IMPORTANT
G058341
Be careful not to fly out the spring.
4. Remove the cover of the conveyor unit 1.
Fixing plates
Shaft (pull 10 mm)
G058344
2742
1/2
2742
9. Replace the belt of the conveyor unit 1.

IMPORTANT
The belt must be attached in the proper
direction. Check that the belt is attached as
shown below.
The surface is different.
Belt
G058345
10. Reassemble the parts. The tension
adjustment for the belt of the conveyor motor

1 is not required.
2012
" Point
When attaching the fixing plate, insert the shaft
through the spring, and then insert the tip of the
shaft to the metal hole and push the fixing plate in
the direction indicated by the arrow.
Shaft
Fixing plate
Spring
Metal
Insert the shaft to the hole of the metal.
G058346
2742
2/2
2743
Slide adjustment of conveyor unit 1

! Procedure
1. Remove the conveyor unit 1 and turn over it.
2741
2. Loosen two screws of the crankshaft, and
adjust the light-tight position of the conveyor

position sensor 1.
3. Attach the conveyor unit 1, and confirm the
gap between the slide section and the main

body by moving the conveyor slide motor
with Output Check.
IMPORTANT
Adjust the conveyor slide motor so that the
gap between the slide section and the main
body is 10.5 mm.
Loosen.
Slide section
Gap of 10.5 mm
Main body
G058347
2743
1/1
2744
Replacing the belt in conveyor unit

2
5. Remove the belt roller (upper).
! Procedure

2741
2741
3. Remove the receiving tray of the conveyor

unit 2. (one screw)
Belt roller (upper)

G058350
6. Remove the belt roller (lower).
G058348

J/P739 (print full sensor)
Belt roller (lower)

Connector
G058351
7. Replace the belt of the conveyor unit 2.

Print full sensor

G058349
2744
1/1
2781
Replenishment package unit

5. Attach the tube clamps to the OUT side of
Replacing the replenisher pump and

the water supply pump [SM]
the hoses of the pump to be replaced.
6. Loosen the wire bands on the caps of the
pump to be replaced, and then remove the

hoses. (Both IN and OUT side)
Processing solution can cause eye irritation.

Be sure to put the goggles on when carrying out this
operation.
If processing solution gets into eyes, immediately rinse
them under running water for at least 15 minutes, and
then contact a physician.
IN
Processing solution can cause skin irritation.

Be sure to wear rubber gloves and clothing for work
wear.
If there is a possibility of direct or indirect exposure to a
processing solution, wash with soap and rinse with lots
of water.
If an allergic reaction is caused on skin, immediately
Caps (Do not remove.)
Poppet valves
! Procedure
OUT
G050887
Be careful not to let the pump rotating part

come into contact with chemical or water.
1. Pull out the replenishment package unit.

2. Remove the replenishment packages.
3. Remove the pump mount. (two screws)
7. Remove the pump as shown in the figure.

2. Push the main body
backward.
Arrangement of the pumps

Refilling water/Water supply
3. Lift it up.
1. Push.
G050874
8. Remove the cover from the removed pump.
Tray units
Cover
Lift up the cover opening the part

Pump attaching
mount
G050875
G058361
4. Close the valve of the strainer unit of the

pump to be replaced.
2781
1/3
IMPORTANT
For the replenisher pumps of CD-A, CD-B,
CD-C, BF-A, BF-B, and STB, do not remove
the caps from the main body of the new
pumps. If they are removed, the pump output
amount indicated on the rating plate will not
be determined properly.
2781
9. Take a note of the output amount displayed

on the new pump's rating plate.
(2) Fix the replenisher pipe and the water supply

pipe.
Remove the replenisher pipe and the water
supply pipe from the sub-tank and direct the
output ports to the front. Then fix the pipes so
that the pipe may be in the vertical position.
Output amount
Rating plate
G050888
10. Disconnect the connectors, and replace the

pump.
NOTE
Fix the replenisher pipe and the water
supply pipe at the same height as when the
machine is operating. This can prevent the
replenisher pump and water supply pump
from shaking and make the accurate
measurement.
(3) Prepare a container for the replenishment
J/P611, code 20, 21 (CD-A replenisher pump)
solution to be output or water.
J/P612 code 20, 22 (CD-B replenisher pump)
Replenisher pipe and water

supply pipe
J/P613 code 20, 23 (CD-C replenisher pump)

J/P614 code 20, 24 (CD-W water supply pump)
J/P615, code 20, 25 (BF-A replenisher pump)
J/P616 code 20, 26 (BF-B replenisher pump)
J/P617 code 20, 27 (STB replenisher pump)
J/P618 (STB-W water supply pump)
Code 46, 47 (BF-W water supply pump)

12. Enter the output amount.
Tape
Extension Processor Settings Pump Output

Amount Setting
G050889
Setting for CD-A, CD-B, CD-C, CD-W, BF-A,

BF-B, and STB
Enter the output amount written in Step 9.
3111
Setting for BF-W and STB-W

Enter the measured value to the Pump Output Amount
Setting.
IMPORTANT
For measurements of two or more
replenishment solutions, use a different
container for each solution.
If no different containers are available,
clean and use the container available.
(4) Press
on the Pump Output Amount

Setting display and select Pump Output
Amount Setting.
(5) Select the pump for output.
1. Remove air from the replenisher pump and

the water supply pump (except BF-W and
STB-W) using the air exhaust tool.
Press the
key to operate the pumps.
(6) Repeat Step (5) until the replenisher solution or

water reaches to OUT of the replenisher pump
while checking if the air is not remained in the
hose.
IMPORTANT
If air remains in the pump, output cannot be
carried out accurately.
If a large amount of air remains in the pump,
the chemical may undergo oxidation, or
precise values may not be obtained because
air escapes during the measurement.
(1) Remove the sub-tank top cover and processor

cover 1.
2001
2781
2/3
2781
(7) Attach the air exhaust tool to the replenisher
Check that replenishment solution or

water reaches to the replenisher/water
supply pumps.
pipe.
Replenisher pipe and water
supply pipe
2. Check the output amount.

For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's
Manual - Additional Operations & Setup
Manual -.
Air exhaust tool
G050890
IMPORTANT
When air is to be exhausted by using
two or more chemicals, be sure to start
from CD-A pump.
Before the air is to be exhaused from
the pumps with other solutions, be sure
to clean the tool. If the tool is not
cleaned, contamination and chemical
reaction may occur.
The air exhaust tool is a service tool.
Refer to Service personnel tool list.
8031
(8) Exhaust the air from the replenisher pump by

pulling the injection syringe from the air
exhaust tool at one stroke.
Remove the air exhaust tool from the
replenisher pipe or the water supply pipe, and
discharge the air, water, or replenishment
solution.
When the output amount for each

replenishment package is measured, the
remaining amount of each solution varies.
3. Replace the replenisher pipe and the water

supply pipe to their original position.
4. Mark the label with a new pump output

amount.
(The label is affixed to the inside of processor door 1.)
5. Attach the sub-tank upper cover and

processor cover 1 as they were.
IMPORTANT
Do not leave the air exhaust tool without
cleaning after use. Otherwise the syringe
packing may be damaged.
Be sure to clean the tool for storage.
IMPORTANT
When the air is exhausted by using the
air exhaust tool, the float may be
deceased by the force of attraction and
the attention messages such as
Replace the Replenishment Package
with a new one. may be displayed.
There may be still some replenisher
solution left in the package. Remove
the replenishment package from the
replenishment unit and shake it to
check if the float is rising.
If the injection syringe slips out of the
air exhaust tool, the replenishment
solution or water may be splashed.
(9) After air has ben exhausted by the exhaust tool,

check that the air does not remain in the hose.
IMPORTANT
The correct value is not measured if
the air is exhausted during the
measurement of the pump output
amount.
2781
3/3
IMPORTANT
Make sure that the difference between the
measured value and the output amount
entered in the machine is within 3%. If the
difference is not 3%, check for damage or
clogging of the pipes. When there is no
problem relating to those items, air must still
be remained in the pumps. Exhaust air, and
measure output amount securely again.
2782
6. Remove the probe nut and the probe.
Replacing the probe [SM]
BF-A
BF-B
Processing solution can cause skin irritation.

Be sure to wear rubber gloves and clothing for work
wear.
If there is a possibility of direct or indirect exposure to a
processing solution, wash with soap and rinse with lots
of water.
If an allergic reaction is caused on skin, immediately
STB
CD-C
CD-B
CD-A
Probe nut
Probe
O-ring
! Procedure
Probe holder
1. Pull out the replenishment package unit.

2. Remove the replenishment package.
3. Remove the protection cover of the SM I/O
PCB. (one screw)
G050893
7. Assemble the new probe, then tighten the
probe nut securely using the probe replacing

jig.
IMPORTANT
The O-ring is attached to the new probe.
The probe (including the O-ring) should be
used properly for each solution.
For CD-C, use the probe which whole color is
black and the O-ring marked with a white dot.
For other solutions, use the probe which the
resin part is blown and the O-ring marked with
a green dot.
The probe replacing jig is a service tool. Refer
to Service personnel tool list.
8031
Protection cover
G058362
4. Disconnect the tray unit connectors.

J/P601 (Tray unit A)
J/P596 (Tray unit B)
5. Remove the tray units.

2. Lift it up.
Tray unit B
1. Press the lever.
Tray unit A
G050892
2782
1/1
Processing solution can cause eye irritation.

Be sure to wear the goggles. If the processing solution
gets into the eyes, wash them with running water, and
contact the physician.
2783
4. Remove the cover of the SM I/O PCB. (one
Adjusting the sensitivity of the

replenisher solution sensor [SM]
screw)
! Procedure
1. Clean the LED and detection sections of the

replenishment solution sensor.
Protection cover
Replenishment solution
package P-2
Replenishment solution
package P-1
G050896
5. Turn the VR of each replenishment solution
sensor on the SM I/0 PCB counterclockwise

fully.
Replenishment solution sensors

G050894
Replenisher sensor arrangement
G058398
"
G050895
2. Attach the replenishment package containing

the replenishment solution.
3. Set the valve chuck, then turn the handle to

turn ON.
Point
Counterclockwise
The light intensity of the replenishment solution
sensor (emission side) is reduced.
Counterclockwise
The light intensity of the replenishment solution
sensor (emission side) is raised.
6. Turn the VR of each replenishment solution

sensor clockwise slowly, and stop turning it
at the position where the LED lights up.
2783
Chemical
VR No.
LED No.
CD-A
VR1
LED10
CD-B
VR2
LED11
CD-C
VR3
LED12
STB
VR4
LED13
BF-A
VR5
LED14
BF-B
VR6
LED15
1/3
Trays
2783
IMPORTANT
If the VR is turned too far clockwise, turn it
counterclockwise to where the LED turns off.
Then turn it clockwise again until the LED
turns on.
7. Under the condition in Step 6, turn each VR
Chemical
VR No.
Revolution
Count
CD-A
VR1
CD-B
VR2
CD-C
VR3
STB
VR4
BF-A
VR5
BF-B
VR6
of the replenishment solution sensor

clockwise according to the number of
rotations below.
IMPORTANT
When the total number of rotations exceeds
11, replace the replenishment solution sensor
and adjust the sensitivity again. (The
maximum number of VR rotations is 13.)
Floats
Replenishment
solution
Replenishment package
Replenishment solution sensor

(detection)
Replenishment
solution
Probe

(LED)
G050897
If the float in the replenishment package

blocks off the replenisher solution sensor, the
LED goes off.
2783
2/3
2783
2783
3/3
Mode
Passwords ............................................................................................................................. 3001
Passwords ............................................................................................................................................................3001
Mode structure chart .............................................................................................................. 3003

Mode structure chart (Order Display) .................................................................................................................3003
Mode structure chart (Judgment Display) ...........................................................................................................3004
Mode structure chart (Menu display) ..................................................................................................................3011
Mode structure chart (Setup) ...............................................................................................................................3013
Mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [N] ....................................................................................................3015
Mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [SM] .................................................................................................3015
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [N] ................................................................................................3016
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM] .............................................................................................3016
Mode structure chart (Maintenance) ....................................................................................................................3017
Daily Totals ............................................................................................................................ 3031

Total Counter .......................................................................................................................................................3031
Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 3061

Service Parameters ..............................................................................................................................................3061
Paper Specification Registration/Setup ...............................................................................................................3062
Magazine Registration/Setup ...............................................................................................................................3063
Monitor setup .......................................................................................................................................................3064
NCE mode ...........................................................................................................................................................3065
Data Initialization ................................................................................................................................................3066
Light Source Registration ....................................................................................................................................3067
Area Registration .................................................................................................................................................3068
Processor Settings ................................................................................................................ 3101

Refilling Water Amount Setting [N] .................................................................................................................3101
Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM] ..............................................................................................................3101
Cleaning Water Amount Setting ..........................................................................................................................3102
Pump Output Amount Setting [SM] ..................................................................................................................3111
Total Replenishment Amount Display [N] ........................................................................................................3112
Total Replenishment Amount Display [SM] .....................................................................................................3112
NMC Setting .......................................................................................................................... 3131

NMC Setting ........................................................................................................................................................3131
Operator Selections ............................................................................................................... 3141

Operator selections [N] ......................................................................................................................................3141
Operator selections [SM] ...................................................................................................................................3141
Maintenance .......................................................................................................................... 3151

Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (135/240 AFC) ....................................................................................................3151
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (120 AFC) ...........................................................................................................3152
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (135/240 MMC) ..................................................................................................3154
3000
1/2
3 Mode
3.
3000
3000
Maintenance .......................................................................................................................... 3155

Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (135/240 AMC) ...................................................................................................3156
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment ..............................................................................................................................3157
Thermosensor Calibration ...................................................................................................................................3158
Input Check (Printer) ...........................................................................................................................................3162
Input Check (Processor) [N] ..............................................................................................................................3163
Input Check (Processor) [SM] ...........................................................................................................................3163
Output Check (Printer) ........................................................................................................................................3167
Output Check (Processor) [N] ...........................................................................................................................3168
Output Check (Processor) [SM] ........................................................................................................................3168
System Version Check .........................................................................................................................................3171
Software Upgrade ................................................................................................................................................3172
Operation Information .........................................................................................................................................3176
Machine Specification [N] .................................................................................................................................3181
Machine Specification [SM] ..............................................................................................................................3181
Printer Mechanical Adjustment .............................................................................................. 3201

Reverse Unit Correction ......................................................................................................................................3201
Paper Advance Length Correction ......................................................................................................................3202
Arm Unit Zigzagging Correction ........................................................................................................................3203
Exposure Center Correction ................................................................................................................................3204
Exposure Image Correction .................................................................................................................................3205
Exposure Start Timing Correction .......................................................................................................................3206
Paper pressure operation correction ....................................................................................................................3207
Exposure Position Correction ..............................................................................................................................3208
Exposure Zoom Rate Correction .........................................................................................................................3209
Exposure Zoom Rate Fine Adjustment ...............................................................................................................3210
Scanner Unit Adjustment ....................................................................................................... 3226

Scanner Filter Position Adjustment .....................................................................................................................3226
Laser Unit Adjustment .........................................................................................................................................3227
Swing and Tilt Adjustment ..................................................................................................................................3231
Light Axis Adjustment ........................................................................................................................................3232
Focus Adjustment ................................................................................................................................................3233
About PC ............................................................................................................................... 3701

BIOS setting (QSS-3001) ....................................................................................................................................3701
BIOS setting (QSS-3011) ....................................................................................................................................3701
Procedure for recovery ........................................................................................................................................3801
Procedure for installing the QSS software ..........................................................................................................3850
Procedure for installing the profile data ..............................................................................................................3860
Installing the SCSI driver ....................................................................................................................................3861
Procedure of installing the DVD-RAM driver ....................................................................................................3870
Check the drive assignment .................................................................................................................................3871
Procedure for installing the FB scanner driver ....................................................................................................3872
Installing the Zip driver .......................................................................................................................................3873
3000
2/2
3 Mode
Reading and Writing Data ...................................................................................................................................3169
3001
Passwords
Passwords
Passwords
! Explanation
! Service personnel password
1. Press the key to select Menu.

2. Insert the service personnel floppy disk into
the floppy disk drive on the Menu display.
3. Press the
key, and then press the
key.
3. Mode
4. Enter the password (2260).

When it is in service mode, Service Mode is displayed
on each display.
NOTE
After password is displayed, input the password within
10 seconds.
If the display image disappears while you are entering the
password, start it over again.
IMPORTANT
Do not eject the floppy disk while the LED of the
floppy disk drive is ON. (It may damage the floppy
disk drive or the floppy disk.)
! Deleting the service personnel password
1. Press the
2. Press the
key.
key to select Menu.

3. Enter the password except for 2260.

When it is in service mode, Service Mode is displayed
on each display.
! Owner password deletion
1. Press the
2. Press the
key to select Menu.
key while the

key is
pressed on the Menu display to bring up the
Password Deletion display.
3. Enter 0 six times slowly, and then press the

key.
NOTE
After deleting the password, it is set to the initial
value (0123).
The Password Deletion display does not appear if
the password is not registered.
The Password Deletion display is appeared when
deleting the password which has been registered.
3001
1/1
3003
Mode structure chart

3. Mode
Mode structure chart (Order Display)
S0100-00-SM0030
Order Display
Item
Reference
Menu
Scanner Lamp ON/OFF
Processor Drive ON/OFF
Rewind Paper
Start Adobe Photoshop
Help Display
3003
1/1
3004
3. Mode
Mode structure chart (Judgment Display)
S0250-00-SM02
Judgment Display
Item
Reference
Help Display
Print Size Change
Print Size Copy
DSA
1 Frame Magnification
Cancel One Frame
Magnification Setting
Print Image Fine Adjustment
Rotation (Only 1 frame)
[-1] Image Rotation
[N] Correction Value, Number
and DSA Hold
[Y] Y-correction Copy
[M] M-correction Copy
[C] C-correction Copy
[D] Density Correction Copy
[REPT] Number of Prints Copy
[+1] DSA Copy
[PASS] Passed frame copy
3004
1/1
3011
3. Mode
Mode structure chart (Menu display)
S0003-00-SM02
S0019-00-SM0030
SP1: Mode can be selected by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
SP2: Data can be changed by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
3011
1/3
3011
Menu display
Item
*1
Reference
Quit the Close Down Checks
Close Down Checks
Quit The Application

Power OFF
Pricing Sheet Reissue
Daily Totals
Print Details
Print Out Daily Totals

Daily Totals Export
Details for Input Media

Supplement Charge

Daily Totals Export
Details for JPEG
Details for Index Print
3. Mode
Daily Totals Export

Daily Totals Export
Reset Daily Totals
Total Counter
Reset
Daily Totals Export
Total Counter 2
Daily Setup
Weekly Setup
Monthly Setup
Emulsion Number Change
Setup (Lamp Change)
Scanner Lamp Change
135/240 AFC Cleaning

Cleaning the Focal Plane
Regulating Guide
Pressure Roller Cleaning
Mail
Extension
3013
3015
3016
Setup
Processor Settings
Operator Selections
IX Data Settings
Imprint Setting
NMC Setting (SP1)
Machine Discrimination
Symbol
Photofinishing Data Utilization
Host
Modem
Price Setting
*2
Print Price Setting

Input Media Extra Charge
Setting
Index Print Price Setting
JPEG Price Setting
Standard Price Setting
Pricing Unit Setting
*3
Retry Communication
Pricing Sheet Print Out Check
Option Registration
Option
Media
Option Software
Password Registration
3017
Maintenance
3011
2/3
3011
3. Mode
*1. When the service personnel password (2260) has been entered, the value of Total Counter in Daily Totals can be reset.
*2. When D type pricing unit is attached, the display does not appear.
*3. Only when D type pricing unit is attached, the display appears.
3011
3/3
3013
3. Mode
Mode structure chart (Setup)
S1000-00-SM0030
Setup
Item
Laser Setup
Reference
3062
3063
3065
Paper Specification Registration/Setup

Magazine Registration/Setup
Paper Setup
NCE Mode (SP1)
Print Channel
Print Channel Selection
Setting
Cut
Copy
Paste
Export
Scanner setup
Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)
Master Data
Scanner Slope
For each film size
Reference Slope
DX Slope
Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)
Master Data
Scanner Slope
For each film size
Scanner Slope
Parameters (Negative) (SP2)
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Service Parameter (SP1)
3061
Light Source Update

Light Source Registration (SP1)
Area Registration (SP1)
3067
3068
Flatbed Scanner Setup

Master Data
Paper Temperature Correction

Key Difference Ratio Setting
DSA
3013
1/2
3013
Item
Monitor Setup

Reference
3064
Brightness Adjustment
Monitor Profile Calibration (SP1)
Monitor Gamma Adjustment
Data Initialization (SP1)
3066
All Data
Main
Main (Setup)
Image Processing
Image Processing (for each Paper
Magazine)
Printer
Processor
3. Mode
Auto Film Carrier

Scanner
Colorimeter
Pricing Unit
NMC
Initial Setup
Initial Setup (SP1)
3013
2/2
3015
Mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [N]

The described place varies depending on the specifications. The described for each specification is referred to the following.
For the SM specification, refer to Mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [SM].
3. Mode
! Display
S4000-00-SM00
Processor Settings
Item
Reference
Processing Solution
Temperature Setting
Standard Replenishment
Amount Setting
Manual Replenishment
Pump Output Amount Setting
(SP2)
Pump Output Amount
Setting
Initial Replenishment
Operation (SP1)
3112
Total Replenishment Amount

Display (SP2)
Dryer Temperature Setting
Processor Standard Setting
(SP1)
Refilling Water Amount Setting

Cleaning Water Amount Setting
3015
3101
3102
1/2
3015
Mode structure chart (Processor Setting) [SM]
3. Mode
! Display
S4200-00-SM00
Processor Settings
Item
Reference
Processing Solution
Temperature Setting
Standard Replenishment
Amount Setting
3111
Pump Output Amount Setting

(SP2)
Pump Output Amount
Setting
Initial Replenishment
Operation (SP1)
3112

Display (SP2)
SM Forced
Replenishment Amount
Setting (SP1)
Dryer Temperature Setting
Correction Setting
Processor Standard Setting
(SP1)

3015
3101
3102
2/2
3016
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [N]

3. Mode
For the SM specification, refer to Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM].
S2000-00-SM0030
! Operator Selections
Judgment Operation
Item
Reference
Hold Key Reset

240 Print Quantity User Advice (Camera Data)
PJP/AUTO/PPI Automatic Order
Reprint Automatic Order
Sort Function by Each Frame
Number of Frames on the Strip of Negatives (135/120/110)
Number of Frames on the Strip of Negatives (240)
Judgment Display Specification
Color of PASS Frame
Color Selection of Print Frame Display
Color Selection of Frame Display
Selecting Judgment Type for the Input Media
Print Operation
Item
Reference
Paper Leading Edge Advance

Print Size Classification
Repeat Prints Classification
3016
1/8
3016
Item
Reference
PPI Image Decision Time

Net Order Mode
Display/Operation
Item
Reference
Buzzer Volume
Buzzer Test
Keyboard Buzzer
Shadow Gamma Adjustment Switch Display
Additional
Reference
Select the Type of Daily Totals reset
3. Mode
Item
(SP2)
Film Carrier Rear Edge Fixed Dimension Frame Number

Frame No. Detect Error Correction (Negative)
Frame No. Detect Error Correction (Positive)
135 Negative Film Inserting Direction Detection Function
135/240 AMC auto focus
3141
Test Operation (SP1)
Correction
Item
Reference
digital ICE Correction

Positive Film Auto Correction
Media Correction
DSA
Judgment Image Correction
Digital Correction (Negative)
Digital Correction (Positive)
DSA (Media)
DSA (Flatbed Scanner)
3141
Graininess Suppression SW (SP1)
Image Save
Item
Reference
Saving Passed Images

CD-R/RW
Writing Folder Format
Viewer Software Selection
HD
Destination File Selection
3016
2/8
3016
Front
Item
Reference
Item
Reference
240
Imprinting Selection
Imprinting User Advice (Camera Data)
Media
Front Print Letter Color
Edge Color of Front Print Character
Front Print Font Size
Background Color of Front Print Text
3. Mode
Index
Hold of Index Print Quantity
Index Quality
135/120/110/Media
Index Print Specification
Prints of Order Number and Date
Print Date Setting
Minimum Index Print Frame Number
Arrangement by Frame Number
Index Print of Passed Frame
Index print background color
240
Print of Title
Print Date Setting
Print Number for each Print Type Display
Print Type Frame Display
Print Type Display Position
Contact Print
Item
Reference
Templates
Reading the contact print

frame
Background Color
Number of Blank Frames on Long Roll Film
Line Feed per Film Strip
NOTE
The Contact Print tab appears by installing the software for making the contact print in option registration.
3016
3/8
3016
Contents of Imprint
Item
Reference
Copyright Mark
Input Contents of
Imprint
CVP/Back Print Data

Index/Logo Data
Reading Logo Data
PU/Store Name
PU/Telephone Number
Processor
Reference
3. Mode
Item
Replenishment Unit
Dryer Pre-heat
3141
3141
Drive, Dryer Manual ON Switch

Error Occurrence Selection
Replenishment error. (SP1)
Refilling water error. (SP1)
Circulation pump error. (SP1)
error. (SP1)
3016
4/8
3016
3. Mode
Mode structure chart (Operator Selections) [SM]
S2000-00-SM0030
! Operator Selections
Judgment Operation
Item
Reference
Hold Key Reset

240 Print Quantity User Advice (Camera Data)
PJP/AUTO/PPI Automatic Order
Reprint Automatic Order
Sort Function by Each Frame
Number of Frames on the Strip of Negatives (135/120/110)
Number of Frames on the Strip of Negatives (240)
Judgment Display Specification
Color of PASS Frame
Color Selection of Print Frame Display
Color Selection of Frame Display
Selecting Judgment Type for the Input Media
Print Operation
Item
Reference
Paper Leading Edge Advance

Print Size Classification
Repeat Prints Classification
PPI Image Decision Time
Net Order Mode
3016
5/8
3016
Display/Operation
Item
Reference
Buzzer Volume
Buzzer Test
Keyboard Buzzer
Shadow Gamma Adjustment Switch Display
Additional
Item
Reference
Select the Type of Daily Totals reset
(SP2)
Film Carrier Rear Edge Fixed Dimension Frame Number

Frame No. Detect Error Correction (Negative)
3. Mode
Frame No. Detect Error Correction (Positive)

135 Negative Film Inserting Direction Detection Function
135/240 AMC auto focus
3141
Test Operation (SP1)
Correction
Item
Reference
digital ICE Correction

Positive Film Auto Correction
Media Correction
DSA
Judgment Image Correction
Digital Correction (Negative)
Digital Correction (Positive)
DSA (Media)
DSA (Flatbed Scanner)
3141
Graininess Suppression SW (SP1)
Image Save
Item
Reference
Saving Passed Images

CD-R/RW
Writing Folder Format
Viewer Software Selection
HD
Destination File Selection
3016
6/8
3016
Front
Item
Reference
Item
Reference
240
Imprinting User Advice (Camera Data)
Media
Front Print Letter Color
Edge Color of Front Print Character
Front Print Font Size
Background Color of Front Print Text
3. Mode
Index
Hold of Index Print Quantity
Index Quality
135/120/110/Media
Prints of Order Number and Date
Print Date Setting
Minimum Index Print Frame Number
Arrangement by Frame Number
Index Print of Passed Frame
240
Print of Title
Print Date Setting
Print Number for each Print Type Display
Print Type Frame Display
Print Type Display Position
Contact Print
Item
Reference
Templates
Reading the contact print

frame
Background Color
Number of Blank Frames on Long Roll Film
Line Feed per Film Strip
NOTE
The Contact Print tab appears by installing the software for making the contact print in option registration.
3016
7/8
3016
Contents of Imprint
Item
Reference
Copyright Mark
Input Contents of
Imprint
CVP/Back Print Data

Index/Logo Data
Reading Logo Data
PU/Store Name
PU/Telephone Number
Processor
Reference
3. Mode
Item
Replenishment Unit
Dryer Pre-heat
3141
3141
Drive, Dryer Manual ON Switch

Error Occurrence Selection
Replenishment error. (SP1)
Replenishment package error
(SP1)
Refilling water error. (SP1)
Circulation pump error. (SP1)
error. (SP1)
3016
8/8
3017
3. Mode
Mode structure chart (Maintenance)
S3000-00-SM00
Maintenance
Item
Various Adjustment
Reference
3151
3152
3153
3154
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (SP2)
Colorimeter Calibration
Confirming the Colorimeter
and Calibration Plate Data
Updating the Calibration Plate
Data
3157
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment (SP1)

Test Paper Advance
Paper Advance Test
Reverse Unit Correction (SP1)
3201
Reverse Unit (Left) Test

Operation
Reverse Unit (Right) Test
Operation
Reverse Unit (Right and Left)
Test Operation
Test Operation for the Paper
Stop Position Correction
Paper Advance Length Correction (SP1)
3202
Test Paper Advance

Loading
Rewind
3017
1/3
3017
Item
Arm Unit Zigzagging Correction
3203
Test Print (Paper Magazine A)

Test Print (Paper Magazine B)
Loading (Paper Magazine A)
Loading (Paper Magazine B)
Rewind (Paper Magazine A)
Rewind (Paper Magazine B)
Exposure Image Correction (SP1)
3205
Test Print
Loading
Rewind
Exposure Start Timing Correction
3206
3. Mode
Various Adjustment
Reference
Test Print
Loading
Rewind
Paper Pressure Operation Correction
3207
Test Print
Loading
Rewind
Exposure Zoom Rate Correction (SP1)
3209
Test Print
Test Print (Confirmation)
Exposure Position Adjustment (SP1)
3208

Confirmation of Test Print
(Paper Magazine A)
Confirmation of Test Print
(Paper Magazine B)
Exposure Zoom Rate Fine Adjustment
(SP1)
3210
Test Print
Test Print (Confirmation)
Exposure Center Correction
3204

Loading (Paper Magazine A)
Loading (Paper Magazine B)
Rewind (Paper Magazine A)
Rewind (Paper Magazine B)
Thermosensor Calibration (SP1)
3017
3158
2/3
3017
Item
Various Adjustment
Reference
Scanner Unit Adjustment (SP1)
Swing and Tilt Adjustment

Light Axis Adjustment
Light Source Registration
Focus Adjustment
3231
3232
3067
3233
Magnification Change
Focus Auto Adjustment
Result
Scanner Filter Position Adjustment (SP1)
3226
Negative Filter Adjustment

Positive Filter Adjustment
3. Mode
3227
Laser Unit Adjustment

Auto Tuning
Process Control Strip
Input Check
Printer
Output Check
Printer
Reading and Writing Data
All Data
Processor
Processor
Writing Data (CPU -> Floppy Disk)
3162
3163
3167
3168
3169
Reading Data (Floppy Disk -> CPU)

Format Floppy Disk
Reading Laser Record (Floppy Disk ->
CPU) (SP1)
Service Data (SP1)
Writing Data (CPU -> Floppy Disk)

Reading Data (Floppy Disk -> CPU)
Format Floppy Disk
System Version Check
3171
Accessories
Profile Data
DLL/Driver
Software Upgrade
Software Upgrade (CD-ROM)
3172
Software Upgrade (NET)

Software Upgrade (HD) (SP1)
Operation Information
3176
Error Record
Daily Setup History
Weekly Setup History
Monthly Setup History
Laser Operation Record
3181
Machine Specification (SP2)

Program Timer Setting
3017
3/3
3031
Daily Totals
Daily Totals
Total Counter
Total Counter
3. Mode
Menu: 2260 Daily Totals
S0017-00-SM00
! Explanation
The total number of exposures for each print channel is
displayed.
! F: Function
! Reset
Total counter is reset.
NOTE
Total Counter 2 cannot be reset.
! Daily Totals Export

The daily totals via the total counter is exported.
3031
1/1
3061
Service Parameters
Setup
Setup
C_OFF
Only color correction is OFF (Only color correction

is the average photometry.)
None
Menu:2260 Extension Setup Scanner Setup Parameters

(Negative) Service Parameter
Both density and color corrections are OFF (the

average photometry).
SetUp
This setting is not used.
! Tungsten Negative Correction Rate (Initial

value: 80) (Input range: 0 to 99)
Set the correction rate when the scanner judges that the
negative was shot under a tungsten light. A setting value of 80
corresponds to no correction. The smaller the value, the
greater the correction.
Specify the correction ratio of the average scanner photometry

value to the scanner correction value.
When it is set to CF0, the scanner correction is 0% and the
average photometry correction is 100%.
When it is set to CF100, the scanner correction is 100% and
the average photometry correction is 0%.
Even if CF is set to 100, the print may be the same as the one
with CF0 when the scanner judges the negative to be a gray
exposure.
S1054-00-SM00
! Explanation
The parameters which change automatic correction by the
scanner, can be changed.
IMPORTANT
50
CCD Noise Suppression Strength can be used for

positive film.
NOTE
It can be set by entering the service personnel password
(2260).
! CCD Noise Suppression Strength (Initial value:

##) (Input range: 0 to 255)
Changes the color correction of the scanner according to the

negatives.
Intermediate-range correction
Attach importance to correction of the frame. (There

may be little differences of correction between the
long and the piece but there may be unevenness of
correction under the same scene.)
The smaller the value, the greater the

correction rate which can be corrected using
the scanner.
ILLUST
! Color Correction Switch (Initial value: 0) (Input

range: 0 to 2)
The smaller the value, the greater the

correction rate which can be corrected
using the average value.
Attach importance to order. (There may be

differences of correction between the long and the
piece but the color will be same under the same
scene.)
When making prints from the film, the part which is extremely
under/over on the image becomes gritty on the print. This item
corrects the part which is gritty.
0
255
The correction becomes slight by

decreasing the value. No correction is
carried out with "0".
The correction becomes remarkable by
increasing the value. The highest value is
255.
ILLUST
NOTE
The initial value is displayed in the right of CCD Noise
Suppression Strength.
! Scanner (Initial value: ON)
This value may be changed due to the software upgrade.
This is the scanner correction switch.

ON
D_OFF
Normal Print
Only density correction is OFF (Only density
correction is average photometry.)
3061
1/2
3. Mode
! CF (Initial value: 80) (Input range: 0 to 99)
3061
Setup
! Color Correction Switch (Initial value: 0) (Input

range: 0 to 1)
Changes how to calculate for the scanner correction according
to the negatives.
Correction with which a color failure often occurs but
pure colors are obtained
Correction with which a color failure does not occurs

often but pure colors are not obtained
3. Mode
3061
2/2
3062
Setup
Paper Specification
Registration/Setup
Menu:2260 Extension Setup Laser Setup Paper
Specification Registration/Setup
Each unexposed part length: 12 mm

Each step length: 12 mm
G052520
S1128-00-SM00
! Explanation
A paper type for setup is registered and setup is carried out.
! Paper Type Selection/Paper Magazine

Selection
16 step setup print: 227 mm

G052522
! F: Function
A maximum of three available paper types can be set.
NOTE
The service personnel password (2260) is required to
display this value.
! Paper Magazine Selection

Select the paper magazine used for setup of each paper type.
127 (1) or the OK
like
The magazine of which paper

specification is registered
127 (1) or the

like
The magazine which is registered and

of which paper specification is not
registered
### (#)
! Paper Gamma Setup

Carry out the paper gamma setup for each paper type.
The test print is one sheet of gray 18 step setup print.
NOTE
The test prints are printed 4 times at most.
The magazine which is not registered
! AOM Bias Characteristic Updating
! Paper Specification Registration/Setup

Carry out Paper Gamma Setup and Printer Profile
Calibration for each paper type.
The test prints are one sheet of the gray 18 step setup print and
one sheet of 16 step setup print.
Adjust the gain value of the light from the laser and update
AOM bias characteristic data.
NOTE
3062
1/2
3. Mode
3062
! Profile Chart Output
Setup
NOTE
No need for adjusting the pulse calibration.
Make five prints of the chart for creating the printer profile.
! Set Up Parameter
9.5 mm
The setup parameter value should be always 860.

89 mm
NOTE
No need for adjusting the setup parameter.
9.5 mm
9.5 mm
89 mm
3. Mode
9.5 mm
9.5 mm
89 mm
9.5 mm
9.5 mm
89 mm
9.5 mm
9.5 mm
89 mm
9.5 mm
G052519
NOTE
There is no adjustment for outputting the printer profile.
The printer profile need to be created for each paper type.
! Printer Profile Calibration

The printer profile which is daily changing is calibrated.
Print the calibration chart and calibrate it using the colorimeter
unit.
Make a test prints.
G052522
NOTE
The profile calibration is the same as that of the weekly
setup.
! Pulse Calibration
The pulse calibration value should be always 1.
3062
2/2
3063
Setup

Menu:2260 Extension Setup Laser Setup Magazine
Registration/Setup

IMPORTANT
To carry out Magazine Registration/Setup, Paper
Specification Registration/Setup of the paper
type needs to be completed.
NOTE
S1035-00-SM0030
! F: Function
! Paper Specification Registration/Setup
! Explanation
Paper Specification Registration/Setup is linked, and Paper

Specification Registration/Setup can be carried out.
3062
The paper magazine to be used is registered and the paper

gamma setup is carried out.
Setup
OK
The magazine which is registered as that

for setup and the paper specification is
also registered
Setup

for setup and the paper specification is
not registered
Magazine
Registration
OK

except for setup and the magazine
registration setup is completed
Magazine
Registration

except for setup and the magazine
registration setup is not completed
The magazine which is not used for setup

and the magazine registration setup is not
completed
! Magazine Registration/Setup (Paper width: 82.5

to 210 mm) (Paper surface: 1 to 4)
You can resister and setup the paper magazine for each paper
type to be used. Also setup status can be checked.
3063
1/1
3. Mode
G052521
3064
Setup
! Adjustment
Monitor setup
Follow the procedure below to setup.

Working place environment check
Menu:2260 Extension Setup Monitor Setup
Brightness adjustment
Monitor Profile Calibration
3. Mode
Gamma Adjustment
! Brightness Adjustment
Carry out the following adjustment using the hard key
(switch) of the display monitor.
S1029-00-SM00
1. Make setting for color temperature according
! Explanation
to the value displayed on the monitor.
2. Set the contrast to the maximum.

3. Adjust the brightness so that the difference
The display monitor can be adjusted basically and

mechanically. Also display monitor color can be adjusted to
the print color according to the operating environment of the
machine.
of the density between the BGR digital

values 0, 0, 0 and 5, 5, 5 can barely be
recognized.
IMPORTANT
Before carrying out the monitor setup, check if the
color can be recognized at your working place. If
necessary, change the environment of the working
place.
! Monitor Profile Calibration
1. Remove the colorimeter from the colorimeter

unit.
! Brightness Adjustment
2. Place the hood of the colorimeter on the
Carry out the basic adjustment using the hard key (switch) of
the display monitor.
circle of the display monitor.
3. Place the colorimeter on the hood.

4. Click YES:Colorimetry.
5. Click YES:Save profile.
IMPORTANT
The brightness adjustment is required according to
the operating environment.
! Monitor Profile Calibration
! Gamma Adjustment
Calibrate the display monitor using the colorimeter unit.

NOTE
Create Monitor Profile Calibration which is to be used
for Monthly Setup.
display this value.
1. Select the sample image for printing and

make a print.
2. Adjust the RGB colors so that the colors of

sample made print match with the sample
image colors on the display monitor.
! Gamma Adjustment
3. Overwrite the monitor gamma table.
The display monitor color can be adjusted to the print color

according to the operating environment of the machine.
IMPORTANT
When looking the print, the print color is changed
according to the brightness and illumination
conditions of the place.
3064
1/1
3065
Setup
5. Click YES:OK.
NCE mode
3. Mode
Menu:2260 Extension Setup Paper Setup Functions

NCE Mode
S1240-00-SM0030
! Explanation
The colors around the letters on the print is softened.
IMPORTANT
Use this mode only when softening the area around
the letters on prints (such as black letters on white
or pale background and white letters on the black
background). This does not correct the whole color
in prints.
This correction should be carried out for each
magazine.
This mode is only for service personnel.
! Adjustment
Check the letters on the prints carefully and correct them
manually.
! NCE mode
1. Make the print with letters and check the
black letters on the white (or pale)

background and white letters on the black
background.
2. Select the magazine to be corrected.

3. Carry out the key correction for the color and
density to be changed.
4. Click Key Correction -> Balance Memory

Shift to change the key correction value to
the balance memory value.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to convert the key correction value to
the balance value.
3065
1/1
3066
Setup
Data Initialization
3. Mode
Menu:2260 Extension Setup Data Initialization
S1022-00-SM0030
! Explanation
The data which is held in the PC can be initialized.
IMPORTANT
Before initializing the data, be sure to backup the data (data writing).
If the data has been initialized by mistake, the data can be returned to the original by reading out the backup floppy
disk data.
3169
If there is a backup data of the service personal level, each data can be written individually.
In case of the backup data of the user level, each data cannot be written individually.
3066
1/4
Item
All Data
3066
Backup file name
Mode or data to be initialized
BkData0100
Main data
BkData0200
Main (Setup) data
Setup
Remarks
All data indicated on the left is
initialized at a time.
Item
Main
BkData0300
Auto Film Carrier data
BkData0300_SCN
Scanner data
BkData0400
Image Processing data
BkData0400_MAG
Image Processing (Magazine) data
BkData2200
Printer data
BkData0900
Processor data
BkData1000
Colorimeter data
BkData1100
Pricing Unit data
BkData1400
NMC data
BkData1700
Correction Value related data
Misreg135_1
Erasing Scratch data
Misreg135_2
Misreg135_3
Misreg135_5
Misreg135_6
Misreg240_1
Misreg240_2
Misreg240_3
Misreg240_4
Misreg240_5
Misreg240_6
Misreg110_2
Misreg110_3
Misreg110_5
Misreg110_6
Misreg2B_0
MisregMMC_1
Backup file name

BkData0100

Print Channel Setting
3. Mode
BkData0204
Remarks
All items in a mode
Current print channel

Order Number
Current settings of Order Display
All items in a mode
Machine Specification
All items in a mode
Operator Selections
All items in a mode
Back Print Data Input
All items in a mode
Imprint Setting
All items in a mode
Lab ID
All items in a mode
Photofinishing Data Utilization
All items in a mode
Option Registration
All items in a mode
Error Record
All items in a mode
Password Registration
Owner password
Key Difference Ratio Setting
All items in a mode
3066
2/4
Item
Main (Setup)
3066
Backup file name
BkData0200
BkData0204
Setup
Remarks
Print Channel Setting
Only Channel Balance

Memory
All items in a mode
Key Difference Ratio Correction
All items in a mode
Daily Setup History
All items in a mode
Weekly Setup History
All items in a mode
Monthly Setup History
All items in a mode
Print Data Record
All items in a mode
Paper Specification
Registration/Setup
Setup status
Setup status
Monitor gamma adjustment
All items in a mode
Setup data
Not displayed on the monitor
Image Processing
BkData0400
Color and Density Correction data
Image Processing (for each

Paper Magazine)
BkData0400_Mag
Data for each paper magazine
Printer
BkData2200
Paper Advance Length Correction
All items in a mode
All items in a mode
All items in a mode
Processor
Auto film carrier
BkData0900
BkData0300
Exposure Image Correction
All items in a mode
All items in a mode
Paper pressure operation correction
All items in a mode
Exposure Position Correction
All items in a mode
Exposure Zoom Rate Correction
All items in a mode
Exposure Zoom Rate Fine

Adjustment
All items in a mode
Only Processing Solution

Display, Order
Classification Specification,
and Processor Specification
Option Registration
Only Digital Flowmeter and

Effluent Concentrator
Processor Settings
All items in all mode
Replenishment Pump Operation
Order Display
All items in a mode
Operator Selections
Only Processor specification
Reverse Unit Correction
All items in a mode
Auto Film Carrier Adjustment
All items in a mode
3066
3/4
3. Mode
Scanner
Backup file name

BkData0300_SCN
Setup
Remarks
Service parameters
All items in a mode
Scanner Special Corrections
All items in a mode
Area Registration
All items in a mode
Focus Adjustment
All items in a mode
BkData1700
Correction amount data
Misreg135_1
All items in a mode
Misreg135_2
All items in a mode
Misreg135_3
All items in a mode
Misreg135_5
All items in a mode
Misreg135_6
All items in a mode
Misreg240_1
All items in a mode
Misreg240_2
All items in a mode
Misreg240_3
All items in a mode
Misreg240_4
All items in a mode
Misreg240_5
All items in a mode
Misreg240_6
All items in a mode
Misreg110_2
All items in a mode
Misreg110_3
All items in a mode
Misreg110_5
All items in a mode
Misreg110_6
All items in a mode
Misreg2B_0
All items in a mode
MisregMMC_1
All items in a mode
Colorimeter
BkData1000
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment
All items in a mode
Pricing Unit
BkData1100
Price Setting
Daily Totals
NMC
BkData1400
Only Pricing Unit Setting
Operator Selections
Only NMC Settings
3066
3. Mode
Item
3066
4/4
3067
Setup

3. Mode
Menu:2260 Extension Setup Scanner Setup Light

Source Registration
S1046-00-SM0030
! Explanation
The operations below are carried out automatically.
1. Checking the CCD sensitivity
2. Registering the area
3068
3. Adjusting the setup filter
4. Calculating the gain value and the offset value
IMPORTANT
Carry out the light source registration for each film
size.
After carrying out "Area Registration", the focus
adjustment is required.
3233
NOTE
The registration is not required for the films which are not
to be used.
For 135, 240 and 120, the light source registration for
each negative and positive is carried out internally.
For 110, the light source registration only for negative is
carried out internally. And for MMC, the light source
registration only for positive is carried out internally.
! Attached Film Carrier

The film carrier which is attached is displayed.
When the film carrier is not attached or attached improperly,
is displayed.
! Registration
When the film size has already been registered, ON is
displayed. When it is not registered, OFF is displayed.
3068
3067
1/1
3068
Setup
Area Registration
3. Mode
Menu:2260 Extension Setup Scanner Setup Area

Registration
S1047-00-SM00
! Explanation
Register the valid range of CCD.
IMPORTANT
After carrying out "Area Registration", the focus
3233
! Attached Film Carrier

The film carrier which is attached is displayed.
When the film carrier is not attached or attached improperly,
is displayed.
! Registration
When the film size has already been registered, ON is
displayed. When it is not registered, OFF is displayed.
3068
1/1
3101
Refilling Water Amount Setting [N]

The described place varies depending on the specifications. The
described for each specification is referred to the following.
Processor Settings
Processor Settings

[SM]
! Display
For the SM specification, refer to Refilling Water Amount

Setting [SM].

Menu: 2260 Extension Processor Settings Processor
Standard Setting Refilling Water Amount Setting
! Display
3. Mode
Menu:2260 Extension Processor Settings Processor

Standard Setting Refilling Water Amount Setting
S4204-00-SM02
! Explanation
! Process Specification
S4008-00-SM00
The process specification which has been registered in the

machine specification is displayed.
3181
! Explanation
! Process Specification
! Refilling Water Amount Setting (Input range:

0.0 to 999.9 ml)
The process specification which has been registered in the

machine specification is displayed.
3181
The output amount of automatic refilling for each refilling

water pump is set.
! Refilling Water Amount Setting (Input range:

0.0 to 999.9 ml)
The output amount of automatic refilling for each refilling
water pump is set.
# Refilling Water Amount Setting 1

When refilling water with "Refilling Water Level"
OFF, set the refilling water amount after "Refilling
Water Level" is set to ON. (For refilling water
during start up checks and normal processing.)
# Refilling Water Amount Setting2
Set the refilling water amount with "Refilling Water
Level" ON. (For automatic refilling during start up
checks.)
3101

When refilling water with "Refilling Water Level"
OFF, set the refilling water amount after "Refilling
Water Level" is set to ON. (For refilling water
during start up checks and normal processing.)
Set the refilling water amount with "Refilling Water
Level" ON. This setting is valid when the Refilling
Water Level 2 of Correction Setting has been set
to Standard. (For automatic refilling during start
up checks.)
# Refilling Water Amount 2 (Low Humidity)
For Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Standard),
when Low Humidity is selected for Refilling
Water Level 2 of Correction Setting, each
refilling water amount is set.
1/2
3101
Processor Settings
3. Mode
# Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Low

Utilization)
For Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Standard),
when Low Utilization is selected for Refilling
Water Level 2 of Correction Setting, each
refilling water amount is set.
Each refilling water amount can be set according to
the amount of evaporation when processing amount
is low (for each machine or time of year).
3101
2/2
3102
Processor Settings

3. Mode
Menu:2260 Extension Processor Settings Processor

Standard Setting Cleaning Water Amount Setting
S4009-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Cleaning Water Amount ON Setting (initial
value: 7.1) (input range: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
Set the operation time of the cleaning pump.
! Cleaning Water Amount OFF Setting (Initial

value: 10.0) (input range: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
When cleaning the water, the drive time of the processor can
be set.
3102
1/1
3111
Pump Output Amount Setting [SM]
Processor Settings
IMPORTANT
Be sure to carry out the initial replenishment
operation during setup.
! Display
When the initial replenishment operation has been

carried out if air in the hose cannot be removed,
activate the pump of the relevant hose to remove air
using the pump output amount setting of Functions.
2781
3. Mode
Menu: 2260 Extension Processor Settings Pump

Output Amount Setting
S4202-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Pump Output Amount Setting (input range: 0.1
to 200.0 ml)
On Pump Output Amount Setting via Function, each output
amount of replenisher pumps, water supply pumps, and
refilling water pumps is measured and then the measurement
values are compared.
IMPORTANT
Do not change the pump output amount except for
when changing the pump.
2781
! F: Function
! Pump Output Amount Measurement
Use this function to measure each output amount of the
replenisher pumps, water supply pumps, and refilling water
pumps.
IMPORTANT
When the replenisher pump is activated via the
pump output amount measurement of Functions
amount remaining is subtracted.
! Initial Replenishment Operation

The service personnel password (2260) is required to display
this value.
After operating each replenisher pump, water supply pump,
refilling water pump for a specified time, the air remaining in
the hose can be extracted.
To stop the initial replenishment, press NO: Cancel.
3111
1/1
3112

Display [N]
Processor Settings

Display [SM]

! Display
Menu: 2260 Extension Processor Settings Total
Replenishment Amount Display
For the SM specification, refer to Total Replenishment

Amount Display [SM].
! Display
3. Mode
Menu: 2260 Extension Processor Settings Total

Replenishment Amount Display
S4203-00-SM11
! Explanation
! Total Replenishment Amount (Input range: 0.00
to 99999.99 ml)
The total replenishment amount can be checked and set.
S4004-00-SM00
! Explanation
! F: Function
! Total Replenishment Amount
! SM Forced Replenishment Amount Setting

(input range: 0.0 to 999.9 ml)
The total replenishment amount can be checked.
The service personnel password (2260) is required to display

this value.
This is the limit amount when carrying out forced
replenishment.
When the forced replenishment amount reaches this value,
each replenishment pump stops.
! Replenishment Lack Time

The replenishment stops when the waste solution tank is full
or when the replenisher solution is empty. "Replenishment
Lack Time" is accumulated according to the paper amount
which are to be processed after the replenishment is stopped.
Carry out the replenishment after the error is released.
IMPORTANT
NOTE
If the replenishment lack time becomes 600 or more
seconds, the error occurs and the operation stops.
! Clear
Do not change the initial value of the forced

replenishment amount.
! Revolution Count
The number of pump rotation when each pump operates
replenishment with the value input in Forced Replenishment
Amount Setting is displayed.
Clear the value which is accumulated.

NOTE
display the clear button.
3112
1/1
3131
NMC Setting
NMC Setting
NMC Setting
3. Mode
Menu:2260 Extension NMC Setting
S3067-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Host
Set the change of Host Name, Telephone Number, the access
from QSS-NET host, and Password.
! Modem
The addition/deletion of the modem, the change of the
settings, and the change of the dial setting can be set.
! Host setting
1. Click Host.
2. Click Property and set the setting items.
Item
Contents
Host Name
Enter the host name which the host of QSSNET has registered.
Telephone
Number
Enter the telephone number which is connected

to the PC of QSS-NET host.
Password
Enter the password to connect with QSS from

the QSS-NET host.
New Password Enter the Password which is set for the user in
QSS-NET host.
Password
Confirmation
Enter the password again to confirm the

password.
3. Click YES: Save.

4. After clicking YES: Enter, the message
Registered. appears.
NOTE
The message The modem to use is not set.
appears when the modem is not set.
3131
1/1
3141
Operator Selections
Operator Selections
! Replenishment error.
Operator selections [N]
Errors related to replenishment can be set ON/OFF.

Error message does not appear when this setting is OFF.
IMPORTANT

For the SM specification, refer to Operator selections
[SM].
Normally, use with ON.
! Refilling water error.

Errors related to refilling water can be set ON/OFF.
! Display
IMPORTANT
Menu: 2260 Extension Operator Selections
3. Mode
! Circulation pump error.

Circulation pump error can be set ON/OFF.
IMPORTANT
! Order Classification Section error.

Errors related to order classification section can be set
ON/OFF.
IMPORTANT
S2000-00-SM0130
! Explanation
Only the function modes which are appear in the service mode
are explained.
! Graininess Suppression SW
Graininess suppression function can be set ON/OFF.
IMPORTANT
! Test Operation
The test operation can be carried out.
The film advance operation and the scanning operation can be
checked.
The printing is not carried out.
NOTE
It returns to the normal print setting when the power is
reset.
! Drive, Dryer Manual ON Switch

Processor drive and Processor dryer operate continuously.
This operates even when processing is not carried out.
IMPORTANT
Normally, use with OFF.
3141
1/2
3141
Operator Selections
! Replenishment package error
Operator selections [SM]

! Display
IMPORTANT
Menu: 2260 Extension Operator Selections
! Refilling water error.

Errors related to refilling water can be set ON/OFF.
IMPORTANT
3. Mode
! Circulation pump error.

Circulation pump error can be set ON/OFF.
IMPORTANT
! Order Classification Section error.
S2000-00-SM0130
! Explanation
Errors related to order classification section can be set

ON/OFF.
IMPORTANT
Only the function modes which are appear in the service mode
are explained.
! Graininess Suppression SW
Graininess suppression function can be set ON/OFF.
IMPORTANT
! Test Operation
The test operation can be carried out.
The film advance operation and the scanning operation can be
checked.
The printing is not carried out.
NOTE
It returns to the normal print setting when the power is
reset.
! Drive, Dryer Manual ON Switch

Processor drive and Processor dryer operate continuously.
This operates even when processing is not carried out.
IMPORTANT
Normally, use with OFF.
! Replenishment error.
IMPORTANT
3141
2/2
3151
Maintenance
Maintenance
! Explanation
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment

(135/240 AFC)
! Scanning Position Correction (Initial value: 0.0

mm) (Input range: -9.9 to 9.9 mm)
The difference between the prescanning position and the

actual scanning position can be corrected.
Menu:2260 Extension Maintenance Various Adjustment

NOTE
If the black margin is printed on the front end or rear end,
it can be corrected automatically with Scanning Position
Auto Correction of Functions mode.
! Auto Gain Standard Value (Initial value: 200)

(Input range: 0 to 255)
It is the standard value to adjust the gain of the DX sensor.
! 135 Loading Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0

to 255)
The loading sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.
NOTE
Only 135 lane has the loading sensor.
S3099-00-SM0029
! Perforation Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0

to 255)
The perforation sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.
! Ready Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0 to

255)
The ready sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.
! Film Ejection Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0

to 255)
The film ejection sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.
! DX Sensor 1, 2, 3, and 4 Gain Values (Input

range: 0 to 255)
S3099-00-SM0129
NOTE
The number of setting items increases when the the service
personnel password (2260) is entered.
Adjust the 135/240 film carrier attached to the machine.
DX sensors 1 and 2 or DX sensors 3 and 4 are adjusted so that

the two sensors have the same sensitivity respectively.
! LED Light Intensity Value (Input range: 0 to

255)
When the (135) lane is selected for the attached film carrier,
the display for adjusting the 135 film carrier appears. If the
(240) lane is selected, that for adjusting the 240 film carrier
appears.
When the lane is moved while the display for adjustment is
appearing, the display for various adjustments appears.
The sensor sensitivity is adjusted to the auto gain standard

value at the lightest area on a blank film which is obtained by
changing the light intensity value of all sensors.
! DX Sensor Gain Value (without Film) (Input

range: 0 to 255)
The gain value (without film) of each DX sensor is displayed.
3151
1/3
3. Mode
When changing the print position for all frames

intentionally, input the correction value. For example,
when carrying out plus correction, the image moves to
left.
3151
! F: Function
! Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
1. Select Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
! Scanning Position Auto Correction
Adjustment.
Using a film, the difference between the prescanning position

and the actual scanning position can automatically be
corrected.
This adjustment is automatically carried out.

NOTE
The film is not used for adjustment.
! Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment
The LED light intensity and sensitivity of each sensor is

automatically adjusted.
1. Select Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment.
NOTE
Sensors for Sensor LED Light Intensity Value

Adjustment
3. Mode
NOTE
When 135 lane is selected, the LED light intensity of

each sensor in the following table is adjusted.
135 lane
Maintenance
! DX Sensor Standard Adjustment
135 Loading Sensor, 135 Perforation

Sensor, 135 Ready Sensor, and 135
DX Sensors 1, 2, 3, and 4
1. Select DX Sensor Standard Adjustment.
When 240 lane is selected, the LED light intensity of

each sensor in the following table is adjusted.
Adjustment
240 lane
240 Perforation Sensor, 240 Ready

Sensor, and 240 DX Sensors 1 and 2
S3099-00-SM01
2. Insert the film into the film carrier.
The sensitivity at the detection side of each sensor and the

sensor LED light intensity adjustment can be carried out
simultaneously.
NOTE
Use the film containing two frames or more, of
which base density is light.
3. Remove the ejected film.

4. The adjustment is complete, and the
The standard adjustment of the 135 DX sensor and 240 DX

sensor can be carried out.
! DX Code Reading
correction value is input automatically.
! DX Code Reading
DX code reading test for either the 135 lane or 240 lane can be
carried out.
! DX Sensor Level Display

The gain value of each DX sensor is displayed.
! Adjustment
1. Select "DX Code Reading".

2. Load the film to the film carrier.
4. The reading is complete, and the result is
displayed.
1. Select Scanning Position Auto Correction.

NOTE
Use a film for adjustment.
NOTE
The reading code, reading count and frame No. are
simply displayed.
The frame code, such as ##E, is displayed as the
display frame No.
A maximum of 80 frames can be displayed. (a
maximum of 80 frames for the half size)
3151
2/3
3151
Maintenance
S3099-00-SM01

3. Mode
1. Select "DX Sensor Level Display".
S3099-00-SM01
NOTE
The A/D value is the gain value detected at real time.
The gain value (without film) indicates the fixed value
obtained by standard adjustment.
3151
3/3
3152
Maintenance

255)
Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (120

AFC)

Menu: 2260 Extension Maintenance Various Adjustment

255)
! F: Function

corrected.

The LED light intensity and sensor sensitivity of each sensor
are adjusted.
NOTE
S3004-00-SM0029
NOTE
(2260).

simultaneously.
Adjust the 120 film carrier attached to the machine.
! Explanation
! Adjustment


NOTE
NOTE

left.
! Scanning Position Correction 1 (Initial value:

100 %) (Input range: 95.00 to 105.00 %)
The correction between the prescanning position and the
actual scanning position is displayed.
1. If the sensor LED light intensity adjustment is
selected, the value is automatically adjusted.
NOTE
1. If the sensor sensitivity adjustment is
! Loading Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0 to

255)
NOTE
! Film Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0 to 255)

The film sensor sensitivity gain value is displayed.
3152
1/1
3. Mode
3153
Maintenance

255)

AFC)


! F: Function
corrected.
The LED light intensity and sensor sensitivity of each sensor

are adjusted.
NOTE

simultaneously.
S3098-00-SM0029
NOTE
(2260).
! Adjustment
Adjust the 110 film carrier attached to the machine.
! Explanation

NOTE

NOTE
left.
1. If the sensor LED light intensity adjustment is
NOTE
! Loading Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0 to

255)
1. If the sensor sensitivity adjustment is
NOTE

to 255)

255)
3153
1/1
3. Mode
3154
Maintenance
! Adjustment

(135/240 MMC)


NOTE
Use a mount for adjustment.
! Emission Lamp and Detection Sensor Position

Adjustment
1. Remove the top cover, and set the MMC to

2007
2. Select Emission Lamp and Detection Sensor

Position Adjustment [Remove the Top
Cover].
NOTE
Use three types of adjustment jigs for "Emission
Lamp and Detection Sensor Position Adjustment".
S3201-00-SM0029
NOTE
Functions appears when the service personnel password
(2260) is entered.
These are the service tools. Refer to Service

personnel tool list.
8031
Scanner adjustment chart
(mount)
Adjust the 135/240 MMC attached to the machine.
Emission adjustment
chart
! Explanation
NOTE
left.
Height adjustment
jig
G052618
3. Adjust a height of the mount carrier.

NOTE
There are two types of adjustment jigs for AMC
and for MMC.
! F: Function
corrected.

Adjustment
Adjust the standard position of the emission lamp and
detection sensor for auto focus.
3154
1/5
3. Mode
S-1200.
3154
Maintenance
(1) Attach the height adjustment jig to the MMC.

Height adjustment jig
Mount carrier sensor light-tight plate
Viewed from side
Worm wheel
3. Mode
Adjustment screwdriver
G057557
(2) Turn the AF motor worm gear through the
Marks
adjusting hole on the mount carrier sensor lighttight plate, and adjust a height of the mount
carrier so that it fits with the height adjustment
jig.
NOTE
Turning the worm gear clockwise moves
the mount carrier upward, whereas turning
the gear counterclockwise moves it
downward.
Projection
G052616
(3) After adjusting the height, mark the adjustment

position on the worm wheel.
IMPORTANT
Mark on the worm wheel which is near
the projection.
Put the marks on the front edge of the
worm wheel tooth and on the projection
which is right down the tooth.
NOTE
The marks are used for position adjustment
of the AF detection sensor.
(4) Remove the height adjustment jig from the

MMC.
4. Adjust the position of the AF emission

sensor.
(1) Insert the emission adjustment chart into the

MMC.
IMPORTANT
There are some space between the
emission adjustment chart and the
3154
2/5
3154
mount carrier. Attach the chart so that it
comes to the center of the mount
carrier.
Maintenance
(4) Set the MMC to S-1200 again. Press the NO:

Cancel key to return to the Various Adjustment
mode, then adjust the position of the AF
emission sensor again.
NOTE
If the MMC is removed during the
emission position check mode, the light
intensity value of the emission lamp
decreases.
(5) Adjust the attaching position of the AF

emission sensor PCB so that the filament image
is in the center. (Loosen two screws.)
AF emission sensor PCB
3. Mode
Screws
Screwdriver (hex. bar)

G057559
(6) Remove the emission adjustment chart.
Filament image
G057558
NOTE
Check if the filament image on the
emission adjustment chart is in the center
of the emission adjustment chart. When it
is on the center, the following adjustment is
unnecessary.
(2) If the filament image is not on the center of the

emission adjustment chart, remove the MMC
from S-1200.
(3) Remove the scanning slot. (two screws)

Screws
Scanning slot
G052619
3154
3/5
3154
5. Adjust the position of the AF detection
Maintenance
carrier was adjusted. (Loosen two screws, two
adjusting screws.)
sensor.
(1) Set the scanner adjustment chart (Mount) to the
Screws
AF detection sensor
Adjusting screws
G052622
IMPORTANT
The tolerance level of swing is about
within 4 mm (corresponds to one
teeth).
Scanner adjustment
chart (mount)
Target triangle marks
G057560
The swing range (4 mm) viewed from the front
IMPORTANT
Position the scanner adjustment chart
(mount) with the target triangle marks
faced the end.

detection sensor to bring the worm gear to the
position marked when the height of the mount
One tooth each

(about 2 mm)
The swing range (4 mm) viewed from the top
G060701
Check that the marked tooth of the

gear swings 2 mm each for left and
right referring to the mark on the
projection.
3154
4/5
3. Mode
MMC.
3154
Maintenance
The worm wheel may come near the

marked position due to a rotation of the
worm wheel. In this case, return the
worm wheel to the position before the
rotation.
Turn both screws 180 each. Be sure
to turn each screws a few at a time.
When the worm wheel does not swing
within the tolerance level (about 4 mm),
adjust the auto focus section.
2085
(3) Remove the scanner adjustment chart (mount)

from the MMC.
6. Remove the MMC from S-1200. If the
3. Mode
scanning slot has been removed in step 4(3), reattach it to the original position. (two
screws)
IMPORTANT
Attach the scanning slot while pressing its
upper left part.
Screws
Scanning slot
G052619
3154
5/5
3155
Maintenance
Maintenance

to 255)

AFC)

Menu:2260 Extension Maintenance Various Adjustment

255)
! Film Ejection Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0

to 255)
! DX Sensor 1, 2, 3, and 4 Gain Values (Input

range: 0 to 255)
DX sensors 1 and 2 or DX sensors 3 and 4 are adjusted so that
the two sensors have the same sensitivity respectively.
Not in use for the 135 AFC

255)
S3099-00-SM0029
IMPORTANT
Do not use the display for adjusting the 240 and
Functions. However, they are displayed because the
adjustment mode of the 135 AFC is as same as that of
the 135/240 AFC.
NOTE
The number of setting items increases when the the service
personnel password (2260) is entered.
! DX Sensor Gain Value (without Film) (Input

range: 0 to 255)
The gain value (without film) of each DX sensor is displayed.
! F: Function
corrected.
! Explanation

The LED light intensity and sensitivity of each sensor is
automatically adjusted.

NOTE
NOTE
The LED light intensity of each sensor in the following

table is adjusted.
Adjustment

left.
! Auto Gain Standard Value (Initial value: 200)

(Input range: 0 to 255)
135 AFC
It is the standard value to adjust the gain of the DX sensor.

simultaneously.
! 135 Loading Sensor Gain Value (Input range: 0

to 255)
135 Loading Sensor, 135 Perforation

Sensor, 135 Ready Sensor, and 135
DX Sensors 1, 2, 3, and 4

The 135 DX sensor standard adjustment can be done.
3155
1/2
3. Mode
When the 135 AFC has already been attached, it is not used.
3155
Maintenance
! DX Code Reading
! DX Code Reading
The DX Code Reading test can be done.
1. Select "DX Code Reading".

2. Load the film to the film carrier.
4. The reading is complete, and the result is

The gain value of each DX sensor is displayed.
! Adjustment
displayed.
NOTE
The reading code, reading count and frame No. are
simply displayed.

NOTE
A maximum of 80 frames can be displayed. (a

maximum of 80 frames for the half size)
1. Select Sensor LED Light Intensity Value

Adjustment.
NOTE
1. Select Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment.
S3099-00-SM01
NOTE
1. Select "DX Sensor Level Display".
1. Select DX Sensor Standard Adjustment.
S3099-00-SM01
NOTE
The A/D value is the gain value detected at real time.
S3099-00-SM01
2. Insert the film into the film carrier.
The gain value (without film) indicates the fixed value

obtained by standard adjustment.
NOTE
Use the film containing two frames or more, of
which base density is light.

4. The adjustment is complete, and the
correction value is input automatically.
3155
2/2
3. Mode
The frame code, such as ##E, is displayed as the

display frame No.
3156
Maintenance
! Adjustment

(135/240 AMC)


NOTE
Use a mount for adjustment.

Adjustment
1. Remove the top cover, and set the AMC to

S-1200.
3. Mode
2007
2. Select "Emission Lamp and Detection

Sensor Position Adjustment".
NOTE
Use three types of adjustment jigs for "Emission
Lamp and Detection Sensor Position Adjustment".
These are the service tools. Refer to Service
8031
S3327-00-SM0030
NOTE
Functions appears when the service personnel password
(2260) is entered.
Adjust the 135/240 AMC attached to the machine.
! Explanation
mm) (Input range: 9.9 to 9.9 mm)

(mount)
Emission adjustment
chart

NOTE
left.
Height adjustment
jig
G060680
3. Adjust a height of the mount carrier.

NOTE
There are two types of adjustment jigs for AMC
and for MMC.
! F: Function
corrected.

Adjustment
Adjust the standard position of the emission lamp and
detection sensor for auto focus.
3156
1/5
3156
Maintenance
(1) Attach the height adjustment jig to the AMC.

Mount carrier sensor

light-tight plate
3. Mode
Worm wheel
Mark
Adjustment screwdriver
G060679
(3) After adjusting the height, mark the adjustment

position on the worm wheel.
G057561
(2) Turn the AF motor worm gear through the

adjusting hole on the mount carrier sensor lighttight plate, and adjust a height of the mount
carrier so that it fits with the height adjustment
jig.
NOTE
Turning the worm gear clockwise moves
the mount carrier upward, whereas turning
the gear counterclockwise moves it
downward.
Block section
Marks
G060705
IMPORTANT
Put the mark on the worm wheel as in
the illustration.
Put the marks on the front edge of the
worm wheel tooth and on the block
section which is above the tooth.
NOTE
The marks are used for position adjustment
of the AF detection sensor.
(4) Remove the height adjustment jig from the

AMC.
3156
2/5
3156
Maintenance
(3) Remove the block and remove the scanning
4. Adjust the position of the AF emission

sensor.
slot. (three screws)
(1) Insert the emission adjustment chart into the

AMC.
IMPORTANT
There are some space between the
emission adjustment chart and the
mount carrier. Attach the chart so that it
comes to the center of the mount
carrier.
Screws
Scanning slot
Filament image
3. Mode
Block
G060686
(4) Set the AMC to S-1200 again. Press the NO:

Cancel key to return to the Various Adjustment
mode, then adjust the position of the AF
emission sensor again.
NOTE
If the AMC is removed during the emission
position check mode, the light intensity
value of the emission lamp decreases.
G057562
NOTE
Check if the filament image on the
emission adjustment chart is in the center
of the emission adjustment chart. When it
is on the center, the following adjustment is
unnecessary.
(2) If the filament image is not on the center of the

emission adjustment chart, remove the AMC
from S-1200.
3156
3/5
3156
Maintenance
5. Adjust the position of the AF detection
emission sensor PCB so that the filament image

is in the center. (Loosen two screws.)
sensor.
(1) Connect the single-adaptor to the AMC, then set

Screws
the target jig to the adaptor.
Emission sensor PCBs
Target triangle marks
3. Mode

(mount)
Screwdriver (hex. bar)
G057563
(6) Remove the emission adjustment chart.

G057564
IMPORTANT
Position the scanner adjustment chart
(mount) with the target triangle marks
faced the end.
If it is positioned on the mount carrier
directly without connecting the singleadaptor, the machine will be terminated
abnormally.
(2) When the target jig has moved to the mount

carrier, remove the single-adaptor.

detection sensor to bring the worm gear to the
position marked when the height of the mount
3156
4/5
3156
carrier was adjusted. (Loosen two screws, two

adjusting screws.)
Screws
Maintenance
IMPORTANT
The worm wheel may come near the
marked position due to a rotation of the
worm wheel. In this case, return the
worm wheel to the position before the
rotation.
Turn the adjusting screws every 180
alternately. Turning one adjusting
screw fully at a time may cause the
screw to be blocked.
(4) Remove the scanner adjustment chart (mount)

from the AMC.
Screwdriver
(hex. bar)
scanning slot has been removed in step 5(3), reattach them to the original position.
(three screws)
IMPORTANT
Attach the scanning slot while pressing its
upper left part.
Adjusting screws
G060685
Upper left part
IMPORTANT
The tolerance level of swing is about
within 4 mm (corresponds to one
teeth).
G060683
One tooth each

for left and right
G060706
Check that the marked tooth of the

gear swings 2 mm each for left and
right referring to the mark on the block
section.
3156
5/5
3. Mode
6. Remove the AMC from S-1200. If the block
3157
Maintenance
2. Open the paper advance door, remove the
test paper from the bottom of the paper

advance unit, then press the
key.

Paper advance unit
3. Mode
Paper advance door
Test Paper
G057526
3. Draw the first line on the paper at 15 mm

S3088-00-SM00
! Explanation
Correct the paper stop position and feed error so that each
step, such as 18 step test print, can be measured correctly by
the colorimeter.
NOTE
(2260).
away from the test paper edge, then the

second line at 240 mm away from the first
position.
300 mm
240 mm
15 mm
! Paper Front End Advance Length Correction

(Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: -5.0 to +0.5 mm)
Correct the feed error of the colorimeter roller from the paper
leading edge to the measurement position.
Second line
! Paper Feed Error Correction (Initial value: 0.0)

(Input range: -5.0 to +0.5 mm)
First line
Correct the feed error of the colorimeter roller.
4. Remove the colorimeter.

5. Execute Paper Test Advance via Functions.
6. Insert the test paper from the first line into
! F: Function
! Test Paper Advance
When the test is executed, the paper with 300 mm is advanced
to the paper advance unit.
the colorimeter.
7. Press the
key.
The test paper stops at the first line.
! Paper Test Advance
8. Press the
or
key to adjust that the
first line comes to the center of the
colorimeter hole.
Adjust the colorimeter unit.
! Adjustment
! Paper Front End Advance Length Correction,
Advance Length Correction
NOTE
Press the
key to return the test paper.
Press the
key to advance the test paper.
1. Execute Test Paper Advance via Functions.
3157
1/2
3157
Maintenance
Line at 15 mm
3. Mode
Test Paper
G052516
9. Press the
key to advance the test

paper to the second line.
10. Press the
or
key to adjust that the
second line comes to the center of the
colorimeter.
11. Press the

paper.
key to remove the test
12. Return the colorimeter to the original

position.
3157
2/2
3158
Maintenance
Thermosensor Calibration
3. Mode
Enter the password (2260). Extension Maintenance Various

Adjustment Thermosensor Calibration
S3005-00-SM00
! Explanation
NOTE
(2260).
! Measurement Value (Initial value: 0.0C) (Input

range: 10 to 52C (Correction value: 0 to 3C)
Measure the temperature with a mercury thermometer and
enter the measured values.
! Correction Value
When the measured temperature is entered, the measured
temperature the displayed temperature = the correction
value, will be automatically entered.
! Displayed Temperature
The processing solution temperature measured by the
thermosensor is displayed.
3158
1/1
3162
Maintenance
Input Check (Printer)

3. Mode
Menu Extension Maintenance Input check Printer
S3089-00-SM0030
! Explanation
A buzzer will sound if sensors, limit switches or other devices at the cursor position turn DARK or ON.
IMPORTANT
The momentary operation cannot be displayed on the input check display because there is a time lag of approx. 0.5
seconds.
Laser Light Source Section

No.
Display
Status
OK/No Good
G Laser Light Source Status
OK
The status of G laser output is

normal.
OK/No Good
B Laser Light Source Status
OK
The status of B laser output is

normal.
##.#C
R Laser Thermosensor
Displays the temperature of the R laser.
##.#C
Laser Unit Thermosensor
Displays the temperature of the laser unit.
Film Carrier Section (135/240 AFC-135 lane, 135 AFC)

No.
Display
Status
ON/OFF
135 Lane Limit Switch
ON
When the 135 lane is detected.
ON/OFF
Film Carrier Code Detector 1
When the film carrier is attached.*1
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
Film Carrier Lock Sensor
DARK/LIGHT
135 Loading Sensor
DARK When the film is detected.
DARK/LIGHT
135 Ready Sensor
DARK/LIGHT
135 Perforation Sensor
LIGHT When the perforation is detected.
ON
3162
When the film carrier is locked.
1/6
3162
No.
Maintenance
Display
Status
DARK/LIGHT
135 DX Sensor 1
DARK When the DX code is detected.
10
DARK/LIGHT
135 DX Sensor 1 (Film Detection)
11
DARK/LIGHT
135 DX Sensor 2
12
DARK/LIGHT
135 DX Sensor 3
13
DARK/LIGHT
14
DARK/LIGHT
135 DX Sensor 4
15
DARK/LIGHT
135 Film Ejection Sensor
16
###
Attached Film Carrier
Displays the attached film carrier.
Film Carrier
135/240 AFC
OFF
ON
OFF
135 AFC
ON
OFF
OFF
Not attached
OFF
OFF
OFF
3. Mode
*1. Film Carrier Code Detector
IMPORTANT
For the 135 AFC, even if the 135 AFC is attached, the display of the attached film carrier is 135/240 AFC.
For the 135 AFC, the following parts is not attached. They are displayed on the Input Check display but they cannot
be used.
135 Film Ejection Sensor
Film Carrier Section (135/240 AFC-240 lane)

No.
Display
Status
ON/OFF
ON
When the 240 lane is detected.
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
DARK/LIGHT
240 Loading Sensor
DARK/LIGHT
240 Ready Sensor
DARK/LIGHT
240 Perforation Sensor
DARK/LIGHT
VEI Sensor
LIGHT When the VEI is at the fourth

position
10
ON/OFF
IPI Limit Switch
ON
When the undeveloped cartridge is

set.
11
ON/OFF
Cartridge Limit Switch
ON
When the cartridge is set.
12
DARK/LIGHT
240 DX Sensor 1
13
DARK/LIGHT
14
DARK/LIGHT
240 DX Sensor 2
15
###
Film Carrier
135/240 AFC
ON
OFF
ON
Not attached
OFF
OFF
OFF
IMPORTANT
When the 135 AFC is attached, the 240 lane is displayed but cannot be used.
3162
2/6
3162
Maintenance
Film Carrier Section (135/240 AFC, 135 AFC-Others)

No.
Display
Status
ON/OFF
DIP Switch 2-1
OFF
ON/OFF
DIP Switch 2-2
OFF
ON/OFF
DIP Switch 2-3
OFF
ON/OFF
DIP Switch 2-4
OFF
Displays the dip switch status of the

AFC/Scanner control PCB. 6501
Turns OFF all.
Film Carrier Section (120 AFC)

Display
Status
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
DARK/LIGHT
Loading Sensor
DARK/LIGHT
Ready Sensor
DARK/LIGHT
Film Feed Sensor
DARK Turns DARK/LIGHT repeatedly

while the film is advanced.
ON
3. Mode
No.
DARK/LIGHT
Film Sensor
ON/OFF
DIP Switch 2-1
OFF
10
ON/OFF
DIP Switch 2-2
OFF
11
ON/OFF
DIP Switch 2-3
OFF
12
ON/OFF
DIP Switch 2-4
OFF
13
###

AFC/Scanner control PCB.
6501
Turns OFF all.
Film Carrier
120 AFC
ON
ON
OFF
Not attached
OFF
OFF
OFF
Film Carrier Section (110 AFC)

No.
Display
Status
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
DARK/LIGHT
Loading Sensor
DARK/LIGHT
Ready Sensor
DARK/LIGHT
Perforation Sensor
ON/OFF
DIP Switch 2-1
OFF
ON/OFF
DIP Switch 2-2
OFF
10
ON/OFF
DIP Switch 2-3
OFF
11
ON/OFF
DIP Switch 2-4
OFF
12
###
ON

6501
Turns OFF all.
Film Carrier
110 AFC
OFF
OFF
ON
Not attached
OFF
OFF
OFF
3162
3/6
3162
Maintenance
Film Carrier Section (135/240 MMC)

Display
Status
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
DARK/LIGHT
Mount Carrier Home Sensor
DARK When the mount carrier is detected.
ON/OFF
Mount Insertion Cover Open Switch
ON
When the switch is pressed.
ON/OFF
ON
DARK/LIGHT
Mount Carrier Sensor (Upper)
DARK/LIGHT
Mount Carrier Sensor (Lower)
DARK/LIGHT
Mount Insertion Cover Sensor
DARK When the mount insertion cover is

closed.
10
DARK/LIGHT
Mount Sensor
ON
When the mount is detected.
11
ON/OFF
DIP Switch 2-1
OFF
12
ON/OFF
DIP Switch 2-2
OFF
13
ON/OFF
DIP Switch 2-3
OFF

6501
Turns OFF all.
14
ON/OFF
DIP Switch 2-4
OFF
15
###
3. Mode
No.
Film Carrier
135/240 MMC
OFF
ON
OFF
Not attached
OFF
OFF
OFF
Film Carrier Section (135/240 AMC)

No.
Display
Status
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
DARK/LIGHT
Mount Carrier Home Sensor
ON/OFF
ON
DARK/LIGHT
Mount Carrier Sensor (Upper)
DARK/LIGHT
Mount Carrier Sensor (Lower)
ON/OFF
Mount Sensor
ON
DARK/LIGHT
Insertion Sensor 1
10
DARK/LIGHT
Insertion Sensor 2
DARK When the mount insertion cover is

closed.
11
ON/OFF
Mount Sensor (Inlet)
ON
12
DARK/LIGHT
Mount Elevator Sensor
13
ON/OFF
Ejection Sensor
ON
14
ON/OFF
DIP Switch 2-1
OFF
15
ON/OFF
DIP Switch 2-2
OFF
16
ON/OFF
DIP Switch 2-3
OFF

6501
Turns OFF all.
17
ON/OFF
DIP Switch 2-4
OFF
18
###
When the mount carrier is detected.
135/240 AMC
Film Carrier
ON
OFF
OFF
Not attached
OFF
OFF
OFF
3162
4/6
3162
Maintenance
Scanner light source section

No.
Display
Status
ON/OFF
Interlock Switch (Scanner Lamphouse)
ON
When the cover is closed.
ON/OFF
Safety Thermostat (Scanner Lamp)
ON
Normal
DARK/LIGHT
Filter Sensor
DARK Turns DARK/LIGHT repeatedly

while the filter is rotated.
Scanner section
Display
Status
DARK/LIGHT
Zoom Sensor 1
DARK Home position
DARK/LIGHT
Zoom Sensor 2
DARK Home position
DARK/LIGHT
Focus Sensor
DARK Home position
DARK/LIGHT
Iris Sensor
DARK Home position
##.#C
Scanner Thermosensor
Displays the temperature of the scanner.
3. Mode
No.
Paper Supply Section (Magazine code)

No.
Display
Status
###(#)
Attached paper Magazine A
Displays the paper width and surface of the

attached magazine.
DARK/LIGHT
Paper Magazine Code Sensor A1
DARK When the pin is detected.
DARK/LIGHT
DARK/LIGHT
DARK/LIGHT
DARK/LIGHT
DARK/LIGHT
DARK/LIGHT
10
###(#)
Attached paper Magazine B
Displays the paper width and surface of the

attached magazine.
11
DARK/LIGHT
Paper Magazine Code Sensor B1
12
DARK/LIGHT
13
DARK/LIGHT
14
DARK/LIGHT
15
DARK/LIGHT
16
DARK/LIGHT
17
DARK/LIGHT
Paper Supply Section (Paper supply)

No.
Display
Status
DARK/LIGHT
Paper End Sensor A
DARK When the paper is detected.
DARK/LIGHT
Paper End Sensor B
DARK/LIGHT
Paper Loading Sensor
DARK/LIGHT
Cut Home Sensor
DARK Home position: When the cutter is

opened.
DARK/LIGHT
Cut End Sensor
DARK When the cutter is closed.
ON/OFF
Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1, 2)
ON
ON/OFF
Laser Output Stop Switch
ON
ON/OFF
Interlock Switch (Printer Door 3)
ON
ON/OFF
Paper Supply B Detection
ON
When the paper supply unit B is

detected.
10
DARK/LIGHT
Hold Sensor
DARK When the pressure is applied on the

paper.
3162
5/6
3162
No.
Maintenance
Display
Status
11
DARK/LIGHT
Paper Supply End Sensor
12
DARK/LIGHT
Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left)
DARK When the left arm is detected.
13
DARK/LIGHT
Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right)
DARK When the right arm is detected.

1
Display
DARK/LIGHT
Status
Pressure Change Sensor 1
DARK When the pressure roller 1 releases

pressure.
DARK/LIGHT
Exposure Start Sensor
DARK/LIGHT
DARK When the pressure roller 2 and 3

apply pressure.
##.#C
Inner Temperature
Displays the temperature of the inside of the

printer.
3. Mode
No.

No.
Display
Status
DARK/LIGHT
DARK When the arm applies pressure.
DARK/LIGHT
Horizontal Advance Sensor (Left)
DARK When the arm (left) is detected.
DARK/LIGHT
Elevator Sensor (Left)
DARK When the arm (left) is detected.
DARK/LIGHT
Horizontal Advance Sensor (Right)
DARK When the arm (right) is detected.
DARK/LIGHT
Elevator Sensor (Right)
DARK When the arm (right) is detected.
DARK/LIGHT
Exposure End Sensor
ON/OFF
Interlock Switch (Paper Advance Section)
ON
Colorimeter Section
No.
1
Display
DARK/LIGHT
Status
Paper Sensor 1
DARK/LIGHT
Paper Sensor 2
ON/OFF
DIP switch 1
OFF
ON/OFF
DIP Switch 2
OFF
ON/OFF
DIP Switch 3
OFF
ON/OFF
DIP Switch 4
OFF

colorimeter control PCB. 6506
Printer Accessory Section (Pricing Unit)

No.
Display
Status
ON/OFF
DIP switch 1
OFF
ON/OFF
DIP switch 2
OFF
ON/OFF
DIP switch 3
OFF
ON/OFF
DIP switch 4
OFF
ON/OFF
DIP switch 5
OFF
ON/OFF
DIP switch 6
OFF
ON/OFF
DIP switch 7
OFF
3162

PU control PCB.
6501
Turns OFF all.
6/6
3163
Maintenance
Input Check (Processor) [N]

For the SM specification, refer to Input Check (Processor) [SM].
! Display
3. Mode
Menu Extension Maintenance Input check Processor
S3090-00-SM0029
! Explanation
IMPORTANT
seconds.
Processor section
No.
Display
Status
ON/OFF
Processing Solution Level
OFF
When the solution level is too low.
ON/OFF
CD Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
OFF
When the replenishment solution is

run out.
ON/OFF
BF Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
OFF

run out.
ON/OFF
STB Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
OFF

run out.
ON/OFF
CD Refilling Water Level
OFF
ON/OFF
BF Refilling Water Level
OFF
ON/OFF
STB 1 Refilling Water Level
OFF
ON/OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
OFF
10
ON/OFF
OFF
11
DARK/LIGHT
Refilling Water Tank Level Sensor
LIGHT When the solution level is too low.
12
ON/OFF
Processing Solution Safety Thermostat
ON
Normal
13
ON/OFF
Interlock Switch (Processor Top Cover)
ON
14
ON/OFF
Rack Stopper Sensor
ON
When the rack stopper is set.
15
ON/OFF
CD Effluent Float Switch
ON
When the effluent is full.
3163
1/4
3163
No.
Maintenance
Display
Status
16
ON/OFF
BF Effluent Float Switch
ON
17
ON/OFF
STB Effluent Float Switch
ON
18
###
Pump Rotation Detector
When an error occurs.*1
19
50/60
Power Supply Frequency (Hz)
Displays the frequency.
20
#.##
CD Flow Amount
Displays the CD circulation amount.*2
*1. Displays OK when all circulation pump is rotating normally.

Displays the circulation pump at which an error is occurring when an error occurs. (CD, BF, STB1, STB2, STB3, STB4)
If the errors occur at two or more pumps simultaneously, the error is displayed in the order from CD.
*2. Displays only when the digital flowmeter is registered as options.
Dryer Section
Display
Status
ON/OFF
Dryer Safety Thermostat
OFF
When the dryer safety thermostat is

turned off.
ON/OFF
Interlock Switch (Dryer Cover)
ON
DARK/LIGHT
Print Sensor (Left)
DARK/LIGHT
Print Sensor (Right)
3. Mode
No.

No.
Display
Status
DARK/LIGHT
Print Full Sensor
DARK/LIGHT
Conveyor Position Sensor 1
DARK Paper advance position (165-210

width)
DARK/LIGHT
DARK Paper advance position (82.5-152

width)
Processor Accessory Section

No.
Display
Status
ON/OFF
Effluent Concentrator Detection
ON
When the effluent concentrator

(ECS-2000) is connected.
ON/OFF
Effluent Float Switch
ON

(ECS-2000) is fill.
NOTE
Displays the processor accessory section, when the effluent concentrator is connected.
3163
2/4
3163
Maintenance
Input Check (Processor) [SM]

! Display
3. Mode
Menu Extension Maintenance Input check Processor
S3090-00-SM0029
! Explanation
IMPORTANT
seconds.
Processor Section (1)

No.
1
Display
ON/OFF
Status
Processing Solution Level
OFF
ON/OFF
CD Refilling Water Level
OFF
ON/OFF
BF Refilling Water Level
OFF
ON/OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
Processing Solution Safety Thermostat
ON
Normal
ON/OFF
Interlock Switch (Processor Top Cover)
ON
10
ON/OFF
Rack Stopper Sensor
ON
When the rack stopper is set.
11
ON/OFF
CD Effluent Float Switch
ON
12
ON/OFF
BF Effluent Float Switch
ON
13
ON/OFF
STB Effluent Float Switch
ON
14
###
Pump Rotation Detector
When an error occurs.*1
15
50/60
Power Supply Frequency (Hz)
Displays the frequency.
16
#.##
CD Flow Amount
Displays the CD circulation amount.*2
*1. Displays OK when all circulation pump is rotating normally.

Displays the circulation pump at which an error is occurring when an error occurs. (CD, BF, STB1, STB2, STB3, STB4)
If the errors occur at two or more pumps simultaneously, the error is displayed in the order from CD.
*2. Displays only when the digital flowmeter is registered as options.
3163
3/4
3163
Maintenance

Display
Status
ON/OFF
CD-A Replenisher Pump Sensor
ON
Home position
ON/OFF
CD-B Replenisher Pump Sensor
ON
Home position
ON/OFF
CD-C Replenisher Pump Sensor
ON
Home position
ON/OFF
CD-W Water Supply Pump Sensor
ON
Home position
ON/OFF
BF-A Replenisher Pump Sensor
ON
Home position
ON/OFF
BF-B Replenisher Pump Sensor
ON
Home position
ON/OFF
STB Replenisher Pump Sensor
ON
Home position
DARK/LIGHT
Replenishment Solution Sensor P-1
LIGHT When the replenishment solution

level is normal.
DARK/LIGHT
Replenishment Solution Sensor P-2
LIGHT When the replenishment solution

level is normal.
10
ON/OFF
Replenishment Package Sensor P-1
ON
When the replenishment package is

set.
11
ON/OFF
Replenishment Package Sensor P-2
ON
When the replenishment package is

set.
12
ON/OFF
Water Supply Tank Level Sensor
OFF
3. Mode
No.
Dryer Section
No.
Display
Status
ON/OFF
Dryer Safety Thermostat
ON
Normal
ON/OFF
Interlock Switch (Dryer Cover)
ON
DARK/LIGHT
Print Sensor (Left)
DARK/LIGHT
Print Sensor (Right)

No.
Display
Status
DARK/LIGHT
Print Full Sensor
DARK/LIGHT
DARK Paper advance position (165-210

width)
DARK/LIGHT
DARK Paper advance position (82.5-152

width)
Processor Accessory Section

No.
Display
Status
ON/OFF
Effluent Concentrator Detection
ON

(ECS-2000) is connected.
ON/OFF
Effluent Float Switch
ON

(ECS-2000) is fill.
NOTE
Displays the processor accessory section, when the effluent concentrator is connected.
3163
4/4
3167
Maintenance
Output Check (Printer)

3. Mode
Menu Extension Maintenance Output Check Printer
S3209-00-SM0030
! Explanation
Check the operation of the motor, buzzer and LED etc. at the cursor.
Laser Light Source Section

No.
Display
Operation
Laser Unit Cooling Fan OFF
Press the
key to stop rotating the fan.
Laser Unit Heater ON
Press the
key to turn on the laser unit heater.
NOTE
The laser unit cooling fan and laser unit heater are shown only when the heater unit is attached.
When turning off the laser unit cooling fan, laser unit cooling fans 1, 2 and 3 stop.
Film Carrier Section (Film Carrier Section) (135/240 AFC-135, 135 AFC)
No.
Display
Operation
Film Ready Lamp (Red)
Press the
stop.
key to start, and the
key to
Film Ready Lamp (Green)
Press the
stop.
key to
Film Feed Motor
Press the
stop.
key to
Film Advance Motor Cooling Fan
Press the
stop.
key to
Lane Lock Solenoid
Press the
stop.
key to
Cleaner Fan
Press the
stop.
key to
Film Ejection Solenoid
Press the
stop.
key to
Buzzer
Press the
stop.
key to
IMPORTANT
For the 135 AFC, the following parts is not attached. They are displayed on the Output Check display but they cannot
be used.
3167
1/4
3167
Maintenance
Lane Lock Solenoid
Cleaner Fan
Film Carrier Section (Film Carrier Section) (135/240 AFC-240)

Display
Operation
Press the
stop.
key to
Press the
stop.
key to
Film Feed Motor
Press the
stop.
key to
Press the
stop.
key to
Spool Key Motor
Press the
stop.
key to
Light Lock Door Motor
Press the
stop.
key to
Lane Lock Solenoid
Press the
stop.
key to
Cleaner Fan
Press the
stop.
key to
Press the
stop.
key to
10
Buzzer
Press the
stop.
key to
Film Carrier Section (Film Carrier Section) (135/240 MMC)

No.
Display
Operation
Press the
stop.
key to
Press the
stop.
key to
Mount Carrier Slide Motor
Press the
key to operate once.
AF Motor
Press the
Buzzer
Press the
stop.
key to
Film Carrier Section (Film Carrier Section) (135/240 AMC)

No.
Display
Operation
Press the
stop.
key to
Press the
stop.
key to
Mount Carrier Slide Motor
Press the
AF Motor
Press the
Mount Insertion Motor
Press the
Mount Elevator Motor
Press the
Mount Ejection Solenoid
Press the
stop.
key to
Buzzer
Press the
stop.
key to
3167
2/4
3. Mode
No.
3167
Maintenance
Film Carrier Section (Film Carrier Section) (120 AFC)

No.
Display
Operation
Press the
stop.
key to
Press the
stop.
key to
Film Feed Motor
Press the
stop.
key to
Buzzer
Press the
stop.
key to
No.
Display
Operation
Press the
stop.
key to
Press the
stop.
key to
Film Feed Motor
Press the
stop.
key to
Buzzer
Press the
stop.
key to
Film Carrier Section (Scanner Light Source Section)

No.
Display
Operation
Filter Motor
Press the
Scanner Lamp + Scanner Lamphouse Cooling Fan
Press the
stop.
Zoom Motor 1
Press the
Zoom Motor 2
Press the
Focus Motor
Press the
Iris Motor
Press the
Scanner Cooling Fan
Press the
stop.
key to
Film Carrier Section (Scanner Section)

No.
1
Display
Operation
key to
Paper supply section

No.
Display
Operation
Paper Advance Motor 1 (Forward)
Press the
stop.
key to
Paper Advance Motor 1 (Reverse)
Press the
stop.
key to
Paper Supply Motor A (Forward)
Press the
stop.
key to
Paper Supply Motor A (Reverse)
Press the
stop.
key to
Paper Supply Motor B (Forward)
Press the
stop.
key to
Paper Supply Motor B (Reverse)
Press the
stop.
key to
Cut Motor
Press the
3167
3/4
3. Mode
Film Carrier Section (Film Carrier Section) (110 AFC)
No.
3167
Maintenance
Display
Operation
Paper Advance Motor 2 (Forward)
Press the
stop.
key to
Paper Advance Motor 2 (Reverse)
Press the
stop.
key to
10
Ribbon Advance Motor
Press the
stop.
key to
11
Dot Head (Left)
Press the
12
Dot Head (Right)
Press the
13
Paper Hold Motor
Press the
14
Arm Move Motor
Press the
15
CVP Print Test
Press the
Exposure Advance Motor 1
Press the
stop.
Pressure Change Motor 1
Press the
Exposure Advance Motor 2
Press the
stop.
Press the
No.
1
Display
3. Mode

Operation
key to
key to

No.
Display
Operation
Paper Advance Motor 3
Press the
stop.
Press the
Horizontal Advance Motor (Left)
Press the
Elevator Motor (Left)
Press the
Horizontal Advance Motor (Right)
Press the
Elevator Motor (Right)
Press the
Elevator Motor (Left and Right)
Press the
Press the
stop.
Press the
key to
Colorimeter Section
No.
1
Display
Operation
Paper Advance Motor
key to
Printer Accessory Section (Pricing Unit)

No.
1
Display
Operation
Printing Test
3167
4/4
3168
Maintenance
Output Check (Processor) [N]

For the SM specification, refer to Output Check (Processor) [SM].
! Display
3. Mode
Menu Extension Maintenance Output Check Processor
S3210-00-SM0029
! Explanation

No.
Display
Operation
Drive Motor
Press the
stop.
key to
CD Heater
Press the
stop.
key to
BF Heater
Press the
stop.
key to
STB Heater
Press the
stop.
key to
CD Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
Press the
stop.
key to
BF Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
Press the
stop.
key to
STB Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
Press the
stop.
key to
CD Replenisher Pump
Press the
stop.
key to
BF Replenisher Pump
Press the
stop.
key to
10
STB Replenisher Pump
Press the
stop.
key to
11
Tank Cooling Fan
Press the
stop.
key to
3168
1/4
No.
12
3168
Maintenance
Display
Operation
Cleaning Pump
Press the
stop.
key to

Display
Operation
CD-W Refilling Water Pump
Press the
stop.
key to
BF-W Refilling Water Pump
Press the
stop.
key to
STB 1-W Refilling Water Pump
Press the
stop.
key to
Press the
stop.
key to
Press the
stop.
key to
Press the
stop.
key to
Dryer Section
No.
Display
Operation
Dryer Fan
Press the
stop.
key to
Dryer Heater
Press the
stop.
key to

No.
Display
Operation
Conveyor Motor 1
Press the
stop.
key to
Conveyor Motor 2
Press the
stop.
key to
Conveyor Slide Motor
Press the
key to move to the paper advance
position (82.5-152 mm paper width), and press the
key again to move to the paper advance position
(165-210 mm).
3168
2/4
3. Mode
No.
3168
Maintenance
Output Check (Processor) [SM]

! Display
3. Mode
Menu Extension Maintenance Output Check Processor
S3210-00-SM0029
! Explanation

No.
Display
Operation
Drive Motor
Press the
stop.
key to
CD Heater
Press the
stop.
key to
BF Heater
Press the
stop.
key to
STB Heater
Press the
stop.
key to
CD Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
Press the
stop.
key to
BF Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
Press the
stop.
key to
STB Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
Press the
stop.
key to
Tank Cooling Fan
Press the
stop.
key to
Press the
stop.
key to
10
Press the
stop.
key to
11
Press the
stop.
key to
12
Cleaning Pump
Press the
stop.
key to
3168
3/4
3168
Maintenance

Display
Operation
CD-A Replenisher Pump
Press the
CD-B Replenisher Pump
Press the
CD-C Replenisher Pump
Press the
CD-W Water Supply Pump
Press the
BF-A Replenisher Pump
Press the
BF-B Replenisher Pump
Press the
BF-W Water Supply Pump
While the
STB Replenisher Pump
Press the
key is pressed, operates.
STB 4-W Water Supply Pump
While the
10
Circulation Pump Stand-by
While the
3. Mode
No.
Dryer Section
No.
Display
Operation
Dryer Fan
Press the
stop.
key to
Dryer Heater
Press the
stop.
key to

No.
Display
Operation
Conveyor Motor 1
Press the
stop.
key to
Conveyor Motor 2
Press the
stop.
key to
Conveyor Slide Motor
Press the
key to move to the paper advance
position (82.5-152 mm paper width), and press the
key again to move to the paper advance position
(165-210 mm).
3168
4/4
3169
Maintenance
Back Up DATA FD
Reading and Writing Data

Menu: 2260 Extension Maintenance Reading and Writing
Data
Main (*1)
BkData0100
Main (Setup) (*1)
BkData0200
BkData0204
Image Processing (*1)
BkData0400
Image Processing (for each

paper magazine) (*1)
BkData0400_Mag
Auto Film Carrier (*1)
BkData0300
Scanner (*1)
BkData0300_SCN
BkData1700
Misreg135_1 (*3)
Misreg135_3 (*3)
3. Mode
Misreg135_5 (*3)
Misreg135_6 (*3)
Misreg240_1 (*3)
Misreg240_2 (*3)
Misreg240_3 (*3)
Misreg240_4 (*3)
Misreg240_5 (*3)
Misreg240_6 (*3)
Misreg110_2 (*3)
S3075-00-SM00
Misreg110_3 (*3)
! Explanation
Misreg110_5 (*3)
Misreg110_6 (*3)
! 1. Writing Data (CPUFloppy Disk), Reading

Data (Floppy DiskCPU)
Misreg2B_0 (*3)
MisregMMC_1 (*3)
The data can be read or written individually when the service

personnel password (2260) has been entered.
Data can be saved via the close down checks. (User level)
When Reading Data/Writing Data is to be carried out via
Service Data, two floppy disks are required to save the data
for each printer and processor section.
NOTE
These FDs below are required.
User level
Back Up DATA
Colorimeter (*1)
BkData1000
Pricing Unit (*1)
BkData1100
NMC (*1)
BkData1400
Printer (*1)
BkData2200
Processor (*2)
BkData0900
(*1) Data which is to be written to INITIAL DATA1 in

Service Data.
Service personnel level
(*2) Data which is to be written to INITIAL DATA2 in

Service Data.
INITIAL DATA1
INITIAL DATA2
(*3) Data is written when the optional digital ICE is

installed.
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
The data relating to the auto film carrier (Auto gain

standard value and Frame stop position correction)
is stored in the EEP-ROM of the AFC control PCB.
Therefore, it cannot be saved to a floppy disk.
When Writing Data is carried out in the user level,

the individual data is written in the same manner as
that in the service level.
When Writing Data has been carried out with
Service Data, data which is to be written to the Back
Up DATA of user level is separated to the two FDs
of INITIAL DATA1 and INITIAL DATA2.
! 2. Format Floppy Disk
Data related to the printer section is written to

INITIAL DATA1.
Format (Initialize) floppy disks. Data can only be written onto

a floppy disk which has been formatted.
IMPORTANT
Data related to the processor section is written to

INITIAL DATA2.
Available floppy disk: 3.5-type 2HD
When the Reading Data is carried out in the user

level, the data can not be read individually. All the
data is written to a floppy disk.
3169
Floppy disks can only be formatted at 1.44 MB and

not at 1.2 MB.
1/2
3169
Maintenance
! 3. Reading the laser history (floppy disk ->

CPU)
If an error occurs on the laser, read the data to analyze it.
When replacing the laser control PCB, read the data saved
when writing.
IMPORTANT
Use this mode to read the data into the laser control
PCB.
The data cannot be read into the laser control PCB
via All Data Reading or Service Data Reading.
3. Mode
This read a part of BkData2200.
3169
2/2
3171
Maintenance
! Explanation
System Version Check
! Accessories

Menu: 2260 Extension Maintenance System Version
Check
# CPU
The name of each control PCB is displayed.
# Version
The system program version number saved on all
control PCBs is displayed.
M#F# besides the version name of the image

processing PCB shows the storage capacity of the
DIMM.
M1F1
128/128/128MB
Normal specification
M2F2
256/256/128MB
When the 120 AFC kit

(option) is attached
# Communication
The communication status of all control PCBs is
displayed.
OK: Communicating
-: Not communicating, not registered as an option,
not connected.
S3059-00-SM0030
! Profile Data
The profile data version is displayed.
NOTE
It is displayed only when the service personnel password
(2260) has been entered.
! DLL/Driver
The versions of DLL and SYS file (driver) are displayed.
S3059-00-SM0129
NOTE
S3059-00-SM0229
3171
1/1
3. Mode
NOTE
If there is an error, as the system program cannot be
executed or read, the boot flush version is displayed.
3172
Maintenance
! Operation
Software Upgrade
1. When "Software Upgrade (CD-ROM)" is

selected, set the program CD.
IMPORTANT

Menu: 2260 Extension Maintenance Software Upgrade
Each control PCB (CPU) is upgraded.
! Data
! Control PCB (CPU), system filename, and
software to be upgraded
Control PCB
(CPU)
Software to be
upgraded
Processor
Control PCB
Processor
Printer control
PCB
Printer
AFC/scanner
control PCB
Auto film carrier
PU control PCB
PU
System filename
proc0.sys
proc1.sys
3. Mode
This section explains the procedure for updating the

system of each control PCBs.
When the QSS software (main) is to be upgraded, refer
to the QSS software installation.
3850
expo0.sys
expo1.sys
afm0.sys
afm1.sys
pu0.sys
pu1.sys
S3060-00-SM0029
! Explanation
Image processing Image processing

PCB
PCB 1
image11.sys
Image processing
PCB 2
image21.sys
Image processing
PCB 3
image31.sys
digital ICE
digital ICE
image41.sys
Colorimeter
Control PCB
Colorimeter unit
! Software Upgrade (CD-ROM)
color0.sys
color1.sys
NOTE
When each control PCB has been replaced, check the
checkbox of the software to be upgraded, and then carry
out upgrading.
Copy the system program from the program CD to the

directory for software upgrade and save it.
Upgrade each control PCB (CPU) using system program data
saved in the directory for software upgrade.
! The place for saving the system program
! Software Upgrade (NET)

Before upgrading, copy the system program via NET, which
is saved in the HD directory for NET, to the directory for
software upgrade and save it.
Software Upgrade (CD-ROM)

C:\Noritsukoki\QSS30\Data\Sys
Software Upgrade (NET)

C:\Noritsukoki\QSS30\Data\Sys-net
! Software Upgrade (HD)

The software upgrade is carried out individually for each
control PCB.
NOTE
3172
1/1
3176
Maintenance
! F: Function
! Laser Information Setting

Enter the password (2260). Extension Maintenance
3. Mode
After replacing the laser unit, reset each cumulative value to 0.
S3322-00-SM0230
S3063-00-SM00
! Explanation
NOTE
The date reset is displayed on the left lower part of the
display.
! Error Record
The error history from the most recent error is displayed.
A maximum of 20 errors can be checked.
NOTE
A maximum of 500 errors can be checked when the
service personnel password (2260) has been entered.
Any data prior to the error will be deleted.
! Daily Setup History

The daily setup history from the latest setup is displayed.
All data for the past 7 setups will be displayed, and any data
prior to that will be deleted.
! Weekly Setup History

The weekly setup history from the latest setup is displayed.
! Monthly Setup History

The weekly setup history from the latest setup is displayed.
! Laser Operation History

Each Laser (R, G and B) Turned ON Time Record, Turned
ON Operation Count, Polygon Mirror Operation Time and
Operation Count are displayed.
3176
1/1
3181
Maintenance
! Language (Initial value: ENGLISH)
Machine Specification [N]
The language loaded by the system program can be set.
ENGLISH
KOREAN

JAPANESE
PEKINESE
FRENCH
TAIWANESE
GERMAN
DANISH
For the SM specification, refer to Machine Specification

[SM].
! Display
ITALIAN
GREEK
SPANISH
DUTCH
PORTUGUESE
FINNISH
RUSSIAN
SWEDISH

INDONESIAN
3. Mode
! HELP Language (Initial value: ENGLISH)

The language used to display the HELP messages of
Attention/Error can be set.
! Installation Date
The installation date of the machine can be checked and set.
! Power Supply Specification

The power supply specification of the machine can be
checked.
Power supply specification table
S3066-00-SM0030
NOTE
(2260).
! Explanation
! Production number (input range: 00000000 to
99999999)
1P2W
200 V
3P-3W
220 V
1P2W
208 V
3P-3W
230 V
1P2W
220 V
3P-3W
240 V
1P2W
230 V
3P-4W
346 V
1P2W
240 V
3P-4W
380 V
1P-3W
100/200 V
3P-4W
400 V
3P-3W
200 V
3P-4W
415 V
3P-3W
208 V
3P1W/1P2W
100/200 V
! Pricing Unit Specification

The specification of the pricing unit can be set.
The serial number of the machine can be specified and

checked for each printer and processor.
During installation, enter the production number.
Standard
! Process Specification (Input range: 0 to 60)

Use this mode to set the process specification for the machine.
Type A
Bar code type
Type B
Card printer
Type C
Bar code type
Type D
PC output
! F: Function
! Processing Solution Display

Set the display of the chemical solution names by process
specification.
! Program Timer Setting

The mode can be moved to the program timer setting.
During installation, set the date/time and program timer.
Processing solution name

CD
BF
STB
P1
P2
PS
P1
P2
P3
CD
BF
TCS
PJ1
PJ2
PJ3
PS1
PS2
PS3
3181
1/2
3181
Machine Specification [SM]
Maintenance
JAPANESE
! Display
PEKINESE
FRENCH
TAIWANESE
GERMAN
DANISH
ITALIAN
GREEK
SPANISH
DUTCH

PORTUGUESE
FINNISH
RUSSIAN
SWEDISH
INDONESIAN
! HELP Language (Initial value: ENGLISH)
! Installation Date
The installation date of the machine can be checked and set.
! Power Supply Specification

The power supply specification of the machine can be
checked.
Power supply specification table
S3066-00-SM0130
NOTE
(2260).
! Explanation
! Production number (input range: 00000000 to
99999999)
1P2W
200 V
3P-3W
220 V
1P2W
208 V
3P-3W
230 V
1P2W
220 V
3P-3W
240 V
1P2W
230 V
3P-4W
346 V
1P2W
240 V
3P-4W
380 V
1P-3W
100/200 V
3P-4W
400 V
3P-3W
200 V
3P-4W
415 V
3P-3W
208 V
3P1W/1P2W
100/200 V
! Pricing Unit Specification
The serial number of the machine can be specified and

checked for each printer and processor.
During installation, enter the production number.
The specification of the pricing unit can be set.

Standard
! Process Specification (Input range: 0 to 60)

Use this mode to set the process specification for the machine.
! Processing Solution Display

Set the display of the chemical solution names by process
specification.
Processing solution name
CD
BF
STB
P1
P2
PS
P1
P2
P3
CD
BF
TCS
PJ1
PJ2
PJ3
PS1
PS2
PS3
Type A
Bar code type
Type B
Card printer
Type C
Bar code type
Type D
PC output
! Circulation Pump Stand-by

Circulation Pump Stand-by function can be set in this mode.
! SM Replenishment Setting
Forced replenishment ON/OFF can be set.
! F: Function
! Program Timer Setting
The mode can be moved to the program timer setting.
During installation, set the date/time and program timer.
! Language (Initial value: ENGLISH)

The language loaded by the system program can be set.
ENGLISH
KOREAN
3181
2/2
3. Mode
The language used to display the HELP messages of

Attention/Error can be set.
3201

! Reverse Unit Upper Stop Position Correction

(Right) (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input range: 4.0
to +4.0 mm)
Reverse Unit Correction
Be careful not to get your hand caught. Keep your hands

away from the unit during operation.
Be careful no to get your hands caught under the belt.
Keep your hands away from the belt during operation.
Corrects the paper transfer position of the front side of the

reverse unit (viewed from the paper advance door).
! Paper Stop Position Correction (Initial value:

0.0 mm) (Input range: 4.0 to +4.0 mm)
Corrects the stop position of the paper rear end where the
reverse unit (left and right) receive the paper from the
exposure advance unit.

Menu 2260 Extension Maintenance Various Adjustment
3. Mode
Paper transfer position
S3277-00-SM0030
NOTE
(2260).
Paper receiving position

G058402
! F: Function
! Explanation
Correct the stop position of the reverse unit (left and right) and
of the paper.
! Reverse Unit (Left) Test Operation

The operation changes by pressing this button.
IMPORTANT
First time: Carries out the initial operation and the reverse
unit (left) moves to the paper receiving position.
Each correction value is reflected to the test print.
Second time: The reverse unit (left) moves to the paper

transfer position.
! Reverse Unit Stop Position Correction (Left)

(Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input range: 1.0 to +1.0
mm)
Third time: The reverse unit (left) moves to the paper

receiving position.
Fourth time or the later: The reverse unit (left) repeats
moving between the paper transfer/receiving position.
Corrects the paper receiving position of the back side of the

NOTE
The operation is reset to the first one by pressing the
other buttons or by opening/closing the advance door.
! Reverse Unit Stop Position Correction (Right)

(Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input range: 1.0 to +1.0
mm)
Corrects the paper receiving position of the front side of the

(Left) (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input range: 4.0
to +4.0 mm)
! Reverse Unit (Right) Test Operation

The reverse unit (right) moves as same as that of Reverse
Unit (Left) Test Operation.
! Reverse Unit (Left/Right) Test Operation
Corrects the paper transfer position of the back side of the

3201
The reverse units (left and right) moves as same as that of

Reverse Unit (Left) Test Operation at the same time.
1/4
3201
! Test Operation for the Paper Stop Position

Correction
Side B
Side A
+correction
After the reverse unit operates the initial operation, paper is

loaded and stops at the paper stop position.
NOTE
When magazines are positioned at magazine mounts A
and B, paper is firstly loaded to magazine mount A.
-correction
Reverse unit
! Adjustment
Pressure release lever
! Before each adjustment
3. Mode
IMPORTANT
For each adjustment, turn on the interlock switch
(paper advance door) intentionally, open the paper
advance door, then check the operation of the
reverse unit. Be sure not to put your hands into the
paper advance section.
Front edge of the reverse unit guide (lower)
G057529
Be sure not to pull the paper advance unit with the

interlock switch (paper advance door) ON. It may
damage the machine.
3. Subtract 0.3 mm from the value registered in
Remove the paper advance door interlock switch, attach it to

the main body, then turn on the switch. (one screw)
Operation and adjust the reverse unit (right)

following the procedure 1 to 3.
step 2, and register the value again.
4. Carry out Reverse Unit (Right) Test
NOTE
Attach the paper advance door interlock switch to the
main body with tape or the like.
5. Carry out Reverse Unit (Left/Right) Test

Operation and check if the heights of the
reverse units (left and right) is the same.
IMPORTANT
If not, adjust them again.
Paper advance door
When checking, keep your eyes horizontal so

as not to tilt the adjustment position.

IMPORTANT
Carry out Reverse Unit Upper Stop Position
Correction when the adjustment of Reverse Unit
Stop Position Correction has been completed.
Screw
Interlock switch (main body
side)
Interlock switch (magnet side)
1. Select Reverse Unit (Left) Test Operation

G057528
! Reverse Unit Stop Position Correction
via F: Functions to move the reverse unit to

the paper transfer position.
2. Enter the correction value so that the
1. Select Reverse Unit (Left) Test Operation
via F: Functions to move the reverse unit to

the stop position.
2. Enter the correction value so that the heights

of the reverse unit (left) A side and the
exposure advance unit B side are the same.
IMPORTANT
Check if the heights of side A and B are the
same by watching them carefully.
dimension between the side D of the reverse

unit (left) and the side E of the processor
loading unit is 0 to 1 mm.
IMPORTANT
Check if the heights of side D and E are the
same by watching them carefully.

3201
2/4
3201
Processor loading
unit
Side D
! Paper Stop Position Correction
+correction
Side E
correction
1. Select Test Operation for the Paper Stop

Position Correction via F: Functions to
move the paper to the stop position.
2. Enter the correction value so that the
dimension between the exposure end sensor

guide of the exposure advance unit and the
paper rear end is 0 to 1 mm.
IMPORTANT
Check the paper rear end carefully.
3. Mode
Reverse unit
Adjust the dimension

between side D and E 0 to 1
mm.
Reverse unit (left)
G057530
3. Input the same correction value of Reverse

Unit Upper Stop Position Correction (Left)
to Reverse Unit Upper Stop Position
Correction (Right).
4. Carry out Reverse Unit (Left/Right) Test
Esposure end sensor

guide
Operation to move the reverse unit to its

upper stop position.
5. Check that the "K" and "H" surfaces (left and
right) of the reverse unit match the "L" and "I"

surfaces of the processor loading unit.
0 to 1 mm
Paper rear end
IMPORTANT
If not, attach the reverse unit (left and right) or
adjust the attaching position of the processor
loading unit.
2652
Surface L
Surface I
+correction
-correction
G057532
3. The message Confirm the paper stop
position, then remove the paper. appears.

Press the
key.
Processor loading
unit
Surface F
IMPORTANT
If one or more of the doors in the printer
section is open, paper is not fed.
Surface H
Surface H and I are in

a line.
Surface K and L are in
a line.
Reverse unit (left)
G057531
3201
3/4
3201
4. Remove the test paper from the lower part of
3. Mode
the paper advance unit.
Test Paper
G057526
3201
4/4
3202
Paper Advance Length Correction

NOTE

! Loading
The paper is loaded.
! Rewind
Rewind the paper.
! Adjustment
paper cutter.
2522
2. Carry out Test Print of Functions.

3. Open the paper advance door, remove the
test paper from the bottom of the paper

advance unit, then press the
key.
S3303-00-SM0030
Paper advance unit
NOTE
(2260).
! Explanation
Correct the paper advance length and the advance roller feed
error.
Paper advance door
IMPORTANT
The correction value of Test Paper Advance is not
reflected in the test print.
No need for correcting each magazine A/B.
! Test Paper Magazine Value (1st) (initial value:

150.0 mm) (input range: 145.0 to 155.0 mm)
The first paper corrects the paper which has just been fed out
from the paper magazine (distance between the paper loading
sensor and the paper cutter) and the advance roller feed error.
! Test Paper Magazine Value (2nd) (initial value:

200.0 mm) (input range: 180.0 to 220.0 mm)
The second test paper corrects the advance roller feed error.
Two test papers
G057526
4. Measure each test paper length of the first

and second paper which are pulled out.
5. Enter each measurement dimension.

6. After correcting, be sure to make a print and
check if the advance length is correct.
7. If the advance length is not correct, adjust it
! F: Function
according to the following procedure.
! Test Paper Advance
When the print advance length of the first paper after

loading is not correct.
Two test papers are fed out. Enter each measurement

dimension of the first and second test papers.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to enter the measurement dimensions of
the first and second test papers at the same time.
3202
When the
Carry out +correction for Test Paper
advance length Measurement Value (1st).
is long.
When the
Carry out correction for Test Paper
advance length Measurement Value (1st).
is short.
1/2
3. Mode
1. Carry out the right angle adjustment of the
3202
When the print advance length of the second or later paper

after loading is not correct.
3. Mode
Return the measurement dimensions for Test Paper

Measurement Valued (1st, 2nd) to the initial values and
adjust them again.
3202
2/2
3203
2. Select magazine A/B.

3. Execute Test Print of Functions.
4. Measure the difference of dimentions of lines

Menu Extension Maintenance Various Adjustment
A and B on the second test print. And input

the value to (AB).
IMPORTANT
Input the correction value in millimeter (mm).

Measure the dimensions of lines A and B on
the test print using a scale.
NOTE
When the measured values of the test print are line
A: 121 mm and B: 120 mm, for example, see the
below.
Line A (121 mm) Line B (120 mm) = Correction
value A B (1 mm)
Line A
S3305-00-SM0030
! Explanation
Correct if the image is exposed diagonally toward the paper
because of the paper zigzagging.
IMPORTANT
Correction is required for each magazine A and B.
The correction is reflected to the test print.
! A B (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input range: 2.0

to +2.0 mm)
The correction for each magazine (paper width and surface) is
necessary.
! Magazine A and B
You can select magazine A or B.
! F: Function
! Test Print (Magazine A/B)
Line B
Print two test patterns to be used for the printer adjustment.

NOTE
The advance length of the test print is 355.6 mm.
G057657
5. Make test prints again and check that the
zigzagging amount (A-B) for all the two prints

are 0.3 mm.
! Loading (Paper Magazine A/B)
IMPORTANT
If the zigzagging amount (A-B) for the two

prints are not 0.3 mm, carry out the fine
adjustment using the input correction value as
a reference.
! Rewind (Paper Magazine A/B)

The paper which has been loaded is rewound.
! Adjustment
A>B
Plus correction
A<B
Minus correction
1. Set the paper magazine to be adjusted

zigzagging to magazine mount A/B.
3203
1/2
3. Mode
Refer to the grid described on lines A and B of

the test print.
3203
NOTE
When correcting 1.0 mm in (A-B), the zigzagging
of approx. 1.0 mm can be corrected on the test
print.
When carrying out the plus correction in (A-B),
the arm (right) moves to the plus direction.
3. Mode
When carrying out the minus correction in (A-B),

the arm (left) moves to the plus direction.
3203
2/2
3204
! Rewind
The paper which is being loaded is rewound.

! Adjustment
! Exposure Center Correction
1. Check that Arm Unit Zigzagging

Correction has been completed.
3203

3. Measure dimension A between the left end
IMPORTANT
When measuring the test print, use the front
end of the test print.
Center line
A
Front end of the test print
S3304-00-SM0030
! Explanation
Adjust the exposure starting position (B, G and R) in the laser
scanning direction so that it comes on the center of the test
print.
IMPORTANT
Exposure Center Correction Master can be
adjusted on Exposure Position Adjustment.
! Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper

Magazine) (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input range:
2.00 to +2.00 mm)
Corrects the reference line to be in the center of the test paper
for each paper magazine (for each paper width and emulsion
type).
G057533
4. Carry out correction so that dimension A is
! Exposure Center Correction (Master) (Initial

value: 0.0 mm) (Input range: 9.9 +9.99 mm)
half of the paper width.
Corrects the exposure center for all the paper magazines at the
same time.
! F: Function
A > a half of the paper width
Plus correction
A < a half of the paper width
Minus
correction

A test pattern to be used for the printer adjustment is made.
NOTE
The advance length of the test paper is 300 mm.
! Loading
3204
1/1
3. Mode
and the center line on the test print.
3205
! Loading
Exposure Image Correction

! Rewind
! Adjustment
3. Mode

2. Measure dimension A in the test print.
A
S3207-00-SM0029
NOTE
(2260).
! Explanation
254 mm
The image to be exposed can be expanded or reduced in the

paper advance direction.
! Exposure Image Correction (Initial value: 254.0

mm) (Input range: +244.0 to +264.0 mm)
The dimension of the test print image is measured, and then
the actual measurement value can be entered.
G057534
3. Enter the measurement value.

4. Carry out Test Print (Confirmation) of
Functions.
5. Confirm that the dimension A on the test print
! F: Function
is 254 mm.
! Test Print
The correction value of Exposure Image Correction is not
reflected to prints.
NOTE
The paper advance length is 300 mm.
! Test Print (Confirmation)

This operation is as same as Test Print. The correction value
is reflected to test prints.
NOTE
The print pattern of the test print made with Test Print
(Confirmation) is as same as that made with Test Print
but of which color of the center line on the test prints
differ. (Red)
3205
1/1
3206
! Adjustment

3203
2. Check that Exposure Image Correction

has been completed.
3205

4. After the test print is made, measure the
dimension between its front end and the
reference line.
3. Mode
Reference line
A
S3307-00-SM0030
NOTE
It is no need for entering the service personnel password
(2260).
! Explanation
When the exposure start position of the image is shifted
forward/backward, correction is carried out.
IMPORTANT
! Exposure Start Timing Correction (Initial value:

0.0 mm) (Input range: 2.0 to +2.0 mm)
The improper timing when the paper reaches the exposure
position after the exposure start sensor detects the paper is
corrected.
G057535

25.4 mm.
If it is longer than 25.4 mm, carry out +correction. If it

is shorter than 25.4 mm, carry out correction.
! F: Function
! Test Print
A is longer than 25.4

mm
+correction
A is less than 25.4

mm
correction

NOTE
! Loading
! Rewind
The paper which is being loaded is rewound.
3206
1/1
3207
Paper pressure operation correction


When both magazines A and B are positioned, paper is
loaded to magazine A firstly.
! 2. Loading

! 3. Rewind
! Adjustment
1. Select and execute Test Print via

NOTE
13 patterns of the test prints are made as shown in
the list below.
When the CVP (optional) has been installed, the
print No. and the revolution pulse are printed on
the back of the print.
S3308-00-SM0030
! Explanation
The banding for each magazine type can be carried out by
adjusting the clearance between the pressure roller 2 of the
exposure advance unit and the paper.
! Paper Pressure Operation Correction (Initial

value: 1) (Input range:1 to13)
Correct the pressure release of the pressure roller 2.
Pressure roller 2
Exposure position
Print No.
Revolusion
pulse (pps)
Test print
advance length
(mm)
1733
152
1600
153
1545
154
1502
155
1466
156
1434
157
1405
158
1378
159
1353
160
10
1329
161
11
1307
162
12
1285
163
13
1265
164
2. When the banding disappears, add 2 to the

correction pattern No., and enter the No. to
the correction No.
NOTE
Banding appears at the position where it is 17 mm
from the rear end of the test print.
Part (A) indicated in the figure
Paper
G057543
! F: Function
! 1. Test Print (Magazine A/B)
Prints the gray test prints (13 pattern).
NOTE
The banding appears on 17 mm from the rear end of the
test print.
3207
1/2
3. Mode
F:Functions.
3207
Example:
Banding
+2
Test prints with no

banding
3. Mode
Print No.
Paper advance direction

G060622
3. Carry out the procedure 1 and 2 for each

paper magazine.
3207
2/2
3208

Adjust the lasers B and G referring to the laser R.
Exposure Position Correction

! Master Correction (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input

range: 9.9 +9.9 mm)
If the gap is beyond the value of the slide bar, input the
correction value to Master.
NOTE
This value is adjusted when shipping. No need for adjust
this value, basically.
For the measure of the correction, when 1.0 mm is input,
Y and M line moves approx. 1.0 mm on the print.

NOTE
The correction value set with the slide bar is not reflected
on the print.
The correction value set on master is reflected on the
print.
Slide bars
S3328-00-00
NOTE
(2260).
! Confirmation of Test Print (Paper Magazine

A/B)
set with the Exposure center correction (Master) A/B, slide
bar and the value entered in Master are reflected to the prints.
The Exposure Zoom Rate Fine Adjustment chart is added.
! Explanation
Carry out correction in which the exposure position in the
laser unit is positioned at the center of the test print. Correct
the positions of the R, G, B laser main and sub scanning.
NOTE
! Adjustment
! Exposure Center Correction Master Magazine

A/B (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input range: 9.99 to
+9.99 mm)
Correct each magazine mount A and B so that the test paper
center to be in the center.

3203
2. Check that Exposure Zoom Rate

3209
IMPORTANT
Exposure Center Correction Master A/B can be
adjusted on Exposure Center Correction.
! Exposure Position Adjustment 1 to 4 (Initial

value: 0) (Input range: 5 to +5 dots)
Adjust the exposure position of the laser B, G, and R in the
direction of main scanning/sub scanning using the slide bar on
the display.
IMPORTANT
The exposure position for main scanning can be
adjusted by 1/8 dot, and 1/2 dot for the sub
scanning.
Adjust the lasers so that the lasers B, G and R are in
a line in the direction of main scanning/sub scanning
when printing.
3208
1/4
3. Mode
! F: Function
3208

Center line

IMPORTANT
Confirm the line using the loupe.
Main scanning images
Loupe is a service personnel tool. Refer to

Service personnel tool list.
8031
7. Move the slide bar of Exposure Position
Adjustment 1 on the Exposure Position

Adjustment display using the mouse, and
select the number which is found in step 2.
If there is no image of which magenta and
cyan lines look like one line, carry out the
adjustment by 1/8 dot.
1 dot
8. Select the image of which the yellow and

cyan lines look like a straight line in the
vertical direction in the test print No.2.
1 dot
Yellow
Sub scanning image

Test Paper
G057536
4. Measure dimension A between the left end

and the center line on the test print.

half of the paper width.
A > a half of the paper width
Plus correction
A < a half of the paper width
Minus
correction
Cyan
G057538

IMPORTANT
6. Select the image of which the magenta and


Magenta
Cyan
/8 dot
G057537
3208
2/4
3. Mode
IMPORTANT
3208

horizontal direction in the test print No.3.

IMPORTANT
14. Press the
key to register the
correction data.
Function and check the correction result of

the print.
Magenta
IMPORTANT
When carrying out Test Print
(Confirmation), make a test print using the
maximum size of paper which has been used.
To distinguish the corrected test prints, the
prints made with Test Print (Confirmation)
have the mark () in the center of each No.
/2 dot
Cyan
G057539

IMPORTANT

Chart for checking the

exposure zoom rate fine
Mark
G057541
Check that each line makes a straight line in

the marks of Exposure Position Adjustment
1 to 4 in the test prints.
Yellow
Each slide bar in the Exposure Position

Adjustment display remains their positions of
the adjustment.
16. If the test paper center is not in the center for
Cyan
each magazine mount A and B, adjust again.
G057540
3208
3/4
3. Mode
15. Carry out Test Print (Confirmation) via F:
3208
17. If each line does not make a straight line in
the marks of Exposure Position

Adjustment 1 to 4 in the test prints, adjust it
again.
IMPORTANT
Adjust each slide bar in the Exposure Position
Adjustment display referring to their position
adjusted in the former procedure (step 2 to
10).
18. Check that the lines (cyan, magenta and
3. Mode
yellow) make a straight line in the most

outside chart for checking the exposure
zoom rate fine adjustment in the test prints. If
it is not on the straight line, carry out the
Exposure Zoom Rate Fine Adjustment.
3210
IMPORTANT
8031
3208
4/4
3209
Exposure Zoom Rate Correction
NOTE


NOTE
The print pattern of the test print made with Test Print
(Confirmation) is as same as that made with Test Print
but of which color of the center line on the test prints
differ. (Red)
! Adjustment
1. Click A in the screen and select the exposure

value of the paper size to use the
adjustment.
S3318-00-SM0030
NOTE
(2260).

3. Measure dimension A in the test print.
IMPORTANT
Measure the dimension of the most outside
line of the test print.
! Explanation
The image to be exposed can be expanded or reduced in the
paper width direction.
IMPORTANT
When carrying out the Exposure Zoom Rate
Correction, make a test print using the maximum
size of paper which has been used.
! Cyan line exposure measured value (Initial

value: 190.0 mm) (Input range: 65.0 mm to
195.0 mm)
The dimension of the test print image is measured, and then
the actual measurement value can be entered.
NOTE
Set the exposure value A referring to the following table.
Paper width
82.5-95 mm
102-117 mm
120-152 mm
Exposure
value
70 mm
90 mm
110 mm
Paper width
152-203 mm
203-210 mm
Exposure
value
140 mm
190 mm
A
G057648
4. Click B and input the measured exposure

value dimension A.
! F: Function
! Test Print
6. Confirm that the dimension A on the test print
Functions.

The correction value of Exposure Zoom Rate Correction is not
reflected to prints.
3209
is the specified length.
7. Carry out the Exposure Position Adjustment.

3208
1/1
3. Mode
3210
Exposure Zoom Rate Fine

Adjustment



! Adjustment
3. Mode
1 dot
S3329-00-SM0030
NOTE
(2260).
M
! Explanation
If there is each shear of B, G and R laser, use this mode.
IMPORTANT
When carrying out the Exposure Zoom Rate Fine
Adjustment, make a test print using the maximum
size of paper which has been used.
Adjust the lasers B and G referring to the laser R.
! Magenta Line (main scanning) (Initial value: 0.0

dot) (Input range: 9.9 to +9.9 dot)
Plus
correction
Minus
correction
G laser expansion and contraction can be corrected against the

! Yellow Line (main scanning) (Initial value: 0.0

dot) (Input range: 9.9 to +9.9 dot)
B laser expansion and contraction can be corrected against the
G057649
IMPORTANT
! F: Function

8031
! Test Print
The correction value of Exposure Zoom Rate Fine
Adjustment is not reflected to prints.
NOTE
3210
1/2
3210
2. Correct the magenta and yellow lines which

look like a straight line with cyan line in the
vertical direction at 0 on the test print.
IMPORTANT
adjustment by 0.1 dot.
Check the line with the most outside chart of
the test print.
NOTE
When correcting the magenta line to the right,
input minus correction value.
3. Mode
When correcting the magenta line to the left, input

plus correction value.
3. Input the correction value.

Functions.
5. Correct the magenta and yellow lines which
look like a straight line with cyan line in the

vertical direction at 0 on the test print again.
6. Check the Exposure Position Adjustment.

3208
IMPORTANT
There is a case when the Exposure Zoom
Rate Fine Adjustment is carried out, the main
scanning position set in the Exposure
Position Adjustment might be changed.
3210
2/2
3226
Scanner Filter Position Adjustment
Scanner Unit Adjustment

! Adjustment
! Before each adjustment
You may get burned. Do not touch the scanner lamp and
scanner lamp light source unit during operation or right
after operation. When the scanner lamp light source unit
is cleaned, check that at least 15 minutes have elapsed
since the scanner lamp was turned off. (When the power
supply is ON, the lamp is cooled by rotating the cooling
fan.)
IMPORTANT
The correction values for the negative/positive filter
stop position adjusted when shipping are indicated
at the following position of S-1200.
When changing the scanner filter stop position from
the value adjusted in shipping, change the
described value.
3. Mode

Scanner Filter Position Adjustment
Label
G057662
S3236-00-SM00
NOTE
Enter the personnel password (2260) to bring up this display.
1. Remove the film carrier.

2. Remove the lamphouse cover. (one knob
screw)
2005
3. Disconnect the connector (J/P470) and

remove the scanner lamp.
! Explanation
The stop position of the scanner filter in the scanner lamp box
is adjusted.
IMPORTANT
Wait until the temparature of the lamp is fully
lowered.
! Negative Filter Position Correction (input

range: 30 to +30)
Lever
The correction amount of the negative filter is displayed.
! Positive Filter Position Correction (input range:

30 to +30)
The correction amount of the positive filter is displayed.
! F: Function
! Negative Filter Adjustment
Adjust the position of the negative filter.
! Positive Filter Adjustment
J/P470
Scanner lamp
Adjust the position of the positive filter.

G057547
3226
1/2
3226
4. Remove the lamphouse cover interlock
3. Adjust the value so that the center of the filter
switch, attach it to the main body, then turn

on the switch. (two screws)
comes to the incident light entrance of the

light guide.
IMPORTANT
Turn on the interlock switch (lamphouse
cover) intentionally, then confirm the filter
position with the lamphouse cover open. Be
sure not to touch the terminal section of
connectors.
Filter
Mirror
Light guide
NOTE
Attach the lamphouse cover interlock switch to the
main body with tape or the like.
3. Mode
Incident light entrance

Interlock switch (main body side)
Electric light
G057546
IMPORTANT
The scanner filter moves right by increasing
the negative filter position correction value
and moves left by decreasing.
The scanner filter moves left by increasing
the positive filter position correction value and
moves right by decreasing.
Screws
4. Return the scanner lamp to the original

position after each filter is adjusted.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to return the interlock switch as it was
before attaching the scanner lamp.

3067
Lamphouse cover
Interlock switch (magnet side)
3233
G057548
! Adjusting each filter position
1. Select Filter Position Correction via F:

Functions.
2. Light the light guide with the electric light,
insert the mirror inside the lamphouse, and

check the incident light entrance of the filter
and the light guide.
3226
2/2
3227

3. Mode

S3271-00-00
! Explanation
! R thermosensor display part
The temperature of the R laser is displayed.
! Laser unit thermosensor display part

The temperature of the B and G laser inside the laser unit are
displayed.
! F: Function
! Auto tuning
To gain the stable laser output light, adjust the laser
temperature.
IMPORTANT
Carry out it when the attention message
1094:Execute Auto Tuning. appears.
NOTE
Before activating the program timer during close down
checks, the same adjustment is automatically carried out.
3227
1/1
3231
! Display
Swing and Tilt Adjustment
Adjust the graph display area.

# Display Area (Horizontal) (input range: 1 to

2500)
The display area of the graph x-axis can be set. If
the display area is narrowed, the x-axis is
magnified.
Menu: 2260 Extension Various Adjustment Scanner Unit

Adjustment Swing and Tilt Adjustment
# Display Area (Vertical) (input range: 1 to 4096)

The display area of the graph y-axis can be set. If
the display area is narrowed, the y-axis is
magnified.
3. Mode
# Graph
Each graph is displayed by selecting the B.G.R
check box.
IMPORTANT
When the Swing and Tilt Adjustment is
carried out, be sure to do at G only.
! Swing and Tilt Adjustment Check

S3228-01-SM00
Check the swing and tilt adjustment.
IMPORTANT
NOTE
Change the focus value continuously, check if the focus
best positions are equal at the front and rear.
After completing, the result is displayed on the pop-up
display.
Be sure to adjust the scanner unit by following the

procedure below.
3232
! Result
3. Fix the scanner unit.
The result is displayed as OK/NG.
4. Confirm the swing and tilt auto adjustment.

When the swing and tilt adjustment check is turned out as
No good, repeat the procedures from step 1.
NOTE
After the swing and tilt adjustment check, if the focus
best positions are at the front and rear and the deviation
of the focus is 2 or less, Good appears.

3233
! Focus Value
! Explanation
When the scanner unit is replaced, enter the focus value

indicated on the front of the scanner.
Adjust the vertical tilt at the front/rear of the scanner unit
! Resolution
IMPORTANT
The order of priority of the film masks which are
used when the swing and tilt is adjusted is as
follows.
Priority
1
The resolution of the waveform selected in Graph of Display

is calculated and displayed for each B, G, and R.
! Adjustment (when replacing and

adjusting the scanner unit)
Film carrier to be set

135/240 AFC (135 lane)*1
135 AFC
120 AFC
110 AFC
This is the procedure for replacing and adjusting the scanner

unit.
Follow the procedure and adjust the scanner unit until the
result becomes OK.
*1. For the 135/240 AFC, be sure to use the 135 lane to carry
out Swing and Tilt Adjustment.
IMPORTANT
OK is displayed when the value is 2/32 step or less.
! Graph
When the image is scanned, the A/D value of each CCD pixel
is graphed out simultaneously.
3231
When only checking the swing and tilt of the

scanner unit, refer to Checking (when only
checking the scanner unit).
1/4
3231
6. Enter the focus value indicated on the front
2. Loosen two scanner unit screws.
7. Adjust the scroll bar and Standard Position
of the scanner unit label.
2005
so that the relation between the waveforms

and the longitudinal red and blue lines in
both right and left graphs is shown as
follows.
(1) Using the scroll bar, adjust the position so that

the waveform of graph can be seen.
so that the three waveforms are in between the
red lines and the fine waveforms are in between
the blue lines.
The range of the blue
Loosen.
The range of the red
G057508
IMPORTANT
Slightly tighten the screws with your hand.
The adjustment may be difficult if they are
strongly tightened.
3. Enter Swing and Tilt Adjustment mode.

4. Attach the adjustment chart to the AFC.
IMPORTANT
Position the adjustment chart correctly.
Otherwise, the scanner unit cannot be
adjusted properly. Be sure to press the upper
and left parts of the chart to the AFC as
shown below and secure the upper and lower
parts using tapes.
Do not use the adjustment chart wrong side
out. Place the adjustment chart so that the
stamp mark of the film size can be read.
Do not fold the adjustment chart as it is thin.
The adjustment chart is a service tool. Refer
8031
S3228-01-SM02
IMPORTANT
If the waveform cannot be seen, check for the
position to which the adjustment chart is
attached and for Light Axis Adjustment.
3232
8. Adjust the resolution of the right/left graphs

to the approx. maximum.
(Loosen one adjusting screw and one unit fixing nut.)
Tapes
Adjustment chart
G050982
5. Set the AFC securely in the body.
Unit fixing nut
Adjusting screw
G057509
3231
2/4
3. Mode
(2) Using Standard Position, carry out adjustment
3231
" Point
When turning the adjusting screw, the position
between the vertical blue/red lines and the undulation
may be changed. In that case, return to step 7 and
adjust the position between the vertical lines and the
waveforms correctly again.
! Checking (when only checking the

scanner unit)
NOTE
The resolution displays how much percentage the
height of the 8 small waveforms shares the height
of the 3 large waveforms.
This is the procedure for checking whether the swing and tilt
of the scanner unit is normal or not. Carry out the adjustment
when the swing and tilt is not normal.
1. Enter Swing and Tilt Adjustment mode.

2. Put the scanner adjustment chart to the
135/240 AFC (135 lane) or 135 AFC.
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT

135/240 AFC (135 lane)
135 AFC
Check.
NOTE
When the result is Good, the swing and tilt
adjustment is completed.
When it is No good, return to Step 8 to carry out
the swing and tilt adjustment according to the
instructions on the display. This correction means
the rotation of the adjusting screw.
Priority
1
9. Carry out Swing and Tilt Adjustment
When there are not 135/240 AFC and 135

AFC, check with 120 AFC and 110 AFC.
3. Mode
Adjust while the unit fixing nut is left

(loosened). If the nut is down, the adjustment
may not be carried out because of the narrow
adjustment range.
120 AFC
110 AFC
IMPORTANT
parts using tapes.
8031
S3228-01-SM02
IMPORTANT
3232
Tapes
Adjustment chart
3232
IMPORTANT
After adjusting the swing and tilt, the light axis
G050982

so that the relation between the waveforms
and the longitudinal red and blue lines in
3231
3/4
3231
both right and left graphs is shown as

follows.
Adjustment of the 120 AFC and 110 AFC are

not required.
(2) Using Standard Position, carry out adjustment

so that the three waveforms are in between the
red lines and the fine waveforms are in between
the blue lines.
135/240 AFC (135 lane)
Difference of G values
when checking the swing
and tilt
9/32 step
135 AFC
120 AFC
9/32 step
110 AFC
8/32 step
7. Remove the adjustment chart from the AFC.
S3228-01-SM02
IMPORTANT
3232
5. Carry out Swing and Tilt Adjustment

Check.
IMPORTANT
No need for adjust the result as OK when
carrying out TAGSwing and Tilt Adjustment
CheckTAG. It is no problem when the value is
with in the value in the table.
6. Check that the value on the 135/240 AFC
(135 lane) or 135 AFC is less than the value

in the following table.
IMPORTANT
When the value of the 135/240 AFC (135
lane) or 135 AFC is less than the following
value, checkings the Swing and Tilt
3231
4/4
3. Mode
IMPORTANT
If adjustment mode is finished while the
adjustment chart is being adhered, the AFC
gets initial-activated resulting in damaging the
chart.
3232

# Graph
check box.
Light Axis Adjustment

IMPORTANT

Adjustment Light Axis Adjustment
When Light Axis Adjustment is to be carried

out, be sure to do at G only.
! Result
The result is displayed as Good or No good.
! Focus Value
! Threshold (input range: 0 to 4096)

For the waveform selected in Graph of Display, Number of
Pixels Exceeding the Threshold in which the part over the
threshold is added up is displayed.
! Adjustment (when replacing and

adjusting the scanner unit)
S3229-01-SM00
! Explanation
Adjust the horizontal tilt of the scanner unit.
IMPORTANT
OK is displayed when the difference of Number of
Pixels Exceeding the Threshold in left/right graph
is 4 pixel or less.
IMPORTANT
The order of priority of the film masks which are
used when the light axis is adjusted is as follows.
Priority
1
Refer to the procedure when checking the light axis

of the scanner unit only.

135/240 AFC (135 lane)*1
135 AFC
2
120 AFC
110 AFC
This is the procedure for replacing and adjusting the scanner

unit.
Follow the procedure and adjust the scanner unit until the
result becomes OK.
2005
2. Loosen two scanner unit screws.
*1. For the 135/240 AFC, be sure to use the 135 lane to carry
out Light Axis Adjustment.
! Graph
! Display

2500)
magnified.
magnified.
3232
Loosen.
G057508
IMPORTANT
Slightly tighten the screws with your hand.
The adjustment may be difficult if they are
strongly tightened.
3. Select Light Axis Adjustment mode.

1/4
3. Mode
If necessary, the focus value can be changed.
3232

IMPORTANT
parts using tapes.
8031
S3229-01-SM02
7. Adjust the light axis of the scanner unit so

that the difference between Number of
Pixels Exceeding the Threshold of both
right and left graphs is 4 or less and the
Result is Good.
(Loosen one adjusting screw and one unit fixing nut.)
"
Point
Sway the scanner unit to the left so that the adjusting

screw can be adjusted toward loose direction.
Tapes
Adjustment chart
G050982

6. Adjust the scroll bar, Display Area,
Threshold, and Position Adjustment

(Right) so that the relation between the
waveforms of the graph and the horizontal
red lines in both right and left graphs is
shown as follows.
Unit fixing nut
Adjusting screw
G057510

only the largest portions of left waveform can
be seen.
(2) Using the scroll bar, Display Area, and Display

Area Setting, adjust the position so that only
largest peak of right waveform can be seen.
(3) Adjust Threshold so that the middle of the peak

of the waveform crosses the red line which
indicates the threshold.
"
Point
When turning the adjusting screw, the waveform may

be moved, or unnecessary waveform may be displayed.
In that case, return to Step 6 and adjust again so that
the only necessary waveform can be seen.
IMPORTANT
The special tool is required to turn the unit
fixing nut.
8. Fix the scanner unit.

9. After fixing the scanner unit, loosen the light
axis adjusting screw.
10. After adjustment, carry out Swing and Tilt

Adjustment Check of Swing and Tilt
3232
2/4
3. Mode
3232
Adjustment. If the waveform is shifted, readjustment is necessary.
3231

IMPORTANT
chart.

3233
Adjustment chart
IMPORTANT
After adjusting the light axis, the light source
registration is required.
! Checking (when only checking the

scanner unit)
IMPORTANT
This is the procedure for only checking the light axis
of the scanner unit.
1. Select Light Axis Adjustment mode.

2. Put the scanner adjustment chart to the

(2) Using the scroll bar, Display area, and Display
Area Setting, adjust the position so that only
largest peak of right waveform can be seen.
IMPORTANT
When there are not 135/240 AFC and 135
AFC, check with 120 AFC and 110 AFC.
Threshold, and Position Adjustment so

that the relation between the waveforms of
the graph and the horizontal red lines in both
right and left graphs is shown as follows.
only the largest portions of left waveform can

be seen.
135/240 AFC (135 lane) or 135 AFC.
Priority
G050982

4. Adjust the scroll bar, Display Area,
(3) Adjust Threshold so that the middle of the peak

of the waveform crosses the red line which
indicates the threshold.

135/240 AFC (135 lane)
135 AFC
120 AFC
110 AFC
IMPORTANT
parts using tapes.
8031
3232
S3229-01-SM02
5. Check that the difference of Number of
Pixels Exceeding the Threshold of

left/right graph is within the value indicated in
the table below.
IMPORTANT
No need for adjust the result as OK. It is no
problem when the value is with in the value in
the table.
3/4
3. Mode
Tapes
3232
When the value of the 135/240 AFC (135

lane) or 135 AFC is less than the following
value, checkings the Light Axis Adjustment
of the 120 AFC and 110 AFC are not
required.
135/240 AFC (135 lane)
Difference of G values
when adjusting the light
axis
37 pixels
135 AFC
120 AFC
28 pixels
110 AFC
28 pixels
3. Mode

IMPORTANT
chart.
3232
4/4
3233
! Focus Value
Focus Adjustment
Enter the focus value.

Adjustment Focus Adjustment
! Resolution
The resolution of the waveform selected in Graph of Display
is calculated and displayed for each B, G, and R.
! F: Function
! Magnification Change
Changes the magnification rate of the scanner zoom lens.
3. Mode
! Auto Focus Adjustment

Carry out the auto focus adjustment.
! Result Display
Display the result of the auto focus adjustment.
! Adjustment
S3230-01-SM00
! Explanation
Correct the deviation of the focus differing from the scanning
height of each film mask.
After replacing or adding the film mask, the focus adjustment
is required.
IMPORTANT
Before carrying out Focus Adjustment, Light
Source Registration is required.
1. Focus Adjustment mode starts.

IMPORTANT
parts using tapes.
! Graph
! Display

MMC and AMC set the scanner adjustment
chart (mount) and adjust it.
When the scanner adjustment chart (Mount)
is used, position the chart with the triangle
marks faced the end.

2500)
magnified.
The adjustment chart is a service personnel

tool. Refer to Service personnel tool list.
8031

magnified.
# Graph
check box.
IMPORTANT
When the focus adjustment is to be carried out,
be sure to do at G only.
3233
1/3
3233

135/240 MMC, 135/240 AMC
(1) Increasing the value in Display Area

(Horizontal) to widen the display area of the
graph as the figure.
Adjustment chart
Waveform B, G, R for the
light axis check
G050982
so that the relation between the waveform of

the graph and the longitudinal red and blue
lines in the graphs is shown as follows.
Waveform B, G, R for the

focus adjustment
G060698
(2) Check whether all of the waveforms B, G, R for

the light axis check and the focus adjustment
are shown. If the waveform cannot be seen,
adjust it with Adjust (L) and Adjust (R) .
IMPORTANT
135/240 AFC, 135 AFC, 120 AFC, 110 AFC

(2) Using the Standard Position key, carry out

adjustment so that the three waveforms are in
between the blue lines and the fine waveforms
are in between the red lines.
line
For the 135/240 AMC and 135/240

MMC, the waveform may not be shown
because the positioning of the focus
adjustment chart(mount) which is set to
the MMC is not decided. In this case,
adjust the mount carrier by pressing
Adjust (L) and Adjust (R).

line
S3230-01-SM02
Adjust (L) and Adjust (R)

G060699
(3) Reset the value in Display Area (Horizontal) to

show only the waveform for the focus
adjustment .
(4) Using the Standard Position key, carry out

adjustment so that the three waveforms are in
3233
2/3
3. Mode
Tapes
3233
between the blue lines and the fine waveforms

are in between the red lines.
line
3. Mode

line
S3230-01-SM02
4. Adjust the focus value so that the resolution

of the graph is approx. maximum.
5. Carry out Focus Auto Adjustment.

NOTE
Adjust the focus according to each film mask.
IMPORTANT
If the message The measurement failed.
appears, carry out the focus adjustment again
while the waveform is displayed in the graph.
6. Enter the magnification rate which is not
registered to Focus Auto Adjustment using

Magnification Change in Functions.
NOTE
Set Magnification Change for each film mask.
The magnification rate which is not registered to
Focus Auto Adjustment can be checked using
Result in Functions.
The focus value is displayed for the magnification
rate which is already registered. - is displayed for
the magnification rate which is not registered. And
nothing appears if there is no need for set the item.
7. Carry out Focus Auto Adjustment.
3233
3/3
3701
About PC
About PC
BIOS setting (QSS-3001)

Described for each model
The BIOS setting differs depending on the model, refer to the following.
For QSS-3011, refer to BIOS setting (QSS-3011).
IMPORTANT
When the operation below has carried out, the setting and confirmation of BIOS are required.
When the lithium battery is replaced (Reset the setting.)
COMSClear is required when replacing the lithium battery or resetting the BIOS of Mother board.
6521
3. Mode
! BIOS setting (QSS-3001)
1. Turn on the circuit breaker.

2. When Press F1 for Configuration/Setup appears on the display monitor, press F1 in the keyboard
immediately.
IMPORTANT
If the F1 is pressed more than one time, the HELP display of BIOS appears. When the HELP display appears,
press the ESC to bring up the BIOS display.
3. Select Loading the Default Setting via the Main Menu display to read the default setting value.
4. Change each setting below in the Main Menu display.
IMPORTANT
When the Wake Up Event setting of Modem Ring Power On is Enable, change it to Disable.
The setting items, except for that indicated below, may be different from each machine, however there is no
need for changing the default settings.
Classification
Date and Time
Power Managemnt Settings
Item
Setting
Date
Set the current date.
Time
Set the current time.
Wake Up Event / Modem Ring Power On
Disable
5. Select Saving the setting via the Main Menu display to save the value.
6. After all the setting of the items has finished, restart the PC by selecting Exiting the System Setup
Utility via the Main Menu display.
3701
1/2
3701
About PC
BIOS setting (QSS-3011)

IMPORTANT
When the operation below has carried out, the setting and confirmation of BIOS are required.
When the lithium battery is replaced (Reset the setting.)
COMSClear is required when replacing the lithium battery or resetting the BIOS of Mother board.
6521
! BIOS setting (QSS-3011)
3. Mode

2. When Press DEL to enter SETUP appears on the display monitor, press Delete on the keyboard
immediately.
3. Select Load Optimized Defaults via the Exit display to read the default setting value.
4. Carry out changing the following items.
IMPORTANT
The setting items, except for that indicated below, may be different from each machine, however there is no
need for changing the default settings.
Menu
Sub Menu
Main
Advanced
Advanced BIOS Features

Processor Features
Power Management
Boot
Item
Setting
Date
Set the current date.
Time
Set the current time.
Halt On
All errors
Full Screen LOGO Show
Disabled
CPU Clock Ratio
15
Wake-Up by PCI card
Disabled
Power On by Ring
Disabled
Wake Up On LAN
Disabled
Boot Other Device
Disabled
5. After completing the all settings, save the setting values and restart the PC by selecting Save &
ExitSetup via the Exit display.
3701
2/2
3801
About PC
7. After restarting the computer, Windows
Procedure for recovery
Setup starts, and after the setup is finished,

the computer restarts automatically.
The recovery media is only for English.
NOTE
No need for enter the product ID or the like.
After the recovery, the hard disk has no optional

software and Windows2000 has already been set up
If the error repeats, check and replace the recovery

CD, the CD drive and HDD if necessary.
IMPORTANT
8. When bringing up Japanese display, set the
! Installation procedures
keyboard.
NOTE
No need for setting the keyboard when bringing
up English display.
Prepare the following items.

1. Recovery CD (Disk 1 of 2)
NOTE
Disk 2 of 2 is ready for chaning the setting of
Windows 2000. It is unnecessary at present.
9. When bringing up Japanese display, set the

language.
NOTE
No need for setting the language when bringing up
English display.
2. QSS software CD
3. Profile data CD
4. Backup FD
10. Install the QSS software.
5. FB scanner driver CD
3850
NOTE
Skip this step when the FB scanner is not installed.
11. Assign the drive.

3871
6. DVD-RAM driver CD
12. Install the profile data.
NOTE
This is unnecessary for QSS-3001 that the DVDRAM (option) is not attached and for QSS-3011.
3860
13. Install the CD Viewer Utility.

Installing CD Viewer Utility
1. Turn on the computer switch and insert the
14. Install the Zip driver.
Disk1 of 2.
3873
2. After the Recovery CD Menu display
NOTE
Skip this step when the Zip drive (optional) is not
installed.
appears, select 1:SystemRecover for

Rxxx-xx.
NOTE
Press the key to stop the recovery.
15. Install the DVD-RAM driver.

3870
3. The Easy Restore display appears. Click
NOTE
This is unnecessary for QSS-3001 that the DVDRAM (option) is not attached and for QSS-3011.
Continue.
NOTE
When canceling the recovery, click Cancel.
16. Install the FB scanner driver.
4. The WARNING! display appears. Click Yes.
3872
NOTE
When canceling the recovery, click No.
17. Read the backup data.

3169
5. The files are copied.
NOTE
Install the optional software, logo data (special order) or
Adobe Photoshop if necessary.
NOTE
It takes about 10 minutes.
6. If the files were copied without any error
! Installing CD Viewer Utility
message, remove the CD and restart the

personal computer.
1. Insert the QSS software CD-ROM into the
IMPORTANT
If any error occurs, the recovery fails. Start it
again from the first step.
NOTE
Enter recov with the keyboard and press the enter
key to return to Step 2.
3801
CD-ROM drive, or into the CD-R/RW drive.

IMPORTANT
Do not touch the recording surface (opposite
to the label side) of the disk, nor put a metal
item, finger print, scratch, dust or moisture to
1/2
3. Mode
3801
About PC
8. Click "Upgrade Driver..." to bring up the
it. The recorded data may be damaged

(erased).
2. Double-click My Computer on the display.

3. Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.
4. Double-click the CD Viewer Utility folder.
5. Double-click the Setup.exe file.
The Installshield Wizard display for CD Viewer
Utility appears.
"Upgrade Device Driver Wizard", and then

click NEXT.
9. Select Display a list of the know drivers***

using Control, and then click NEXT.
10. Click "Show all hardware of device class"
and select PC/AT Enhanced PS/2 Keyboard

(101/102-Key). Then click NEXT.
11. On the "Update Driver Warning" display,
6. Click Next.
click YES.
The Program folder selection display appears.
7. Set the program folder as CD Viewer Utility,

the existing folder as Accessories, then
click Next.
12. When the Start Device Driver Installation

display appears, click NEXT.
13. When the Confirm Device Install display

appears, click YES.
Installation starts.
14. Click Finish.

15. Click Close.
16. On the "System Setting Change" display,
8. Click Finish.
9. Register the CD Viewer Utility data.
Refer to CD Viewer Utility Operator's Manual.
click Yes.
! Setting the language
17. The computer restarts automatically.
1. Open Control Panel via My Computer, and

then double-click Regional Options.
2. Select the General tab.

3. Select your language from Language
setting for*** and press the Set as Default

button.
4. Select your language on the Select system

Local display, and then click OK.
5. Similarly, select a language for Your locale

location, and then click the Apply button.
6. Select the Input Locales tab.

7. Select your language from Input language
via Installed input locales and press the
Set as Default button.
8. Click OK.
! Keyboard setting
1. Right-click My Computer and select

Properties.
2. Click the Hardware tab.

3. Click Device Manager... of Device Manager.
4. Double-click Keyboards.
5. Double-click the displayed device and open
the property.
6. Double-click Keyboards.
7. Select the Driver tab.
3801
2/2
3. Mode
3850
About PC
6. After the Select Program Folder display
Procedure for installing the QSS

software
appears, check that the Program Folders:

has been set to QSS-30 and the Existing
Folders: has been set to Accessories.
Then click Next>.
7. Installation starts.
8. If the Read only file detection display
To install newly
We explain the procedure for installing the QSS software after
recovery of computer. After installation, proceed operations
according to the recovery procedure.
Procedure for recovery
3801
1. Insert the QSS software CD into the CD-
ROM drive, start Setup.exe in the CD-ROM.
2. When the Choose Setup Language display

appears, check that the appropriate
language has been selected, then click OK.
3. When the InstallShield Wizard display
appears, click Yes.
9. When the InstallShield Wizard Complete

display appears, check that Yes, I want to
restart my computer now. has been
selected, then click Finish.
10. After restarting the computer, the QSS
software starts, and software upgrade of

peripheral is automatically done.
3. Mode
11. Click No: Cancel after the upgrade of

peripheral unit.
appears, click Next.
4. After the Select Program Folder display
appears, check that the Program Folders:

has been set to QSS-30 and the Existing
Folders: has been set to Accessories.
Then click Next>.
6. When the InstallShield Wizard Complete
display appears, check that Yes, I want to
restart my computer now. has been
selected, then click Finish.
7. After restarting the computer, the QSS
software starts, and software upgrade of

peripheral is automatically done.
8. Restart the computer.

(1) Shut down the computer.
(2) Turn off the circuit breaker, and turn it on again.
(3) Press the system switch to start the personal
computer.
To upgrade the QSS software

Follow the instructions listed below.
1. Backup the data of the machine.

3169
2. Quit the QSS software.

3. Insert the QSS software CD into the CD-
ROM drive, start Setup.exe in the CD-ROM.
4. When the Choose Setup Language display

appears, check that the appropriate
language has been selected, then click OK.
5. When the InstallShield Wizard display

3850
1/1
3860
About PC
Procedure for installing the profile

data
1. Quit the QSS software and bring up the

Windows screen.
2. Insert the profile data CD into the CD-ROM
drive and start "Setup.exe" in the CD-ROM.
3. When the Welcome display appears, click

Next.
3. Mode
4. When the Machine type selection display
appears, check the checkbox of the relevant

machine to which the software is to be
installed, and then click Next.
5. When the File copy starts display appears,

click Next.
7. When the Setup Completion display
8. Shut down the system.

9. Turn off the circuit breaker of the main body,
and then turn it on again.
3860
1/1
3861
About PC
12. The Digital Signature Not found display
Installing the SCSI driver
appears.
Click Yes.
IMPORTANT
13. Click Finish.

For QSS-3011, installation of the SCSI driver is

unnecessary.
IMPORTANT
printer processor section.
2. If the QSS software is running, quit it. Bring

up the Windows screen.
3. After Windows2000 starts, the Welcome to

the Upgrade DeviceDriver Wizard display
appears.
(2) After the circuit breaker is turned OFF, turn ON

it again, then turn ON the power switch.
3. Mode
1. When the power is turned OFF, activate the
When starting the application software

again, shut down the personal
computer, then turn OFF the circuit
breaker.
Click Cancel.
4. Select Computer Management.

My Computer Controlpanel Administrative
Tools Computer Management
5. Select Device maneger and select the
device from that displayed below Other

Option.
6. Select the Driver tab, and select Update

Driver.
7. The Welcome to the Upgrade Device

Driver Wizard display appears.
Click Next.
8. Put the checkmark to Search for a suitable

driver for my device.
Click Next.
9. Put a checkmark to Floppy disk drive and

insert the enclosed floppy disk to the disk
drive.
IMPORTANT
Do not put any other checkmarks.
Click Next.
10. The installation starts. Put a checkmark to

Install one of the other drives.
Click Next.
11. Select Adaptec SCSI card 2915LP/2930LP

for Description.
(1) Select Adaptec SCSI card 2915LP/2930LP

for Description.
(2) Select a:\win2000\adf6ul60\adf6ul160.inf for

Location.
(3) Click Next.
3861
1/1
3870
Procedure of installing the DVDRAM driver
About PC
NOTE
In Japanese, the letters may be garbled. For
checking, select ForematFont, and then
select MS Gothic.
(13) Click Finish.
IMPORTANT
The message to recommend restarting the

computer appears.
For QSS-3011, installation of the DVD-RAM driver is

unnecessary.
(14) Click No.
After installing the DVD driver, you should assign the

drive.
3871
6. Double-click My Computer.

Check that the DVD drive is recognized as CD drive

or Removable disk.

(1) Insert the enclosed CD-ROM into the CD-ROM
drive, or into the CD-R/RW drive.
IMPORTANT

IMPORTANT
Do not touch the recording surface

(opposite to the label side) of the disk,
nor put a metal item, finger print,
scratch, dust or moisture to it. The
recorded data may be damaged
(erased).
(2) Double-click My Computer on the display.

(3) Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.
(4) Double-click the SETUP.EXE file.
When starting the application software

again, shut down the personal
computer, then turn OFF the circuit
breaker.
(2) After the circuit breaker is turned OFF, turn ON

it again, then turn ON the power switch.
DVD-RAM Software Setup appears.
(5) Click Installation software for DVD-RAM

drive.
The dialog will appear.
(6) Click Install.

The Welcome display appears.
(7) Click Next.

The Product license agreement display
appears.
(8) Click Yes.

The Instead destination selection display
appears.
(9) Click Next.

(10) Click Next.

The File copy start display appears.
(11) Click Next.

The DVD-RAM driver is copied, and Readme
2K appears.
(12) Click the crisscross on the top-right corner to

close Readme 2K.
The Setup Completion display will appear.
3870
1/1
3. Mode

3871
About PC
Check the drive assignment
In case of QSS-3011
Drive
Compact Flash
Check the assignment of each drive.
Drive type
SCSI
(Port3, Target ID:4, LUN:0)
Example: Zip drive
Turn on the main power supply and turn on the circuit

breaker.
2. Quit applications.
3. Check the drive map for each installed drive.
3. Mode
(1) Right-click My Computer.

(2) Select Manage.
Computer Management appears.
(3) Select Disk Management.

The name of the drives which are currently installed
are displayed from Disk0 to Disk5 and from
CDRom0 to CDRom1 on the right of the display.
(4) Right-click the Disk# (#: relevant number).

(5) Select Properties.
The properties of the drive is displayed. Check the
assignment of the drive.
G052740
IMPORTANT
Example: SCSI drives
Drive type differs depending on the model.

In case of QSS-3001
Drive
Drive type
Zip drive
IDE
MO drive
SCSI
CD-ROM drive
CD-R/RW drive
IDE
PC card
SCSI
SmartMedia
SCSI
Compact Flash
SCSI
DVD-RAM drive
SCSI
G052741
In case of QSS-3011
Drive
Drive type
Zip drive
IDE
MO drive
SCSI
CD-R/RW drive
IDE
PC card
SCSI
SmartMedia
SCSI
4. Take notes of the drive name and the attached

drive.
5. Carry out settings of Media of Option

Registration.
IMPORTANT
To restart the application, shut down the computer and
reset the circuit breaker. Then on the circuit breaker
again.
The application will not start only after the computer has
shut down.
Drive A (floppy disk drive) and drive C (hard disk drive)
are fixed. You do not have to change the setting.
3871
1/1
3872
About PC
17. Select General.

18. Click Next.
19. Click Finish and remove the CD-ROM from
Procedure for installing the FB

scanner driver
the CD-ROM or CD-R/RW drive.


breaker.


computer.
21. Connect the flatbed scanner to the personal

computer using the USB cable.
22. After rebooting the computer, the message
IMPORTANT
Disconnect the USB cable between the
flatbed scanner and the personal computer
before installing the driver.
Digital Signature not Found appears. Click

YES.
4. Insert the enclosed CD-ROM into the CDROM drive, or into the CD-R/RW drive.
IMPORTANT
(erased).

7. Double-click the SETUP.EXE file.
The UMAX CD setup program display appears.
8. Select a language of the software to be

installed.
9. Click Next.
10. On the Software Selection display, select
VistaScan TWAIN driver only.
IMPORTANT
Three other software other than VistaScan
TWAIN driver are selected. Cancel the
selections of those other than VistaScan
TWAIN driver.
11. Click Next.

The Acrobat Reader 4.0 Setup display appears.
12. Click Cancel.

The Canceling Acrobat Reader 4.0 Setup display
appears.
13. Click Yes.

14. Carry out VistaScan Setup.
15. Click Next.
The Software License Agreement display appears.
16. Click Yes.

The VistaScan Setup display appears.
3872
1/1
3. Mode
3873
About PC
Installing the Zip driver



breaker.

3. Insert the QSS software CD-ROM into the
3. Mode
CD-ROM drive, or into the CD-R/RW drive.

IMPORTANT
(erased).

6. Double-click the ioware-w32-x86-28.exe
file.
The Welcome display appears.
7. Click Next>.
The Software Licence Agreement display appears.
8. Click YES.
The Choose Destination Location display appears.
9. Click Next>.
The Finished display appears.
10. Click Close.

The Iomega Software Setup display appears.
11. Select Shut Down Later and click OK.

computer.
3873
1/2
3873
About PC
3. Mode
3873
2/2
Troubleshooting
Attention message: Processor ............................................................................................... 4001
No. 0500 [N] Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. .....................................................................................4001
No. 0501 [N] The replenisher switch is turned on. ..........................................................................................4001
No. 0502 [N] Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. .............................................................4002
No. 0503
Empty the Effluent Tank. .................................................................................................................4002
No. 0504 The Effluent Concentration Tank is full. ...........................................................................................4003

No. 0507 Close the Processor Top Cover. .........................................................................................................4004
No. 0508 Paper remains in the processor. Are you sure you want to turn the drive off? ..................................4005
No. 0515 Set the Rack Stopper. .........................................................................................................................4010
No. 0516 Remove the prints from Conveyor Unit 2. ........................................................................................4010
No. 0517 Attach Conveyor Unit 1. ....................................................................................................................4011
No. 0518 Set the Dryer Cover. ..........................................................................................................................4011
Attention message: SM replenishment .................................................................................. 4041

No. 0700-## [SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# ..................................................4041
No. 0701-## [SM] Attach the Replenishment Package.P-# .............................................................................4041
No. 0702 [SM]
Add water to the Water Supply Tank. .....................................................................................4042
No. 0705-## [SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# ..................................................4043
4000
1/11
4 Troubleshooting
4.
4000
4000
Attention message: Printer .................................................................................................... 4101

No. 1000 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A .................................................................4101
No. 1001 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B ..................................................................4101
No. 1002 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper magazine A ............................................4101
No. 1003 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper magazine B ............................................4101
No. 1004 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A ...............................................................................4102
No. 1005 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B ...............................................................................4102
No. 1010 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A ..............................................................................4104
No. 1011 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B ..............................................................................4104
No. 1012 The print channel is not set. Confirm the print channel. ..................................................................4104
No. 1013 Outputting. . . .....................................................................................................................................4105
No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . .....................................................................4105
No. 1015 One moment please. . . .......................................................................................................................4106
No. 1017 Would you like to stop printing? .......................................................................................................4107
No. 1027-## Profile data was not found. ...........................................................................................................4114
No. 1029 The measurement failed. Measure it again. .......................................................................................4115
No. 1030 Wait until printing is complete. .........................................................................................................4116
No. 1031 Paper Specification Registration Setup was not completed. .............................................................4117
No. 1032 One moment please. . . .......................................................................................................................4117
No. 1035 Paper Magazine Registration Setup is not completed. ......................................................................4119
No. 1036 Paper type for the attached magazine is not set. Paper Magazine A ................................................4120
No. 1037 Paper type for the attached magazine is not set. Paper Magazine B ................................................4120
No. 1038 Paper type for the magazine is not set. ..............................................................................................4121
No. 1039 Paper type specification is not set. .....................................................................................................4121
No. 1040 Press the [ORDER] key. ....................................................................................................................4122
No. 1041 No more printing can be done for this order. Order will count up. ..................................................4122
No. 1043 Laser temperature is being adjusted. One moment please. . . ...........................................................4123
No. 1045 Close the Paper Advance Door. .........................................................................................................4124
No. 1046 Change the Paper Magazine. .............................................................................................................4125
No. 1047 Close the printer door. .......................................................................................................................4125
No. 1048 Press the [ORDER] key. Wait until output has completed. ..............................................................4126
No. 1049 Execute Auto Tuning. ........................................................................................................................4126
Attention message: Scanner ................................................................................................. 4132

No. 1302 Would you like to stop scanning? ......................................................................................................4132
No. 1305 Photometry Section may be dirty. .....................................................................................................4134
No. 1306 Update the light source. If film remains in the Film Carrier, remove it. ..........................................4134
No. 1307 Scanner Light Source is weak. ...........................................................................................................4135
No. 1308 Execute the light source registration. If film remains in the Film Carrier, remove it. .....................4135
No. 1312 Close the Lamphouse Cover. .............................................................................................................4137
No. 1313 The Focus Adjustment was not completed yet. .................................................................................4137
4000
2/11
4 Troubleshooting
No. 1028 More than 3 correction keys of low, middle or high density area. Execute correction? ...................4115
4000
Attention message: Film carrier ............................................................................................. 4150

No. 1400 Lock the Film Carrier. .......................................................................................................................4150
No. 1401 Attach the Film Carrier. .....................................................................................................................4151
No. 1402 Attach the 135/240 AFC. ...................................................................................................................4151
No. 1403 Undeveloped cartridge. Cannot print. ................................................................................................4153
No. 1404 The IX frame data is incomplete. ......................................................................................................4153
No. 1405-## Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier. ................................................................................4154
No. 1409 Set the lane for the Film Carrier. .......................................................................................................4156
No. 1410 Confirm the film stop position in the Film Carrier. ...........................................................................4156
No. 1412 The film is upside down. Would you like to continue printing? .......................................................4158
No. 1413 Input the frame number .....................................................................................................................4158
No. 1414 The FID number was not detected. ....................................................................................................4159
No. 1417 Close the Mount Insertion Cover. ......................................................................................................4160
No. 1420 Select the DX code. ...........................................................................................................................4164
No. 1421 Confirm the stop position of all the frames to be printed. .................................................................4164
No. 1422 Select the 135 lane. ............................................................................................................................4165
No. 1423 Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment. Remove the film from the Film Carrier. ...........4165
No. 1424 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is being executed. ..............................................................4165
No. 1425 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is complete. .......................................................................4165
No. 1426 Attach the 110 AFC. ..........................................................................................................................4166
No. 1427 Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment. If film remains in the Film Carrier, remove it. .4166
No. 1428 Remove the mount from the Film Carrier. ........................................................................................4167
No. 1429 Make sure that the mount is placed correctly. ...................................................................................4167
No. 1430 Confirm the frame size. .....................................................................................................................4168
No. 1432 Attach the MMC. ...............................................................................................................................4169
No. 1433 Attach the AMC. ................................................................................................................................4170
No. 1435 Insertion direction of film is different. Insert the film from the rear end (end with largest frame number).
..............................................................................................................................................................................4171
4000
3/11
4 Troubleshooting
No. 1416 Select the 240 lane. ............................................................................................................................4160
4000
Attention message: Disk/Media ............................................................................................. 4181

No. 1501 The media is write protected.#### .....................................................................................................4181
No. 1502 Replace the media.#### .....................................................................................................................4182
No. 1503 The appropriate file was not found.#### ...........................................................................................4182
No. 1510 Read the data. Set the media. ............................................................................................................4188
No. 1511 Write the data. Set the media. ...........................................................................................................4188
No. 1512 Data was not read from the media. ....................................................................................................4189
No. 1513 Data was not written to the media. Format the media? ....................................................................4189
No. 1514 Set the template media then select the media type. ...........................................................................4190
No. 1515 Data is too large to write. ...................................................................................................................4190
No. 1516 Data is too large to read. ....................................................................................................................4191
No. 1517 Invalid image format. Failed to read. .................................................................................................4191
No. 1518 Output media is the same as Input media. Select different one. .......................................................4192
No. 1519 Data was not written to the media. Format the media? ....................................................................4192
No. 1520 Select the template. ............................................................................................................................4193
No. 1522 Are you sure to print the previous frame except selected one? .........................................................4194
No. 1523 It was not registered as an option. .....................................................................................................4194
No. 1527 Write the data. Set the media. ..................................................................................................... 4195-01
No. 1528 Registered Print Channel is not for normal printing. ................................................................... 4195-01
No. 1532 Write the data. .............................................................................................................................. 4195-03
No. 1533 Data was saved to the storage media. .......................................................................................... 4195-04
No. 1534 Data was not written to the Hard Disk. Would you like to delete the image file(s)? ................. 4195-04
No. 1540 Data is being saved to the storage media. One moment please. . . ...................................................4196
No. 1547 Data was saved to the storage media. Remove the media. ...............................................................4197
No. 1548 Hard disk is full. Would you like to delete the image file(s)? ..........................................................4197
No. 1549 Data is too small to read. ...................................................................................................................4198
Attention message: Colorimeter ............................................................................................ 4201

No. 1550 Register the Calibration Plate Data. ...................................................................................................4201
No. 1551 The calibration plate data is out of range. Register the data? ............................................................4201
No. 1552-## The paper in the Colorimeter is too short. It cannot be measured. ...............................................4202
Attention message: Pricing unit ............................................................................................. 4221

No. 1600-## Reload the Pricing Unit. ...............................................................................................................4221
No. 1601-## Turn on the Pricing Unit. ..............................................................................................................4221
No. 1602-## The rest 10 order could be kept by the Pricing Unit. ...................................................................4222
No. 1603-## The rest 2 order could be kept by the Pricing Unit. .....................................................................4222
No. 1604-## Pricing Sheet Print Out Check ......................................................................................................4223
Attention message: NMC ....................................................................................................... 4225

No. 1620 New mail has arrived. ........................................................................................................................4225
Attention message: Software Upgrade .................................................................................. 4228

No. 1801-#### Execute software upgrade. .......................................................................................................4228
4000
4/11
4 Troubleshooting
No. 1521 Template information does not match to make the Album Print. ......................................................4193
4000
Attention message: Main ....................................................................................................... 4250

No. 1900 It was not registered as an option. .....................................................................................................4250
No. 1901 Selected optional function is not available. If you need to use, Install it. ........................................4251
No. 1902 Adobe Photoshop is being used. To enter Menu, Quit the Adobe Photoshop. .................................4251
No. 1903-#### Proceeding. One moment please. . . .........................................................................................4252
No. 1904-#### Proceeding. One moment please. . . .........................................................................................4252
No. 1905 Program timer was not set. ................................................................................................................4253
No. 1907 Select one frame. ...............................................................................................................................4254
Attention message: Edit ......................................................................................................... 4401

No. 4001 Are you sure about deleting? .............................................................................................................4401
No. 4002 Red Eye Correction cannot be executed no more. .............................................................................4401
No. 4003-## Image cannot be inserted into the specified position. ..................................................................4402
No. 4006 Prints cannot be made with this Print Channel. Select a Print Channel using a larger paper width. 4404
No. 4007 The Letter Information was not read successfully. ............................................................................4404
No. 4010 Specify the image area. ......................................................................................................................4406
No. 4011 Are you sure you want to exit? ..........................................................................................................4406
No. 4012 No more UNDO can be executed. .....................................................................................................4407
No. 4014 The saved data cannot be read with this version. ..............................................................................4408
No. 4015 Selected file already exists. ................................................................................................................4408
No. 4017 The head and jaw position is opposite, or the selected region is too small. ......................................4409
No. 4018 Would you like to quit the Edit Mode? .............................................................................................4409
No. 4019 If you Import, all customer information will be deleted. Are you sure you want to Import? ..........4410
No. 4020 Failed to write the file. .......................................................................................................................4410
No. 4021 Failed to read the file. ........................................................................................................................4411
No. 4023 Image magnification ratio or reduction ratio is out of range. ............................................................4412
No. 4024 Select the layer. ..................................................................................................................................4412
No. 4025 This template has more than 16 layers. You cannot use this template. ............................................4413
4000
5/11
4 Troubleshooting
No. 4009 Template file was not found. Select the folder including the files. ..................................................4405
4000
Error message: Processor ..................................................................................................... 4461

No. 5500 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. CD .................................................4461
No. 5501 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. BF ..................................................4461
No. 5502 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. STB ...............................................4461
No. 5503 The dryer temperature is above the safety range. ..............................................................................4461
No. 5504 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. CD .........................................4462
No. 5505 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. BF ..........................................4462
No. 5506 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. STB .......................................4462
No. 5507 The dryer temperature is below the processing range. ......................................................................4462
No. 5508 [N] The processing solution level is too low. ...................................................................................4463
No. 5508 [SM]
The processing solution level is too low. ................................................................................4463
No. 5509 The circulation amount has decreased. ..............................................................................................4464

No. 5510 Processor A/D conversion error. ........................................................................................................4464
No. 5511 [N] The circulation pump has stopped. CD ......................................................................................4465
No. 5513 [N] The circulation pump has stopped. BF .......................................................................................4465
No. 5516 [N] The circulation pump has stopped. STB2 ..................................................................................4465
No. 5511 [SM]
The circulation pump has stopped. CD ...................................................................................4465
No. 5513 [SM]
The circulation pump has stopped. BF ....................................................................................4465
No. 5515 [SM]
The circulation pump has stopped.STB1 ................................................................................4465
No. 5516 [SM]
The circulation pump has stopped. STB2 ...............................................................................4465
No. 5517 [SM]
No. 5518 [SM]
Error message: Processor ..................................................................................................... 4466

No. 5519 Thermosensor error. CD ....................................................................................................................4466
No. 5520 Thermosensor error. BF .....................................................................................................................4466
No. 5521 Thermosensor error. STB ..................................................................................................................4466
No. 5522 Dryer thermosensor error. ..................................................................................................................4466
No. 5523 Inner Thermosensor error. .................................................................................................................4467
No. 5524 Refilling water operation error. CD-W ..............................................................................................4467
No. 5525 Refilling water operation error. BF-W ..............................................................................................4467
No. 5526 Refilling water operation error. STB1-W ..........................................................................................4467
No. 5530 The Processor Top Cover is open. .....................................................................................................4468
No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. ...............................................................4468
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. ......................................................................................4469
No. 5535 Paper has jammed in the processor section. ......................................................................................4470
No. 5537 The Rack Stopper is not set. ..............................................................................................................4472
No. 5538 Backup data error. Processor ............................................................................................................4473
No. 5540 Print Conveyor 1 operation error. ......................................................................................................4475
No. 5541 Print Conveyor 1 was removed. .........................................................................................................4476
No. 5542 Laser Unit Thermosensor error. .........................................................................................................4476
No. 5543 The dryer cover is removed. ..............................................................................................................4477
No. 5544 Failed to turn ON the PC when the machine started up. ...................................................................4477
4000
6/11
4 Troubleshooting
4000
Error message: SM replenishment ........................................................................................ 4521

No. 5700-## [SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-A .....................................................................4521
No. 5701-## [SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-B .....................................................................4521
No. 5702-## [SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-C .....................................................................4521
No. 5703-## [SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-W ....................................................................4521
No. 5704-## [SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-A .....................................................................4521
No. 5705-## [SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-B ......................................................................4521
No. 5706-## [SM] Replenishment pump operation error. STB .......................................................................4521
Refilling water operation error. CD-W ...................................................................................4522
No. 5711 [SM]
Refilling water operation error. BF-W ....................................................................................4522
No. 5712 [SM]
Refilling water operation error. STB1-W ...............................................................................4522
No. 5713 [SM]
No. 0500 [SM]
No. 5715 [SM]
4 Troubleshooting
No. 5710 [SM]
4000
7/11
4000
Error message: Printer .......................................................................................................... 4607

No. 6012-## Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A ........................................................................................4607
No. 6013-## Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B ........................................................................................4607
No. 6014-## Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A ....................................................................................4607
No. 6015-## Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B ....................................................................................4607
No. 6016-## Paper Cutter operation error. ........................................................................................................4608
No. 6017-## Paper has jammed in the printer section. ......................................................................................4608
No. 6021-## Paper remains in the printer section. ............................................................................................4611
No. 6034-## Paper has jammed in the Paper Advance Section. .......................................................................4619
No. 6054 The Initial Setup was not executed. ...................................................................................................4626
No. 6056 Printer system error. ...........................................................................................................................4627
No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error. .................................................................................................................4644
No. 6074 B Laser control error. .........................................................................................................................4644
No. 6075 G Laser control error. ........................................................................................................................4644
No. 6076 Polygon Mirror control error. ............................................................................................................4645
No. 6081 Backup data error. Printer .................................................................................................................4649
No. 6082-### Setup error. .................................................................................................................................4650
No. 6083 Setup data error. .................................................................................................................................4651
No. 6084 Setup data error (High density area). .................................................................................................4651
No. 6086 Setup print error. ................................................................................................................................4652
No. 6090-## R Laser Thermosensor error. ........................................................................................................4659
No. 6091-## Arm Unit operation error. .............................................................................................................4660
No. 6092-## Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. ...................................................................................4660
No. 6095-## Reverse Unit (Left) Horizontal operation error. ...........................................................................4661
No. 6096-## Reverse Unit (Right) Horizontal operation error. ........................................................................4661
No. 6097-## Reverse Unit (Left) Elevator operation error. ..............................................................................4662
No. 6098-## Reverse Unit (Right) Elevator operation error. ............................................................................4662
No. 6100-## Paper Advance Door is open. .......................................................................................................4663
No. 6101-## Paper Hold Motor operation error. ...............................................................................................4663
No. 6104 Printer Door is open. ..........................................................................................................................4665
No. 6105 B Laser light source status error. .......................................................................................................4665
No. 6106 G Laser light source status error. .......................................................................................................4665
No. 6107 R Laser temperature is out of range. ..................................................................................................4666
No. 6111 Auto Tuning error. .............................................................................................................................4668
4000
8/11
4 Troubleshooting
No. 6080 Paper Magazine is different. ..............................................................................................................4649
4000
Error message: Scanner ........................................................................................................ 4681

No. 6300 Scanner Light Source Section Safety Thermostat was activated. ......................................................4681
No. 6302-## Scanner Filter operation error. ......................................................................................................4682
No. 6303-## Scanner Zoom 1 operation error. ..................................................................................................4682
No. 6304-## Scanner Zoom 2 operation error. ..................................................................................................4682
No. 6305-## Scanner Focus operation error. .....................................................................................................4683
No. 6306-## Scanner Iris operation error. .........................................................................................................4683
No. 6307 Scanner Measurement Value error. ...................................................................................................4684
No. 6308-## Scanner light source registration error. ........................................................................................4684
No. 6309-## Scanner change of light error. ......................................................................................................4685
No. 6310-## Scanner area registration error. ....................................................................................................4685
No. 6311-## Scanner data error. ........................................................................................................................4686
No. 6313-## CCD check error. ..........................................................................................................................4687
No. 6314 Setup Filter dispersion correction error (Negative). ..........................................................................4688
No. 6315 Setup Filter dispersion correction error (Positive). ............................................................................4688
No. 6317 Light source registration error (Positive). ..........................................................................................4688
No. 6318 CCD output characteristics error. ......................................................................................................4690
No. 6319 Backup data error. Scanner AFC ......................................................................................................4690
No. 6321 Focus auto adjustment error. ..............................................................................................................4692
No. 6322-## Scanner input balance error. .........................................................................................................4692
No. 6324 F stop value range error. ....................................................................................................................4693
No. 6326 The Lamphouse Cover is open. .........................................................................................................4694
4000
9/11
4 Troubleshooting
No. 6316 Light source registration error (Negative). ........................................................................................4688
4000
Error message: Film carrier ................................................................................................... 4731

No. 6400-## Perforation Sensor error.#### ......................................................................................................4731
No. 6401-## Loading Sensor error.#### ...........................................................................................................4731
No. 6402-## Ready Sensor error.#### ..............................................................................................................4732
No. 6403-## 135 film has stopped at the Film Carrier. .....................................................................................4732
No. 6407-## Spool Key operation error. ...........................................................................................................4734
No. 6408 The Film Carrier is unlocked. ............................................................................................................4735
No. 6409-## The 240 Head Cleaning Leader has stopped. ...............................................................................4735
No. 6410-## Film Sensor error.### ...................................................................................................................4736
No. 6411-## Film Carrier Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment was not executed. ...................................................4736
No. 6412-## 135 DX Sensor 1 error. .................................................................................................................4737
No. 6423 Auto focus error. ................................................................................................................................4740
No. 6424-## Mount Unit operation error. .........................................................................................................4740
No. 6425-## Mount detection error. ..................................................................................................................4741
No. 6426 The lane is out of position. ................................................................................................................4741
No. 6429 System error (AFC / Scanner control PCB). .....................................................................................4742
No. 6431 Auto focus error. ................................................................................................................................4744
No. 6432-## Mount Unit operation error. .........................................................................................................4745
No. 6433-## Mount detection error. ..................................................................................................................4745
No. 6434-## Mount detection (inlet) error. .......................................................................................................4746
No. 6435-## Mount insertion operation error. ..................................................................................................4746
No. 6436 Mount elevator operation error. .........................................................................................................4747
No. 6437-## Mount eject operation error. .........................................................................................................4747
No. 6438-## 135 Cleaning Leader has stopped. ................................................................................................4748
No. 6439-## The film strip is too short to be printed. .......................................................................................4748
Error message: Disk/Media ................................................................................................... 4782

No. 6503 Formatting could not be executed. .....................................................................................................4782
No. 6504 Backup data could not be read. ..........................................................................................................4782
No. 6505 Backup data could not be written. .....................................................................................................4783
No. 6506-## Hard disk is full. Delete the unnecessary image file(s). ..............................................................4783
Error message: Colorimeter .................................................................................................. 4801

No. 6551-## Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit. .................................................................................4801
No. 6552 Backup data error. Colorimeter Unit ................................................................................................4801
Error message: Pricing unit ................................................................................................... 4831

No. 6600-## Pricing Unit communication error. ...............................................................................................4831
No. 6601-## Pricing Unit operation error. ........................................................................................................4831
No. 6602-## Pricing Unit Printer operation error. .............................................................................................4832
No. 6603 Backup data error. PU .......................................................................................................................4832
Error message: Software upgrade ......................................................................................... 4854

No. 6803 Language version of message data is incorrect. Message display in English. .................................4854
4000
10/11
4 Troubleshooting
4000
Error message: Image processing PCB ................................................................................ 4861

No. 6820-## Image Processing PCB operation error. .......................................................................................4861
No. 6821 Print data error. ..................................................................................................................................4861
Error message: Communication ............................................................................................ 4870

No. 6900-## Main control system error. ...........................................................................................................4870
No. 6901-#### ARCNET communication error.######### ............................................................................4871
No. 6902-#### LVDS communication error.######### ..................................................................................4871
No. 6903-#### Serial communication error.########## .................................................................................4872
No. 6904-#### SCSI communication error.########## ..................................................................................4872
No. 6906-#### Failed to change the mode. Enter to the next mode? ...............................................................4874
No. 6907-#### The appropriate file was not found. ..........................................................................................4874
No. 6908-#### Processing communication error. .............................................................................................4875
No. 6909-#### CPU was reset. Abort the process. ..........................................................................................4875
No. 6913 System was shut down forcibly. Restart the system. ........................................................................4877
No. 9000-## Edit mode System error. ..............................................................................................................4971

No. 9001-## Edit mode Information file error. ................................................................................................4971
No. 9002-## Edit mode Image data error. ........................................................................................................4972
No. 9003-## Edit mode Image read error. ........................................................................................................4972
4000
11/11
4 Troubleshooting
Error message: Edit ............................................................................................................... 4971
4001
Attention message: Processor

No. 0500 [N]

Add water to the Refilling Water Tank.
No. 0501 [N]

The replenisher switch is turned on.
Attention message release

or automatic release
The replenishment switch turns ON by pressing the YES key.
Condition
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
The refilling water tank level sensor turns OFF.
After the replenishment switch was turned OFF, a

specified number of seconds of replenishment lack
time has passed.
After the replenishment switch was turned OFF, a

specified time has passed with the replenishment
solution sensor ON.
After the replenishment switch was turned OFF,

manual replenishment or output amount
measurement is carried out.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F27
Processor I/O PCB

Failed parts
Refilling water tank level sensor
Manual No.
6701
Manual No.
6181
Disconnect the connector of the refilling water tank level

sensor and measure the resistance between pins 1 and 2 on
the jack side when the water temperature is between 10C
and 35C. The level sensor is defective if the resistance is
not between 1.5 k and 4 k.
Condition
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
6701
6552
6801
Processor I/O PCB

Processor Control PCB
Power Supply
NOTE
Electrical circuit diagram for the reference
Circuit diagram
LPP1-6 DC power supply connecting 2

LPP3-2 Processor I/O PCB around (1)
Detailed diagram
LPP13-5 Refilling water block
4001
1/1
4002
No. 0502 [N]

Add replenishment solution to the
replenishment tank.
No. 0503
Empty the Effluent Tank.
This attention message will be automatically released when

the effluent tank is emptied.
Condition
Condition
Condition
Each replenishment solution level sensor turns OFF.
NOTE
The name of processing solution causing this attention
message will be displayed in the second line of the message.
CD, BF and STB
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F27
Processor I/O PCB

Failed parts
Replenishment solution level sensor
Manual No.
6701
Power Supply
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram
The effluent concentrator solution level detector of

the processing tank (effluent connecting tank) turns
OFF.
NOTE
The name of processing solution causing this attention
message will be displayed in the second line of the message.
CD, BF and STB
Manual No.
6181
6701
6552
6801
Condition
Check Point
Disconnect the connector of the replenishment solution level

sensor. If the resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the jack
side is not between 1.5 k and 4 k when the solution
temperature between is 10C and 35C, the level sensor is
defective.
Processor I/O PCB
Suffix
number
Check the solution level of the effluent tank.
Check if the float of the effluent float switch moves

up and down smoothly.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F29
Processor I/O PCB

Failed parts
Manual No.
6701
Manual No.
6181
Effluent float switch
Disconnect the connector of the effluent float switch. If there

is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the jack side when
the float is lowered, the float switch is defective.
6701
6552
6801
Processor I/O PCB

Power Supply
NOTE
Circuit diagram
LPP13-4 Replenishment block

Detailed diagram
LPP13-4 Replenishment block [N]

LPP13-4 Waste solution collecting block [SM]
4002
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
4003
No. 0504
The Effluent Concentration Tank is full.
Countermeasure message
Make sure the Effluent Concentrator is turned on. Empty the
Effluent Tank.

This attention message will be released when the effluent
concentrator tank is emptied.
NOTE
This message will be displayed only when the machine is
equipped with the optional effluent concentrator.
Suffix
number
Condition
The effluent concentrator solution level sensor turns

OFF.
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
Check Point
1
Check if the float of the effluent concentrator solution

level sensor moves up and down smoothly.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F28
Processor I/O PCB

Failed parts
Manual No.
6701
Manual No.
Effluent concentrator solution level sensor
Disconnect the connector of the effluent concentrator

solution level sensor. If there is no conduction between pins
1 and 2 on the jack side when the float is lowered, the sensor
is defective.
6701
6552
6801
Processor I/O PCB

Power Supply
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram
LPP13-8 Option
4003
1/1
4004

Detailed diagram
No. 0507
Close the Processor Top Cover.
LPP13-2 Temperature control block (2)

LPP13-3 Dryer section and Drive block

The message will be automatically released when the
processor top cover is closed.
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
While prints are not being made, the interlock switch

(processor top cover) turns OFF.
When auto cleaning is to be carried out, the interlock

switch (processor top cover) turns OFF.
When refilling with water is to be carried out, the

interlock switch (processor top cover) turns OFF.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
The drive motor, the refilling water pump, the cleaning pump,
and the exhaust fan will stop when the interlock switch
Check Point
1
Check that the processor top cover is securely closed.
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point
Interlock switch (processor top cover)
Blown fuses
F27
Processor I/O PCB

Failed parts
Manual No.
6181
Manual No.
6701
Manual No.
6181
Disconnect the connector of the interlock switch. If there is

no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side when
you place a magnet close to the interlock switch, the
interlock switch is defective.
6703
6701
6552
6801
Processor relay PCB

Processor I/O PCB
Power Supply
NOTE
Circuit diagram

LPP3-4 Main relay PCB around
4004
1/1
4005
No. 0508
Paper remains in the processor. Are you
sure you want to turn the drive off?
or
Press the
Press the
being ON.
key to turn OFF the drive.

key to finish the print mode with the drive
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
Although paper still remains in the processing rack or

dryer rack, an attempt is made to turn off the drive.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
Processing time of the processor varies depending on the
specification.
Check Point
1
Check if all pieces of paper come out.
4005
1/1
4010
No. 0515
Set the Rack Stopper.
No. 0516
Remove the prints from Conveyor Unit 2.
This attention message will be released when the rack stopper

is set.
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
-
This attention message will be released automatically by

removing the prints.
Condition
Suffix
number
While prints are not being made, the rack stopper

sensor turns OFF.
Condition
The print full sensor turns DARK.
Check Point
Check Point
1
Check that the print full sensor is not soiled.
Check if the rack stopper is securely placed.

Failure in the attaching position adjustment
of the rack stopper sensor
Failed parts
Manual No.
Print full sensor
6181
Processor I/O PCB

Failed parts
Multi Power Supply (printer)
Manual No.
6181
Rack stopper sensor
Disconnect the connector of the rack stopper sensor. If there

is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side
when you place a magnet close to the rack stopper sensor,
the sensor is defective.
Processor I/O PCB
6701
6552
6801
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Manual No.
6181
6701
6552
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram
LPP13-6 Order Classification Unit
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram
LPP13-4 Replenishment block [N]

LPP13-4 Waste solution collecting block [SM]
4010
1/1
4011
No. 0517
Attach Conveyor Unit 1.
No. 0518
Set the Dryer Cover.
This attention message will be released when the print

conveyor unit is set.
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
While prints are not being made, the interlock switch

(dryer cover) turns OFF.
Print conveyor unit 1 cannot be detected.
Check Point
1
This message will be released automatically when the dryer

cover is closed.
Check if print conveyor unit 1 is attached securely.
NOTE
When the interlock switch (dryer cover) turns OFF, the drive
motor, the dryer heater and the dryer fan will stop.
Failed parts
Processor I/O PCB
Manual No.
6701
6552
6801
NOTE
Check Point
1
Check that the dryer cover is securely attached.
Diagnosis
Interlock switch (dryer cover)
Circuit diagram

Blown fuses
F27
Processor I/O PCB

Failed parts
Detailed diagram
Manual No.
6181
Manual No.
6701
Manual No.
6181

6703
6701
6552
6801
Processor relay PCB

Processor I/O PCB
Power Supply
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram
4011
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
4041
No. 0700-## [SM]

Replace the Replenishment Package with
a new one.P-#
Attention message: SM replenishment
Check Point
1
Check that the replenishment solution sensor is not

soiled.
Diagnosis
This attention message will be released only when the

replenishment package is removed. (You have to turn OFF the
replenishment package sensor once.)
Sensitivity of the replenishment solution

sensor
Failed parts
Condition
Condition
SM I/O PCB
0x01
While replenishment solution sensor CD-A turns

DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not
refilled forcibly.
0x02
While replenishment solution sensor CD-B turns

refilled forcibly.
0x04
While replenishment solution sensor CD-C turns

refilled forcibly.

LPP3-5 SM I/O PCB around
0x08
While replenishment solution sensor STB turns

refilled forcibly.
Detailed diagram
0x10
While replenishment solution sensor BF-A turns

refilled forcibly.
0x20
While replenishment solution sensor BF-B turns

refilled forcibly.
Manual No.
6801
Manual No.
6801
6741
6552
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
LPP13-10 Replenisher block (2)
NOTE
When the tank is not refilled forcibly whether or not to set SM
replenishment via Machine specifications, these messages
appear. When the following conditions, the tanks are not
refilled forcibly.
SM
Replenishment
Setting
ON
Detecting condition of the replenishment

solution sensor
The replenishment solution is not detected
when the power is ON.
when the replenishment package is replaced.
during output checks.
while measuring the output amount.
while initial replenishing.
Each replenishment solution in the
replenishment package is not detected at the
same time.
OFF
Forced replenishment is not carried out.
A suffix number is indicated by the hexadecimal numeral.

8151
4041
1/2
4041
No. 0701-## [SM]

Attach the Replenishment Package.P-#
you attach the replenishment package.
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
Replenishment package sensor P-1 turns OFF.
Replenishment package sensor P-2 turns OFF.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Replenishment package sensor
Manual No.
6801
4. Troubleshooting

Failure in the attaching position adjustment
of the replenishment package sensor
Manual No.
6801
Disconnect the connector of the replenishment package

sensor. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the
jack side when a magnet is placed near the replenishment
package sensor, the sensor is defective.
SM I/O PCB
6741
6552
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram
4041
2/2
4042
No. 0702 [SM]

Add water to the Water Supply Tank.
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
The water supply tank level sensor turns OFF.
Diagnosis
F27
Processor I/O PCB

Failed parts
Water supply tank level sensor
Manual No.
6701
Manual No.
6181
4. Troubleshooting
Blown fuses
Disconnect the connector of the water supply tank level

sensor and measure the resistance between pins 1 and 2 on
the jack side when the water temperature is between 10C
and 35C. The level sensor is defective if the resistance is
not between 1.5 k and 4 k.
SM I/O PCB
Processor I/O PCB
Power PCB
6741
6701
6552
6801
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram
4042
1/1
4043
No. 0705-## [SM]

Replace the Replenishment Package with
a new one.P-#
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram
This attention message will be released only when the

replenishment package is removed. (You have to turn OFF the
replenishment package sensor once.)
Condition
Condition
0x01
While replenishment solution sensor CD-A turns

DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are
refilled forcibly.
0x02
While replenishment solution sensor CD-B turns

refilled forcibly.
0x04
While replenishment solution sensor CD-C turns

refilled forcibly.
0x08
While replenishment solution sensor STB turns

refilled forcibly.
0x10
While replenishment solution sensor BF-A turns

refilled forcibly.
0x20
While replenishment solution sensor BF-B turns

refilled forcibly.
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
NOTE
When the tank is refilled forcibly after SM replenishment has
been set via Machine Specification, these messages appear.
A suffix number is indicated by the hexadecimal numeral.
8151
Check Point
1
Check that the replenishment solution sensor is not

soiled.
Diagnosis
Sensitivity of the replenishment solution
sensor
Failed parts
SM I/O PCB
Manual No.
2783
Manual No.
6181
6741
6552
6801
4043
1/1
4101
Attention message: Printer
No. 1000
The Paper Magazine is out of paper.
Paper Magazine A
No. 1002
Would you like to feed the leading edge of
paper? Paper magazine A
No. 1001
The Paper Magazine is out of paper.
Paper Magazine B
No. 1003
Would you like to feed the leading edge of
paper? Paper magazine B
Remove the Paper Magazine. Press the [YES] key to continue the
printing.

or
Press the
A piece of unexposed paper will be fed out if you press the

key.
Exposure will start from the first piece of paper if you press
the
key.
key to restart printing.
Press the
or
key to eject the film from the film carrier.
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Suffix
number
Condition
Paper end sensor A or B turns LIGHT.
Condition
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
When the power supply is turned ON, or after the

paper magazine has been replaced, an attempt is
made to feed out the first piece of paper.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Paper end sensors A and B
Dual paper magazine PCB (only paper
magazine B)
Printer control PCB
Manual No.
6156
6582
6551
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

LPP1-10 Around paper supply section
Detailed diagram
LPP11-2 Paper supply section A (1)

LPP11-6 Paper supply unit B
4101
1/1
4102
No. 1004
Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper
Magazine A
No. 1005
Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper
Magazine B
This attention message will be released automatically when
the paper magazine set in the print channel is attached.
Suffix
number
Condition
The paper magazine code sensor A or B cannot detect

the paper magazine code. (All the code sensors turn
LIGHT.)
Although either paper magazine code sensor A or B

detects the paper magazine code, the currently
selected print channel is inconsistent.
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
Check Point
1
Check that the paper magazine code sensor is not

soiled.
Check that the detection cap of the paper magazine is

correctly set.
Check that the paper magazine is inserted as far as it

will go.
Diagnosis
Manual No.
Adjustment failure in the attaching position

of the paper magazine code sensor
Failed parts
Paper magazine code sensors A and B
Printer I/O PCB 1
Printer control PCB
magazine B)
Manual No.
6151
6460
6551
6801
6582
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram

4102
1/1
4104
No. 1010
Change the Paper Magazine. Paper
Magazine A
No. 1012
The print channel is not set. Confirm the
print channel.
No. 1011
Change the Paper Magazine. Paper
Magazine B

This attention message will be canceled automatically after
the all settings required in the print channel are entered, or the
print channel is changed.
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
A print channel with improper print channel setting is

selected.
The paper magazine which is different from that set

in the print channel is set.
Check Point
1
Check that the paper magazine code sensor A or B is

not soiled.

correctly set.

will go.
Check the print channel setting.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
Diagnosis
Manual No.

Failed parts
Printer I/O PCB 1
Printer control PCB
magazine B)
Manual No.
6151
6460
6551
6801
6582
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram

4104
1/1
4105
No. 1013
Outputting. . .
No. 1014
The system is being initialized, one
moment please. . .


If you do not have to access to the Menu mode, press the

key to release.
This attention message will be released automatically after

system initialization is completed.
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
While printing, outputting to media, or when the

paper is feeding in the printer, an attempt is made to
access to the Menu display.
Check Point
Condition
After the power supply has been turned ON, the
system is being initialized.
Diagnosis
Check the current print position.
Failed parts
Printer control PCB
Diagnosis

Failed parts
Printer control PCB

Manual No.
6551
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram
LPP1-1 System connecting

LPP1-2 PC connecting
LPP1-4 Printer AC Power Supply connecting
Manual No.
6551
6801
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4105
1/1
4106
No. 1015
One moment please. . .
The attention message will be released automatically when the
operation at Maintenance mode is completed.
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
Each operation is being carried out in the
Maintenance mode.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
6551
6801
4. Troubleshooting
Printer control PCB
Manual No.
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4106
1/1
4107
No. 1017
Would you like to stop printing?
or
Press the
key to stop printing.
Press the
key to continue printing.
Condition
Condition
While prints are not being made, the
pressed.
key is
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
4107
1/1
4114
No. 1027-##
Profile data was not found.
Suffix
number
Condition
91
When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,

the parameter file for gray control is not included in
the hard disk.
Diagnosis
Failure in the profile data
Suffix
number
Condition
01

the monitor profile data is not included in the hard
disk.
02

the monitor initial setting file is not included in the
hard disk.
11

the profile data of paper type 1 is not included in the
hard disk.
12

hard disk.
13

the profile data of paper types 1 and 2 is not included
in the hard disk.
14

hard disk.
15

in the hard disk.
16

in the hard disk.
17

the profile data of paper types 1, 2 and 3 is not
included in the hard disk.
40

the flatbed scanner profile data is not included in the
hard disk.
41

the flatbed scanner initial setting file is not included
in the hard disk.
50

the positive scanner profile data is not included in the
hard disk.
51

the positive scanner initial setting file is not included
in the hard disk.
60

the reference table data (monitor) for color correction
table calculation is not included in the hard disk.
61

the reference table data (printer) for color correction
table calculation is not included in the hard disk.
90

the parameter file for chroma enhancement is not
included in the hard disk.
Install the profile data from the profile CD

corresponding to the main software.
4114
Manual No.
3860
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
1/1
4115
No. 1028
More than 3 correction keys of low, middle
or high density area. Execute correction?
No. 1029
The measurement failed. Measure it again.
or

or
Press the
Press the
key to carry out the correction.
Press the
key to measure the print again.
Press the
key to stop the operation.
key to stop carrying out the correction.
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Suffix
number
Condition
When the measurement of the test print has been

completed in setup mode, the correction result is 3
keys or more.
The measurement of the test print is failed in setup

mode.
Check Point
Check Point
1
Condition
Carry out each correction via Colorimeter Unit

Adjustment.
Check that the test print is correctly placed in the

colorimeter.
Check that the test print is correctly made.
Carry out each correction via Colorimeter Unit

Adjustment.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Colorimeter Control PCB
Printer Power Supply
Colorimeter
NOTE
Circuit diagram
LPP1-14 Colorimeter unit
Manual No.
6506
6801
2111
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Colorimeter
Manual No.
6506
6801
2111
NOTE
Circuit diagram
4115
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
4116
No. 1030
Wait until printing is complete.
Return the Paper Magazine, if you removed it.

the print channel is changed or the selected magazine is
attached.
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
When the magazine needs to be replaced during
printing
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
Wait until printing is completed, and place the
selected paper magazine.
4116
1/1
4117
No. 1031
Paper Specification Registration Setup
was not completed.
No. 1032
or automatic return
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Suffix
number
Condition
An attempt is made to print using the paper type

which has not been set up in the Paper Magazine
Registration Setup, Weekly Setup, or the Printer
Profile Calibration mode.
Condition
Press the
printing.
key to interrupt scanning or
Check Point
1
Wait until the interrupt process has been completed.
Check Point
Carry out the setup using the paper type which the
Paper Specification Registration Setup has been
done.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Carry out Paper Specification Registration
Setup.
Manual No.
3062
4117
1/1
4119
No. 1035
Paper Magazine Registration Setup is not
completed.
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
The paper magazine which the Paper Magazine
Registration Setup has not been done is selected
when outputting the test print for monitor gamma
adjustment or profile chart.
Check Point
Check that the paper magazine to which Paper
Magazine Registration Setup has been completed is
selected.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Carry out Paper Magazine Registration
Setup.
Manual No.
3063
4119
1/1
4120
No. 1036
Paper type for the attached magazine is
not set. Paper Magazine A
No. 1037
Paper type for the attached magazine is
not set. Paper Magazine B
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
The paper type of the paper magazine with which

printing or setup is to be carried out is not specified.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
Check the paper type of the paper magazine.
Diagnosis
Setup.
Manual No.
3063
4120
1/1
4121
No. 1038
Paper type for the magazine is not set.
No. 1039
Paper type specification is not set.
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
Suffix
number
The paper type of the paper magazine with which

printing or setup is to be carried out is not specified.
Check Point
1
Condition
The paper type, the specification of which has not
been registered during printing or setup, is selected.
Check Point
Check the paper type of the paper magazine.
Check that the paper type, the specification of which

has been registered, is selected.
Diagnosis
Setup.
Manual No.
Diagnosis
3063
Carry out Paper Specification Registration

Setup.
4121
Manual No.
3062
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
4122
No. 1040
Press the [ORDER] key.
No. 1041
No more printing can be done for this
order. Order will count up.

or automatic return
Condition
Condition
Since the machine is waiting until the index prints
have been made or the data has been output to the
medium, another setting display cannot appear.
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
The 71st roll of films or 71st file of media in the
order has been processed continuously.
NOTE
The data capacity which can be stored in an order is limited up
to 70 films or works.
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
4122
1/1
4123
No. 1043
Laser temperature is being adjusted. One
moment please. . .

Circuit diagram
LPP1-9 Laser Unit around 2

Detailed diagram
LPP11-7 Laser temperature section

or automatic return
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
On starting, B and G lasers are waited until the

temperature is processable, the fine tuning is done or
the automatic tuning is done.
NOTE
When the temperature around B and G lasers head section is
processable (20 to 45C), the fine tuning is started.
4. Troubleshooting
This attention message is displayed from when the

temperature is not processable to when the fine tuning or
automatic tuning is finished.
The laser unit heater works to shorten the time required for
adjusting the temperature to processable.
Check Point
1
Wait until the laser temperature adjustment has been

completed.
IMPORTANT
When the adjustment is not completed by the fine tuning
(max. five minutes), it is automatically shifted to the
automatic tuning (max. 30 minutes).
When shifting to the automatic tuning, it takes max. 35
minutes until the adjustment is completed.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
6574
B laser driver
G laser driver
6573
2601
6159
Laser I/O PCB

Laser unit
Laser unit heater
Laser unit cooling fans 1, 2 or 3
Laser temperature connecting PCB
6575
Fuse F49 or F50
6801
Laser power supply 1
NOTE
The laser unit heater and laser temperature connecting PCB
may not be equipped depending on the machine.
Circuit diagram

4123
1/1
4124
No. 1045
Close the Paper Advance Door.
This message will be released automatically when the paper
advance door is closed.
Condition
Error message No.
-
Condition
The interlock switch (Paper advance
door) turns off during period of time.
NOTE
The power is not supplied to some electrical parts when the
interlock switch (Paper advance door) turns off.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
Check that the paper advance door is securely closed.
Diagnosis
Attaching position of the interlock switch
(paper advance door) incorrect
Failed parts
Interlock switch (paper advance door)
Manual No.
6151
Manual No.
6151

Printer I/O PCB 2
Power Supply
6461
6552
6801
6801
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

LPP1-12 Advance main unit around
Circuit diagram
LPP11-1 Interlock switch
4124
1/1
4125
No. 1046
Change the Paper Magazine.
No. 1047
Close the printer door.
Remove the Paper Magazine. Press the [YES] key to continue the
printing.

or
When the
key is pressed, operations stop until the
magazine is replaced with the displayed one.
Press the
key to stop the printing operation.
When printer doors 1, 2 and 3 are closed, this message is
automatically released.
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
Condition
01
Printer doors 1 and 2 turn OFF.
02
Printer door 1 turns OFF.
NOTE
interlock switch (printer door 1, 2 or 3) turns OFF.
The paper magazine must be replaced to print the

label index while using single paper magazine
machine.
Check Point
Check Point
Check that the paper magazine code sensor is not

soiled.

correctly set.

will go.
Diagnosis
Manual No.

Failed parts
Paper magazine code sensor A
Printer I/O PCB 1
Printer control PCB
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram
Manual No.
6151
6460
6551
6801
Check that printer doors 1, 2 and 3 are securely

closed.
Diagnosis
Manual No.

of the interlock switch (printer door 1, 2 or 3)
6151
Failed parts
Manual No.
Interlock switch (printer door 1, 2 or 3)
6151

Dual paper magazine PCB
Printer I/O PCB 1
Printer control PCB
Power Supply
6582
6460
6551
6801
6801
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

LPP1-11 Transfer section and exposure advance section
around
Detailed diagram

4125
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
4126
No. 1048
Press the [ORDER] key. Wait until output
has completed.
No. 1049
Execute Auto Tuning.

Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
While printing, outputting to media, or when the

paper is feeding in the printer, the light source update
is required.
The G laser stability signal cannot be checked.
The B laser stability signal cannot be checked.
The G and B lasers stability signals cannot be

checked.
Check Point
1
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Printer control PCB
Manual No.
6551
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Condition
Execute the automatic tuning.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
6861
6861
2601
B laser driver
G laser driver
Laser unit
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4126
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
When printer doors 1, 2 and 3 are closed, this message is

automatically released.
4132
Attention message: Scanner
No. 1302
Would you like to stop scanning?
or
: The film is ejected and the operation stops.
: The operation is continued.
Condition
Condition
The
judgement.
key is pressed during film scanning or
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
4132
1/1
4134
No. 1305
Photometry Section may be dirty.
No. 1306
Update the light source. If film remains in
the Film Carrier, remove it.
Clean the Light Source Section and Photometry Section. For
details, refer to the manual.

or
Condition
Suffix
number
: The light source is updated.
: The light source is not updated.
Condition
Condition
When the Area Registration is carried out, the data
sent from the CCD is abnormal.
Check Point
1
Suffix
number
Condition
The light source registration is not carried out, or a

certain time has passed after light source registration.
Check Point
Check that the scanner light source section (scanner

lamp and heat absorbing filter) is neither damaged
nor soiled.
Update the light source.
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Failed parts
Scanner Unit
LVDS connecting PCB
D-ICE PCB
Image processing PCB
Printer control PCB
Multi Power Supply (scanner)
Manual No.
The light source registration is carried out.
Manual No.
3067
2061
6410
6408
6405
6551
6801
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S2-1 Around ARCNET and LVDS
S2-3 DC Power Supply connecting
S2-4 Around AFC/Scanner control PCB
4134
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
4135
No. 1307
Scanner Light Source is weak.
No. 1308
Execute the light source registration. If
film remains in the Film Carrier, remove it.
Clean the Light Source Section and Photometry Section. For
details, refer to the manual.

or
Condition
Suffix
number
02
: The light source registration is carried out.
: The light source registration is not carried out.
Condition
Condition
The light intensity of the scanner lamp is out of the
allowable range.
Suffix
number
Condition
While default is selected in the backup data, the AFC

for updating the light source is replaced.
Uneven light source is out of the allowable range.
Check Point
Check Point
1

nor soiled.
Read the backup data.
Update the light source.
Diagnosis
Replace the scanner lamp.
Failed parts
Diagnosis
The light source registration is carried out.

Failed parts
Scanner Unit
AFC/scanner control PCB
Lamp Power Supply
Manual No.
3067
Manual No.
2061
6501
6801
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S2-2 AC Power Supply connecting
4135
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
01
4137
No. 1312
Close the Lamphouse Cover.
No. 1313
The Focus Adjustment was not completed
yet.


the lamphouse cover is closed.
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
While the data is not being scanned, the interlock

switch (lamphouse) turns OFF.
Film scanning is carried out when the digital ICE

Correction of Operator Selection is ON and the
Focus Adjustment is not completed.
IMPORTANT
Check Point
1
Condition
Check the signal of the interlock switch (lamphouse)

via input check.
When the digital ICE (option) has not installed, digital

ICE Correction cannot be performed.
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
Condition
Check Point
Diagnosis
Incorrect attaching position of the interlock
switch (lamphouse)
Blown fuses
Manual No.
6107
AFC/scanner driver PCB
6502
F23
Main relay PCB
6702
Interlock switch (lamphouse)
Carry out the focus adjustment.
Check the setting of the digital ICE Correction.
Manual No.
F26, 28
and 31
Failed parts
Manual No.
6107

Main relay PCB
Power Supply
6502
6501
6702
6801
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S2-5 AFC/scanner driver PCB
Detailed diagram
S12-2 Scanner light source section
4137
1/1
4150
Attention message: Film carrier
No. 1400
Lock the Film Carrier.
you lock the film carrier.
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
While the film is not being processed with the film
carrier attached, the AFC lock sensor turns LIGHT.
Check Point
Check that the film ready lamp of the film carrier
does not blink in red.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
If the film carrier is not in position, the ready lamp blinks.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Film carrier lock sensor
Manual No.
6107
6502
6501
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram
S12-1 Film carrier mount section/cooling fan
4150
1/1
4151
No. 1401
Attach the Film Carrier.
No. 1402
Attach the 135/240 AFC.

you attach the film carrier.
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
-

Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
A film carrier other than the 135/240 AFC is attached

when cleaning the 135/240 AFC at the close down
checks.
All film carrier code detectors 1, 2 and 3 recognize

the respective code as "H".
Check Point
Check the carrier code detector via input check with
the film carrier attached.
Diagnosis
Check Point
1
Check that the 135/240 AFC is securely attached.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Connecting PCB 1
110 connecting PCB
120 connecting PCB
MMC connecting PCB
135 AFC connecting PCB
Manual No.
6601
6631
6621
6636
6638
6502
6501
Failed parts
Connecting PCB 1
6601
6502
6501
NOTE
Circuit diagram
S4-1 135/240 AFC (1)
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Manual No.
Detailed diagram
S12-5 135/240 AFC (3)
S4-1 135/240 AFC (1)

S5-1 120 AFC
S6-1 110 AFC
S7-1 135/240 MMC (1)
S8-1 135 AFC (1)
Detailed diagram
S12-5 135/240 AFC (3)
4151
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
4153
No. 1403
Undeveloped cartridge. Cannot print.
No. 1404
The IX frame data is incomplete.
Confirm the Film Cartridge.
Press the [YES] key to scan again. If this error recurs, clean the
Magnetic Head. For details, refer to the manual.

or
Condition
Press the
Suffix
number
Press the
Condition
When the 240 cartridge is inserted into the film
carrier, the IPI limit switch turns ON.
key to continue film processing.
NOTE
When the above attention message appears, the frame
numbers which could not be read are displayed.
Condition
Check Point
1
Check if the IPI claw of the 240 film cartridge is

folded back.
Suffix
number
Condition
Check that the pin of the IPI limit switch moves

smoothly.
The read head (camera track or photo finishing track)

cannot read the IX data.
Check Point
Diagnosis
Failed parts
IPI limit switch
AFC sensor PCB
Connecting PCB 2
Connecting PCB 4
Connecting PCB 1
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S4-2 135/240 AFC (2)
Detailed diagram
S12-5 135/240 AFC (3)
Manual No.
6111
6606
6602
6609
6601
6501
6801
Clean the magnetic head.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Read head
Magnetic head PCB
Connecting PCB 2
Connecting PCB 4
Connecting PCB 1
Manual No.
6111
6608
6602
6609
6601
6501
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S4-2 135/240 AFC (2)
Detailed diagram
S12-5 135/240 AFC (3)
4153
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
key to scan it again.
4154
No. 1405-##
Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier.
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S4-1 135/240 AFC (1)
S4-2 135/240 AFC (2)
Condition
Detailed diagram
Condition
01
When the power supply is turned ON or the system is

initializing after the error cancellation, the 135
loading sensor turns DARK.
02

initializing after the error cancellation, the 135 ready
sensor turns DARK.
04

perforation sensor turns DARK.
S12-6 135/240 AFC (4)

S12-7 135/240 AFC (5)
S12-8 135/240 AFC (6)
S12-9 135/240 AFC (7)
(135 AFC)
Failure of Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment
08

initializing after the error cancellation, DX sensor 1
turns DARK.
Failure of DX Sensor Standard Adjustment
10

turns DARK.
135 ready sensor
Failed parts
135 perforation sensor
135 loading sensor
135 DX sensor 1 or 2
Check Point
135 AFC sensor PCB

1
Check that the light axis of each sensor is not soiled

due to dust.
Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Value

Adjustment.

Diagnosis
Power PCB
(135/240 AFC)
Manual No.
Failed parts
135 ready sensor
135 loading sensor
Sensor PCB
Connecting PCB 2
Connecting PCB 4
Connecting PCB 1
Power PCB
Manual No.
6111
6111
6111
6111
6606
6602
6609
6601
6502
6501
6801
6607
Manual No.
6115
6115
6115
6115
6638
6639
6502
6501
6801
6607
NOTE
3151
Manual No.
3155
Circuit diagram

S8-1 135 AFC (1)
Detailed diagram
S12-15 135 AFC (1)

S12-16 135 AFC (2)
4154
1/2
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
4154
No. 1406-##

Failed parts
Manual No.
6607
Power PCB
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S4-1 135/240 AFC (1)
S4-2 135/240 AFC (2)
Suffix
number
Condition
01

loading sensor turns DARK.
02

initializing after the error cancellation, the 240 ready
sensor turns DARK.
04

08

turns DARK.
10

initializing after the error cancellation, the cartridge
limit switch turns ON.
20

initializing after the error cancellation, the IPI limit
switch turns ON.
Detailed diagram
S12-5 135/240 AFC (3)

S12-6 135/240 AFC (4)
S12-7 135/240 AFC (5)
S12-10 135/240 AFC (8)
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
Check Point
1

due to dust.

Adjustment.
Diagnosis
Manual No.
3151

Failed parts
240 ready sensor
240 loading sensor
240 DX sensor 1
IPI limit switch
Sensor PCB
Connecting PCB 2
Connecting PCB 4
Connecting PCB 1
Manual No.
6111
6111
6111
6111
6111
6111
6606
6602
6609
6601
6502
6501
6801
4154
2/2
4155
No. 1407-##
No. 1408-##
Condition
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
01

initializing after the error cancellation, the loading
sensor turns DARK.
01

initializing after the error cancellation, the loading
sensor turns DARK.
02

initializing after the error cancellation, the ready
sensor turns DARK.
02

initializing after the error cancellation, the ready
sensor turns DARK.
04

initializing after the error cancellation, the
04

initializing after the error cancellation, the film
sensor turns DARK.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
Check Point
Check that each sensor is not soiled.

Adjustment.

Adjustment.
Diagnosis
Diagnosis

Failure of the film sensitivity adjustment
Failed parts
Loading sensor
Ready sensor
Perforation sensor
110 sensor PCB
110 connecting PCB
Power PCB
NOTE
Manual No.
3153

Manual No.
6113
6113
6113
6113
6631
6502
6501
6801
6607
Failed parts
Loading sensor
Ready sensor
Film sensor
120 sensor PCB
120 connecting PCB
Power PCB
Manual No.
6112
6112
6112
6622
6621
6502
6501
6801
6607
Circuit diagram

S5-1 120 AFC
Detailed diagram
3152
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S6-1 110 AFC
Manual No.
Detailed diagram
S12-11 120 AFC
4155
1/1
4156
No. 1409
Set the lane for the Film Carrier.
No. 1410
Confirm the film stop position in the Film
Carrier.

NOTE
This message will be displayed only when the 135/240 AFC is
attached.
Condition

,
or
If the
key is pressed, the frame will be skipped and
scanning will restart from the next frame.
Press the
Suffix
number
-
Adjust the film stop position by using the cursor key.
Condition
Press the
The film size specified in the selected channel does

not match the film size lane for the 135/240 AFC
selected when the error message appears.
Suffix
number
-
Check that the channel setting is correct.
Check that the lane is correctly selected.
key to eject the film.
Condition
Check Point
1
key to restart scanning.
Condition
The scanner cannot recognize a frames included in
the scanned data as a proper images.
NOTE
The film stop position in the film carrier is not checked.
First, a roll of film is scanned from the leading edge to the rear
edge.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
135 lane limit switch
Driver PCB 2
Connecting PCB 3
Power PCB
Manual No.
6111
6111
6605
6603
6502
6801
6607
Then, the images which are recognized as frames by the

scanner are displayed on the screen sequentially.
This attention message will appear when the image data of
frames which has unclear boundary between exposed area and
unexposed one is displayed on the screen.
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S4-1 135/240 AFC (1)
Detailed diagram
S12-3 135/240 AFC (1)
4156
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
The attention message will be released when the lane is selected or

the
key is pressed after changing the print channel.
4158
No. 1412
The film is upside down. Would you like to
continue printing?
135 AFC sensor PCB

or
key to start scanning.
Press the
Failed parts
135 DX sensor 1, 2, 3, or 4

Press the
Power PCB
Manual No.
6115
6638
6639
6502
6501
6801
6607
NOTE
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
When 135 DX sensor 1, 2, 3, or 4 detects the film DX

code, it detects that the film is upside down.
Circuit diagram

S8-1 135 AFC (1)
Detailed diagram
Check Point
Check that the DX sensor is not soiled.

Adjustment.
4. Troubleshooting
S12-15 135 AFC (1)

S12-16 135 AFC (2)
Diagnosis
(135/240 AFC)
Failed parts
135 DX sensor 1, 2, 3, or 4
Sensor PCB
Connecting PCB 2
Connecting PCB 4
Connecting PCB 1
Power PCB
Manual No.
3151
Manual No.
6111
6606
6602
6609
6601
6502
6501
6801
6607
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S4-2 135/240 AFC (2)
Detailed diagram
S12-8 135/240 AFC (6)

S12-9 135/240 AFC (7)
(135 AFC)
Manual No.
3155
4158
1/2
4158
(135 AFC)
No. 1413
Input the frame number

Failed parts
or
135 DX sensor 1, 2, 3, or 4
key to input the frame numbers.
Press the
frame numbers.
key to start scanning without reading the
135 AFC sensor PCB

135 AFC sensor PCB
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
While the 135 film is being processed, the 135 DX

sensor 1, 2, 3, or 4 cannot detect the frame number, or
cannot read more than two frames.

Check Point
1
Manual No.
6115
6638
6638
6639
6502
6501
6801
6607
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Check that the DX code area of the film is not

fogged.
Check that the film without the DX code is not used.

Adjustment.
Diagnosis
Power PCB
3155
4. Troubleshooting
Press the
Manual No.

S8-1 135 AFC (1)
Detailed diagram
S12-15 135 AFC (1)

S12-16 135 AFC (2)
(135/240 AFC)
Failed parts
135 DX sensor 1, 2, 3, or 4
Sensor PCB
Connecting PCB 2
Connecting PCB 4
Connecting PCB 1
Power PCB
Manual No.
3151
Manual No.
6111
6606
6602
6609
6601
6502
6501
6801
6607
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S4-2 135/240 AFC (2)
Detailed diagram
S12-8 135/240 AFC (6)

S12-9 135/240 AFC (7)
4158
2/2
4159
No. 1414
The FID number was not detected.
or
Press the
key to enter the number.
Press the
FID number.
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
240 DX sensor 1 or 2 cannot the FID code of the film.
Check if the DX sensor is not soiled.

Adjustment.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
Diagnosis
Failed parts
240 DX sensor
Sensor PCB
Connecting PCB 2
Connecting PCB 4
Connecting PCB 1
Power PCB
Manual No.
3151
Manual No.
6111
6606
6602
6609
6601
6502
6501
6801
6607
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S4-1 135/240 AFC (1)
Detailed diagram
S12-10 135/240 AFC (8)
4159
1/1
4160
No. 1416
Select the 240 lane.
No. 1417
Close the Mount Insertion Cover.

NOTE
attached.
This message will be released automatically when the mount

insertion cover is closed.
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
When the 240/240 head cleaning is carried out during

close down checks, the 135 lane is not selected.
When the light source is updated, the 240 lane is not
selected.
An attempt is made to carry out daily setup, area
registration, lamp change setup for 240 using the 135
lane.
Suffix
number
Condition

initializing after the error cancellation, the mount
insertion cover sensor turns LIGHT.
Check Point
1
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Check Point
1
Check that the mount insertion cover is closed.
Mount insertion cover sensor

MMC connecting PCB
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Driver PCB 2
Connecting PCB 3
Power PCB
NOTE
Manual No.
6111
6605
6603
6502
6501
6801
6607

Power PCB
Manual No.
6114
6636
6501
6801
6607
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S7-2 135/240 MMC (2)
Detailed diagram
S12-4 135/240 AFC (2)
Circuit diagram

S4-1 135/240 AFC (1)
Detailed diagram
S12-3 135/240 AFC (1)
4160
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
4164
(135 AFC)
No. 1420
Select the DX code.

Failed parts
or
Press the
135 DX sensor 1, 2, 3, or 4
key to select the DX code.
Press the
DX code.
135 AFC sensor PCB

Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
The DX code on the film is not read while scanning.

Power PCB
Manual No.
6115
6638
6639
6502
6501
6801
6607
Circuit diagram
Check that the film without the DX code is not used.
Check that the DX sensor is not soiled.

Adjustment.
Diagnosis

S8-1 135 AFC (1)
4. Troubleshooting
Check that the DX code area of the film is not

fogged.
3155
NOTE
Check Point
1
Manual No.
Detailed diagram
S12-15 135 AFC (1)

S12-16 135 AFC (2)
(135/240 AFC)
Failed parts
135 DX sensor 1, 2, 3, or 4
Sensor PCB
Connecting PCB 2
Connecting PCB 4
Connecting PCB 1
Power PCB
Manual No.
3151
Manual No.
6111
6111
6606
6602
6609
6601
6502
6501
6801
6607
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S4-1 135/240 AFC (1)
S4-2 135/240 AFC (2)
Detailed diagram
S12-8 135/240 AFC (6)

S12-9 135/240 AFC (7)
S12-10 135/240 AFC (8)
4164
1/2
4164
No. 1421
Confirm the stop position of all the frames
to be printed.
,
or
If the
key is pressed, the frame will be skipped and
scanning will restart from the next frame.
Press the
Press the
key to restart scanning.

Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
The film is inserted while the SHIFT key is being
pressed.
4164
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
When the frame of the film is not recognized properly after
scanning, move the film to the proper stop position manually.
2/2
4165
No. 1422
Select the 135 lane.
No. 1423
Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment. Remove the film from the
Film Carrier.

NOTE
attached.
No. 1424
Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is
being executed.
No. 1425
Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is
complete.
Suffix
number
Condition
When the 135/240 head cleaning is carried out during

close down checks, the 135 lane is not selected.
When the light source is updated, the 135 lane is not
selected.
registration, lamp change setup for 240 using the 135
lane.

NOTE
This message will be displayed only when the positive film is
inserted.
Condition
Check Point
1
Suffix
number
Condition
When two or more hours have elapsed since the

previous LED light intensity adjustment, the positive
film is inserted into the auto film carrier.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Driver PCB 2
Connecting PCB 3
Power PCB
Manual No.
6111
6605
6603
6501
6801
6607
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S4-1 135/240 AFC (1)
Detailed diagram
S12-3 135/240 AFC (1)
4165
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
4166
No. 1426
Attach the 110 AFC.
No. 1427
Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment. If film remains in the Film
Carrier, remove it.

or
Press the
adjustment.
Suffix
number
Condition
Press the

registration, lamp change setup for 110 using the
135/240 AFC.
key to stop the light intensity adjustment.
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
After the sensor LED light intensity adjustment has

been completed, a specified time has elapsed and the
light source need not be updated.
Check Point
1
key to carry out the light intensity
Check if the 110 AFC is set securely.
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
Check Point
Diagnosis
Failed parts
110 connecting PCB
Power PCB
NOTE
Manual No.
6631
6502
6501
6801
6607

Adjustment.
Diagnosis
Failure of Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment and
DX Sensor Standard Adjustment
Circuit diagram
Manual No.
3151
3152
3153
3155

S6-1 110 AFC
4166
1/1
4167
No. 1428
Remove the mount from the Film Carrier.
No. 1429
Make sure that the mount is placed
correctly.

Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
01
When the AMC operates initial operation, the mount

sensor is ON.
02
When the AMC operates initial operation, the

ejection sensor is ON.
NOTE
This attention message appears when the auto mount carrier is
attached.
Suffix
number
01
Condition
When the mount is inserted for the first time, the
mount sensor does not turn light.
NOTE
This attention message appears when the auto mount carrier is
attached.
Check if no mounts are left in the mount unit and the

mount stocker.
Check if no mounts are left in the mount unit and the

mount stocker.
Check if two dummy mounts are not set

continuously.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Mount sensor
Ejection sensor
MMC sensor PCB
AMC connecting PCB
Manual No.
6116
6116
6637
6640
6501
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S9-1 135/240 AMC (1)
S9-2 135/240 AMC (2)
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Mount sensor
Mount sensor (entrance)
MMC sensor PCB
AMC connecting PCB
Manual No.
6116
6116
6637
6640
6501
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S9-1 135/240 AMC (1)
S9-2 135/240 AMC (2)
Detailed diagram
S12-17 AMC (1)

S12-18 AMC (2)
S12-19 AMC (3)
Detailed diagram
S12-17 AMC (1)

S12-18 AMC (2)
S12-19 AMC (3)
4167
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
Check Point
4168
No. 1430
Confirm the frame size.
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
Smaller 120 size film different from the set size is

detected.
NOTE
When setting a 6 7 film in the film size 6 8, then this
message appears.
Confirm the 120 film size.
Check that the loading sensor, the ready sensor and

the film sensor are not soiled.

Adjustment.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
Diagnosis
Sensitivity adjustment failure in the loading
sensor, ready sensor, or film sensor
Failed parts
Manual No.
3151
Manual No.
6112
Loading sensor
Ready sensor
Film sensor
Film feed motor
PM driver (film feed motor)
120 connecting PCB
120 sensor PCB
6851
6621
6622
6501
6502
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S5-1 120 AFC
Detailed diagram
S12-11 120 AFC
4168
1/1
4169
No. 1432
Attach the MMC.
This attention message will be released when the MMC is
attached.
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
An attempt is made to carry out AMC daily setup and

lamp change setup on the condition that MMC light
source is registered.
NOTE
Only a light source of mount carrier for MMC or AMC can be
registered.
4. Troubleshooting
Carry out the light source registration when using the different
type of the mount carrier.
Check Point
1

the MMC attached.
Carry out the light source registration.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Connecting PCB 1
MMC connecting PCB
Manual No.
6601
6636
6501
6502
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S2-5 Around AFC/scanner driver PCB
S7-1 135/240 MMC (1)
S7-2 135/240 MMC (2)
Detailed diagram
S12-13 135/240 MMC (1)

S12-14 135/240 MMC (2)
4169
1/1
4170
No. 1433
Attach the AMC.
This attention message will be released when the AMC is
attached.
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
An attempt is made to carry out AMC daily setup and

lamp change setup on the condition that AMC light
source is registered.
NOTE
Only a light source of mount carrier for MMC or AMC can be
registered.
4. Troubleshooting
Carry out the light source registration when using the different
type of the mount carrier.
Check Point
1

the AMC attached.
Carry out the light source registration.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Connecting PCB 1
AMC connecting PCB
Manual No.
6601
6640
6501
6502
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S9-1 135/240 AMC (1)
S9-2 135/240 AMC (2)
Detailed diagram
S12-17 135/240 AMC (1)

S12-18 135/240 AMC (2)
S12-19 135/240 AMC (3)
4170
1/1
4171
No. 1435
Insertion direction of film is different.
Insert the film from the rear end (end with
largest frame number).
or
Press the
Press the
key to process the film by force.
Condition
Suffix
number
135 DX sensor detects that the film is inserted form

the leading edge. (when the 135 negative film
insertion direction detection function in Operator
Selections is ON)
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
Check Point
1

due to dust.
Carry out the sensor sensitivity adjustment for AFC

(135).
Diagnosis
Failed parts
135 DX sensor 1.2
Sensor PCB
Connecting PCB 1
Multi power supply
Manual No.
6111
6606
6601
6801
6501
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S4-1 135/240 AFC (1)
Detailed diagram
S12-8 135/240 AFC (1)
4171
1/1
4181
Attention message: Disk/Media
No. 1501
The media is write protected.####
Release the write protection tab on the disk.
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
The media is write-protected when an attempt was
made to write data to the disk.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
The name of the corresponding media will be displayed in the
second line of the message.
FD, MO, Zip, CD, DVD, SmartMedia, Compact Flash, or PC
card
Check Point
1
Check the write protection tab of the media indicated

by the message.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
FD drive
MO drive
Zip drive
CD drive
DVD drive
SmartMedia
Compact Flash
PC card
NOTE
Circuit diagram
LPP1-3 PC Power Supply connecting
LPP1-16 PC Power Supply connecting (1)
4181
1/1
4182
No. 1502
Replace the media.####
No. 1503
The appropriate file was not found.####
Replace the disk.

or
Press the
key to restart writing.

key to stop writing.
Suffix
number
Condition
The required file was not found when an attempt was

made to read data.
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
NOTE
FD, MO, Zip, HD, CD, DVD, SmartMedia, Compact Flash,
PC card, CD-R external writing system, or Network
When writing the data, the space of media is tight.
NOTE
After replacing the media, the data can be written
continuously.
card
The order number is displayed in the third line of the message.
(max: five orders)
Check Point
1
Check that the media containing the desired file has

been inserted.
Reset the power supply.
Diagnosis
The number of the order is displayed in the fourth line of the

message.
The number of media will be displayed in the fifth line of the
message.
Failed parts
MO drive
Zip drive
Check Point
1
HD drive
Check the free capacity of the disk indicated by the

message.
CD drive
DVD drive
SmartMedia
Diagnosis
Compact Flash
Failed parts
Manual No.
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
FD drive
MO drive
Zip drive
CD drive
DVD drive
SmartMedia
Compact Flash
PC card
Manual No.
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
FD drive
PC card
NOTE
Circuit diagram
NOTE
Circuit diagram
4182
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Press the
Condition
4188
No. 1510
Read the data. Set the media.
No. 1511
Write the data. Set the media.
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
Suffix
number
The media is removed while reading.
NOTE
card
Condition
A media is not placed when the data is to be written
to the media.
NOTE
card
Check Point
1
Check that the media displayed in the message is

placed.
The number of media will be displayed in the fourth line of

the message.
Check Point
Diagnosis
1
Failed parts
Manual No.
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
FD drive
MO drive
Zip drive
CD drive
DVD drive
SmartMedia
Compact Flash
PC card
NOTE
Circuit diagram

placed.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
FD drive
MO drive
Zip drive
CD drive
DVD drive
SmartMedia
Compact Flash
PC card
NOTE
Circuit diagram
4188
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
4189
No. 1512
Data was not read from the media.
No. 1513
Data was not written to the media. Format
the media?

Are you sure you want to format?
Condition

,
Condition
A disk error occurs when the data is to be read from

the media.
NOTE
card
Press the
Incorrect format of media
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
FD drive
MO drive
Zip drive
CD drive
DVD drive
SmartMedia
Compact Flash
PC card
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Condition
Suffix
number
-

placed.
key to format the media and write the
Press the
key to write the data to the media without
being formatted the media.
Check Point
1
or
Press the
data to the media.
Condition
A disk error occurs when the data is to be written to
the media.
NOTE
FD, MO, Zip, DVD, SmartMedia, Compact Flash, or PC card
Check Point
1

placed.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
FD drive
MO drive
Zip drive
DVD drive
SmartMedia
Compact Flash
PC card
NOTE
Circuit diagram
4189
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
4190
No. 1514
Set the template media then select the
media type.
No. 1515
Data is too large to write.

Condition
Condition
Condition
Frame printing is selected.
Album printing is selected.
Card printing is selected.
Postcard printing is selected.
Business card printing is selected.
Calendar printing is selected.
Multi printing is selected.
When the data is to be written to the file, the data

cannot be written as the file size is larger than the
capacity of the media.
NOTE
card
NOTE
card
Check Point
1
Condition
Check Point
1
Check the size of the media displayed in the message.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
FD drive

placed.
MO drive
Zip drive
CD drive
Diagnosis
DVD drive
Failed parts
FD drive
MO drive
Zip drive
CD drive
DVD drive
SmartMedia
Compact Flash
PC card
NOTE
Manual No.
SmartMedia
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
Compact Flash
Manual No.
PC card
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
4190
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
Suffix
number
4191
No. 1516
Data is too large to read.
No. 1517
Invalid image format. Failed to read.
or
Press the
or
key to read the data again.
Press the
key to stop reading.
Press the
Condition

Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
The data cannot be read since the file to be read from

the medium is 3800 2000 pixels or more. (In the
case of without optional memory)
Since the image format cannot be identified, printing

cannot be carried out.
The data cannot be read since the file to be read from

the medium is 7400 5000 pixels or more.
NOTE
FD, MO, Zip, CD, DVD, SmartMedia, Compact Flash, PC
card, or flatbed scanner
The file name which is not read is displayed in the third line of
the message.
NOTE
card
the message.
This message will be displayed each time the file is not read.
Check Point
This message will be displayed each time the file is not read.
When the machine is equipped with the optional DIMM, it can
read the file, the size of which is up to 7400 5000 pixels.
Check Point
1
Check the size of the file displayed in the message.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
PC card
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
Flatbed scanner
FD drive
MO drive
Zip drive
CD drive
DVD drive
SmartMedia
Compact Flash
NOTE
NOTE
Applicable input image format
Exif1.0, JPEG (including Progressive JPEG and CMYK
Format), Bitmap, PSD (including Photoshop document and
CMYK Format), PCD (Photo CD), PCX, DCX (Paint
BrushFormat), TGA (Taraga), and TIFF (non-compressed)
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
FD drive
MO drive
Zip drive
CD drive
DVD drive
SmartMedia
Compact Flash
PC card
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Check the format of the file displayed in the message.
Circuit diagram
4191
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Press the
4192
No. 1518
Output media is the same as Input media.
Select different one.
No. 1519
Data was not written to the media. Format
the media?
Are you sure you want to format?

Condition
or
Suffix
number
Condition
Press the
data to the media.
The same media is selected for input and output and

the
key is pressed.
Press the
key to format the media and write the

Condition
Suffix
number
A disk error occurs when the data is to be written to

the CD-R/RW.
NOTE
CD
Check Point
1
Check if the CD-R/RW is placed.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
6528
CD-R/RW drive
NOTE
Circuit diagram
4192
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
4193
No. 1520
Select the template.
No. 1521
Template information does not match to
make the Album Print.

Condition
Condition
Condition
An attempt is made to scan and read the data without

selecting the template when album printing.
An attempt is made to register without selecting the

template when album print channel setting.
Suffix
number
Condition
The information file does not exist when selecting the

album template, or selected the album template
without the image insertion area.
The image insertion area of album template is

overlapped.
A template other than album template is selected

when selecting the album template.
Check Point
1
Check if the album template is selected.
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
Check Point
1
4193
Correct the information file in the template

information correction display.
1/1
4194
No. 1522
Are you sure to print the previous frame
except selected one?
No. 1523
It was not registered as an option.

Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
An attempt is made to print the previous frame when

entering the 1 frame magnification display from the
judge display.
Suffix
number
Condition
Inputting or outputting is made with a media which is

not registered as an option.
NOTE
second and third lines of the message.
card
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
Check the media drive displayed in the message.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
PC card
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
Flatbed scanner
FD drive
MO drive
Zip drive
CD drive
DVD drive
SmartMedia
Compact Flash
NOTE
Circuit diagram
4194
1/1
4195-01
No. 1527
Write the data. Set the media.
No. 1528
Registered Print Channel is not for normal
printing.

or
Press the
Press the
key and set a new media to write.

key to write to the media.
Condition
key to stop writing to the media.
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
Displayed to check when the data is being written
after it is written to the media.
NOTE
card
Suffix
number
Condition
When the prints are made from the CT-1, Print Type
in Print Channel Setting has been set to other than
Normal Print.
NOTE
When using the CT-1 with off-line process, this message
appears.
Check Point
1

(max: five orders)
Change the print channel of QSS to the normal print

mode.

message.
The number of media will be displayed in the fifth line of the
message.
4195-01
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
,
Press the
4195-03
No. 1532
Write the data.
,
or
Press the
Press the
Press the
key and set a new media to write.

key to write to the media.
key to stop writing to the media.
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
Several orders are output to a kind of media.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
The name of the corresponding drive will be displayed in the
C:
(max: five orders)
message.
When changing the order or before writing the data, this
message appears.
4195-03
1/1
4195-04
No. 1533
Data was saved to the storage media.
No. 1534
Data was not written to the Hard Disk.
Would you like to delete the image file(s)?

Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Condition
or
Condition
Press the
key to bring up the File Delete dialog
box. Delete unnecessary files in the hard disk.
The data has been written to the storage media.
Press the
NOTE
C:
(max: five orders)
message.
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
When the data is to be written to the hard disk, the
space of drive C is below 4 GB.
NOTE
third line of the message.
C:
When media output is performed to the hard disk, this
message appears.
When this message is displayed, the File Delete dialog box
appears.
Check Point
1
Unnecessary file is deleted.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
6527
6521
6526
HD drive
ATX mother board
ATX power supply
NOTE
Circuit diagram
4195-04
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
4196
No. 1540
Data is being saved to the storage media.
the data saving is completed.
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
The data is being written to the medium.
4196
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
FD, MO, Zip, HD, CD, DVD, SmartMedia, Compact Flash, or
PC card
1/1
4197
No. 1547
Data was saved to the storage media.
Remove the media.
No. 1548
Hard disk is full. Would you like to delete
the image file(s)?
the data saving is completed.
Press the
Condition
Condition
The data has been written to the media.
NOTE
FD, MO, Zip, HD, CD, DVD, SmartMedia, Compact Flash, or
PC card
(max: five orders)
message.
Suffix
number
Condition
01
When Adobe Photoshop is started, the space of drive

C is below 4GB.
NOTE
C:
appears.
Check Point
1
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
6527
6521
6526
HD drive
ATX mother board
ATX power supply
NOTE
Circuit diagram
4197
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
or
Press the
key to bring up the File Delete dialog
box. Delete unnecessary files in the hard disk.
Condition
Suffix
number
4198
No. 1549
Data is too small to read.
or
Press the
Press the

Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
When reading the data from media, the file size is
smaller than the inputting minimum size.
IMPORTANT
Inputting minimum size from media is vertical 32 pixels
and horizontal 32 pixels.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
FD, MO, Zip, CD, DVD, SmartMedia, Compact Flash, PC
card, or flatbed scanner
the message.
4198
1/1
4201
No. 1550
Register the Calibration Plate Data.
Attention message: Colorimeter
No. 1551
The calibration plate data is out of range.
Register the data?

or
Suffix
number
-
Condition
The unavailable data is registered in the current
calibration plate data.
Check Point
1
Update the calibration plate data.
Press the
key to resister the correction value.
Press the
key not to resister the correction value.
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
When the colorimeter is calibrated, the difference

between the two photometry values obtained by the
calibration plate measurements from the leading end
to 9 mm and from that to 25 mm is 100 or less.
2111
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Colorimeter
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Manual No.
Check Point
6506
6801
2111
Check if the calibration plate is inserted in the reverse

direction.
Diagnosis
Carry out each correction via Colorimeter
Unit Adjustment.
Failed parts
Colorimeter
Manual No.
3157
Manual No.
6506
6801
2111
NOTE
Circuit diagram
4201
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
4202
No. 1552-##
The paper in the Colorimeter is too short.
It cannot be measured.
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual.
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
While the paper is being fed to lead the paper front
end, the paper rear end is fed to 5 mm before the
paper advance roller.
02
While the paper is being fed, the paper rear end is fed
to 5 mm before the paper advance roller.
4. Troubleshooting
01
Check Point
1
Check that a short test print has not been inserted.
Diagnosis
Carry out each correction via Colorimeter
Unit Adjustment.
Failed parts
Colorimeter
Manual No.
3157
Manual No.
6506
6801
2111
NOTE
Circuit diagram
4202
1/1
4221
Attention message: Pricing unit

No. 1600-##
Reload the Pricing Unit.
No. 1601-##
Turn on the Pricing Unit.
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
Suffix
number
03
When the type B (card printer pricing unit) is used,

the paper sensor in the pricing unit cannot detect the
paper within 30 seconds after the unit has started
printing.
02
When type A (bar-code printer pricing unit) is used

for printing, the pricing unit power supply is OFF.
03
The pricing unit power supply is OFF while the type

B (card printer pricing unit) is printing.
NOTE
The type of the pricing unit can be changed via Pricing Unit
Specification of Machine Specification.
04
When type C (bar-code printer pricing unit) is used

for printing, the pricing unit power supply is OFF.
When Pricing Unit Setting via Option Registration is set to

Not in use, this attention message does not appear.
Check Point
1
NOTE
Check Point
Confirm the set state of the pricing sheet.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
PU control PCB
PU printer
Condition
The cover on the pricing unit is open.
There is no pricing sheet.
Sheet feed switch is pressed.
Manual No.
6516
Diagnosis
Failed parts
PU control PCB
PU printer
4221
Manual No.
6516
-
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
4222
No. 1602-##
The rest 10 order could be kept by the
Pricing Unit.
No. 1603-##
The rest 2 order could be kept by the
Pricing Unit.
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
Suffix
number
01
When the standard setting of pricing unit is used for

printing, only 10 orders can be stored in the pricing
unit.
01
When the standard setting of pricing unit is used for

printing, only 2 orders can be stored in the pricing
unit.
02

for printing, only remaining 10 orders can be stored
in the pricing unit.
02

for printing, only remaining 2 orders can be stored in
the pricing unit.
03
When type B (card printer pricing unit) is used for

printing, only remaining 10 orders can be stored in
the pricing unit.
03
When type B (card printer pricing unit) is used for

printing, only remaining 2 orders can be stored in the
pricing unit.
04

for printing, only remaining 10 orders can be stored
in the pricing unit.
04

for printing, only remaining 2 orders can be stored in
the pricing unit.
NOTE
Condition
NOTE
4222
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
4223
No. 1604-##
Pricing Sheet Print Out Check
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
The judgement has been completed or the
key is pressed.
NOTE
When PJP/AUTO/PPI Automatic Order via Operator
Selections is set to Not in use, this attention message will not
appear after the judgement is completed.
4. Troubleshooting

4223
1/1
4225
Attention message: NMC

Attention message: NMC
No. 1620
New mail has arrived.
Condition
Condition
A mail, the upgrade software, or the backup data is
received.
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
4225
1/1
4228
Attention message: Software Upgrade

Attention message: Software Upgrade
No. 1801-####
Execute software upgrade.
Upgrade software again. If this error recurs, contact us or your
place of purchase.
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
Although the version of each control PCB is checked

when the power supply is turned ON, it is not correct.
NOTE
The name of PCB where the attention message arises will be
displayed in the second line of the message.
Suffix
number
4. Troubleshooting
Although the suffix number for this attention message will

vary depending on the condition, the corrective action should
be taken according to PCB displayed and the following
diagnosis.
PCB
0002
Printer control PCB (exposure)
0008
0010
0080
0100
PU control PCB
8000
Check Point
1
Upgrade the software.
3172
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Printer control PCB
PU control PCB
PCI-ARCNET conversion PCB
Manual No.
6551
6552
6501
6405
6516
6402
6506
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4228
1/1
4250
Attention message: Main
No. 1900
It was not registered as an option.
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
When the setup or adjustment for the option which is

not registered is to be carried out.
NOTE
To carry out the setup or adjustment, register as an option.
The suffix number is displayed in the second line of the
message.
Option
00001
PU
00002
NMC
00004
00008
00010
Flatbed scanner
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
4250
1/1
4251
No. 1901
Selected optional function is not available.
If you need to use, Install it.
No. 1902
Adobe Photoshop is being used. To enter
Menu, Quit the Adobe Photoshop.
Condition
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
After the optional software has been uninstalled, an

attempt is made to use its function.
NOTE
To use the optional software, install the software again.
Condition
An attempt is made to select Menu using F via
Order Display while Adobe Photoshop is being
used.
NOTE
The operation relating to setup cannot be done when the
Adobe Photoshop works.
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
4251
1/1
4252
No. 1903-####
Proceeding. One moment please. . .
No. 1904-####
Proceeding. One moment please. . .

or
Press the
Press the
responsibility.
Condition
1
The F key is selected via the Order Display during

processing.
Condition
The interrupt process is carried out while test prints

are made during setup.
An attempt was made to change each control PCB on

the Menu display or subsequent during processing.
NOTE
The suffix number varies depending on the operation in
progress.
Suffix
number
key to proceed the operation.

key to bring up the next display on your
Condition
An attempt was made to change each control PCB on
the Menu display or subsequent during processing.
NOTE
The suffix number varies depending on the operation in
progress.
Suffix
number
Condition
Condition
0001
Interrupting
0001
Interrupting
0002
Initializing
0002
Initializing
0003
Paper processing
0003
Paper processing
0004
Scanning (AFC)
0004
Scanning (AFC)
0005
Scanning (media)
0005
Scanning (media)
0006
Outputting media
0006
Outputting media
0007
Data for media output is being acquired.
0007
Data for media output is being acquired.
0008
Printing
0008
Printing
NOTE
In the service mode, attention number 1904 appears instead of
condition 3 of attention message No. 1903.
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
NOTE
This message will be displayed only in the service mode.
Press NO: Continue to bring up the next display.
4252
1/1
4253
No. 1905
Program timer was not set.
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
When the program timer is to be activated after close

down checks have been completed, the time of the
program timer has not yet been set.
Check Point
Set the clock of the program timer.
4. Troubleshooting
4253
1/1
4254
No. 1907
Select one frame.
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
The non-frame images for C, H, P are selected and
OK is pressed when setting the frame each C, H, P
via the Print Channel Setting.
Check Point
Select the images with the frames in the Frame
Setting on the Print Channel Setting and press OK.
4. Troubleshooting
4254
1/1
4401
No. 4001
Are you sure about deleting?
Attention message: Edit

No. 4002
Red Eye Correction cannot be executed
no more.

or
To delete, press the
To cancel, press the

key.
key.
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
An attempt is made to delete the area made in the

template information correction display.
An attempt is made to delete the image save data.
An attempt is made to delete the all area in the

template information correction display.
The delete button is pressed in the customer

information select screen.
Suffix
number
Condition
The Red Eye Correction is executed over 20 times for

an image.
NOTE
This message appears in the Red Eye Correction operation.
To repeat the Red Eye Correction over 20 times, reset with
UNDO.
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
NOTE
This message appears when operating in the Edit mode.
4401
1/1
4402
No. 4003-##
Image cannot be inserted into the
specified position.
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
The area for image inserting is not selected.
The dropped area is not for image inserting.
To drop to a frame except the area for image

inserting.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
Check Point
1
Check that the image is dropped in the area for image

inserting.
Check that the area for image inserting is selected.
4402
1/1
4404
No. 4006
Prints cannot be made with this Print
Channel. Select a Print Channel using a
larger paper width.
No. 4007
The Letter Information was not read
successfully.

Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
Suffix
number
Condition
The specified print size is larger than the paper size.
NOTE
This message appears in the mode for business card and ID
photo.
Condition
Some letter information file does not exist when
reading a image.
NOTE
Check Point
1
Make paper advance length longer.
Use the wide width paper.
4404
Correct the information file in the template

4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1/1
4405
No. 4009
Template file was not found. Select the
folder including the files.
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
There is not the template in the folder selected in the

template selection screen.
After selecting the folder in the template selection

screen, the CD-ROM is removed before reading.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
Check Point
1
Check if the CD-ROM is set securely.
Check if the folder which there are templates.
4405
1/1
4406
No. 4010
Specify the image area.
No. 4011
Are you sure you want to exit?
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
The image inserting area is not made in the template

The message appears for confirmation when quitting

the template information correction screen.
NOTE
This message appears when operating in the template
NOTE
This message appears when operating in the template
Check Point
Make the area for image inserting in the template
4. Troubleshooting
4406
1/1
4407
No. 4012
No more UNDO can be executed.
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
The cumulative UNDO processing capacity has
exceeded the buffer capacity.
NOTE
UNDO is for to cancel the proximate operation.
The buffer is a section of memory that stores the information
temporarily.
4. Troubleshooting
The processing capacity for UNDO changes depending on the

operations.
4407
1/1
4408
No. 4014
The saved data cannot be read with this
version.
No. 4015
Selected file already exists.

Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
The version of the image saved data is old when
reading the data.
NOTE
This message appears when reading an image in the Edit
mode.
Suffix
number
Condition
When making a new customer information file, there

is a same name file.
NOTE
This message appears when operating in the Customer
Information Input screen.
Check Point
Check Point
Save the data with another file name.

4. Troubleshooting
Make the image data again.
4408
1/1
4409
No. 4017
The head and jaw position is opposite, or
the selected region is too small.
No. 4018
Would you like to quit the Edit Mode?
or
Press the
Press the

key to quit the edit mode.
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
Condition
In ID photo mode, extremely small area is selected.
The head and jaw position is opposite.
Suffix
number
-
Condition
Edit End is pressed during image editing in the edit
mode.
IMPORTANT
When positioning the face in ID photo mode, position the
head first, then position the jaw.
4. Troubleshooting
The jaw cannot be positioned above the head.

NOTE
In example A, the jaw is set to wrong position therefore the
face area become narrower.
In example B, the head position is upside down.
Example B
Example A
Head position 1
Jaw position 2
Jaw position 2
Head position 1
4409
1/1
4410
No. 4019
If you Import, all customer information will
be deleted. Are you sure you want to
Import?
Suffix
number

key to stop importing.
01
The data base file for writing the customer

information cannot be opened.
02
The CSV file for writing the customer information

cannot be opened.
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
Try to read the customer information from CSV file
during image editing.
Condition
IMPORTANT
The data base file is Mdb file type.
The data base file is saved customer information of CSV
file type.
4410
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Press the
No. 4020
Failed to write the file.
Condition
or
Press the
4411
No. 4021
Failed to read the file.
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
02
The customer information cannot be read from CSV

file.
IMPORTANT
The data base file is Mdb file type.
4. Troubleshooting
The data base file is saved customer information of CSV

file type.
4411
1/1
4412
No. 4023
Image magnification ratio or reduction
ratio is out of range.
No. 4024
Select the layer.

Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
When specifying the cropping area using the mouse
in the edit mode or 1 frame magnification display,
magnification ratio exceeds the setting range.
Suffix
number
Condition
The default layer is not selected on the template edit

display.
Check Point
1
Select the default layer.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
The cropping value of image data in the edit mode or 1 frame
magnification display is from 10 % to 400 %.
4412
1/1
4413
No. 4025
This template has more than 16 layers.
You cannot use this template.
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
The template which has more than 16 layers is
selected on the Template Select Screen.
Check Point
Use the template which has 16 layers or less.
4. Troubleshooting
4413
1/1
4461
Error message: Processor
Blown fuses
No. 5500
The processing solution temperature is
above the safety range. CD
F8
Manual No.
6703
Processor relay PCB
F9
F10
No. 5501
above the safety range. BF
F12
In the case of a cooling failure
Manual No.
6181
Cooling water solenoid valve
No. 5502
above the safety range. STB
If the cooling water solenoid valve does not operate when

DC 24 V is output between connector pins 1 and 2 of each
cooling water solenoid valve, the solenoid valve is defective.
6381
Transistor PCB
Replace the chemical filter cartridge. For details, refer to the
manual.
Chilling unit
Processor I/O PCB
6701
6552
6801
6801
6181
Alarm release
Error message release
Power Supply
Processing tank cooling fan
If the cooling fan does not operate when DC 24 V in output

between connector pins 1 and 2 of each cooling fan, the tank
cooling fan is defective.
Condition
Error message No.
Condition
No. 5500
The CD processing solution temperature

exceeds the safety range (setting
temperature+1C) after temperature
adjustment has been completed. (CD
thermosensor)
No. 5501
No. 5502
6701
6552
6801
6801
Processor I/O PCB

Power Supply
The BF processing solution temperature

adjustment has been completed. (BF
thermosensor)
Thermosensor
The STB processing solution temperature

adjustment has been completed. (STB
thermosensor)
When temperature is incorrectly detected
Disconnect the connector of each thermosensor. If the

measured resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side
differs greatly from the values in the table below, the
thermosensor is defective.
6552
6181
6701
6552
6801
6801
Processing solution float switch

Processor I/O PCB
Check Point
1
Check that the value measured via Thermosensor

Calibration is correctly entered.
Check the setting temperature of the chilling unit

(only when equipped with the chilling unit).
4
5

Power Supply
Actual temperature (C)
Resistance ()
Check that the cooling water solenoid valve for CD,

BF or STB works well (only when equipped with the
cooling water unit).
10
20.35
20
12.59
30
7.99
Check that the tank cooling fans (FAN 3, 4 and 5)

operate properly.
35
6.42
38
5.65
Check that the pump cooling fans (FAN 6 and 7)

operate properly.
40
5.19
45
4.22
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F27
Manual No.
6181
Processor I/O PCB
Manual No.
6701
When temperature is incorrectly adjusted

Processing solution heater
Manual No.
6181
F29
4461
1/3
4. Troubleshooting
4461
Manual No.
Disconnect the connector of each processing solution heater.

If the measured resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the plug
side differs greatly from the values in the table below, the
heater is defective.
6703
6701
6702
6552
6801
6801
Processor relay PCB

Processor I/O PCB
Main relay PCB
Power Supply
No. 5503
The dryer temperature is above the safety
range.
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
Heater name
Resistance ()
Condition
CD (H1)
72
BF (H2)
72
Suffix
number
STB (H3)
57.6
In the case of a circulation failure

Circulation pump
Processor I/O PCB
Power Supply
Manual No.
6181
6701
6552
6801
6801
Condition
The dryer temperature exceeds the safety range
(setting temperature+10C) after temperature
adjustment has been completed.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F1
Processor relay PCB
Manual No.
6703
F2
F3
NOTE
Circuit diagram

F4
F5
F6
F7
Dryer heater
Processor relay PCB
Processor I/O PCB
Detailed diagram

LPP13-8 Option
Main relay PCB

Power Supply
Dryer thermosensor
Manual No.
6181
6703
6701
6702
6552
6801
6801
Manual No.
6181
6552
6801
Disconnect the connector of the dryer thermosensor. If the

Dryer safety thermostat
Processor relay PCB
Processor I/O PCB
Power Supply
4461
6181
6703
6701
6552
6801
6801
2/3
4. Troubleshooting
4461
Resistance ()
10
19.07
20
11.92
30
7.63
40
5.05
50
3.41
60
2.35
70
1.66
80
1.19
Processor relay PCB

Main relay PCB
Processor I/O PCB
Manual No.
6181
6703
6702
6701
6552
6801
4. Troubleshooting

Dryer fan
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram

4461
3/3
4462
No. 5504
below the processing range. CD

No. 5505
below the processing range. BF
6703
6701
6702
6552
6801
6801
Processor relay PCB

Processor I/O PCB
Main relay PCB
No. 5506
below the processing range. STB

Power Supply
purchase.
Heater name
Resistance ()
CD (H1)
72
Alarm release
72
57.6

Error message No.
Condition
No. 5504
The CD processing solution temperature

falls below the processing range (setting
temperature 1C) after the temperature
adjustment has been completed. (CD
temperature sensor)
The BF processing solution temperature
adjustment has been completed. (BF
temperature sensor)
Multi power supply

Processor I/O PCB
Power Supply
Resistance ()
10
20.35
20
12.59
30
7.99
35
6.42
38
5.65
40
5.19
45
4.22
Check Point
Check that the value measured via Thermosensor
Calibration is correctly entered.
Check the setting temperature of the chilling unit

(only when equipped with the chilling unit).
6552
6801
6181
6701
6552
6801
6801
The STB processing solution temperature

adjustment has been completed. (STB
temperature sensor)

Circulation pump
Processor I/O PCB
Diagnosis

Blown fuses
F27
Manual No.
Processor I/O PCB
6701
Processor relay PCB
6703
F29
F8
F9
F10
F12
Manual No.
6181
Thermosensor
Condition
No. 5506
BF (H2)
STB (H3)
NOTE
The processing solution temperature will begin adjusting
when the error display is canceled.
No. 5505
Manual No.
6181

Power Supply
Manual No.
6181
6701
6552
6801
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4462
1/3
4. Troubleshooting
4462
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram

No. 5507
The dryer temperature is below the
processing range.
purchase.
Alarm release
The dryer temperature will begin adjusting when the error display
is canceled.
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
The dryer temperature falls below the processing
range (setting temperature10C) during paper
processing. (dryer thermosensor)
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F3
Manual No.
6703
Processor relay PCB
F4
F5
F6
F7
6181
6703
6701
6702
6552
6801
Dryer heater
Processor relay PCB
Processor I/O PCB
Main relay PCB
Dryer thermosensor
Manual No.
Manual No.
6181
6552
6801

Processor relay PCB
Processor I/O PCB
4462
6181
6703
6701
6552
6801
Resistance ()
10
19.07
2/3
4. Troubleshooting
4462
Resistance ()
20
11.92
30
7.63
40
5.05
50
3.41
60
2.35
70
1.66
80
1.19
NOTE
Circuit diagram
4. Troubleshooting

Detailed diagram

4462
3/3
4463
No. 5508 [N]

The processing solution level is too low.
When the solution is insufficiently added

Main relay PCB
Manual No.
6702
6801
NOTE
Alarm release
Circuit diagram

Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
Detailed diagram

The processing solution level detectors of the

processing solution float switches (CD: FS1, BF:
FS2, and STB: FS3) turned OFF.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
If the processing solution level detector of the processing
solution float switch turns OFF, all the processing solution
heaters and circulation pumps will stop.
Check Point
1
Check if the processing solution is leaking from the

tank.
Clean the strainer units of the replenishment pumps

CD, BF, and STB1 and the hoses. Check the output
amounts.
Check if the float of the processing solution float

switch moves up and down smoothly.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F27
Processor I/O PCB
Manual No.
6701
F29
F31
When the level is incorrectly detected
Manual No.
6181
Disconnect the connector of the processing solution float

switch. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 3 on the
jack side when the float is lifted, the float switch is
defective.
Processor I/O PCB
Power Supply
Replenisher pump
6701
6552
6801
6801
Manual No.
6181
The replenisher pump does not start operating when AC 24

V is outputted between pins 1 and 2 of each replenisher
pump connector, the pump is defective.
Processor I/O PCB
6701
6552
4463
1/2
4463
No. 5508 [SM]

The processing solution level is too low.
Alarm release
6181
Water Supply Pump
If the water supply pump does not start to operate when AC

24 V is outputted between water supply pump connectors
(CD-W: pins 7 and 8, BF-W: pins 13 and 14, and STB-W:
pins 17 and 18), the water supply pump is defective.
SM I/O PCB
Processor I/O PCB

Main relay PCB
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
Manual No.
Power Supply
6741
6701
6552
6702
6801
6801
NOTE
If the CD-W has any problem, the No. 5524 Refilling water
operation error. message is displayed first.
The processing solution level detectors of the

processing solution float switches (CD: FS1, BF:
FS2, and STB: FS3) turned OFF.
NOTE
If the processing solution level detector of the processing
solution float switch turns OFF, all the processing solution
heaters and circulation pumps turn OFF.
Circuit diagram
4. Troubleshooting

Check Point
1

tank.
Clean the strainer units in the replenisher pumps

(CD-A: RP5, CD-B: RP6, CD-C: RP7, BF-A: RP9,
BF-B: RP10, and STB: RP11) and in the water
supply pumps (CD-W: RP-8, BF-W: RP-13 and
STB-W: RP-12) and hoses. Check the output
amounts.

Detailed diagram

LPP13-4 Waste solution collecting block
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F29
Processor I/O PCB
Manual No.
6701
F31
When the level is incorrectly detected
Manual No.
6181

jack side when the float is lifted, the float switch is
defective.
Processor I/O PCB
Power Supply
Replenisher pump
6701
6552
6801
6801
Manual No.
6181

V is outputted between pins 1 and 2 of each replenisher
pump connector, the pump is defective.
4463
2/2
4464
No. 5509
The circulation amount has decreased.
No. 5510
Processor A/D conversion error.
Replace the chemical filter cartridge. For details, refer to the
manual.
purchase.
Alarm release
Alarm release
NOTE
This error message will be displayed only when the machine is
equipped with the optional digital flowmeter.
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
The circulation amount of the CD processing solution

measured by the digital flowmeter falls below
3L/min.
Suffix
number
Although the machine is not equipped with a digital

flowmeter, the digital flowmeter is set to ON via
Option Registration.
NOTE
This error will not be displayed when the digital flowmeter is
set to OFF via Option Registration.
Check Point
1
Check that the chemical filter cartridge is not soiled.
Check if the circulation pump and the hose connected

to the pump are clogged.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F28
Condition
Processor I/O PCB
Manual No.
6701
Condition
The analog data detected by the CD thermosensor

cannot be converted to digital data.
The analog data detected by the BF thermosensor

The analog data detected by the STB thermosensor

The analog data detected by the dryer thermosensor

IMPORTANT
The A/D conversion is a process that converts analog
data of the temperature measured by the processing
solution thermosensor and the dryer thermosensor into
digital data via the processor control PCB.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
6181
Thermosensor

differs greatly from the values in table 1 below, the
Failed parts
Digital flowmeter
Processor I/O PCB
NOTE
Manual No.
6181
6701
6552
6801
Manual No.

Dryer thermosensor
6552
6801
6181

Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram
LPP13-8 Option
4464
6552
6801
Resistance ()
10
20.35
20
12.59
30
7.99
35
6.42
38
5.65
40
5.19
45
4.22
1/2
4. Troubleshooting
4464
Failed parts
Manual No.
6181
Dryer thermosensor

Resistance ()
10
19.07
20
11.92
30
7.63
40
5.05
50
3.41
60
2.35
70
1.66
80
1.19
4. Troubleshooting
6552
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram

4464
2/2
4465

Failed parts
No. 5511 [N]

The circulation pump has stopped. CD
Manual No.
If the circulation pump does not operate when DC 24 V is

outputted between pins 1 and 2 of the circulation pump
connector, the circulation pump is defective.
No. 5513 [N]

The circulation pump has stopped. BF
Processor I/O PCB

Main relay PCB
No. 5515 [N]

The circulation pump has stopped. STB1
No. 5516 [N]

Power Supply
No. 5517 [N]

No. 5518 [N]
6701
6702
6552
6801
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4. Troubleshooting
Detailed diagram
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
Condition
Error message No.
Condition
No. 5511
The rotation detector built in the CD

circulation pump detects that the pump
has stopped rotating.
No. 5513
The rotation detector built in the BF

No. 5515
The rotation detector built in the STB1

No. 5516

No. 5517

No. 5518

Check Point
1
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F27
Processor I/O PCB

Failed parts
Circulation pump
Manual No.
6701
Manual No.
6181
4465
1/2
4465

Failed parts
No. 5511 [SM]

The circulation pump has stopped. CD
Manual No.
If the circulation pump does not operate when DC 24 V is

outputted between pins 1 and 2 of the circulation pump
connector, the circulation pump is defective.
No. 5513 [SM]

The circulation pump has stopped. BF
Processor I/O PCB

Main relay PCB
No. 5515 [SM]

The circulation pump has stopped.STB1

No. 5516 [SM]

No. 5517 [SM]
No. 5518 [SM]
6701
6702
6552
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram
4. Troubleshooting
Alarm release
Condition
Error message No.
Condition
No. 5511
The rotation detector built in the CD

No. 5513
The rotation detector built in the BF

No. 5515

No. 5516

No. 5517

No. 5518

Check Point
1
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F27
Processor I/O PCB

Failed parts
Circulation pump
Manual No.
6181
Manual No.
6181
4465
2/2
4466
Detailed diagram
No. 5519
Thermosensor error. CD
No. 5520
Thermosensor error. BF
No. 5521
Thermosensor error. STB
purchase.
Alarm release
Condition
Condition
No. 5519
The temperature detected by the CD

thermosensor is not within a specified
range.
No. 5520
The temperature detected by the BF

range.
No. 5521
The temperature detected by the STB

range.
4. Troubleshooting
Error message No.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
6181
Thermosensor
Disconnect the connector of the thermosensor. If the

6552
6801

Resistance ()
10
20.35
20
12.59
30
7.99
35
6.42
38
5.65
40
5.19
45
4.22
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4466
1/2
4466
No. 5522
Dryer thermosensor error.
purchase.
Alarm release
Condition
Error message No.
Condition
No. 5522
The temperature detected by the dryer

range.
Failed parts
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Manual No.
6181
Dryer thermosensor
Disconnect the connectors of the dryer thermosensor and

inner thermosensor. If the measured resistance between pins
1 and 2 on the plug side differs greatly from the values in the
table below, the thermosensor is defective.
6552
6801

Resistance ()
10
19.07
20
11.92
30
7.63
40
5.05
50
3.41
60
2.35
70
1.66
80
1.19
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram
4466
2/2
4467
No. 5523
Inner Thermosensor error.
No. 5524
Refilling water operation error. CD-W
No. 5525
Refilling water operation error. BF-W
purchase.
No. 5526
Refilling water operation error. STB1-W
Alarm release
No. 5527

This message will be released automatically when the door is
closed.
No. 5528
Condition
No. 5529
Condition
The temperature detected by the inner thermosensor

is not within a specified range.
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
Alarm release
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
6181
6552
Inner thermosensor
Condition
Disconnect the connector of the inner thermosensor. If the

Error message No.
Condition
No. 5524
The refilling water level detector of the

CD processing solution float switch does
not turn ON even though approximately
60 seconds have passed since refilling
water operation started.
No. 5525

BF processing solution float switch does
not turn ON even though approximately
60 seconds have passed since refilling
water operation started.
No. 5526

STB1 processing solution float switch
does not turn ON even though
approximately 60 seconds have passed
since refilling water operation started.
No. 5527

No. 5528

No. 5529

6801

Resistance ()
10
19.07
20
11.92
30
7.63
40
5.05
50
3.41
60
2.35
70
1.66
80
1.19
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram

4467
1/2
4467
NOTE
The CD, BF, and STB4 processing solution float switches
have a processing solution level detector, a refilling water
level detector and a safety thermostat for each.
The STB3, 5 and 6 processing solution float switches have a
refilling water level detector for each.
Check Point
1

tank.

Check that the hoses from the refilling water pumps

CD-W, BF-W, STB1-W, STB2-W, STB3-W, and
STB4-W to the sub-tank are not clogged.
Diagnosis
Manual No.
4. Troubleshooting
When water is incorrectly added
6181
Refilling water pump

V is outputted between pins 1 and 2 of the replenisher pump
connector, the replenisher pump is defective.
Processor I/O PCB
Power Supply
When refilling water is incorrectly
detected
6552
6801
6701
6552
6801
Manual No.
6181
Disconnect the connectors of the CD, BF and STB4

processing solution float switches. If there is no conduction
between pins 4 and 5 on the jack side when the float is
raised, the float switch is defective.
Disconnect the connectors of the STB1, STB2 and STB3
processing solution float switches. If there is no conduction
between pins 1 and 2 on the jack side when the float is
raised, the float switch is defective.
Processor I/O PCB
Power Supply
6701
6552
6801
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram

4467
2/2
4468
No. 5530
The Processor Top Cover is open.
No. 5532
The Processing Solution Safety
Thermostat has activated.
Close the cover.
Alarm release
Alarm release

Condition
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
While prints are being made, the interlock switch

NOTE
The drive motor, the refilling water pump, the cleaning pump,
and the exhaust fan will stop when the interlock switch
Check Point
1
Check that the processor top cover is securely closed.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F27
Processor I/O PCB
Manual No.
Condition
The safety thermometer of the processing solution
float switches CD, BF, and STB turns OFF.
NOTE
The processing solution safety thermostat is activated at the
following temperatures.
OPEN (OFF) 462.5C
CLOSE (ON) 363C
If the safety thermostat of the processing solution float switch
turns OFF, all the processing solution heaters and circulation
pumps will stop.
Check Point
6181
Manual No.
Check if the hose connected to the circulation pump

are clogged.
6701
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
6181

Processor relay PCB
Processor I/O PCB
Power Supply
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram

6703
6701
6552
6801
6801
Manual No.
6181

Processor relay PCB
Processor I/O PCB
Main relay PCB
Power Supply
When the safety thermostat is defective
6703
6701
6702
6552
6801
6801
Manual No.
6181

jack side when the processing solution temperature is at
36C or below, the float switch is defective.
Processor I/O PCB
Power Supply
4468
6701
6552
6801
6801
1/2
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
4468
Manual No.
6181
Thermosensor
Disconnect the connectors of the CD1, BF and STB

thermosensor. If the measured resistance between pins 1 and
2 on the plug side differs greatly from the values in the table
below, the thermosensor is defective.
Processor I/O PCB
Power Supply
Resistance ()
10
20.35
20
12.59
30
7.99
35
6.42
38
5.65
40
5.19
45
4.22
4. Troubleshooting
6552
6801
6181
6701
6552
6801
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram

4468
2/2
4469
No. 5533
The Dryer Safety Thermostat has
activated.
6552
6801


6552
6801
Condition

Condition
The dryer safety thermostat turns OFF.
NOTE
The dryer safety thermostat is activated at the following
temperatures.
OPEN (OFF) 902.8C
CLOSE (ON) 704.4C
When the dryer safety thermostat goes OFF, the dryer heater
and dryer fan go OFF.
Check if the dryer fan is rotating.
19.07
20
11.92
30
7.63
40
5.05
50
3.41
60
2.35
70
1.66
80
1.19
Circuit diagram

Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F1
Resistance ()
10
NOTE
Check Point
1
4. Troubleshooting
Manual No.
6181
Dryer thermosensor
Alarm release
Suffix
number
Manual No.
Processor relay PCB
Manual No.
6703
F2
F3
F4
Detailed diagram
F5

F6
F7
When the dryer fan rotates incorrectly
Dryer fan
Processor relay PCB
Dryer heater
Processor relay PCB
Manual No.
6181
6703
Manual No.
6181
6703
Manual No.
6181
Disconnect the connector of the dryer safety thermostat. If

there is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side
when the dryer section temperature is at 60C or below, the
safety thermostat is defective.
Processor relay PCB
Processor I/O PCB
Main relay PCB
6703
6701
6702
4469
1/1
4470
In the case of a detection failure of the

exposure end sensor
No. 5535
Paper has jammed in the processor
section.

In the case of a detection failure of the
print sensor
Alarm release
Processor I/O PCB


Power Supply
Condition
Manual No.
6552
6801
Manual No.
6701
6552
6801
6801
NOTE
Condition
Although prints passed through the exposure end

sensor in the exposure advance unit, the print sensors
(right and left) in the dryer unit does not turn DARK
within a specified time.
IMPORTANT
This error message will appear when the print sensors
failed to detect the prints even though the sensors tried
to detect the prints six times continuously.
Check Point
1
Check that the upper guides and the squeegee unit are
securely attached.
Make sure that the gears and the rollers rotate

smoothly after removing the paper processing rack
from the processing solution tank.
Check if the lower turn belt of the paper processing

rack is ripped up.
Check that no paper remains in the dryer rack.
Check if the exposure end sensor in the exposure

advance unit is soiled.
Check if the print sensor is soiled.
Circuit diagram

4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
Detailed diagram
LPP11-4 Exposure advance section

Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F1
Processor relay PCB
Manual No.
6703
F2
When the dryer fan rotates incorrectly
Dryer fan
Processor relay PCB
Processor I/O PCB
Main relay PCB
When the drive motor is defective
Drive motor
Processor I/O PCB
Main relay PCB
Manual No.
6181
6703
6701
6702
6552
6801
Manual No.
6181
6701
6702
4470
1/1
4472
No. 5537
The Rack Stopper is not set.
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
While prints are being made, the rack stopper sensor

turns OFF.
Check Point
1
Check if the rack stopper is securely placed.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Manual No.
6181
Rack stopper sensor

Failed parts
Manual No.
6181
Rack stopper sensor

Processor I/O PCB
6701
6552
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram
4472
1/1
4473
No. 5538
Backup data error. Processor
Load backup data from the floppy disk. For details, refer to the
manual.
Alarm release
Press the
disk.
key to read the backup data in the hard
Condition
Suffix
number
The backup data of the processor control PCB is

abnormal.
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
NOTE
The name of the corresponding CPU PCB will be displayed in
the second line of the message.
If approximately five days have passed with the power supply
being OFF to the machine or if the CPU PCB has been
replaced with a new one, this error message will appear.
Diagnosis
When the data is erased
Carry out Reading data.
Failed parts
Manual No.
3169
Manual No.
6552
4473
1/1
4475

Detailed diagram
No. 5540
Print Conveyor 1 operation error.
purchase.
Alarm release
Condition
Condition
-01
Conveyor position sensor 2 does not turn LIGHT

even though a specified time has passed since print
conveyor unit 1 sliding started.
-02
Both conveyor position sensors 1 and 2 turn LIGHT

since print conveyor unit 1 sliding started.
-04
Conveyor position sensor 1 does not turn LIGHT

even though a specified time has passed since print
conveyor unit 1 storing started.
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
Check Point
1
Check if print conveyor unit 1 is attached securely.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F28
Processor I/O PCB

When the conveyor slide motor is
defective:
Conveyor slide motor

Processor I/O PCB
Power Supply
In the case of a detection failure of
conveyor position sensors 1 and 2
Conveyor position sensors 1 and 2
Processor I/O PCB
Power Supply
Manual No.
6701
Manual No.
6181
6701
6552
6801
6801
Manual No.
6181
6701
6552
6801
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4475
1/1
4476
No. 5541
Print Conveyor 1 was removed.
No. 5542
Laser Unit Thermosensor error.
Alarm release
purchase.
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
Print conveyor unit 1 comes off while the drive motor

is operating.
Condition
Suffix
number
Confirm the set state of print conveyor unit 1.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Processor I/O PCB
Power Supply
NOTE
Manual No.
6701
6552
6801
6801
NOTE
When the error is released once, the error does not recur until
the power supply is reset or the machine is started by the
program timer.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Printer control PCB
Laser unit
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram
The temperature detected by the laser unit

thermosensor is not within a specified range.
Manual No.
6551
6801
2601
IMPORTANT
Replacement and adjustment of the components in the
laser unit are impossible.
Replace the unit.
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4476
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
Condition
4477
No. 5543
The dryer cover is removed.
No. 5544
Failed to turn ON the PC when the
machine started up.
Close the cover.
purchase.
Alarm release
Alarm release
Condition
Condition
(dryer cover) turns OFF.
NOTE
When the interlock switch (dryer cover) turns OFF, the drive
motor, the dryer heater and the dryer fan will stop.
Condition
Suffix
number
Check Point
1
NOTE
After canceling the error, the machine can be operated to the
close down checks. However, if the computer does not start
before the starting work in the next morning and the power
switch of it is turned on, the error message will be displayed
again.
Check that the dryer top cover is securely closed.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F27
Processor I/O PCB
Manual No.
Condition
When the power switch is turned on, the computer
does not start because it is not communicated with
the processor control PCB.
Check Point
6181
Manual No.
Check that the cable and connector between the

processor control PCB and System control PCB are
broken or imperfect contact.
6701
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
Failed parts
6181
Processor relay PCB

Processor I/O PCB
Power Supply
6703
6701
6552
6801
6801
6552
6442

Manual No.
System control PCB

NOTE
Circuit diagram
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram
4477
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
4521
No. 5700-## [SM]

Replenishment pump operation error. CDA
No. 5701-## [SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. CDB
No. 5702-## [SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. CDC
No. 5703-## [SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. CDW
No. 5704-## [SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. BFA
No. 5705-## [SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. BFB
No. 5706-## [SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. STB
Error message: SM replenishment

Failed parts
Replenisher pump and water supply pump
Manual No.
6181
The replenishment pump and water supply pump does not

start to operate when AC 24 V is outputted to connectors of
CD-A: 1 and 2, CD-B: 3 and 4, CD-C: 5 and 6, CD-W: 1 and
2, BF-A: 7 and 8, BF-B: 9 and 10, or STB: 11 and 12 on the
plug side of the replenishment pump and water supply
pump, the replenishment pump and the water supply pump is
defective.
Replenisher pump sensor and water supply
pump sensor
6181
SM I/O PCB
6741
6701
6552
6702
6801
6801
Processor I/O PCB

Main relay PCB
Power Supply
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram

purchase.
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
01
The replenisher pump sensor or water supply pump

sensor stays ON even though a specified time has
passed since the replenisher pump or the water supply
pump started operating.
02
The replenisher pump sensor or water supply pump

sensor stays OFF even though a specified time has
passed since the replenisher pump or the water supply
pump started operating.
Check Point
1
Check that the valve of the strainer unit is not closed.
Clean the strainer.
Check that the replenisher hose and water supply

hose are not clogged.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F31
Processor I/O PCB
Manual No.
6701
4521
1/1
4522
Check Point
No. 5710 [SM]

Refilling water operation error. CD-W
No. 5711 [SM]
Refilling water operation error. BF-W
No. 5712 [SM]
F27
Check that the hoses from the water supply pump and
refilling water pump are not clogged.
Check that the processing float switch moves

smoothly.
Processor I/O PCB
Manual No.
6701
F29
When water is incorrectly added
No. 5715 [SM]

Manual No.
6181
Water Supply Pump
If the water supply pump does not start to operate when AC

24 V is outputted between pins 1 and 2 on connector CD-W:
pins 3 and 4, BF-W: pins 3 and 4, or STB-4: pins 5 and 6, the
water supply pump is defective.
Alarm release
6181
Refilling water pump
The replenishment pump does not start to operate when AC

24 V is outputted between pins 1 and 2 of connectors STB1,
STB2 and STB3 of the replenishment pump, the
replenishment pump is defective.
Condition
SM I/O PCB
Error message No.
Condition
No. 5710

CD processing solution float switch does
not turn ON even though a specified time
has passed since refilling water operation
started.
BF processing solution float switch does
not turn ON even though a specified time
has passed since refilling water operation
started.
No. 5712

does not turn ON even though a specified
time has passed since refilling water
operation started.
No. 5713

operation started.
No. 5715

tank.
Blown fuses
No. 0500 [SM]

No. 5714
Diagnosis
No. 5713 [SM]

No. 5711

operation started.
operation started.
Processor I/O PCB

Main relay PCB
Power Supply
When refilling water is incorrectly
detected
6741
6701
6552
6702
6801
6801
Manual No.
6181

switch. If there is no conduction between CD: pins 5 and 6,
BF: pins 5 and 6, STB: pins 1 and 2, and STB4: pins 5 and 6
when the float is lifted, the float switch is defective.
Processor I/O PCB
Power Supply
6701
6552
6801
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4522
1/2
4. Troubleshooting
4522
Detailed diagram
4. Troubleshooting

4522
2/2
4607
Error message: Printer
In the case of a detection failure (paper

loading sensor, paper end sensors 1 and
2)
No. 6012-##
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A
Printer control PCB
No. 6013-##
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B

Manual No.
6551
6582
6801
NOTE
Alarm release
Circuit diagram

Condition
Condition
Detailed diagram
No. 6012
Paper cannot be loaded from paper

magazine A.
No. 6013
Paper cannot be loaded from paper

magazine B.

Suffix
number
Condition
01
Even when a specified length of paper is advanced

after the paper loading has started, paper end sensors
A and/or B do not turn DARK.
02

after the paper end sensor has turned DARK, the
loading sensor does not turn DARK.
4. Troubleshooting
Error message No.
Check Point
1
Check that the paper is correctly inserted into the

paper magazine.
Clean the advance roller.
Check that the paper loading sensor and the paper end
sensor are not soiled.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F16
Printer I/O PCB 1

In the case of an advance failure

PM driver (paper advance motor 1)
Printer I/O PCB 1
Printer control PCB
2, )
Paper loading sensor
Printer I/O PCB 1
Manual No.
6460
Manual No.
6156
6851
6460
6551
6801
6801
Manual No.
6156
6156
6460
4607
1/2
4607
No. 6014-##
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A
No. 6015-##
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B

2)
Printer control PCB
Manual No.
6551
6582
6801
NOTE
Alarm release
Circuit diagram

Condition
Condition
Detailed diagram
No. 6014
Paper cannot be rewound into paper

magazine A.
No. 6015
Paper cannot be rewound into paper

magazine B.
Suffix
number

4. Troubleshooting
Error message No.
Condition
01
Even when a specified length of paper is rewound

after the paper rewinding has started, the paper
loading sensor does not turn LIGHT.
02
Even when a specified length of paper is rewound

after the paper loading sensor has turned LIGHT,
paper end sensors A and/or B do not turn LIGHT.
Check Point
1
Check that the paper is correctly inserted into the

paper magazine.
Clean the advance roller.
Check that the paper loading sensor and the paper end
sensor are not soiled.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F16
Printer I/O PCB 1


Printer I/O PCB 1
Printer control PCB
2, )
Printer I/O PCB 1
Manual No.
6460
Manual No.
6156
6156
6460
6551
6801
6801
Manual No.
6156
6156
6460
4607
2/2
4608

Detailed diagram
No. 6016-##
Paper Cutter operation error.

purchase.
Alarm release
Condition
Condition
01
The cut home sensor does not turn LIGHT even

though a specified time has passed during cut
operation.
02
The cut end sensor does not turn DARK even though
a specified time has passed since the cut end sensor
turned LIGHT during cut operation.
03
The cut end sensor does not turn LIGHT even though
a specified time has passed after the cut operation
was completed.
04
The cut end sensor does not turn DARK even though
a specified time has passed since cut operation was
completed and the cut home sensor turned LIGHT.
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F19
Printer I/O PCB 1

In the case of an operation failure
Manual No.
6460
Manual No.
2522
Cutter unit
Cut motor
Printer I/O PCB 1
Printer control PCB
In the case of a detection failure
Cut home sensor
Cut end sensor
Printer control PCB
6156
6460
6551
6801
6801
Manual No.
6156
6156
6551
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4608
1/2
4608
No. 6017-##
Paper has jammed in the printer section.

Paper supply end sensor

Exposure start sensor
Exposure end sensor
Alarm release
Printer control PCB

Manual No.
6156
6157
6157
6552
6551
6801
NOTE
Condition
Circuit diagram
Condition
01
The paper supply end sensor does not turn DARK

even though a specified length of paper was fed from
the arm of paper supply unit A.
02
The exposure start sensor does not turn DARK even

though a specified length of paper was fed from the
exposure standby position.
03

after the exposure start sensor has turned DARK, the
exposure start sensor does not turn LIGHT.
04
The exposure end sensor does not turn DARK even

though a specified length of paper was fed from the
exposure standby position.

around

4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
Detailed diagram

Check Point
1
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F18
Printer I/O PCB 1
Manual No.
6460
F19
In the case of an adjusting failure
Stop position of the paper advance unit arm
Standard position of the paper advance unit
arm
Arm move motors (right and left)
Paper hold motor
Exposure advance motor 1
Pressure change motor 1
PM driver (exposure advance motor 2)
Printer I/O PCB 1
Printer control PCB
Manual No.
3201
2652
Manual No.
6158
6158
6157
6157
6157
6157
6851
6460
6551
6801
6801
4608
2/2
4611

Detailed diagram
No. 6021-##
Paper remains in the printer section.

Alarm release
Condition
Condition
01
Paper end sensor A turns DARK after the error

message No. 6017: Paper has jammed in the
printer section. was released.
02
Paper end sensor B turns DARK after the error

03
The paper loading sensor turns DARK after the error

04
The paper supply end sensor turns DARK after the

error message No. 6017: Paper has jammed in the
05
The exposure start sensor turns DARK after the error

4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
NOTE
When the door is open, the error messages described above
will be displayed because the check whether the paper remains
or not cannot be done.
Check Point
1
Check if no paper remains in the printer.
Diagnosis
Printer control PCB
Manual No.
6156
6156
6156
6157
6551
6801
6582
NOTE
Circuit diagram

around
4611
1/1
4619
No. 6034-##
Paper has jammed in the Paper Advance
Section.

Circuit diagram

around
Detailed diagram

Alarm release
Condition
Condition
01
Even when a specified length of paper is fed after the

exposure end sensor has turned DARK, the exposure
end sensor does not turn LIGHT.
02
The exposure end sensor is being turned DARK.

4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
Check Point
1
Check that the exposure end sensor is not soiled.
Diagnosis
Stop position of the paper advance unit arm
Standard position of the paper advance unit
arm
Blown fuses
F18
Printer I/O PCB 1
Manual No.
3201
2652
Manual No.
6460
F19
Printer I/O PCB 1
Printer control PCB
Exposure end sensor
Manual No.
6157
6157
6157
6157
6851
6460
6551
6801
6801
Manual No.
6157
6552
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4619
1/1
4626
No. 6054
The Initial Setup was not executed.
purchase.
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
An attempt is made to carry out printing without
initial setup.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
Check the points and follow the diagnosis mentioned below
even though the initial setup have been finished.
Check Point
1
Allow the computer to read the backup data.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Carry out initial setup.
Manual No.
Initial Setup
4626
1/1
4627
No. 6056
Printer system error.
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
When the RAM or the like on the printer control PCB

is checked during start-up, they are abnormal.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
6551
Printer control PCB
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4627
1/1
4644
No. 6073
Synchronous Sensor error.
No. 6074
B Laser control error.
No. 6075
G Laser control error.
purchase.
Alarm release
purchase.
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
The synchronous signal does not enter within the
specified period to the synchronous sensor PCB.
Condition
NOTE
Although the suffix numbers for this error message will vary
depending on the error occurring conditions, the corrective
action should be taken according to the following diagnosis.
An abnormal occurs in the B and G lasers.
NOTE
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Diagnosis
Manual No.
Failed parts
6801
6801
6574
6574
6573
2601

B laser driver
G laser driver
Laser I/O PCB
Laser unit
Manual No.
6801
6801
6574
6574
6573
2601

B laser driver
G laser driver
Laser I/O PCB
Laser unit
IMPORTANT
Replace the unit with a new one.
NOTE
Circuit diagram

IMPORTANT
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4644
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
4645
No. 6076
Polygon Mirror control error.
purchase.
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
The polygon mirror does not rotate property.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F42
Laser I/O PCB
Manual No.
6573
Failed parts
Manual No.
6571
6551
6573
2601
Laser control PCB

Printer control PCB
Laser I/O PCB
Laser unit
IMPORTANT
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4645
1/1
4649
No. 6080
Paper Magazine is different.
No. 6081
Backup data error. Printer
manual.
Alarm release
Alarm release
Suffix
number
-
Press the
disk.
Condition
The paper magazine selected in the print channel is
not attached in printing.
Condition
Suffix
number
Check Point
Check if the paper magazine is attached securely.
Check if the paper magazine code is set securely.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Printer I/O PCB 1
Printer control PCB
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Circuit diagram

Manual No.
6151
6460
6551
6801
Condition
The backup data of the printer control PCB is
abnormal.
NOTE
The name of the corresponding control PCB will be displayed
in the second line of the message.
If approximately 5 days have passed with the power supply
being OFF or if the printer control PCB has been replaced
with a new one, this error message will appear.
Check Point
1
Diagnosis
Manual No.
3169
Failed parts
Manual No.
6551
Printer control PCB

NOTE
Circuit diagram

4649
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
4650
No. 6082-###
Setup error.
Suffix
number
Condition
114
The G exposure correction amount in the high density

area during the initial setup is out of the adjustable
range. First print
115
The B exposure correction amount in the high density

range. First print
116
The R exposure correction amount in the high density

range. Second print
117

range. Second print
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
101
The R exposure correction amount calculated via

Exposure Light Intensity Setting during initial setup
is out of the adjustable range.
118

range. Second print
102
The G exposure correction amount calculated via

119

range. (The third print)
103
The B exposure correction amount calculated via

120

104
The R exposure correction amount calculated for the

gray color characteristic calculation print during the
initial setup is out of the adjustable range. First print
121

105
The G exposure correction amount calculated for the

122
The R exposure correction amount calculated for

printing via ND filter correction during the initial
setup is out of the adjustable range.
106
The B exposure correction amount calculated for the

123
The G exposure correction amount calculated for

107

initial setup is out of the adjustable range. Second
print
124
The B exposure correction amount calculated for

#10
108

print
The R exposure correction amount calculated for

sample print is out of the adjustable range.
#11
The G exposure correction amount calculated for


print
#12
The B exposure correction amount calculated for

#13

area calculated during the setup is out of the
adjustable range.
#14

adjustable range.
#15

adjustable range.
#16
The R exposure correction amount calculated during

the setup is out of the adjustable range.
#17
The G exposure correction amount calculated during

#18
The B exposure correction amount calculated during

109
110

initial setup is out of the adjustable range. (The third
print)
111

print)
112
113

print)
range. First print
4650
1/2
4. Troubleshooting
4650
NOTE
A mark "#" of the suffix number indicates a type of setup
carried out when an error occurs.
2: Daily setup
3: Weekly setup
4: Not in use
5: Paper specification registration setup
6: Paper magazine registration setup
7: Emulsion number change
Check Point
1
Calibrate the colorimeter.
Diagnosis
Manual No.
3157
In the case of a colorimeter failure

In the case of the colorimeter unit failure
In the case of the calibration plate failure
Manual No.
4. Troubleshooting
2111
2111
Diagnosis
Manual No.
6801
6801
6801
6801
6574
6574
6861
6861
6861
6573
6571
6551
2601

B laser driver
G laser driver
B-AOM driver
G-AOM driver
R-AOM driver
Laser I/O PCB
Laser control PCB
Printer control PCB
Laser unit
IMPORTANT
Replace the unit.
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4650
2/2
4651
No. 6083
Setup data error.
No. 6084
Setup data error (High density area).
Alarm release
Alarm release
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
Suffix
number
The exposure correction amount calculated for each

magazine is out of the adjustable range.
NOTE
The type of the paper magazine where an error occurs will be
Condition
The exposure correction amount in the high density
area calculated for each magazine is out of the
adjustable range.
NOTE
The type of the paper magazine where an error occurs will be
Check Point
Check Point
Make sure the paper used in the setup and the

processing solutions are matched properly.
Check the condition of the processing solution.
Make sure the laser dust prevention glass are not

soiled.
Make sure the paper used in the setup and the

processing solutions are matched properly.
Check the condition of the processing solution.
Make sure the laser dust prevention glass are not

soiled.
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Manual No.
3157

Manual No.
2111
2111

Diagnosis
Laser unit
Manual No.
Diagnosis
2601
Laser unit
Manual No.
3157
Manual No.
2111
2111
Manual No.
2601
IMPORTANT
Replace the unit.
IMPORTANT
Replace the unit.
4651
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
4652
No. 6086
Setup print error.
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
01
The printing operation is not completed due to paper

jam.
02
The printing operation is not completed due to

communication error.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
Check the another error message which appeared at
the same time.
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Make the setup print again.
Manual No.
-
4652
1/1
4659
No. 6090-##
R Laser Thermosensor error.
purchase.
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
An error occurs in the R laser thermosensor.
NOTE
The R laser thermosensor is built into the laser unit.
4. Troubleshooting
The thermosensor is not attached to the B or G laser.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F41
Laser I/O PCB
Manual No.
6573
Failed parts
Manual No.
6571
6551
6573
2601
Laser control PCB

Printer control PCB
Laser I/O PCB
Laser unit
IMPORTANT
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4659
1/1
4660
No. 6091-##
Arm Unit operation error.
No. 6092-##
Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error.
No. 6093-##
Alarm release
Alarm release
Condition

Condition
0001
Even when the arm unit has been moved for a

specified time, the zigzag correction sensors (right
and left) do not turn DARK.
0002
Even when the arm unit has been moved for a

specified time, the zigzag correction sensors (right
and left) do not turn LIGHT.
Suffix
number
Condition
Even when the pressure change motor has been

rotated for a specified time, pressure change sensors
1 and 2 do not change from DARK to LIGHT.
Check Point
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F17
Condition
Printer I/O PCB 1
Manual No.
Check if the sensor is soiled.
6460
Diagnosis

Arm move motors (right and left)
Printer I/O PCB 1
Printer control PCB
Zigzag correction sensors (right and left)
Printer control PCB
Manual No.
6156
6460
6551
6801
6801
Manual No.
6156
6551
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

around
Detailed diagram

Blown fuses
F19
Printer I/O PCB 1

Pressure change motors 1 and 2

Printer I/O PCB 1
Printer control PCB
Pressure change sensors 1 and 2
Printer control PCB
Manual No.
6460
Manual No.
6157
6460
6551
6801
Manual No.
6157
6551
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

around
Detailed diagram

4660
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
4661
No. 6094-##
purchase.
No. 6095-##
Reverse Unit (Left) Horizontal operation
error.
No. 6096-##
Reverse Unit (Right) Horizontal operation
error.
Alarm release
purchase.
Condition
Alarm release
Suffix
number
Condition
0001
Even when pressure change motor 3 has been rotated

for a specified time, pressure change sensor 3 does
not turn LIGHT.
Even when pressure change motor 3 has been rotated

for a specified time, pressure change sensor 3 does
not turn DARK.
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
0001
The horizontal advance sensors (right and left) do not

change from DARK to LIGHT even though a
specified time has passed after moving the reverse
unit in the paper advance unit horizontally.
0002
The horizontal advance sensors (right and left) do not

change from LIGHT to DARK even though a
specified time has passed after moving the reverse
unit in the paper advance unit horizontally.
Check Point
1
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F15
Printer I/O PCB 2


Printer I/O PCB 2
Pressure change sensor 3
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram

LPP11-5 Paper advance unit
Manual No.
6461
Check Point
Manual No.
6157
6461
6552
6801
6801
Manual No.
6157
6552
6801
Check if the reverse unit slides smoothly.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F13
Printer I/O PCB 2
Manual No.
6461
F14
Horizontal advance motors (right and left)
Printer I/O PCB 2
Horizontal advance sensors (right and left)
Manual No.
6158
6461
6552
6801
6801
Manual No.
6158
6552
6552
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4661
1/2
4. Troubleshooting
0002
4661
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram
4. Troubleshooting

4661
2/2
4662
NOTE
No. 6097-##
Reverse Unit (Left) Elevator operation
error.
Circuit diagram

No. 6098-##
Reverse Unit (Right) Elevator operation
error.
Detailed diagram

purchase.
Alarm release
Suffix
number
Condition
0001
The elevator sensors (right and left) do not change

from DARK to LIGHT even though a specified time
has passed during elevating the reverse unit in the
paper advance unit.
0002
The elevator sensors (right and left) do not change

from DARK to LIGHT even though a specified time
has passed during elevating the reverse unit in the
paper advance unit.
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
Check Point
1
Check if the reverse unit elevates smoothly.
Check that the belt tension of the elevator motor is

not slackened.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F13
Printer I/O PCB 2
Manual No.
6461
F14
Elevator motors (right and left)
Printer I/O PCB 2
Printer control PCB
Power Supply
Elevator sensors (right and left)
Manual No.
6158
6461
6552
6801
6801
6801
Manual No.
6158
6552
6801
4662
1/1
4663
No. 6100-##
Paper Advance Door is open.
No. 6101-##
Paper Hold Motor operation error.
Remove any paper that remains then close the door.
purchase.
Alarm release
Alarm release
closed.
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
Error message No.
Condition
No. 6100
In printing, the interlock switch (paper

advance door) turns off during period of
time.
NOTE
interlock switch (Paper advance door) turns off.
01
Even when a specified time has passed during the

arm pressing the paper, the paper hold sensor does
not change from DARK to LIGHT.
02
Even when a specified time has passed during the

arm pressing the paper, the paper hold sensor does
not change from LIGHT to DARK.
Check Point
Check Point
1
Check that the paper advance door is securely closed.
Check if the arm presses smoothly.
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F17
Condition
Printer I/O PCB 2

Attaching position of the interlock switch

(paper advance door) incorrect
Blown fuses
Manual No.
F19
6461
Printer I/O PCB 1

Manual No.
Paper hold motor
6151
Printer I/O PCB 1

Printer control PCB
Failed parts
Manual No.
6151
Power Supply

Printer I/O PCB 2
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram
6461
6552
6801
6801

Hold sensor
Printer control PCB
Manual No.
6460
Manual No.
6158
6460
6551
6801
6801
6801
Manual No.
6158
6551
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

around
Detailed diagram

4663
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
4665

Detailed diagram
No. 6104
Printer Door is open.
Remove any paper that remains then close the door.
Alarm release
closed.
Condition
Condition
01
While prints are being made, the interlock switches

(printer doors 1 and 2) turn OFF.
02

(printer door 3) turns OFF.
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
NOTE
interlock switch (printer door 1, 2 or 3) turns OFF.
Check Point
1
Check that printer doors 1, 2 and 3 are securely

closed.
Diagnosis
of the interlock switch (printer door 1, 2 or 3)
Failed parts
Interlock switch (printer door 1, 2 or 3)
Manual No.
6151
Manual No.
6151

Printer I/O PCB 1
Printer control PCB
6460
6551
6801
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

around
4665
1/2
4665
No. 6105
B Laser light source status error.
No. 6106
G Laser light source status error.
purchase.
Alarm release
Error message
No.
Condition
6105
An error occurs in the light source state of

B laser.
6106
An error occurs in the light source state of

B laser.
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
NOTE
This error lets you know that the B/G laser head in the laser
unit has deteriorated.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
2601
6571
6573
6574
6801
Laser unit
Laser control PCB
Laser I/O PCB
B and G laser drivers
IMPORTANT
Replace the unit.
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4665
2/2
4666
No. 6107
R Laser temperature is out of range.
purchase.
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
After becoming the standby state of the R laser, the
temperature deviates the upper range again.
02
After becoming the standby state of the R laser, the

temperature deviates the lower range again.
4. Troubleshooting
01
NOTE
The R laser thermosensor is built into the laser unit.
The thermosensor is not attached to the B or G laser.
The processable range of R laser is 32C to 38C.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
6571
6573
6574
6801
Laser control PCB

Laser I/O PCB
2601
Laser unit
IMPORTANT
Replace the unit.
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4666
1/1
4668
No. 6111
Auto Tuning error.
purchase.
Alarm release
Condition
Condition
01
The automatic tuning has been started but it is

canceled.
02
The automatic tuning is not started because of the

error.
04
The automatic tuning is finished abnormally because

of the error.
06
There is no response of the completion when it takes

60 minutes after the automatic tuning is started.
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
IMPORTANT
The error message which occurred during the automatic
tuning after the Close down checks is not displayed.
Check the error with the Error Record.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
6571
6573
6574
6801
Laser control PCB

Laser I/O PCB
2601
Laser unit
IMPORTANT
Replace the unit.
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4668
1/1
4681
Error message: Scanner
No. 6300
Scanner Light Source Section Safety
Thermostat was activated.
purchase.
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
The safety thermostat (scanner lamp) turns OFF.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
When the safety thermostat (scanner lamp) turns OFF, the
lamp power supply turns OFF.
OPEN (OFF) 902.8C
CLOSE (ON) 704.4C
The temperature at which the safety thermostat turns OFF is
referred to as the OPEN temperature.
Check Point
1
Check that the air filters are not soiled.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F26, 28
and 30
Manual No.
6502
Failed parts
Manual No.
6107
Lamp cooling fan
If the lamp cooling fan is not activated when 24 V is

outputted between pins 1 and 2 of the lamp cooling fan
connector, the cooling fan is defective.
Safety thermostat (scanner lamp)
Main relay PCB
6107
6502
6501
6801
6702
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Detailed diagram
4681
1/1
4682
No. 6302-##
Scanner Filter operation error.
No. 6303-##
Scanner Zoom 1 operation error.
No. 6304-##
Scanner Zoom 2 operation error.
purchase.
Alarm release
purchase.
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
Although the filter motor is turned ON, the filter
sensor stays LIGHT.
Error message No.
Condition
02

sensor stays DARK.
No. 6303
Although zoom motor 1 is turned ON, the

status of zoom sensor 1 does not change.
03

sensor does not turn LIGHT from the home position.
No. 6304
Although zoom motor 2 is turned ON, the

status of zoom sensor 2 does not change.
Check Point
1
Check that the filter wheel is not soiled.
Check that the filter sensor is not soiled.
Diagnosis
Condition
01
Zoom sensor 1 or 2 stays LIGHT.
02
Zoom sensor 1 or 2 stays DARK.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F26, 28
and 30
Suffix
number
Manual No.
6502
Failed parts
Scanner Unit
Main relay PCB
Blown fuses
F26, 28
and 30
Manual No.
2061
6502
6501
6801
6702
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Manual No.
6502
Failed parts
Scanner Unit
Manual No.
2061
6502
6501
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram

4682
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
01
4683
No. 6305-##
Scanner Focus operation error.
No. 6306-##
Scanner Iris operation error.
purchase.
purchase.
Alarm release
Alarm release
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
01
Although the focus motor is turned ON, the focus

sensor stays LIGHT.
01
Although the IRIS motor is turned ON, the IRIS

sensor stays LIGHT.
02
Although the focus motor is turned ON, the focus

sensor stays DARK.
02
Although the IRIS motor is turned ON, the IRIS

sensor stays DARK.
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
F26, 28
and 30
Manual No.
6502
Failed parts
Scanner Unit
Main relay PCB
Blown fuses
F26, 28
and 30
Manual No.
2061
6502
6501
6801
6702
NOTE
6502
Failed parts
Scanner Unit
Main relay PCB
Manual No.
2061
6502
6501
6801
6702
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Manual No.
Circuit diagram

4683
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
4684
No. 6307
Scanner Measurement Value error.
No. 6308-##
Scanner light source registration error.
purchase.
purchase.
Alarm release
IMPORTANT
When this error occurs, the light source registration has
not been completed properly. After troubleshooting,
carry out the light source registration again.
Condition
Alarm release
Suffix
number
The scanned data is unusually abnormal.
NOTE
action should be taken according to the following check point
and diagnosis.
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
Shutter speed on the scanner camera cannot be
adjusted properly during the initial setup or light
source registration.
Check Point
1

nor soiled.
Carry out the scanner change of light again.
NOTE
and diagnosis.
Check Point
1
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Scanner Unit
LVDS connecting PCB
D-ICE PCB
Printer control PCB
Manual No.
2061
6410
6408
6405
6551
6801
6801

nor soiled.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Scanner Unit
LVDS connecting PCB
NOTE
Circuit diagram

D-ICE PCB
Printer control PCB
4684
Manual No.
2061
6410
6408
6405
6551
6801
6801
1/2
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
4684
NOTE
Circuit diagram
4. Troubleshooting

4684
2/2
4685
NOTE
No. 6309-##
Scanner change of light error.
Circuit diagram
purchase.
IMPORTANT
When this error occurs, the daily setup has not been
completed properly. After troubleshooting, carry out the
daily setup again.

Alarm release
Condition
Condition
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
The shutter speed on the scanner camera cannot be

adjusted during the daily setup.
NOTE
and diagnosis.
Check Point
1

nor soiled.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Scanner Unit
LVDS connecting PCB
D-ICE PCB
Printer control PCB
Main relay PCB
Manual No.
2061
6410
6408
6405
6551
6801
6801
6702
4685
1/2
4685
NOTE
No. 6310-##
Scanner area registration error.
Circuit diagram
purchase.
IMPORTANT
When this error occurs, the Area Registration has not
been completed normally. After the problem has been
solved, carry out Area Registration again.

Alarm release
Condition
Condition
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
Although the area registration of the film carrier is

carried out via Area Registration, it cannot be
completed normally.
NOTE
and diagnosis.
Check Point
1
Check if the film carrier is attached correctly.

nor soiled.
Check that no foreign matter adheres to the scanner

unit light axis.
Light axis adjustment, and swing and tilt adjustment

of the scanner unit
Diagnosis
Light axis adjustment of the scanner unit
Swing and tilt adjustment of the scanner
Failed parts
Scanner Unit
LVDS connecting PCB
D-ICE PCB
Printer control PCB
Main relay PCB
Manual No.
3232
3231
Manual No.
2061
6410
6408
6405
6551
6801
6801
6702
4685
2/2
4686
No. 6311-##
Scanner data error.
purchase.
IMPORTANT
When this error occurs, the light source registration data
will be erased. In this case, you have to read backup
data or carry out the light source registration again.
Alarm release
Suffix
number
Condition
While the backup data is being read, the detected data

is out of range.
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
NOTE
action should be taken according to the the following check
point and diagnosis.
Check Point
1
Read the backup data again.
Initialize the scanner data and carry out the light

source registration and the area registration.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
6521
ATX mother board

NOTE
Circuit diagram
4686
1/1
4687
No. 6313-##
CCD check error.
purchase.
IMPORTANT
When this error occurs, the scanner setup has not been
completed properly. Carry out the scanner setup again.
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
Although the CCD check is carried out during the

light source registration, it cannot be completed
normally.
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
NOTE
Check Point
1

nor soiled.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Scanner Unit
LVDS connecting PCB
D-ICE PCB
Main relay PCB
Manual No.
2061
6502
6501
6410
6408
6801
6702
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4687
1/1
4688
NOTE
No. 6314
Setup Filter dispersion correction error
(Negative).
Circuit diagram

No. 6315
Setup Filter dispersion correction error
(Positive).
purchase.
Alarm release
Error message No.
Condition
No. 6314
Though the setup filter dispersion

correction of the negative is carried out
via Light source registration and Light
source update, those operations cannot be
completed normally.
No. 6315
Though the setup filter dispersion

correction of the positive is carried out
via Light source registration and Light
source update, those operations cannot be
completed normally.
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
NOTE
and diagnosis.
Check Point
1

nor soiled.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Scanner Unit
D-ICE PCB
Main relay PCB
Manual No.
2061
6502
6551
6408
6801
6702
4688
1/2
4688
No. 6316
Light source registration error (Negative).
No. 6317
Light source registration error (Positive).
purchase.
Alarm release
Condition
Condition
No. 6316
Although the light source registration

(negative) is carried out via Scanner
Setup, it cannot be completed normally.
No. 6317
Although the light source registration

(positive) is carried out via Scanner
Setup, it cannot be completed normally.
4. Troubleshooting
Error message No.
NOTE
Check Point
1

nor soiled.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Scanner Unit
D-ICE PCB
Main relay PCB
Manual No.
2061
6502
6551
6408
6801
6702
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4688
2/2
4690
No. 6318
CCD output characteristics error.
No. 6319
Backup data error. Scanner AFC
purchase.
manual.
Alarm release
Alarm release

Press the
disk.
Condition
Condition
Condition
Although the CCD check is carried out during the

light source registration, the result is abnormal.
NOTE
Check Point
1

nor soiled.
Suffix
number
Condition
The backup data of the AFC/scanner control PCB is

abnormal.
NOTE
being OFF or if the AFC/scanner control PCB has been
replaced with a new one, this error message will appear.
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Failed parts
Scanner Unit
D-ICE PCB
Main relay PCB
Manual No.
2061
6502
6501
6408
6801
6702
Manual No.
3169
Manual No.
2061
NOTE
Circuit diagram

NOTE
Circuit diagram

4690
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
4692
No. 6321
Focus auto adjustment error.
No. 6322-##
Scanner input balance error.
purchase.
Alarm release
Alarm release
Condition
Condition
Focus auto adjustment of the scanner is carried out in

failure.
Suffix
number
Condition
Each gain value of R, G, B, or IR is abnormal during

light source registration.
To determine the gain values of R, G, B, and IR

during light source registration, the gain value of IR
is used.
Check Point
1
Check that the scanner dust prevention glass is not

soiled.
Diagnosis
Manual No.
Confirm the swing and tilt adjustment of the

scanner unit.
3231
Confirm the light axis adjustment of the

scanner unit.
3232
Failed parts
Scanner Unit
NOTE
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
2061
6501
6502
6801
Scanner Unit
D-ICE PCB
Main relay PCB
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Manual No.
2061
6502
6501
6408
6801
6702
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4692
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
Suffix
number
4693
No. 6324
F stop value range error.
purchase.
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
Since the aperture has been adjusted during light

source registration, the standard light intensity cannot
be obtained.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
lamp, reflector, heat absorbing filter, dust prevention
glass and lens box) is neither damaged nor soiled.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Scanner Unit
D-ICE PCB
Main relay PCB
Manual No.
2061
6502
6501
6408
6801
6702
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4693
1/1
4694
No. 6326
The Lamphouse Cover is open.
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
The interlock switch (lamphouse) turns OFF during
scanning or printing.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses
Manual No.
6502

of the interlock switch (lamphouse)
Manual No.
6107
Failed parts
Interlock switch (lamphouse)
Main relay PCB
4. Troubleshooting
F28
Manual No.
6107
6502
6501
6801
6702
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Detailed diagram
4694
1/1
4731
Error message: Film carrier
Circuit diagram
No. 6400-##
Perforation Sensor error.####
S4-1 135/240 AFC (1)

S5-1 120 AFC
S6-1 110 AFC
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the
manual.
Detailed diagram
S12-7 135/240 AFC (5)

S12-11 120 AFC
S12-12 110 AFC
Alarm release
(135 AFC)
Suffix
number
Condition
Although the emission LED of the perforation sensor

135, 240 or 110 is turned ON and OFF, the sensor
detection status does not change.

Sensitivity adjustment failure of the 135
perforation sensor
Failed parts
NOTE
and diagnosis.
The name of film carrier currently attached will be displayed

135, 240 or 110
135 AFC sensor PCB

Power PCB
Manual No.
3155
Manual No.
6115
6638
6639
6502
6501
6801
6607
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
NOTE
Check Point
1
Check that the perforation sensor is not soiled.

Adjustment.
Circuit diagram

S8-1 135 AFC (1)
Diagnosis
Detailed diagram
(135/240, 110 AFC)

Sensitivity adjustment failure of the
perforation sensor
Failed parts
Perforation sensor
Connecting PCB 2
Connecting PCB 4
Connecting PCB 1
110 connecting PCB
110 sensor PCB
Manual No.
S12-15 135 AFC (1)

S12-16 135 AFC (2)
3151
3153
Manual No.
6111
6113
6602
6609
6601
6631
6606
6501
6502
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram
4731
1/2
4731

Failed parts
No. 6401-##
Loading Sensor error.####

Circuit diagram
Alarm release

S4-2 135/240 AFC (2)
S5-1 120 AFC
S6-1 110 AFC
Condition
Condition
Detailed diagram
S12-6 135/240 AFC (4)

S12-11 120 AFC
S12-12 110 AFC
Although the emission LED of the loading sensor

135, 240, 110, or 120 is turned ON and OFF, the
sensor detection status does not change.
NOTE
and diagnosis.
135, 240, 110 or 120
(135 AFC)
loading sensor
Failed parts
135 loading sensor
135 AFC sensor PCB
Check Point
1
Check that the loading sensor is not soiled.

Adjustment.

Power PCB
Diagnosis
(135/240, 110, 120 AFC)
Sensitivity adjustment failure of the loading
sensor
Manual No.
Failed parts
Loading sensor
Connecting PCB 2
Connecting PCB 4
Connecting PCB 1
120 connecting PCB
110 connecting PCB
Sensor PCB
120 sensor PCB
110 sensor PCB
Manual No.
6111
6112
6113
6602
6609
6601
6621
6631
6606
6622
6632
6501
3155
Manual No.
6115
6638
6639
6502
6501
6801
6607
NOTE
3151
3152
3153
Manual No.
Circuit diagram

S8-1 135 AFC (1)
Detailed diagram
S12-15 135 AFC (1)

S12-16 135 AFC (2)
4731
2/2
4. Troubleshooting
6502
6801
NOTE
manual.
Suffix
number
Manual No.
4732

Failed parts
No. 6402-##
Ready Sensor error.####
Circuit diagram

S4-2 135/240 AFC (2)
S5-1 120 AFC
S6-1 110 AFC
Alarm release
Condition
Detailed diagram
Condition
Although the emission LED of the ready sensor 135,

240, 110, or 120 is turned ON and OFF, the sensor
input status does not change.
NOTE
and diagnosis.
135, 240, 110 or 120
S12-6 135/240 AFC (4)

S12-11 120 AFC
S12-12 110 AFC
(135 AFC)
ready sensor
Failed parts
135 ready sensor
135 AFC sensor PCB
Check Point
Check that the ready sensors are not soiled.

Adjustment.
Diagnosis
Power PCB
Manual No.
Connecting PCB 2
Connecting PCB 4
Connecting PCB 1
120 connecting PCB
110 connecting PCB
Sensor PCB
120 sensor PCB
110 sensor PCB
Manual No.
6115
6638
6639
6502
6501
6801
6607
3151
Circuit diagram

S8-1 135 AFC (1)
3152
3153
Ready sensor
3155
NOTE
(135/240, 110, 120 AFC)
Failed parts
Manual No.
Manual No.
Detailed diagram
S12-15 135 AFC (1)

S12-16 135 AFC (2)
6111
6112
6113
6602
6609
6601
6621
6631
6606
6622
6632
6501
6502
4732
1/2
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
Sensitivity adjustment failure of the ready

sensor
6801
NOTE
manual.
Manual No.
4732

Failed parts
No. 6403-##
135 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.

Remove the film. For details, refer to the manual.
Circuit diagram
Suffix
number
Condition
01
Although the film is fed for a specified time after the

loading sensor has detected the film leading end, the
ready sensor does not turn DARK.
02

ready sensor has turned DARK, the perforation
sensor cannot detect any perforation.
03

ready sensor has turned DARK, the ready sensor does
not turn LIGHT.
14
The perforation sensor cannot detect the continuous

signals of DARK and LIGHT while the film is being
fed.
ready sensor has turned LIGHT, the film ejection
sensor does not turn LIGHT.
Although the film is fed reversely for a specified time
after the perforation sensor has turned DARK, the
ready sensor does not turn LIGHT.

S4-1 135/240 AFC (1)
S4-2 135/240 AFC (2)
Detailed diagram
S12-3 135/240 AFC (1)

S12-6 135/240 AFC (4)
S12-7 135/240 AFC (5)
(135 AFC)
sensor, ready sensor, or perforation sensor
Failed parts
135 loading sensor
135 AFC sensor PCB
Check Point
1
2

the perforation sensor are not soiled.
Adjustment.

Power PCB
Manual No.
3155
Manual No.
6115
6638
6639
6502
6501
6801
6607
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Diagnosis
(135/240 AFC)
Failed parts
Loading sensor
Manual No.
3151
Manual No.
6111
Ready sensor

S8-1 135 AFC (1)
Detailed diagram
S12-15 135 AFC (1)

S12-16 135 AFC (2)
Perforation sensor
Film feed motor
Sensor PCB
Connecting PCB 2
Connecting PCB 4
Connecting PCB 1
6851
6606
6602
6609
6601
4732
2/2
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
12
6501
6502
6801
NOTE
Alarm release
04
Manual No.
4733

Failed parts
No. 6404-##
Connecting PCB 2
Connecting PCB 4
Connecting PCB 1
Alarm release

Manual No.
6602
6609
6601
6501
6502
6801
NOTE
Condition
Circuit diagram
Condition
01
Even when a specified time has elapsed after the film

was fed from the cartridge, the loading sensor does
not turn DARK.
02
Even when a specified time has passed after the

loading sensor turned DARK, the ready sensor does
not turn DARK.
03
Even when a specified time has passed after feeding

the film strip is started, the ready sensor does not turn
DARK.
04
Even when a specified time has passed after the film

was fed from the CCD position, the perforation
sensor does not turn DARK.
05

perforation sensor turned DARK, the sensor cannot
detect the first perforation.
06

perforation sensor turned DARK, the sensor cannot
detect the end perforation.
07
Even when the film has been fed for a specified time
after the perforation sensor detected a perforation, the
next perforation cannot be detected.
08
When the film is rewound, the ready sensor does not

turn LIGHT.
09
When the film is rewound, the loading sensor does

not turn LIGHT.

S4-1 135/240 AFC (1)
S4-2 135/240 AFC (2)
Detailed diagram
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
S12-3 135/240 AFC (1)

S12-6 135/240 AFC (4)
S12-7 135/240 AFC (5)
Check Point
01

02

Adjustment.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Loading sensor
Manual No.
3151
Manual No.
6111
Ready sensor
Perforation sensor
Film feed motor
6851
4733
1/2
4733

Failed parts
No. 6405-##
110 sensor PCB

Alarm release
Manual No.
6632
6501
6502
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S6-1 110 AFC
Condition
01
Condition
Even when a specified length of film has been fed
after the loading sensor turned DARK, the ready
Detailed diagram
02

after the ready sensor turned DARK, the perforation
sensor cannot detect the first perforation.
03

after the ready sensor turned DARK, the ready sensor
does not turn LIGHT.
04
The perforation sensor cannot detect the continuous

signals of DARK and LIGHT while the film is being
fed.
05
When the film is to be fed reversely while the film is

placed over the perforation sensor, the ready sensor
does not turn LIGHT even when a specified length of
the film has been fed reversely after the sensor
detected the first perforation.
06

reversely after the ready sensor turned DARK, the
07

reversely after the perforation sensor turned DARK,
the ready sensor does not turn LIGHT.

4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
Check Point
01

02

Adjustment.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Loading sensor
Manual No.
3151
Manual No.
6113
Ready sensor
Perforation sensor
Film feed motor
110 connecting PCB
6851
6631
4733
2/2
4734
NOTE
No. 6406-##
Circuit diagram

S5-1 120 AFC
Alarm release
Detailed diagram
S12-11 120 AFC
Condition
Condition
01

after the loading sensor turned DARK, the ready
02

after the ready sensor turned DARK, the film sensor
does not turn DARK.
03

after the ready sensor turned DARK, the ready sensor
04
Although a specified length of film has been fed with

the film sensor DARK, the input status of the film
feed sensor does not change.
05
Although a specified length of film has been fed

reversely, the ready sensor does not turn DARK.
06

reversely after the ready sensor turned DARK, the
07

reversely after the perforation sensor turned DARK,
the ready sensor does not turn LIGHT.
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
Check Point
1

the film sensor are not soiled.
Diagnosis
sensor, ready sensor, or film sensor
Failed parts
Loading sensor
Manual No.
3151
Manual No.
6112
Ready sensor
Film sensor
Film feed motor
120 connecting PCB
120 sensor PCB
6851
6621
6622
6501
6502
6801
4734
1/2
4734

Detailed diagram
No. 6407-##
Spool Key operation error.
S12-3 135/240 AFC (1)

S12-5 135/240 AFC (3)
Confirm the Film Cartridge.
Alarm release
Condition
Condition
01
Even when the spool key motor has operated for a

specified time after the 240 cartridge was detected,
the VEI sensor does not turn LIGHT.
02
The spool key motor has operated for a specified time

after the 240 cartridge was detected, and then the
spool key motor has operated for a specified time
after the VEI sensor turned DARK, however the VEI
sensor does not turn LIGHT.
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
NOTE
and diagnosis.
Check Point
1
Check that the VEI sensor is not soiled.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
6111
VEI sensor
Spool key motor
Sensor PCB
Driver PCB 2
Connecting PCB 2
Connecting PCB 4
Connecting PCB 1
6606
6605
6602
6609
6601
6501
6502
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S4-1 135/240 AFC (1)
S4-2 135/240 AFC (2)
4734
2/2
4735
No. 6408
The Film Carrier is unlocked.
No. 6409-##
The 240 Head Cleaning Leader has
stopped.
Alarm release
Remove the cleaning leader. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
Condition
Condition
The AFC lock sensor turns LIGHT when the film is
in the AFC.
Condition
Suffix
number
Diagnosis
Failed parts
01
Even when a specified length of cleaning leader has

been fed after the loading sensor turned DARK, the
ready sensor does not turn DARK.
02

been fed from the scanning position, the perforation
03

after the perforation sensor turned DARK, the film
ejection sensor does not turn DARK.
04

been fed after the film ejection sensor turned DARK,
the ready sensor does not turn DARK.
05

after the ready sensor turned DARK, the film ejection
Manual No.
6107
6501
6502
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Condition
Detailed diagram
Check Point
1
Check that the head cleaning reader is not defective.
Check if the ready sensor, perforation sensor and film

ejection sensor are soiled.
Clean the film feed route.

Adjustment.
Diagnosis
Sensitivity adjustment failure of the ready
sensor, perforation sensor and film ejection
sensor
Failed parts
Ready sensor
Manual No.
3151
Manual No.
6111
Perforation sensor
Film ejection sensor
Film feed motor
Sensor PCB
Connecting PCB 2
Connecting PCB 4
Connecting PCB 1
4735
6606
6851
6602
6609
6601
1/2
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
4735
Failed parts
Manual No.
6501
6502
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S4-1 135/240 AFC (1)
S4-2 135/240 AFC (2)
Detailed diagram
4. Troubleshooting
S12-3 135/240 AFC (1)

S12-4 135/240 AFC (2)
S12-6 135/240 AFC (4)
S12-7 135/240 AFC (5)
4735
2/2
4736
No. 6410-##
Film Sensor error.###
No. 6411-##
Film Carrier Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment was not executed.
manual.
Alarm release
Alarm release
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
Suffix
number
Although the emission LED of the film sensor is

turned ON and OFF, the sensor input status does not
change.
01
135 DX sensors 1, 2, 3, and 4 are not adjusted.
02
240 DX sensors 1 and 2 are not adjusted.
04
The loading sensors 135 and 240, ready sensors 135

and 240, and perforation sensors 135 and 240 are not
adjusted.
08
The 110 film sensor has not been adjusted.
10
The 120 film sensor has not been adjusted.
The name of the film carrier will be displayed on the second

line of the message.
120
Check Point
1
Check that the film sensor is not soiled.

Adjustment.
NOTE
This error message will be displayed at the following cases.
Refer to the diagnosis when the error message will be
displayed again even though the sensitivity adjustment was
carried out.
The AFC/scanner control PCB was replaced.
Backup data cannot be retrieved from the AFC/scanner
control PCB.
The sensor standard adjustments have not been
completed properly.
Diagnosis
Manual No.
Check Point
3151
3152
3153

Adjustment.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
120 film sensor
120 sensor PCB
120 connecting PCB
Manual No.
6112
6606
6621
6501
6502
6801
NOTE
(135/240 AFC)
Manual No.
3151
(110, 120 AFC)

Manual No.
3152
3153
Circuit diagram

S5-1 120 AFC
Failed parts
Manual No.
6501
Detailed diagram
4736
1/2
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
and diagnosis.
Condition
4736
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S4-1 135/240 AFC (1)
S4-2 135/240 AFC (2)
S5-1 120 AFC
S6-1 110 AFC
Detailed diagram
4. Troubleshooting
S12-6 135/240 AFC (4)

S12-7 135/240 AFC (5)
S12-8 135/240 AFC (6)
S12-9 135/240 AFC (7)
S12-10 135/240 AFC (8)
S12-11 120 AFC
S12-12 110 AFC
(135 AFC)
Manual No.
3155

Failed parts
Manual No.
6501
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S8-1 135 AFC (1)
Detailed diagram
S12-15 135 AFC (1)

S12-16 135 AFC (2)
4736
2/2
4737
NOTE
No. 6412-##
135 DX Sensor 1 error.
Circuit diagram
No. 6413-##

S4-2 135/240 AFC (2)
No. 6414-##
Detailed diagram
S12-8 135/240 AFC (6)

S12-9 135/240 AFC (7)
No. 6415-##
(135 AFC)
Alarm release
Failure of 135 DX sensor standard

adjustment
Failed parts
135 DX sensor
Condition
135 AFC sensor PCB
Suffix
number
Condition
Although the emission LED of 135 DX sensors 1, 2,

3 or 4 is turned ON and OFF, the sensor input status
does not change.
NOTE
and diagnosis.
Check Point

Manual No.
3155
3155
Manual No.
6115
6638
6639
6501
6502
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S8-1 135 AFC (1)
Detailed diagram
Check if the 135 DX sensor is soiled.

Adjustment.
S12-15 135 AFC (1)

S12-16 135 AFC (2)
Diagnosis
(135/240 AFC)
Failure of 135 DX sensor standard
adjustment
Failed parts
135 DX sensor
Sensor PCB
Connecting PCB 2
Connecting PCB 4
Connecting PCB 1
Manual No.
3151
3151
Manual No.
6111
6606
6602
6609
6601
6501
6502
6801
4737
1/2
4. Troubleshooting
manual.
4737

Detailed diagram
No. 6416-##
S12-10 135/240 AFC (8)
No. 6417-##
manual.
Alarm release
135 DX Sensor 2 error.20
Suffix
number
Condition
Although the emission LED of 240 DX sensors 1 or 2

is turned ON and OFF, the sensor input status does
not change.
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
NOTE
and diagnosis.
Check Point
1
Check if the 240 DX sensor is soiled.

Adjustment.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
240 DX sensor
Sensor PCB
Connecting PCB 2
Connecting PCB 4
Connecting PCB 1
Manual No.
3151
Manual No.
6111
6606
6602
6609
6601
6501
6502
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S4-1 135/240 AFC (1)
4737
2/2
4740

Circuit diagram
No. 6423
Auto focus error.
S2-4 AFC/scanner control PCB

S7-2 135/240 MMC (2)
manual.
Detailed diagram
S12-13 135/240 MMC (1)
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
Although the auto focus adjustment is carried out for

a specified time, the adjustment cannot be carried out
normally.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
This error message appears when the manual mount carrier is
attached.
Check Point
1
Check that the film is placed on the mount.
Check that the AF sensor is not soiled.
Check that the scanner adjustment chart, emission

adjustment chart and the mount which is processed
normally are not damaged.
Check that the mount is processable with MMC.
Diagnosis
Manual No.
Check that the light axis of the AF sensor is

correctly positioned.
3154
After adjusting the height of the mount

carrier, check that the worm wheel swings
within the tolerance range of 4 mm (one
tooth).
2085
Failed parts
Manual No.
6114
6114
AF sensor
AF motor
If the AF motor is not activated when DC24 V is outputted

between pins 1 and 2 of the AF motor connector, the AF
motor is defective.
MMC sensor PCB
MMC connecting PCB
6637
6636
6501
6502
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram
4740
1/2
4740
No. 6424-##
Mount Unit operation error.
manual.
Alarm release
Suffix
number
Condition
01
When an attempt has been made to move the mount

to the home position, the mount carrier home sensor
does not turn DARK even after the mount carrier
slide motor has operated for a specified time.
02
When an attempt has been made to move the mount

from the home position, the mount carrier home
sensor does not turn LIGHT even after the mount
carrier slide motor has operated for a specified time.
03
When the mount is to be ejected, the mount insertion

cover is not opened.
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
Check Point
1
Check if the mount carrier sensor is soiled.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Mount carrier home sensor
Mount carrier slide motor
MMC connecting PCB
Manual No.
6114
6114
6851
6636
6501
6502
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S7-1 135/240 MMC (1)
Detailed diagram
S12-16 135/240 MMC (2)
4740
2/2
4741
No. 6425-##
Mount detection error.
No. 6426
The lane is out of position.
manual.
Alarm release
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
Suffix
number
Condition
The 135 or 240 lane limit switch turns OFF while the
film is being processed using the 135/240 AFC.
Condition
01
When the mount insertion cover sensor is ON, the

mount sensor does not turn DARK.
02
When the mount is to be ejected, the mount sensor

Check Point
1
Check that the lane limit switch is securely attached.
Diagnosis
Check Point
1
Failed parts
Check that the mount insertion cover sensor or the

mount sensor is not soiled.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Mount sensor
MMC connecting PCB
MMC sensor PCB
NOTE
Manual No.
6114
6114
6636
6637
6501
6801
If there is no conduction between connector pins 1 and 2

(135) or between pins 1 and 3 (240) of the lane limit switch
when the lane lock switch is pressed, the lane limit switch is
defective.
Connecting PCB 3
6603
6501
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S4-1 135/240 AFC (1)
Circuit diagram

S7-2 135/240 MMC (2)
Manual No.
6111
Lane limit switch
Detailed diagram
S12-13 135/240 MMC (1)
Detailed diagram
S12-16 135/240 MMC (2)
4741
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
4742
No. 6429
System error (AFC / Scanner control
PCB).
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
The system of the scanner in the AFC control PCB
does not operate normally.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
6501
6502
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4742
1/1
4744
NOTE
No. 6431
Auto focus error.
Circuit diagram

S9-1 135/240 AMC (1)
S9-2 135/240 AMC (2)
manual.
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
Although the auto focus adjustment is carried out for

a specified time, the adjustment cannot be carried out
normally.
Detailed diagram
S12-17 135/240 AMC (1)
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
This error message appears when the auto mount carrier is
attached.
Check Point
1
Check that the AF sensor is not soiled.
Check that the scanner adjustment chart, emission

adjustment chart and the mount which is processed
normally are not damaged.
Check that the mount is processable with AMC.
Diagnosis
Manual No.
Check that the light axis of the AF sensor is

correctly positioned.
3156
After adjusting the height of the mount

carrier, check that the worm wheel swings
within the tolerance range of 4 mm (one
tooth).
3156
Failed parts
AF sensor
AF motor
Manual No.
6116
6116
If the AF motor is not activated when DC24 V is outputted

between pins 1 and 2 of the AF motor connector, the AF
motor is defective.
MMC sensor PCB
AMC connecting PCB
Main relay PCB
6637
6640
6501
6502
6702
6801
4744
1/1
4745

Detailed diagram
No. 6432-##
S12-18 135/240 AMC (2)

S12-19 135/240 AMC (3)
Alarm release
Suffix
number
Condition
01
The mount carrier home sensor does not turn DARK

even though the mount unit moves to the home
position.
02
The mount carrier home sensor does not turn DARK

even though the mount unit moves to the home
position.
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
NOTE
attached.
Check Point
1
Check if the mount unit slides smoothly.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
MMC sensor PCB
AMC connecting PCB
Main relay PCB
Manual No.
6116
6116
6851
6637
6640
6501
6502
6702
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S9-1 135/240 AMC (1)
4745
1/2
4745
No. 6433-##
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
01
When the mount is inserted, the mount sensor does

not turn ON.
02
When the mount is ejected, the mount sensor does not

turn OFF.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
attached.
Check Point
1
Check that the mounts are correctly set in the mount

stocker.
Check that the weight of the mount stocker is set.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
MMC sensor PCB
AMC connecting PCB
Main relay PCB
Manual No.
6116
6637
6640
6501
6502
6702
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S9-1 135/240 AMC (1)
Detailed diagram
S12-19 135/240 AMC (3)
4745
2/2
4746

Detailed diagram
No. 6434-##
Mount detection (inlet) error.
S12-18 135/240 AMC (2)

S12-19 135/240 AMC (3)
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
The mount elevator sensor does not turn DARK even

though the mount is inserted.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
attached.
Check Point
1
Check that the mounts are correctly set in the mount

stocker.
Check that the weight of the mount stocker is set.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Mount sensor
MMC sensor PCB
AMC connecting PCB
Main relay PCB
Manual No.
6116
6116
6116
6116
6851
6637
6640
6501
6502
6702
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S9-1 135/240 AMC (1)
4746
1/2
4746

Detailed diagram
No. 6435-##
Mount insertion operation error.
S12-18 135/240 AMC (2)

S12-19 135/240 AMC (3)
Alarm release
Suffix
number
Condition
01
The loading sensor 1 does not turn DARK even

though the mount unit moves to the home position for
a specified time.
02
The loading sensor 1 does not turn LIGHT even

though the mount unit moves from the home position
for a specified time.
03
The loading sensor 2 does not turn DARK even

though the mount unit moves to the set position for a
specified time.
04
The loading sensor 2 does not turn LIGHT even

though the mount unit moves from the set position
for a specified time.
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
NOTE
attached.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Loading sensor 1
Loading sensor 2
MMC sensor PCB
AMC connecting PCB
Main relay PCB
Manual No.
6116
6116
6116
6116
6851
6637
6640
6501
6502
6702
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S9-1 135/240 AMC (1)
4746
2/2
4747
No. 6436
Mount elevator operation error.
No. 6437-##
Mount eject operation error.
Alarm release
Alarm release
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
Suffix
number
01
The mount elevator sensor does not turn DARK even

though the mount elevator motor activates for a
while.
01
When the mount is moved to the ejection position,

the mount sensor does not turn ON.
02
02
The mount elevator sensor does not turn LIGHT even

though the mount elevator motor activates for a
while.
The mount elevator motor does not turn OFF even

though the mount elevator motor activates.
NOTE
attached.
NOTE
attached.
Check Point
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Mount elevator sensor
Mount elevator motor
AMC connecting PCB
Main relay PCB
Manual No.
6116
6116
6640
6501
6502
6702
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S9-1 135/240 AMC (1)
Detailed diagram
S12-18 135/240 AMC (2)

S12-19 135/240 AMC (3)
Condition
Check if no mounts are left in the mount unit.
Confirm the set state of the mount stocker.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Ejection sensor
Mount ejection solenoid
AMC connecting PCB
Main relay PCB
Manual No.
6116
6116
6640
6501
6502
6702
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

S9-1 135/240 AMC (1)
Detailed diagram
S12-18 135/240 AMC (2)

S12-19 135/240 AMC (3)
4747
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
4748

Failed parts
No. 6438-##
135 Cleaning Leader has stopped.
Manual No.
6607
Power PCB
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
01
Although the leader is fed for a specified time after

the loading sensor has detected the leader, the ready
02

the ready sensor has turned DARK, the perforation
sensor cannot detect any perforation.
04

the perforation sensor turned DARK when the leader
is attached, the film sensor does not turn DARK.
05

the film ejection sensor turned DARK when the
leader is attached, the ready sensor does not turn
LIGHT.
06

the ready sensor turned LIGHT when the leader is
attached, the film sensor does not turn LIGHT.

S4-1 135/240 AFC (1)
S4-2 135/240 AFC (2)
Detailed diagram

S12-3 135/240 AFC (1)
S12-4 135/240 AFC (2)
S12-5 135/240 AFC (3)
S12-6 135/240 AFC (4)
S12-7 135/240 AFC (5)
S12-8 135/240 AFC (6)
S12-9 135/240 AFC (7)
4. Troubleshooting
Alarm release
Check Point
1
Check if the loading sensor, ready sensor, perforation

sensor, and film ejection sensor are not soiled.

Adjustment.
Diagnosis
Sensitivity adjustment failure of the loading
sensor, ready sensor, perforation sensor, and
film ejection sensor
Failed parts
Loading sensor
Manual No.
3151
Manual No.
6111
Ready sensor
Perforation sensor
Film feed motor
Sensor PCB
Connecting PCB 1, 2 or 4

6851
6606
6601
6602
6609
6501
6502
4748
1/2
4748
This error does not occur within two times rear edge
reshape using our product.
No. 6439-##
The film strip is too short to be printed.
Remove the film from the cartridge and proceed by strip. The film
length is shorter than prescribed. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
Suffix
number
Condition
01
The loading sensor detects LIGHT which is larger

than the specified size when loading the film after the
ready sensor detects the film leading edge.
02
The film of which size A between the last perforation

and the rear end is 146 mm or less is processed.
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
NOTE
This error occurs when the length of the IX240 film rear edge
is shorter than that is required for scanning.
Check Point
1
Check that the processed film has not the detach

perforation near the rear edge or the detach
perforation has not cut.
Check that the size A of the processed film indicated

below is not 146 mm or less.
Detach perforation
G058798
G058799
IMPORTANT
Process the stripped IX240 cartridge film.
For details, refer to the Troubleshooting Manual.
If the size A is 129 mm or more, all the frames in the film
can be printed by stripping the film.
If the size A is less than 129 mm, the last frame and the
several frames from the last in the film cannot be printed.
4748
2/2
4782
Error message: Disk/Media

No. 6503
Formatting could not be executed.
No. 6504
Backup data could not be read.
Clean the disk drive with a disk cleaner. For details, refer to the
manual.
purchase.
Alarm release
Alarm release
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
Suffix
number
The format error occurs in the driver controller.
NOTE
card
Check Point
1
Condition
When the power supply is turned ON, the backup
data stored in the hard disk cannot be read.
NOTE
C:
Check Point
Defective media
Clean the disk drive.
Diagnosis
NOTE
In the case of the FD, MO, Zip and DVD-RAM, clean the disk
drive.
Failed parts
6527
6521
6526
HD drive
ATX mother board
ATX power supply
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
6528
6528
6528
6528
6528
6521
6526
FD drive
MO drive
Zip drive
CD drive
DVD drive
ATX mother board
ATX power supply
Manual No.
NOTE
Circuit diagram
NOTE
Circuit diagram
4782
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
4783
No. 6505
Backup data could not be written.
No. 6506-##
Hard disk is full. Delete the unnecessary
image file(s).
purchase.
Alarm release
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
01
When the power supply is turned on or the data is to

be written to the hard disk, the space of drive C is less
than 4GB.
The backup data cannot be written to the hard disk.
NOTE
C:
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
6527
6521
6526
HD drive
ATX mother board
ATX power supply
NOTE
NOTE
C:
appears.
Check Point
1
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Circuit diagram
Manual No.
6527
6521
6526
HD drive
ATX mother board
ATX power supply
NOTE
Circuit diagram
4783
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Alarm release
4801
Error message: Colorimeter

Error message: Colorimeter
No. 6551-##
Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit.
No. 6552
Backup data error. Colorimeter Unit
manual.
Alarm release
Alarm release
Condition
When the suffix number of the message is "02", press the

key to read the backup data from the hard disk.
Condition
01
Although a specified length of paper is fed to lead the

front end of the paper, the paper sensor (rear) does
not turn DARK.
02
While the paper is being fed in paper advance

operation, the paper sensor (rear) turns LIGHT.
03
Even after a specified length of paper has been fed to

eject the paper, the paper sensor (rear) does not turn
LIGHT.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
System control PCB
Colorimeter
NOTE
Circuit diagram
Manual No.
6506
6801
6442
2111
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
01
The backup data for the colorimeter control PCB is

not found or the data is abnormal. (when the backup
data is not stored in the HD of the computer.)
02
The backup data for the colorimeter control PCB is

not found or the data is abnormal. (when the backup
data is stored in the HD of the computer.)
NOTE
being OFF or if the colorimeter control PCB has been replaced
with a new one, this error message will appear.
The message with suffix number 02 appears after the
colorimeter control PCB was replaced. Press the
key to read the backup data in the hard disk.
Diagnosis
For the message with suffix number 01
Carry out Reading Data of the backup FD.
Failed parts
Manual No.
3169
Manual No.
6506
NOTE
Circuit diagram
4801
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
4831
Error message: Pricing unit

No. 6600-##
Pricing Unit communication error.
No. 6601-##
Pricing Unit operation error.
purchase.
purchase.
Alarm release
Alarm release
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
Suffix
number
The communication between the PU control PCB and

the pricing unit is not carried out normally.
01
NOTE
Depending on type of the pricing unit, the suffix number is
different.
Suffix
number
02
Since excessive communication data is sent to the

pricing unit, the printing operation is delayed.
04, 05
Even after a specified time has passed since the data

was transmitted to the personal computer, no signal is
returned.
NOTE
different.
Bar code pricing unit

Type B
Suffix
number
Card printer pricing unit

04
Although a specified time has passed since printing

started, printing is not completed.
02, 03
Type
Type A
03
Condition
Type C
01
Standard
02
Type A
03
Type B
04
Type C
05
Type D
Pricing Unit
When the pricing unit specification via Machine

Specification is set to Not in use, this error does not occur.
Check Point
1
Type
Check that the pricing unit power supply is ON.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
PU control PCB
System control PCB
NOTE
Circuit diagram

LPP1-15 Pricing Unit
For PC output
Manual No.
6516
6402
6442
6801
When the pricing unit specification via Machine

Specification is set to Not in use, this error does not occur.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
PU control PCB
System control PCB
Manual No.
6516
6402
6442
6801
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4831
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
4832
No. 6602-##
Pricing Unit Printer operation error.
No. 6603
Backup data error. PU
purchase.
manual.
Alarm release
Alarm release

Press the
disk.
Condition
Condition
Condition
Abnormal data is sent from the card printer.

Continuous check for two or more seconds detects
that an error signal has been sent.
NOTE
different.
Suffix
number
03
Suffix
number
Condition
The backup data of the PU control PCB is abnormal.
NOTE
being OFF or if the PU control PCB has been replaced with a
new one, this error message will appear.
Type
Type B
Diagnosis
When the pricing unit specification via Machine Specification

is set to Not in use, this error does not occur.

Failed parts
Diagnosis
Failed parts
PU control PCB
System control PCB
NOTE
Manual No.
6516
6402
6442
6801
Manual No.
3169
Manual No.
6516
PU control PCB
NOTE
Circuit diagram

Circuit diagram

4832
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
4854
Error message: Software upgrade

Error message: Software upgrade
No. 6803
Language version of message data is
incorrect. Message display in English.
Upgrade software again. If this error recurs, contact us or your
place of purchase.
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
When the power supply is turned ON or when the

language of the machine specification is to be
changed, the selected language does not appear.
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
Diagnosis
Countermeasure
Upgrade the system program.
Manual No.
3172
4854
1/1
4861
Error message: Image processing PCB

Error message: Image processing PCB
No. 6820-##
Image Processing PCB operation error.
No. 6821
Print data error.
purchase.
Alarm release
Alarm release
Condition
Condition
Condition
4353 to
4880
Communication error between the image processing

PCB and D-ICE PCB occurs.
5377,
5632,
16389 16391,
16657 16676,
61441 61446

PCB and main control PCB occurs.
16387,
16392

PCB and laser control PCB occurs.
16386,
16388,
16401 16408,
61440
Internal processing error occurs in the image

processing PCB.
Condition
The print information sent from the main does not
match that of the printer.
NOTE
The print information contains order number, frame number
and index number.
Check Point
1
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
6405
NOTE
Check Point
1
Suffix
number
Circuit diagram
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Memory
Laser control PCB
Compact archive (HDD)
D-ICE PCB
Manual No.

6405
6404
6571
6583
6408
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4861
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix
number
4870
Error message: Communication
No. 6900-##
Main control system error.
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
An error is detected using the self-diagnostic function

of the main control system.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
Although the suffix number for this error message will vary
action should be taken according to PCB displayed and the
following diagnosis.
Check Point
1
Diagnosis
Countermeasure
Manual No.
3172
4870
1/1
4871
No. 6901-####
ARCNET communication error.#########
No. 6902-####
LVDS communication error.#########
purchase.
purchase.
Alarm release
Alarm release
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
Suffix
number
When the power supply is turned ON, the version is

checked, or software is upgraded, an ARCNET
communication error occurs.
The communication error occurs temporarily because

of the instant power failure.
NOTE
The name of PCB where the error arises will be displayed in
NOTE
Suffix
number
Condition
Suffix
number
PCB
0002
Printer control PCB (Exposure)
0008
0010
0080
0100
PU control PCB
The LVDS communication error occurs.
PCB
0001
0002
Diagnosis
Failed parts

PCI-LVDS conversion PCB
Diagnosis
ATX mother board

Failed parts
Manual No.
ARCNET cable
Printer control PCB

PU control PCB
ATX mother board
Manual No.
LVDS cable
6551
6551
6405
6516
6402
6521
6551
6405
6402
6521
NOTE
Circuit diagram

NOTE
Circuit diagram

4871
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
4872
No. 6903-####
Serial communication error.##########
No. 6904-####
SCSI communication error.##########
purchase.
purchase.
Alarm release
Alarm release
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
PCB
Suffix
number
0001
The serial communication between the ATX mother

board and colorimeter control PCB is not carried out
normally.
0002
The serial communication between the colorimeter

and colorimeter control PCB is not carried out
normally.
NOTE
Condition
The SCSI communication error occurs.
NOTE
Suffix numbers for the error message will vary depending on
the error occurring condition.
Check Point
1
Check the SCSI cable.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Manual No.
Serial cable
Diagnosis
Setting failure

System control PCB
ATX mother board
Colorimeter
6506
6442
6521
2111
3861
Install the SCSI driver.

Failed parts
Circuit diagram

Manual No.
6524
6521
SCSI board
ATX mother board
NOTE
Manual No.
NOTE
Circuit diagram
4872
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
4874

the value converted by the hexadecimal notation are
displayed.
No. 6906-####
Failed to change the mode. Enter to the
next mode?
Suffix
number
PCB
purchase.
The 1st bit
Unused
The 2nd bit
The 3rd bit
Unused
Alarm release
The 4th bit
Printer control PCB
The 5th bit
Unused
The 6th bit
Unused

Press the
Press the
Press the
key to change the mode again.

key to stop changing.
key to enter the next mode.
Condition
Suffix
number
Unused
The 8th bit
The 9th bit
PU control PCB
Example:
2002:
Failed to enter to the input/output mode. (AFC)
400 A:
Failed to enter to the adjustment mode. (AFC,
printer)
Condition
Each control PCB does not return any signal when
the mode is changed.
NOTE
Suffix numbers for the error message will vary depending on
the error occurring condition. Carry out the corrective actions
according to the following diagnosis for each suffix numbers.
Check Point
1
Diagnosis
# The first figure of suffix number:

The mode to which you are going to bring up is
displayed.
Suffix
number
The 7th bit
Failed parts
Printer control PCB
PCB

PU control PCB
1###
Normal mode
2###
Input/Output mode
3###
Setup mode
4###
Adjustment mode
5###
Start Up Checks mode
6###
Close Down Checks mode
7###
Program timer mode
8###
Input check mode
F###
Unknown
4. Troubleshooting
Manual No.
6551
6501
6516
6552
NOTE
Circuit diagram

# The last three figures of suffix number:

For each control PCB which failed to change the
mode, the last two figures are shown by a bit and
4874
1/2
4874
No. 6907-####
The appropriate file was not found.
Alarm release
Suffix
number
Condition
06
The mGamma01_b.bmp file (image data for display)

is not found during the monitor gamma adjustment.
07

08

09

10

41
The CMS_Chart1.bmp file for output the profile

chart is not present.
42
The PROF30_01.bmp file for output the profile chart

is not present.
43

is not present.
44

is not present.
45

is not present.
46

is not present.
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
NOTE
The file name where the error arises will be displayed in the
Diagnosis
Countermeasure
Install the QSS software.
Manual No.
3850
4874
2/2
4875
NOTE
No. 6908-####
Processing communication error.
Circuit diagram
purchase.
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
When the processing command is sent from the CPU

to each control PCB, each PCB does not return any
signal.
The communication error occurs temporarily because

of the instant power failure.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
The target CPU PCB or the CPU in the affected unit in the
Suffix
number
PCB
0002
Printer control PCB
0008
0010
0080
0100
PU control PCB
8000
Check Point
1
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Printer control PCB
Printer I/O PCB 1
PU control PCB
Power Supply
Manual No.
6551
6460
6552
6501
6405
6516
6402
6801
6801
6801
6801
4875
1/2
4875
purchase.
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
The CPU is reset due to power failure.
NOTE
The target CPU PCB or the CPU in the affected unit in the
Suffix
number
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4. Troubleshooting
No. 6909-####
CPU was reset. Abort the process.
PCB
0002
Printer control PCB
0008
0010
0080
0100
PU control PCB
8000
Check Point
1
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Printer control PCB
Printer I/O PCB 1
PU control PCB
Power Supply
Manual No.
6551
6460
6552
6501
6405
6516
6402
6801
6801
6801
6801
4875
2/2
4877
No. 6913
System was shut down forcibly. Restart
the system.
purchase.
Alarm release
Condition
Suffix
number
-
Condition
System has shut down forcibly while processing.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
Diagnosis
Failed parts
Printer control PCB
PU control PCB
Manual No.
6551
6501
6405
6516
6402
NOTE
Circuit diagram

4877
1/1
4971
Error message: Edit

Error message: Edit
No. 9000-##
Edit mode System error.
No. 9001-##
Edit mode Information file error.
purchase.
purchase.
Alarm release
Alarm release
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
Suffix
number
Condition
There is no msimg32.dll in Windows 2000.
AlhpaBlend function is not supported in Windows

2000.
The image insertion information is defective when

reading an information file in the Edit mode.
The image information file is broken when entering

in image editing mode.
The letter information is defective when reading an

information file in the Edit mode.
There is not the image information file when entering

There is an unknown information data when reading

information file extend data in the Edit mode.
Making data for frame printing is failed.
The contents of PSD file is defective when entering

Changing the size of template image is failed when

entering in image editing mode.
Changing the magnification of inserted image data is

failed.
NOTE
This message appears when reading an information file in the
Edit mode.
Check Point
1
Check if the information file is not broken in the

template information correction screen.
Install the option template again.
NOTE
Diagnosis
Countermeasure
Install the QSS software again.
Carry out the recovery.
Manual No.
3172
3850
3801
4971
1/1
4. Troubleshooting
4972
Error message: Edit
No. 9002-##
Edit mode Image data error.
No. 9003-##
Edit mode Image read error.
This file format cannot be read, or this file is broken. Select the
correct file.
Saved image is broken. Remake the data, and save it.
Alarm release
Alarm release
Condition
Condition
Suffix
number
Suffix
number
Condition
Condition
The image saved data to read is broken.
Reading PSD file is failed.
Copying the image inserted in Inserted Graphics is

failed.
There is not the information file in the image saved

data to read.
The inserted image data cannot be read by Plug-in.
There is not the template file in the image saved data

to read.
Reading PSD file is failed.
Reading PSD image file is failed.
There is not the image file to insert.
NOTE
This message appears when reading an image in the Edit
mode.
Reading image file to insert is failed.
The layer information to read image is defective.
Check Point
Reading Bitmap file in the preview screen is failed.
10
Reading thumbnail file in the template selection

screen is failed.
11
Writing thumbnail file in the template selection

screen is failed.
12
4. Troubleshooting
Make the image data again.
Diagnosis
Countermeasure
There is not a file when receiving the template file

name.
Manual No.
3172
3850
NOTE
Check Point
1
Check if the corrective image data is selected.
Carry out the operation using another image data.
Diagnosis
Countermeasure
Manual No.
3172
3850
4972
1/1
Operation sequence
Film advance operation (135) ..............................................................................................................................5101
Film feed operation (MMC) ................................................................................................................................5151
Film advance operation (AMC) ...........................................................................................................................5155
Paper path diagram ............................................................................................................... 5501

Paper path diagram ..............................................................................................................................................5501
Paper advance operation ...................................................................................................... 5511

Paper loading operation .......................................................................................................................................5511
Paper advance operation (before exposure) .........................................................................................................5521
Exposure operation ..............................................................................................................................................5541
Paper advance operation (after exposure: lane is not selected) ...........................................................................5551
Paper advance operation (after exposure: lane is selected) .................................................................................5552
Paper rewind operation ........................................................................................................................................5561
Paper splicing operation ......................................................................................................................................5571
Paper end operation .............................................................................................................................................5581
Fogged paper operation .......................................................................................................................................5591
5000
1/1
5 Operation sequence
5.
5000
5101
Film advance operation (135)

This section explains the process of the film being loaded, pre-scanned, scanned and ejected.
! Flow chart
1. Insert the film.

2. The film has passed the loading sensor.
Film feed motor: ON
Lane lock solenoid: ON (for 135/240 AFC)
Loading sensor
Rewinding unit
Film
G050809
3. Reading of the DX code starts.
DX sensor
G050863
4. The film has passed the ready sensor.

When the ready sensor does not detect the film:
Waiting film insertion
Ready sensor
G050810
5. The film is fed just before the scanning position.

Film feed motor: OFF
5101
1/4
5101
Scanning position
G050811
6. Pre-scanning starts.
Filter motor: ON/OFF (Light source shutter: OPEN)
Film feed motor: ON
7. The film has passed the perforation sensor.

When the perforation sensor does not detect the film:
Perforation sensor
G050812
8. The front end of the film enters the rewinding unit.

9. The rear end of the film has passed the ready sensor.
When the ready sensor does not detect the rear end of the film:
No. 6403
NOTE
This error message will be displayed when the ready sensor detected the film and a specified length of film was fed, but
the ready sensor did not turn LIGHT.
Ready sensor
G050845
5101
2/4
No. 6403
5101
10. The rear end of the film passes the scanning position.
Scanning position
G050846
11. The pre-scanning is completed.

Filter motor: ON/OFF (Light source shutter: CLOSE)
12. Scanning starts.

Film feed motor: ON (reverse)
When the scanning cannot be started:

When the memory capacity in the image processing PCB is insufficient, the rear end of the film waits before the
scanning position until the memory is sufficient.
Perforation sensor
G050847
No. 6403
Ready sensor
G050848
14. The rear end of the film has passed the loading sensor.
When the loading sensor does not detect the film:
No. 6403
5101
3/4
5101
Loading sensor
G050849
15. The final frame of the film has passed the scanning position.
Scanning position
G050850
16. Scanning is completed.

17. The film is ejected.

Lane lock solenoid: OFF
5101
4/4
5111

This section explains the process of the film being loaded, scanned and ejected.
! Flow chart
1. Set a film cartridge.

Lane lock solenoid: ON
Cartridge limit sensor: ON
When the IPI limit switch recognize the film is undeveloped

No. 1403
Undeveloped cartridge. Cannot print.
2. The light lock door is opened.

Light lock door motor: ON/OFF
Light lock door

G050860
3. The leading edge of the film is fed.

Film feed motor: ON (forward)
Spool key motor: ON (forward)
4. The front end of the film has passed the loading sensor.
When the loading sensor does not detect the film leading edge
No. 6404
The film is rewound.
Spool key motor: ON (reverse)
Light lock door motor: ON for a specified time
Film
Loading sensor
G050817
5. The front end of the film has passed the ready sensor.
Spool key motor: OFF
5111
1/6
Rewinding unit
5111
When the ready sensor does not detect the film leading edge:
No. 6404
Ready sensor
G050818
6. Reading of information starts.

NOTE
Read information of the DX code, frame numbers, FID and IX data.
Scanning position
G050823
NOTE
Reading of the the magnetic data starts.
9. The front end of the film has passed the perforation sensor.
When the perforation sensor does not detect the film advance:
No. 6404
Perforation sensor
G050819
10. The turn round perforation has passed the ready sensor.
5111
2/6
7. The leading edge of the film passes the scanning position.
5111
11. The turn round perforation passes the scanning position.

12. Check the magnetic data.

When the magnetic date has not been read
No. 1404
The IX frame data is incomplete.
If select the scanning again, read the magnetic data again after rewinding of the film.
Scanning position
G050820
13. Pre-scanning is completed.


Spool key motor: ON (reverse)

When the memory capacity in the image processing PCB is insufficient, the rear end of the film waiting before the
When the perforation sensor does not detect the film rewinding:
No. 6404
Scanning position
G050820
5111
3/6
5111
15. The final frame of the film passes the scanning position.
Scanning position
G050822

17. The film is fed.

When the magnetic data is not written:

Carry out Step 23.
18. The front end of the film passes the perforation sensor.
No. 6404
Perforation sensor
G050819
19. The turn round perforation passes the scanning position.

Magnetic head
G050852
5111
4/6
5111
20. Magnetic data writing start

NOTE
Wait until the writing data has been sent from the personal computer.
21. The leading edge of the film passes the magnetic head.
Magnetic head
G050858
22. Writing of the magnetic data is completed.

Ready sensor
G050824

No. 6404
24. A specified length of the film is rewound.

Spool key motor: ON
25. The VEI of the cartridge is set to the "Processed".

Spool drive motor: ON/OFF
When the VEI sensor is not LIGHT:

No. 6407
Spool Key operation error.
26. The light lock door is closed.

Light lock door motor: ON
5111
5/6
5111
Light lock door
G050861
27. Remove the cartridge.
5111
6/6
5131

! Flow chart
1. Insert the film.

Film feed motor: ON
Rewinding unit
Loading sensor
G050826
Ready sensor
G050827
4. The front end of the film has passed the scanning position.
Shutter motor: ON (Light source shutter: OPEN)
Scanning position
G050854
5131
1/3
5131
6. The film feed sensor detects the film advance.

When the film feed sensor does not detect the film advance:
No. 6406
Film feed sensor
G050828
No. 6406
Ready sensor
G050829

Scanning position
G050830

5131
2/3
5131
Scanning position
G050831
When the ready sensor does not detect the rear end of the film:
Ready sensor
G050832
Light source shutter: CLOSE
Scanning position
G050833

14. The film is fed at a high speed.
Film feed motor: ON (high speed)
15. Film is ejected.

5131
3/3
No. 6406
5141

! Flow chart
1. Insert the film.

Film feed motor: ON
Rewinding unit
Loading sensor
G050837
Ready sensor
G050838
4. The front end of the film has passed the scanning position.
Scanning position
G050855
5141
1/3
5141
6. The front end of the film has passed the perforation sensor.
No. 6405
Perforation sensor
G050839
Scanning position
G050856
9. Scanning starts.

Scanning position
G050840
When the perforation sensor does not detect the film advance:
No. 6405
5141
2/3
5141
No. 6405
Ready sensor
G050841
Scanning position
G050842
12. The film is fed at a high speed.

13. Film is ejected.

5141
3/3
5151
Film feed operation (MMC)

This section explains the process of the mount insertion cover being opened and the mount being ejected.
NOTE
When the mount insertion cover is not open, it opens after returning the carrier to its home position.
! Flow chart
1. The mount carrier moves to the left. (The mount insertion cover is closed.)
Mount carrier slide motor: ON (forward)
Scanning position
Moves to the left.
Detection plate
G052535
When the mount carrier home sensor is not LIGHT: (mount carrier does not move)
No. 6424
2. The mount carrier moves to the home position.

Mount carrier slide motor: ON (reverse)
Moves to the right.
Detection plate

G052534
When the mount carrier home sensor is not DARK: (mount carrier does not move)
No. 6424
3. The mount insertion cover is open.

When the mount insertion cover sensor is not LIGHT: (mount insertion cover does not open)
No. 6424
4. After inserting the mount, close the mount insertion cover.

Mount insertion cover sensor: DARK
Mount sensor: DARK
5151
1/3
5151
5. The mount carrier is moved to the position of the focus adjustment.

Mount

G052536
6. The auto focus is adjusted.

AF motor: ON (forward/reverse)
When the auto focus adjustment is not finished:
No. 6423
Auto focus error.
Moves up and down.
AF sensors
G052537
Moves to the left.
G052696
8. Pre-scanning finishes and the mount carrier stops on the scanning start position.
Mount carrier slide motor: OFF
9. Scanning starts.
5151
2/3
5151

When the memory capacity in the image processing PCB is insufficient, the mount carrier waits before the scanning
position until the memory is sufficient.
Moves to the right.
Scanning start position

G052539

Scanning start position

G052540
11. The mount carrier moves to the home position.

When the mount carrier home sensor is not DARK: (mount carrier does not move)
No. 6424
Moves to the right.

G052542
12. The mount insertion cover is open.

When the mount insertion cover sensor is not LIGHT: (mount insertion cover does not open)
No. 6424
13. The mount is ejected.
5151
3/3
5155
Film advance operation (AMC)

This section explains the process of the mount insertion and the mount ejection.
NOTE
If the mount carrier is not in the home position, move it to the home position before the operation.
! Flow chart
1. Set the loading stocker to the AMC.

When the mount sensor (entrance) is not DARK after pressing the YES/START key:
No. 1429
Make sure that the mount is placed correctly.
Loading stocker
Loading sensor 1
Loading sensor 2
G058785
2. Move the mount from the loading stocker to the mount carrier.
Mount loading motor: ON (reverse)/OFF
When the loading sensor 1 does not turn LIGHT when loading the mount, or the loading sensor 2 does
not turn DARK (the mount ejection pin does not move to the loading position):
No. 6435
When the mount sensor is not DARK:

No. 6433
Loading stocker
Mount sensor
Mount
Mount loading motor
Loading sensor 1
Mount carrier
Mount loading pin
Loading sensor 2
G058793
5155
1/6
Mount loading motor
Mount
5155
3. Move the mount loading pin to the home position.

Mount loading motor: ON (forward)/OFF
When the loading sensor 2 does not turn LIGHT when the mount loading in moves to the home
position after loading the mount, or the loading sensor 1 does not turn DARK (the mount loading pin
does not move to the home position):
No. 6435
Loading stocker
Mount sensor
Mount
Mount loading motor
Mount loading pin
Mount carrier
G058792
4. Auto focus adjustment

AF motor: ON (forward/reverse)
When the auto focus adjustment is not finished:

No. 6431
Auto focus error.
Mount
Moves up
AF sensors
AF motor
G058786
IMPORTANT
The mount carrier moves to the pre-scanning start position at high speed.
The mount carrier moves at middle speed after starting pre-scanning.
5155
2/6
Loading sensor 1
Loading sensor 2
5155
The mount carrier moves to the pre-scanning start position

at high speed.
Scanning position
Mount
G057568
The mount carrier moves at middle speed after starting

pre-scanning.
G058787
6. Pre-scanning finishes and the mount carrier stops through the scanning position.
Mount
Scanning position
G058788
7. Scanning starts.
IMPORTANT
The mount carrier moves to the scanning start position at high speed.
The mount carrier moves at low speed after starting scanning.
5155
3/6
5155

When the memory capacity in the image processing PCB is insufficient, the mount carrier waiting before the scanning
position until the memory is sufficient.
The mount carrier moves to the scanning start position
at high speed.
Scanning position
Mount
G057565
The mount carrier moves at low speed after starting

scanning.
G057567
Mount
G057566
9. The mount carrier moves to the ejection side at high speed.

5155
4/6
5155
Mount
G058788
10. Moves the mount to the ejection position.

Mount ejection solenoid: ON/OFF
When the mount sensor is not LIGHT:

No. 6433
When the ejection sensor is not DARK:

No. 6437
Ejection position.
Mount
Mount sensor
Ejection sensor
Mount ejection roller

G058789
11. Moves the mount to the ejection stocker.

Mount elevator motor: ON/OFF
When the mount elevator sensor does not turn DARK -> LIGHT -> DARK:
No. 6436
Mount elevator operation error.
When the ejection sensor is not LIGHT:

No. 6437
5155
5/6
Ejection stocker
5155
Mount
Ejection sensor
G058790
12. The mount is ejected.

13. Moves the mount carrier to the home position.
Mount carrier slide motor: ON (reverse)/OFF
When the mount carrier home sensor is not DARK:

No. 6432
Mount

Mount carrier
G058791
5155
6/6
5501
Paper path diagram
Paper path diagram
Paper path diagram

In the following diagrams, the paper advance route is shown by dotted lines.
Paper cutter unit

Arm unit
Paper supply unit A
Paper advance unit
Viewed from the arrow
Reverse unit (left)

Paper magazine B
Paper magazine A
Paper supply unit B
G057421
5501
1/1
Correction value printing

unit
5511
Paper advance operation
Paper loading operation

This section explains the paper loading operation of paper magazine A or B on the dual paper magazine machine.
The single paper magazine machine is only operation of magazine A.
Paper supply motor B (PM43)
Paper end sensor B (SE41)
Paper loading sensor (SE14)
Paper cutter
Arm
Paper magazine B
Paper advance motor 1 (PM20)
Paper magazine A
Paper supply motor A (PM42)
G058323
Paper loading starts.
Paper supply motor A/B: ON (forward)

Paper advance motor 1: ON (forward)
Did paper end sensor A or B detect the paper leading end?
NO
YES
Error No. 6012-01

Error No. 6013-01
Paper supply motor A/B: OFF

Paper advance motor 1: OFF
Did the paper loading sensor detect the paper leading end?
NO
YES
Error No. 6012-02

Error No. 6013-02

The paper leading end is advanced to before the cut

position.
After detecting the paper by the paper loading sensor, a specified
time has passed:
The loading is completed.
5511
1/1
Paper end sensor A (SE13)
5521
Paper advance operation (before exposure)

This section explains the paper advance operation, the paper cut operation and the paper transfer operation to the exposure advance section.
Paper hold position
Paper cutter
Zigzag correction sensors (left and

right) (SE19 and 20)
Paper

Arm unit
(PM24)
Cut motor (M5)
Pressure change motor 1 (PM25)
G057448
Paper advance is started with it is loaded (the paper leading

end is before the cut position).
Paper advance motor 1: ON (forward)
A specified length of paper is advanced so that the paper

leading end comes to the hold position.
Paper advance motor 1: OFF (forward)
The paper is held with the arm unit.
Paper hold motor: ON/OFF
According to the paper advance length, the paper is advanced

to the paper cut position.
Arm move motors (right and left): ON (forward)/OFF

Paper advance motor 1: ON (forwad)/OFF
NOTE
The paper advance is carried out by moving the arm unit and
roller advancing with paper advance motor 1.
To the next page
5521
1/3
5521
From the previous page
The paper is cut.
Cut motor: ON/OFF
Rewind a specified length of paper in the magazine so that

the paper leading end is before the cut position.
Paper advance motor 1: ON (reverse)/OFF

Paper supply motor A/B: ON (reverse)/OFF
The paper is advanced to the paper transfer position of the

exposure advance section.
Arm move motor (left and right): ON (forward)
YES
NO
Error No. 6091-01

Did the zigzag correction sensors (right and left) detect the
arm unit?
Arm move motors (left and right): OFF
After the zigzag correction sensor (left/right) detects the arm

unit, it advances a specified amount of the arm unit and
stops.
Arm move motor (left/right): OFF
If the detect timings are different on the zigzag correction

sensors (left and right), the arm unit which was lately
detected is moved for the pulse.
Arm move motor (left/right): ON/OFF
The arm unit is moved for the input correction value in

Arm Unit Zigzagging Correction of Printer Mechanical
Adjustment.
With pressuring exposure advance roller 1 of the exposure

advance section, the hold of the arm unit is released.
Pressure change motor 1: ON/OFF

To the next page
5521
2/3
5521
Exposure starts.
5541
The arm unit is moved for the lately detected correction and
the zigzag correction.
NOTE
The initial operation does not include this operation.
The arm unit is moved to the paper hold position.
Did the zigzag correction sensors (left and right) turn

LIGHT?
YES
NO
Arm move motor (left and right): ON (reverse)
Error No. 6091-02

After the zigzag correction sensor (left/right) turn LIGHT, a

specified amount of the arm unit is advanced and it stops at
the paper hold position.
End
5521
3/3
5541
Exposure operation
The section explains the exposure operation.
Exposure advance motor 1 (PM24)
Roller 2
Roller 1
Roller 3
Exposure position
Paper
Exposure advance motor 2 (PM26)
Roller of the reverse units
Exposure start sensor (SE22)
Arm unit
Exposure end sensor (SE24)

Paper hold motor (M7)
G057449
When the paper is loading, the drive of roller 2 and 3 are

started.
Exposure advance motor 2: ON
Roller 1: Released pressure
Roller 3: Pressured
Paper leading end position: Before the paper cutter blade
The paper advance operation is carried out and the paper

exposure advancing is started with transferring the paper to
the exposure advance section.
1
Roller 1 is pressured.

Roller 1: Pressured
Roller 3: Pressured
Paper leading end position: The position of a few millimeter
across roller 1
The hold of the arm unit is released.
To the next page
5541
1/4
5541
Is there a paper processed before?
YES
NO
Did the exposure start sensor detect the paper

rear end?
NO
Error No. 6017-03

YES
Exposure advance motor 2: OFF
The drive of roller 1 is started.
Exposure advance motor 1: ON
NO
YES
Error No. 6017-02

Did the exposure start sensor detect the paper leading end?

The exposure start sensor detects the paper leading end and
then it advances the drive of roller 1 by low speed.
Exposure advance motor 1: Slow down
Paper leading end position: Around before roller 2
The pressure of roller 2 is started.

Pressure change motor 2: ON
Roller 1: Pressured
Roller 2: Released pressurePressured
Roller 3: Pressured
Paper leading end position: Around the center of roller 2
The pressure of roller 2 is completed and the pressure

release of roller 1 and 3 are started.
Roller 1: PressuredReleased pressure
Roller 2: Pressured
Paper leading end position: Around the center of exposure
Exposure starts.
To the next page
5541
2/4
5541
The drive of roller is stopped.

The pressure release of roller 3 is completed.

Pressure change motor 2: OFF
Roller 2: Pressured
The pressure release of roller 1 is completed and the

pressure of roller 3 is started.

Roller 2: Pressured
Roller 3: Released pressurePressured
Paper leading end position: Around the center of roller 3
The pressure of roller 3 is completed.

Roller 2: Pressured
Roller 3: Pressured
Did the exposure end sensor detect the paper leading end?
NO
YES
Error No. 6017-04


To the next page
5541
3/4
5541
Is there a paper to be exposed next?
YES
NO
The process of the next paper is started.
Process of the next paper

1
The pressure of roller 2 is released.

Roller 3: Pressured
Paper rear end position: Around the center of roller 2
Did the exposure end sensor detect the paper rear end?
NO
YES
The exposure is completed.
Error No. 6034-01

Paper has jammed in the Paper Advance Section.

The exposure operation is completed and the paper advance

operation (after exposure) is carried out.
5551
5552
When all of paper process are completed, the paper is

automatically rewound.

The pressure of rollers 2 and 3 are released together.
Pressure change motor 2: ON/OFF (after forward, reverse)

NOTE
After pressure change motor 2 is turned forward and roller
2 is pressured then the pressure of roller 3 is released,
pressure change motor 2 is reversed and the pressure of
roller 2 is released.
When the pressure of roller 3 is released and pressure
change motor 2 is reversed and then only cam of roller 2 is
rotated, the pressure of roller 2 and 3 are released together.
5541
4/4
5551
Paper advance operation (after exposure: lane is not selected)

This section explains the operation which the paper is advanced to the processor loading unit by holding the paper with the reverse units
(left and right) of the paper advance unit.
When the paper width is 117 mm or more, the lane is not selected and the paper is advanced to the processor.
IMPORTANT
Even if the paper width is 102 mm or less, in the following conditions, the lane also is not selected.
Conditions of the lane is not selected

First print for each order
50th print in one order
Paper whose the leading end was advanced
Fogged paper
Spliced paper
Elevator sensor (right)

(SE29)
Center lane
Roller of the reverse

units
One-lane advance
position
Home position
Horizontal advance
sensor (left) (SE26)
Horizontal advance
sensor (right)
(SE28)
Elevator motor
(left) (PM31)
Exposure end sensor

(SE24)
Horizontal advance motor

(right) (PM32)
Reverse unit (left)
(PM28)

units
Horizontal advance
motor (left) (PM30)
Elevator motor (right) (PM33)
Exposure advance
section
Paper

(PM29)
Pressure change sensor 3 (SE25)
G058401
5551
1/4
Elevator sensor
(left) (SE27)
5551
The paper moves to the exposure position.
Do this paper select lane?
YES
Select lane. (Two-lanes advance)
5552
NO
The reverse units (left and right) horizontally move from

the home position to the one-lane advance position.
Horizontal advance motors (left and right)

ON (inside move)They move a specified distanceOFF
A
The reverse units (left and right) horizontally move from the
one-lane advance position to the paper receiving position.
Elevator motors (left and right)

ON: Down (middle speed)They move a specified
distance.OFF
Are the rollers of the reverse units (left and right)

pressured?
NO
YES
Pressure change sensor 3 watches the pressure condition of the roller.
NOTE
If the rollers are pressured, pressure change sensor 3 is DARK.
The pressures of the rollers of the reverse units (left and

right) are released.

ON (rotate)It rotates a specified times.OFF
NOTE
The pressure of the roller is released and the paper from the exposure advance
section is received.
Is the pressure of the roller of the reverse unit (left)

released?
NO
YES
Error No. 6094-01

NOTE
When pressure change sensor 3 do not turn LIGHT even if the
pressure release operation is started and a certain time passes, an
error occurs.
To the next page
5551
2/4
5551
In the exposure finish timing, the winding in low speed and

the pressure of the rollers of the reverse units (left and right)
are started.
ON: Winding (low speed)A certain time
NOTE
When the paper rear end passes through the exposure position, the winding is started. (in same speed as the advance
speed of the exposure advance section)
NOTE
After the exposure end sensor detects the paper leading end and a certain time passes, the pressure is started.
Are the rollers of the reverse units (left and right) pressured?
NO
YES
Error No. 6094-02

When pressure change sensor 3 do not turn DARK even if

the pressure operation is started and a certain time passes, an
error occurs.
When the paper rear end is come off exposure advance roller
3, winding in high speed is carried out.

ON: Winding (high speed)A certain time passes.OFF
NOTE
When the paper rear end is come off exposure advance roller 3, winding in high speed is started.
After the paper rear end is detected by the exposure end sensor, the winding a specified length is carried out and
finished.
Did the paper rear end pass through the exposure end
sensor?
NO
Error No. 6034-01

NOTE
YES
When the exposure end sensor does not turn LIGHT even if the
exposure end sensor turns DARK and then the winding of a
specified length is carried out, an error occurs.
The reverse units (left and right) which held the paper go up
and move to the paper advance position.

ON: Up (high speed)They move a specified distance.ON: UP (low speed)OFF
NOTE
The stopped time on the paper advance position is different depending on the paper advance length.
When the paper length is long, the stop time is also long.
To the next page
5551
3/4
NOTE
5551
The paper leading end is transferred to the processor loading

unit.
NOTE
The roller of the processor loading unit is driven by the processor and rotate, and advance the paper to the processor.
The reverse units (left and right) stop a specified time on the
paper advance position.
The reverse units (left and right) come down the one-lane
advance standby position.
Did the elevator sensors (left and right) detect the reverse
units (left and right)?
NO
Error No. 6097-01

Reverse Unit (Left) Elevator operation error.
Error No. 6098-01
Reverse Unit (Right) Elevator operation error.
YES
NOTE
When the elevator sensors (left and right) do not turn LIGHT
after the reverse units (left and right) come down and move a
specified distance, an error occurs.

A
YES
NO
The reverse units (left and right) move to the outside and
return to the home position.
Horizontal advance motors (left and right)

ON (outside move)They move a specified distanceOFF
5551
4/4

ON: Down (high speed)They move a specified distance.OFF
5552
Paper advance operation (after exposure: lane is selected)

This section explains the operation which the paper is advanced to the processor loading unit by alternately holding the paper with the
reverse units (left and right) of the paper advance unit.
When the paper width is 102 mm or less, the lane is not selected with the paper advance unit and the paper is advanced to the
processor.
After the reverse unit of the paper advance unit is completed the initial operation (when the power is ON or an error is cleared), it is
started the operation on the left side.
IMPORTANT
Even if the paper width is 102 mm or less, in the following conditions, the lane is not selected.
5551
Conditions of the lane is not selected

First print for each order
50th print in one order
Paper whose the leading end was advanced
Fogged paper
Spliced paper

(SE29)
Right lane
Elevator sensor
(left) (SE27)

unit
Horizontal advance
sensor (left) (SE26)
Home position
Horizontal advance
sensor (right)
(SE28)
Elevator motor
(left) (PM31)
Exposure end sensor

(SE24)

(right) (PM32)
Reverse unit (left)

Elevator motor (right) (PM33)

(PM28)
(left) (PM30)
Exposure advance
section
Roller of the reverse unit
Paper
Pressure change sensor 3 (SE25)
G058402
5552
1/4
Left lane
5552
NOTE
This item explains the pattern of the left lane in the left/right lane alternately selecting operation.
When selecting the right lane, the operation of the reverse unit turns the left to the right.
The paper moves to the exposure position.
Do this paper select lane?
NO
Lane is not selected. (one-lane advance)
5551
YES
Is the paper rear end held by the reverse unit 25 mm or

more high position from the home position? (when the
reverse unit (right) is working)
NO
YES
NOTE
While the paper rear end on the right lane is advanced to the specified position, the reverse unit (left) is standby.
The writing time varies depending on the paper advance length.

When the paper length is long, the writing time is also long.
The reverse unit (left) horizontally moves from the home

position to the inside and comes down to the paper receiving
position.
ON (inside move)They move a specified distanceOFF
ON: Down (middle speed)They move a specified distance.OFF
NOTE
After turning on the power supply, the reverse unit (left) firstly operates.
Is the roller of the reverse unit (left) released?
NO
YES
Pressure change sensor 3 watches the pressure condition of the roller.
NOTE
If the rollers are pressured, pressure change sensor 3 is DARK.
The pressure of the roller section of the reverse unit (left) is

released.
NOTE
The pressure of the roller is released and the paper from the exposure advance section is received.
To the next page
5552
2/4
5552
Is the pressure of the roller of the reverse unit (left)

released?
NO
YES
Error No. 6094-01

NOTE
When pressure change sensor 3 do not turn LIGHT even if the
pressure release operation is started and a certain time passes,
an error occurs.
In the exposure finish timing, winding in low speed and the

pressure of the roller of the reverse unit (left) is started.

ON: Winding (low speed)A certain time
NOTE
When the paper rear end passes through the exposure position, the winding is started. (in same speed as the advance speed
of the exposure advance section)
NOTE
Is the pressure of the roller of the reverse unit released?
NO
After the exposure end sensor detects the paper leading end and a certain time passes, the pressure is started.
Error No. 6094-02

YES
NOTE
When pressure change sensor 3 do not turn DARK even if the
pressure operation is started and a certain time passes, an error
occurs.
When the paper rear end is come off exposure advance roller
3, winding in high speed is carried out.

ON: Winding (high speed)A certain time passes.OFF
NOTE
When the paper rear end is come off exposure advance roller 3, winding in high speed is started.
After the paper rear end is detected by the exposure end sensor, the winding a specified length is carried out and finished.
Did the paper rear end pass through the exposure end
sensor?
NO
Error No. 6034-01

NOTE
When the exposure end sensor does not turn LIGHT even if the
exposure end sensor turns DARK and then the winding of a
specified length is carried out, an error occurs.
YES
To the next page
5552
3/4
5552
YES
NO
At the same time, another lane operation is started.
A
Right lane
Left lane
The reverse unit (left) which held the paper goes up and move
to the outside, and then move to the paper advance position.

ON: Up (high speed)They move a specified distance.ON: UP (low speed)OFF
NOTE
The stopped time on the paper advance position is different depending on the paper advance length.
When the paper length is long, the stop time is also long.
The paper leading end is transferred to the processor loading
unit.
NOTE
The roller of the processor loading unit is driven by the processor and rotate, and advance the paper to the processor.
The reverse unit (left) stops a specified time on the paper

advance position.
The reverse unit (left) comes down the height of the home
position.
ON: Down (high speed)They move a specified distance.OFF
Did the elevator sensor (left) detect the reverse unit (left)?
NO
YES
Error No. 6097-01

Reverse Unit (Left) Elevator operation error.
NOTE
When the elevator sensor (left) does not turn LIGHT after the
reverse unit (left) come down and move a specified distance,
an error occurs.
The reverse unit (left) moves to the outside and returns to the
home position.

5552
4/4
5561
Paper rewind operation

This section explains the paper rewinding operation of paper magazine A or B on the dual paper magazine machine.
The single paper magazine machine is only operation of paper A.
Paper rewind conditions

Paper was rewound.
After printing was finished and then two minutes passed, the paper was automatically rewound.
The machine entered to the Various Adjustment mode of printer.
Test paper advance operation was carried out via Functions of the Various Adjustment mode.
The error of paper jam occurred on the printer and processor.
When the paper is end
5581
Paper supply motor B (PM43)
Paper cutter
Arm
Paper magazine B
Paper supply motor A (PM42)
Paper magazine A
G058323
Paper rewinding is started.
Paper advance motor 1: ON (reverse)

Paper supply motor A/B: ON (reverse)
Did the paper loading sensor turn LIGHT?
NO
YES
Error No. 6014-01

Error No. 6015-01

To the next page
5561
1/2
5561
From the
Did paper end sensor A or B turn LIGHT?
NO
YES
Error No. 6014-02

Error No. 6015-02

The paper is rewound into the magazine.
After paper end sensor A or B turns LIGHT, a specified time has

passed:
Rewinding is completed.
5561
2/2
5571
Paper splicing operation

This section explains the splicing detection with the loading sensor while printing.
Splice section (hole) detecting condition
Splice hole
Splice section
Paper cutters
Paper
advance
direction
Cut prohibitive area (228.1 mm)
Exposure capable area
G058325
X = Paper length come out the paper cutter

Y = Paper length between the leading end of the cut prohibitive area and the cutter
! Operation outline
! Condition 1: When detecting a splice section (hole) with the loading sensor and the dimension of the
exposure capable area is more than the print advance length (X + Y Print advance length)
1. Load the paper so that X is same as the print advance length and cut it, and then carry out the printing
normally.
2. Then load the splice section and cut it, and then feed out the splice section.
(Splice section length = Cut prohibitive area + Y mm)
! Condition 2: When detecting a splice section (hole) with the loading sensor and the dimension of the
exposure capable area is less than the print advance length (X + Y < Print advance length)
X + Y 117 mm
1. Cut the rear end of the exposure capable area and feed out the unexposed paper to the processor.
2. Cut the rear end of the cut prohibitive area and feed it to the processor.
X + Y < 117 mm
1. Load the splice section and cut it, and then feed it to the processor.
(Splice section length = Cut prohibitive area + X + Y mm)
5571
1/1
5581
Paper end operation

This section explains the paper end processing operation in printing.
The paper is rewound into the magazine in paper end.
Remove the rewound paper when replacing with the new one.
Except in printing, the paper end processing is also carried out in the following timing.
Timing when is carried out the paper end processing

Printing was started, and the paper end was detected when the paper leading end was advanced.
The paper end was detected in processing of the fogged paper.
When the loading operation was carried out on the Various Adjustment mode (Focus Adjustment, Printer Mechanical Adjustment,
etc.), the paper end was detected.
IMPORTANT
For paper magazine A of the single or dual paper magazine machine, the paper end length is about min. 184 mm to
max. 540 mm. If the print advance length is 117 mm or more, cut it and feed out the leading end to the processor.
(184+ Print advance length The longest is 184 + 356 = 540 mm)
Paper advance length
Paper cutter
Approx. 184 mm

Paper magazine A
G058326
For paper magazine B of the dual paper magazine machine, the paper end length is about min. 292 mm to max. 648
mm. If the print advance length is 117 mm or more, cut it and feed out the leading end to the processor.
(292+ Print advance length The longest is 292 + 356 = 648 mm)
Paper cutter
Approx. 292 mm
Paper advance length
Paper magazine B
G058327
When the paper is end, the paper which is cut and advanced to the processor is not exposed. UNEXPOSED is printed
on the paper base.
5581
1/2
5581
Did paper end sensor A (or B) turn LIGHT?
NO
The paper processing is continued.
YES
The CVP printing and paper advancing are stopped.
Was the paper leading end advanced 117 mm or more from

the cutter?
NO
YES
The paper is cut and the leading end is advanced to the processor.
UNEXPOSED is printing on the paper base.
The paper is rewound into the magazine.
The paper is rewound into the magazine in paper end.

5561
Attention No. 1000
The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A
Attention No. 1001
The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B
Do you continue the printing operation?
NO
Press the NO: End key.
YES
The film is ejected from the film carrier and the processing is
completed.
Did you replace the paper magazine with a new one?

NO
YES
Press the YES: Restart key.
The paper processing is continued.
5581
2/2
5591
Fogged paper operation

This section explains the fogged paper operation when the paper is loading (print standby) and the printer door and paper advance door are
opened,
Timing when the fogged paper is processed

When the first print is made after the fogged paper was made
When the rewind operation (not automatic) is carried out after the fogged paper was made
When the fogged paper is made

Y = approx. 210 mm
Paper cutter
Paper magazine A
Rewinding position
G058328

Paper cutter
Rewinding position
Y = approx. 318 mm
X
Paper magazine B
G058330
! Operation outline
! Condition 1: Paper length come out the paper cutter is 117 mm or more (X 117 mm)
1. The paper (X) is cut and fed.

2. The paper (Y) is advanced by 117 mm advance with cutting to two parts for magazine A and three parts
for magazine B.
! Condition 2: Paper length come out the paper cutter is less than 117 mm (0 X < 117 mm)
1. The paper (X + Y) is advanced by 117 mm advance with cutting to three parts for magazine A and four
parts for magazine B.
! Condition 3: Paper length from the rewind position to the paper leading end is 117 mm or more (Y
117 mm, X < 0 mm)
1. The paper (Y) is advanced by 117 mm advance with cutting to two parts for magazine A and three parts
for magazine B.
5591
1/2
5591
! Condition 4: Paper length from the rewind position to the paper leading end is less than 117 mm (Y <
117 mm)
1. A paper is advanced by 117 mm advance.
5591
2/2
Electrical parts
Power specification ................................................................................................................ 6001
Changing the power supply specifications (Japan) .............................................................................................6001
Changing the power supply specifications (Outside Japan) ................................................................................6002
Changing the frequency .......................................................................................................................................6003
Cables ................................................................................................................................... 6011

Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable ..................................................................................................6011
Handling the flat cable .........................................................................................................................................6012
Installation position of the field ground (Scanner section) ..................................................................................6021
Installation position of the field ground (Printer section) ....................................................................................6022
Installation position of the field ground (Processor section) ...............................................................................6023
Power ON/OFF ...................................................................................................................... 6031

System starting ....................................................................................................................................................6031
Disposition and description of electrical parts ....................................................................... 6107

Scanner section (disposition and description of electrical parts) ........................................................................6107
135/240 AFC (disposition and description of electrical parts) ............................................................................6111
120 AFC (disposition and description of electrical parts) ...................................................................................6112
135/240 MMC (disposition and description of electrical parts) ..........................................................................6114
135/240 AMC (disposition and description of electrical parts) ..........................................................................6116
Printer main body (disposition and description of electrical parts) .....................................................................6151
Paper supply section (disposition and description of electrical parts) .................................................................6156
Exposure advance section (disposition and description of electrical parts) ........................................................6157
Paper advance section (disposition and description of electrical parts) ..............................................................6158
Laser unit (disposition and description of electrical parts) ..................................................................................6159
Personal computer section (disposition and description of electrical parts) (QSS-3001) ...................................6161
Personal computer section (disposition and description of electrical parts) (QSS-3011) ...................................6161
Disposition (QSS-3011) ................................................................................................................................6161
Processor section (disposition and description of electrical parts) [N] .............................................................6181
Processor section (disposition and description of electrical parts) [SM] ..........................................................6181
Disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply .................................................................. 6301

Scanner section (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply) ..................................................................6301
135/240 AFC (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply) .....................................................................6311
120 AFC (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply) .............................................................................6312
MMC (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply) ..................................................................................6314
AMC (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply) ..................................................................................6316
Printer section (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply) ....................................................................6351
Processor section (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply) [N] .......................................................6381
Processor section (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply) [SM] ....................................................6381
6000
1/3
6 Electrical parts
6.
6000
6000
Description of PCB (printer section) ...................................................................................... 6401

PCI-LVDS conversion PCB (J390343) ...............................................................................................................6401
PCI-ARCNET conversion PCB (J390342) .........................................................................................................6402
Keyboard connecting PCB (J390645) .................................................................................................................6403
Memory (I090231, I090232) ...............................................................................................................................6404
Image processing PCB (J390577) .......................................................................................................................6405
D-ICE PCB (J390572) .........................................................................................................................................6408
LVDS connecting PCB (J390651) ......................................................................................................................6410
Keyboard switch PCB (J390510) ........................................................................................................................6441
System control PCB (J390642) (QSS-3001) .......................................................................................................6442
System control PCB (J390739) (QSS-3011) .......................................................................................................6442
PS2 PCB (J490281) .............................................................................................................................................6443
Printer I/O PCB 1 (J390590) ...............................................................................................................................6460
Printer I/O PCB 2 (J390574) ...............................................................................................................................6461
AFC/scanner control PCB (J390546) ..................................................................................................................6501
AFC/scanner driver PCB (J390721) ....................................................................................................................6502
Colorimeter control PCB (J390551) ....................................................................................................................6506
PU control PCB (J307103) ..................................................................................................................................6516
SW/LED PCB (J390643) .....................................................................................................................................6517
ATX mother board (W408266), DIMM (I090236) (QSS-3001) .......................................................................6521
ATX mother board (W408721), RIMM (I090302) (QSS-3011) ........................................................................6521
SCSI card (I090228) (QSS-3001) .......................................................................................................................6524
Video board (I090301) (QSS-3011) ...................................................................................................................6525
ATX power supply (I038354), Battery pack (I085024) (QSS-3011) .................................................................6526
Hard disk drive (I090238, I090291) (QSS-3001) ...............................................................................................6527
Hard disk drive 1, 2 (I090303) (QSS-3011) .......................................................................................................6527
Each media drive (QSS-3001) ............................................................................................................................6528
Each media drive (QSS-3011) ............................................................................................................................6528
Printer control PCB (J390578) ............................................................................................................................6551
Processor control PCB (J390592) [N] ...............................................................................................................6552
Processor control PCB (J390592) [SM] ............................................................................................................6552
Laser control PCB (J390640) ..............................................................................................................................6571
Clock PCB (J390639) ..........................................................................................................................................6572
Laser I/O PCB (J390641) ....................................................................................................................................6573
B laser driver and G laser driver (J390656) ........................................................................................................6574
Laser temperature connecting PCB (J390742) ....................................................................................................6575
CVP PCB (J306324) ............................................................................................................................................6581
Dual paper magazine PCB (J306820) .................................................................................................................6582
Hard disk drive (I090233) ...................................................................................................................................6583
6000
2/3
6 Electrical parts
ATX power supply (I038337), Battery pack (I085024) (QSS-3001) .................................................................6526
6000
Description of PCB (film carrier section) ................................................................................ 6601

Connecting PCB 1 (J390481) ..............................................................................................................................6601
Connecting PCB 2 (J390482) ..............................................................................................................................6602
Connecting PCB 3 (J490255) ..............................................................................................................................6603
Driver PCB 1 (J390368) ......................................................................................................................................6604
Driver PCB 2 (J390519) ......................................................................................................................................6605
Sensor PCB (J390560) .........................................................................................................................................6606
Power PCB (J390380) .........................................................................................................................................6607
Magnetic head PCB (J390497) ............................................................................................................................6608
Connecting PCB 4 (J390579) ..............................................................................................................................6609
Connecting PCB (J390371) .................................................................................................................................6621
Sensor PCB (J390385) .........................................................................................................................................6622
Connecting PCB (J390372) .................................................................................................................................6631
Sensor PCB (J390394) .........................................................................................................................................6632
MMC connecting PCB (J390483) .......................................................................................................................6636
MMC sensor PCB (J390389) ..............................................................................................................................6637
135 AFC connecting PCB (J390708) ..................................................................................................................6638
135 AFC sensor PCB (J390709) .........................................................................................................................6639
AMC connecting PCB (J390700) ........................................................................................................................6640
Description of PCB (processor section) ................................................................................. 6701

Processor I/O PCB (J306946) [N] .....................................................................................................................6701
Processor I/O PCB (J306946) [SM] ..................................................................................................................6701
Processor relay PCB (J306816) ...........................................................................................................................6703
SM I/O PCB (J390534) [SM] ............................................................................................................................6741
Description of power supply .................................................................................................. 6801

Power supply .......................................................................................................................................................6801
Description of PM driver ........................................................................................................ 6851

Description of PM driver .....................................................................................................................................6851
AOM driver (I124001-00) ...................................................................................................................................6861
Replacing the computer ......................................................................................................... 6901

Replacing the computer .......................................................................................................................................6901
6000
3/3
6 Electrical parts
Main relay PCB (J390644) ..................................................................................................................................6702
6001
Power specification
Power specification
Changing the power supply specifications (Japan)
Be sure to turn off the circuit breaker and main power supply before starting this operation.
The power supply specifications can be set by changing the wiring between terminal strip TA1 in the processor power supply and terminal
strip TA2 on the main relay PCB, and by changing the connection of the connector J668 on the main relay PCB.
Main relay PCB
T2
T1
Wiring cover
G057419
6. Electrical parts
! Change procedure
1. Wiring change
Wiring No.
Single phase, two wires (AC

200 V)
R S1
S S2
2. Change the connection of connector (J668).

Change the connection of the connector (J668) to each power specification (1P2W) on the main relay PCB.
3. Check the connection of connectors J656 (dryer heater) and J652 (dryer fan).
Check that the connectors (J656 and J652) on the processor relay PCB are connected to 200-208 V.
4. Check the connection of the connectors for transformer (TR1).

Check that the connectors from J/P662 on the main relay PCB to transformer (TR1) are connected to 200 V.
5. Indication change of the power supply specifications

In the Machine Specification mode, change the power specifications.
3181
6001
1/2
6001
Power specification
6. Change of the rating plate
Rating plate
G057420
! Single phase, two wires (AC 200 V)

Main relay PCB
6. Electrical parts
Processor relay PCB
Terminal strip 2 (T-2)
Terminal strip 1
G058333
6001
2/2
6002
Power specification
Changing the power supply specifications (Outside Japan)
Be sure to turn off the circuit breaker and main power supply before starting this operation.
The power supply specifications can be set by changing the wiring between terminal strip TA1 in the processor power supply and terminal
strip TA2 on the main relay PCB, and by changing the connection of the connectors J668 on the main relay PCB, and J652 and J656 on the
processor relay PCB.
Main relay PCB
T2
T1
Wiring cover
6. Electrical parts
G057419
! Change procedure
1. Wiring change
Wiring
No.
Single phase, two wires (AC 200 V

to AC 240 V)
Three phases, three wires (AC 200 Three phases, four wires (AC 346 V
V to AC 240 V)
to AC 415 V)
L1 (L) S1
L1 (L) S1
L1 (L) S1
L2 (N) S2
L2 (N) S2
L2 (N) S3
L3 S5
L3 S3
L3 S4
N S5
N S5
N S2
2. Change the connection of connector (J668).

Change the connection of the connector (J668) to each power specification (1P2W, 3P3W, 3P4W) on the main relay PCB.
3. Change the connection of connectors J656 (dryer heater) and J652 (dryer fan).
Change the connection that the connectors (J656 and J652) on the processor relay PCB accord with each input voltage (200-208
V, 220 V, 230-240 V).
4. Check the connection of the connectors for transformer (TR1).

Change the connection that the connectors from J/P662 on the main relay PCB to transformer (TR1) accord with each input
voltage.
5. Indication change of the power supply specifications

In the Machine Specification mode, change the power specifications.
3181
6002
1/3
6002
Power specification
6. Change of the rating plate
Rating plate
G057420
! Single phase, two wires (AC 200 V to AC 240 V)

Main relay PCB
6. Electrical parts
Processor relay PCB
Terminal strip 2 (T2)

Terminal strip 1
G058388
! Three phases, three wires (AC 200 V to AC 240 V)

Main relay PCB
Processor relay PCB

Terminal strip 1
G058389
6002
2/3
6002
Power specification
! Three phases, four wires (AC 346 V to AC 415 V)

Main relay PCB
Processor relay PCB

Terminal strip 1
6. Electrical parts
G058390
6002
3/3
6003
Power specification
Changing the frequency

Change the frequency by changing the insertion direction of the drive gear in the drive motor.
! Procedure
1. Remove the dryer cover 1 and processor cover 2.
2001
2. Loosen the four screws of the drive motor holder.

3. Remove the wiring duct. (two screws)
4. Turn the drive gear over and attach it. (one E-ring)
Wiring duct
Drive motor
Loosen.
Drive gear
E-ring
G058352
NOTE
The figure shows the installation conditions for 60 Hz.

IMPORTANT
When attaching the wiring duct, be careful not to jam the cables.
6. Adjust the drive gear backlash.
6003
1/1
6. Electrical parts
For 60 Hz (30T)
For 50 Hz (36T)
6011
Cables
Cables
Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable

! PCBs which connect to the optical fiber cable
PCB name
PCB No.
Connector No. on the PCB
Manual No.
J390342
P82 (OUT), P81 (IN)
6402
Remarks
P84 (OUT), P83 (IN)

P86 (OUT), P85 (IN)
J390546
P11 (OUT), P12 (IN)
PU control PCB
J307103
P300 (OUT), P299 (IN)
Printer control PCB
J390578
P245 (OUT), P246 (IN)
6501
6516
6551
P295 (OUT), P296 (IN)

J390592
P795 (OUT), P796 (IN)
6552
! Precautions when handling the optical fiber cable

Do not bend the optical fiber cable by R25 mm or less. The cable maybe damaged. Lay the cable with a bending radius of at least
R50 mm. When inserting, removing, or laying the cable, do not use force. Do not secure the cable with mini-bands or clamps.
G051006
When the optical fiber cable is to be removed from the PCB, pull the cable straight out while pressing part A in the direction
indicated by the arrow. When the cable is to be connected, push it straight as far as it will go.
Part A
Optical fiber cable
Connector on the PCB

G051007
IMPORTANT
If pulling the optical fiber cable out forcibly without pressing part A, the sheath of the cable is broken and a part of
the sheath remains in the connector, resulting in the communication error.
6011
1/2
6. Electrical parts
Optical fiber cable
6011
Cables
Since the optical fiber cable is provided with IN and OUT ends, be careful to connect them correctly. If part A of the connector on
the PCB is white, the cable end should indicate OUT. If part A is black, the cable end should indicate IN. The OUT cable end is
marked using a white tape. There is no marking on the IN cable end.
OUT
Part A (White)
Optical fiber cable
Marking on the cable
The arrow on the connector indicates the direction to the connector.

G051008
IN
Part B (Black)
Optical fiber cable
No marking on the cable
G051009
If the optical fiber cable is damaged, it cannot be reused even after the damaged part has been cut off. A communication error
occurs.
Optical fiber cable
Do not reuse this cable even if the damaged part

has been cut off.
Damaged part
G051010
Be careful not to place an excessive load on the optical fiber cable or to let a hard or heavy object fall on it.
Do not damage the sheath of the optical fiber cable. A dent or flaw on the sheath is however small, means the optical fiber cable
cannot be used.
Never touch the end face of the optical fiber cable with bare hands. Communication will not be possible if oil or dust adheres to
the cable end, or if the cable end is scratched.
The connector guard unit must be inserted into an unused connector for the optical fiber cable. This prevents dust from entering
inside the connector. And also prevents malfunction due to sunshine.
Connector guard unit

Unused connector
G050366
6011
2/2
6. Electrical parts
The arrow on the connector indicates the direction to the PCB.
6012
Cables
Handling the flat cable

! PCBs which connect to the flat cable
For the connector is insertion type
PCB name
PCB No.
Manual No.
MMC connecting PCB
J390483
P1172
MMC sensor PCB
J390389
P1181
6601
6603
6605
6608
6621
6622
6631
6632
6636
6637
AMC connecting PCB
J390700
P1303
6640
Manual No.
6601
6602
6609
6606
6638
6639
Connecting PCB 1
J390481
P1002
Connecting PCB 3
J490255
P1009
Driver PCB 2
J390519
P1032
Magnetic head PCB
J390497
P1040
Connecting PCB
J390371
P1074
Sensor PCB
J390385
P1080
Connecting PCB
J390372
P1074
Sensor PCB
J390394
P1080
Remarks
135/240 AFC
135/240 AFC
135/240 AFC
135/240 AFC
120 AFC
120 AFC
110 AFC
110 AFC
135/240 MMC
135/240 MMC,
135/240 AMC
135/240 AMC
For the connector is sandwich type (A)

PCB No.
Connecting PCB 1
J390481
P1001
Connecting PCB 2
J390482
P1010
Connecting PCB 4
J390579
P1004
Sensor PCB
J390560
P1014
Connecting PCB
J390708
P1292
Sensor PCB
J390709
P1295
Remarks
135/240 AFC
135/240 AFC
135/240 AFC
135/240 AFC
6. Electrical parts
PCB name
135 AFC
135 AFC
! Precautions when handling the flat cable

For the connector is insertion type
1. Be sure to the flat cable straight.
Pay attention that the connection of the cable may peel off. If the main power supply of the machine is turned on with the cable
peeling off, the PCB and cable are damaged.
Part of connection
Sheet cable
Connector
G052634
2. Be sure to insert the flat cable as far as it will go. If the main power supply of the machine is turned on with the cable inserted
insufficiently, the PCB and cable are damaged.
3. Check the insertion direction of the flat cable and then proceed.
For the connector is sandwich type (A)

IMPORTANT
For the connector is sandwich type (A), insert the flat cable under the lock plate and fix it.
6012
1/2
6012
Cables
1. When removing the flat cable, open the lock plate of the connector, and then remove the flat cable. If the flat cable is pulled out
while the lock plate is not opened, the lock plate is damaged.
Flat cable ( The connection side is
downward.)
Release
Lock plate
Fix
Connector
G054665
2. When connecting the flat cable, do not allow the cable to be tilted.
Pay attention that the connection of the cable may peel off. If the main power supply of the machine is turned on with the cable
peeling off, the PCB and cable are damaged.
3. Be sure to insert the flat cable as far as it will go and then close the lock plate. If the main power supply of the machine is turned
on with the cable being locked insufficiently, the PCB and cable may be damaged.
6. Electrical parts
4. Insert the flat cable with the connection side downward.
6012
2/2
6021
Cables
Installation position of the field ground (Scanner section)

IMPORTANT
Be sure to put the grounds to the original positions after the PCBs and parts are replaced.
Be sure to attach the ground with lock washer if it is attached.
NOTE
The field ground (FG) means the ground and FG clamp.
The grounds are shown with the below illustrations in the wiring diagrams.
G057008
PCB, Power Supply and other electrical parts

No
Name
Connector No.
Remarks
Lamp Power Supply
J/P166
Noise filter
Connector for film carrier
Scanner Unit
Three ground wires
Mask carrier
Two ground wires
J/P40, 41
J/P17
Cable (includes shield cap tire cable)

Related PCB
Connector No.
Connector No.
Related PCB
J/P1
J/P17
J/P2
J/P16
J/P6
J/P62
Scanner Unit
J/P5
J/P23
J/P30
J/P475
Filter motor
J/P27
J/P63
Scanner Unit
J/P26
J/P163
Main relay PCB (processor

section)
J/P17
J/P250
Scanner Unit
J/P60
J/P439
LVDS connecting PCB (printer

section)
10
Noise filter
J/P161
J/P323
Main relay PCB (processor

section)
6. Electrical parts
No
135/240 AFC
No
Name
Connector No.
J/P17
Remarks
Rear base side attachment
Film rewinding unit
Rear base side attachment
Sensor cover
HFI unit open/close fulcrum
Magnetic head PCB attaching

sheet metal
HFI unit open/close fulcrum
6021
1/1
6022
Cables
Installation position of the field ground (Printer section)

IMPORTANT
NOTE
G057008

1
Name
Connector No.
J/P310
ATX power supply
J/P312
Image processing PCB power

supply
J/P364

supply 2
J/P365
J/P318
J/P319
10
Connector for paper advance unit
11
Display monitor
Remarks
6. Electrical parts
No
J/P250

No
Related PCB
Connector No.
Connector No.
Related PCB
J/P171
J/P177
Keyboard connecting PCB
LVDS connecting PCB
J/P439
J/P60
Scanner unit (scanner section)
Laser control PCB
J/P282
J/P73
Laser control PCB
J/P283
J/P128
Laser I/O PCB
J/P151
J/P62
System control PCB
J/P983
J/P184
Laser unit
J/P115
Laser I/O PCB
Keyboard switch PCB
2
3
Laser I/O PCB
J/P115
Laser unit
PU control PCB
J/P304
PU unit
6022
1/1
6023
Cables
Installation position of the field ground (Processor section)

IMPORTANT
NOTE
G057008

No
Name
Power Supply
Processor relay PCB
Terminal strip 1
Main relay PCB
CD heater
Connector No.
Remarks
T1
T2
J/P375
BF heater
J/P376
STB heater
J/P377

Related PCB
Connector No.
Connector No.
Related PCB
Processor I/O PCB
J/P735
J/P752, 736
Main relay PCB
J/P163
J/P26
AFC/Scanner driver PCB

(scanner section)
Main relay PCB
J/P323
J/P161
Noise filter (scanner section)
6023
6. Electrical parts
No
Conveyor unit
1/1
6031
Power ON/OFF
Power ON/OFF
System starting
! How to start the system when normal operation
! According to the program timer
1. At the time set on the Program Timer, the processor temperature adjustment starts .
2. The signal for start is send from the processor control PCB and the computer starts.
3. After communication check, the input section and the printer section are initialized.
The system program starts.
! In the program timer mode
1. Press the start switch of the computer.

2. The processor temperature adjustment starts.
! How to start the system after the maintenance (the circuit breaker is turned off.)

2. The power supply of the processor section is turned on and the temperature adjustment starts.
3. Press the start switch of the computer.
! According to turn on the circuit breaker (when the circuit breaker is turned off in program timer mode)

2. The power supply of the processor section is turned on to activate the program timer.
6031
1/1
6. Electrical parts
! According to turn on the circuit breaker (when the circuit breaker is turned off while operating)
6107
Disposition and description of electrical parts
Scanner section (disposition and description of electrical parts)

! Disposition
19
6
10
5
23
20
6. Electrical parts
22
16
18
25
21
15
17
24
G057389
Scanner section
No.
Name
Symbol
Remarks
Zoom sensor 1
SE3
Scanner unit 1
Zoom sensor 2
SE4
Scanner unit 1
Focus sensor
SE5
Scanner unit 1
Scanner unit 1
IRIS sensor
SE6
Filter sensor
SE70
SE71
Interlock switch (scanner lamphouse)
LS1
Safety thermostat (scanner lamp)
STH1
Scanner thermosensor
THS
10
Filter motor
PM1
6107
Scanner unit 1
1/2
No.
6107
Name

Symbol
Remarks
11
Zoom motor 1
PM2
Scanner unit 1
12
Zoom motor 2
PM3
Scanner unit 1
13
Focus motor
PM4
Scanner unit 1
14
IRIS motor
PM5
Scanner unit 1
15
Lamp cooling fan 1
FAN28
Exhaust
16
Scanner unit cooling fan
FAN29
Exhaust
17
Scanner unit power supply cooling fan 1
FAN30
Exhaust
18
Scanner lamp
19
Film ready lamp
L1
When the interlock switch (scanner

lamphouse) is OFF, not in operation.
LED1
Buzzer
BZ1
21
Scanner lamp relay
X13
22
Noise filter
NF1
23
Scanner Unit
24
Scanner unit power supply cooling fan 2
FAN32
Intake
25
Lamp cooling fan 2
FAN33
Blowing
6. Electrical parts
20
6107
2/2
6111
135/240 AFC (disposition and description of electrical parts)

! Disposition
2
13
3
12
9
11
10
23
28
14
5
12
13
20
3
7
1
Magnetic head unit
10
2
1
19
11
6. Electrical parts
15
22
9
8
24
16
When the magnetic head unit is open
When the rear cover is open

18
26
17
27
25
6
G051033
135/240 AFC
No.
Name
Symbol
135 loading sensor
SE52
135 ready sensor
SE53
SE54
240 ready sensor
SE55
6111
Remarks
1/2
No.
6111
Name

Symbol
SE56
VEI sensor
SE57
240 loading sensor
SE62
135 DX sensor 1
SE147
135 DX sensor 2
SE148
10
135 DX sensor 3
SE149
11
135 DX sensor 4
SE150
12
240 DX sensor 1
SE151
13
240 DX sensor 2
SE152
14
SE153
15
LM1
16
LM2
17
IPI limit switch
LM4
18
LM5
19
Cleaner fan
20
Film feed motor
FAN28
PM1
21
Light lock door motor
PM2
22
Spool key motor
PM3
23
Film ejection solenoid
SOL4
24
Lane lock solenoid
SOL6
25
Read head (photo finishing track)
26
Read head (camera track)
27
Write head (photo finishing track)
28
Film feed motor cooling fan
FAN31
6111
Remarks
Exhaust
Exhaust
6. Electrical parts
2/2
6112
120 AFC (disposition and description of electrical parts)

! Disposition
G051034
No.
Name
Symbol
Loading sensor
SE64
Ready sensor
SE65
Film sensor
SE66
Film feed sensor
SE67
Film feed motor
PM10
6112
6. Electrical parts
120 AFC
Remarks
1/1
6113

! Disposition
2
3
1
6. Electrical parts
2
3
G052690
110 AFC
No.
Name
Symbol
Loading sensor
SE90
Ready sensor
SE91
Perforation sensor
SE92
Film feed motor
PM10
6113
Remarks
1/1
6114
135/240 MMC (disposition and description of electrical parts)

! Disposition
7
8
4
5
9
2
3
G052686
135/240 MMC
No.
Name
Symbol
Mount sensor
SE70
AF sensor
SE72
Mount carrier sensor (upper)
SE73
Mount carrier sensor (lower)
SE74
SE77
AF motor
DM9
PM11
Mount insertion cover open switch
SM3
Remarks
SE68
6114
1/1
6. Electrical parts
6115

! Disposition
3
4,5
2
6,7
1
3
6,7
6. Electrical parts
2
4,5
G057665
135 AFC
No.
Name
Symbol
135 loading sensor
SE52
135 ready sensor
SE53
SE54
135 DX sensor 1
SE147
135 DX sensor 2
SE148
135 DX sensor 3
SE149
135 DX sensor 4
SE150
Film feed motor
PM1
6115
Remarks
1/1
6116
135/240 AMC (disposition and description of electrical parts)

! Disposition
6
9
14
1
3
12
15
10
11
4
13
7,8
5
G060697
135/240 AMC
No.
Name
Symbol
SE156
Loading sensor 1
SE157
Loading sensor 2
SE158
SE159
AF sensor
SE160
SE161
Mount carrier sensor (lower)
SE162
Mount carrier sensor (upper)
SE163
Mount sensor
SE164
10
Ejection sensor
SE165
11
Mount loading motor
DM14
12
DM15
13
AF motor
DM16
14
PM17
15
SOL26
6116
Remarks
1/1
6. Electrical parts
6151
Printer main body (disposition and description of electrical parts)

! Disposition
25 (for single paper magazine spec)
22
23
32
30
24 (for dual paper magazine spec)
31
25 (for dual paper magazine spec)
33
11
15 (for dual paper

magazine spec)
8
14
3
4
20
26
6. Electrical parts
16 (for dual paper

magazine spec)
9
10

17
6
21
18, 19
(from the
right)
12
13
27, 28, 29 (from the right) (for dual paper magazine

spec)
G057390
Printer main body

No.
Name
Symbol
Remarks
Paper magazine code sensor A
SE12
Paper sensor 1
SE38
Colorimeter
Paper sensor 2
SE39
Colorimeter
6151
1/2
No.
6151
Name

Symbol
Paper magazine code sensor B
SE40
Interlock switch (printer door 1)
LS6
LS7
Laser output stop switch
LS8
LS9
LS10
Remarks
10
Inner thermosensor
TH11S
11
Paper advance motor
PM12
Colorimeter
12
Printer power supply cooling fan 1
FAN8
Exhaust
13
Printer power supply cooling fan 2
FAN9
Exhaust
14
Laser unit cooling fan 1
FAN10
Intake
15
Printer control box cooling fan 4
FAN12
Intake
16
FAN13
Intake
17
Laser control box cooling fan 1
FAN14
Exhaust
18
FAN15
Exhaust
19
FAN16
Exhaust
20
FAN17
Exhaust
21
FAN18
Exhaust
22
FAN19
Intake
23
FAN20
Intake
24
FAN21
Blowing
25
FAN22
Blowing
26
Inner cooling fan
FAN23
Intake
27
FAN24
Exhaust
28
FAN25
Exhaust
29
FAN26
Exhaust
Option (dual paper magazine)
30
Counter
31
Hour meter
HM
32
Buzzer
BZ1
33
Circuit breaker
6. Electrical parts
6151
2/2
6156
Paper supply section (disposition and description of electrical parts)

! Disposition
15
13
3
10
5
6. Electrical parts
12
1
14
11
16
G057391
Paper supply section

No.
Name
Symbol
Remarks
Paper end sensor A
SE13
SE14
Cut home sensor
SE15
Cut end sensor
SE16
Hold sensor
SE17
SE18
Paper end sensor B
SE41
PM20
Arm move motor (left)
PM22
10
Arm move motor (right)
PM23
When one of the interlock switches (printer

doors 1 and 2, and the paper advance door) is
off, not in operation.
6156
1/2
No.
6156
Name
Symbol
Remarks
11
PM21

doors 1 and 2, and the paper advance door) or
Laser Output Stop Swith is off, not in
operation.
12
Paper supply motor A
PM42
13
Paper supply motor B
PM43

doors 1 and 2, and the paper advance door 3)
is off, not in operation.
14
Cut motor
M5
15
Paper hold motor
M7
16
Ribbon advance motor
M6
6. Electrical parts

6156
2/2
6157
Exposure advance section (disposition and description of electrical parts)

! Disposition
7
10
1
4
6
6. Electrical parts
2
5
3
G057392

No.
Name
Symbol
Zigzag correction sensor (left)
SE19
Zigzag correction sensor (right)
SE20
SE21
SE22
SE23
Exposure end sensor
SE24
PM24
PM25
PM27
10
PM26
6157
Remarks

doors 1 and 2, and the paper advance door) or
Laser Output Stop Swith is off, not in
operation.
1/1
6158
Paper advance section (disposition and description of electrical parts)

! Disposition
3
4
10
11
9
7
G057393

No.
Name
Symbol
SE25
Horizontal advance sensor (left)
SE26
Elevator sensor (left)
SE27
Horizontal advance sensor (right)
SE28
SE29
PM28
PM29
PM30
PM31
10
Horizontal advance motor (right)
PM32
11
Elevator motor (right)
PM33
6158
Remarks

1/1
6. Electrical parts
6159
Laser unit (disposition and description of electrical parts)

! Disposition
Laser unit
1
Back view of laser unit
G057556
Laser unit
1
Name
Laser unit heater
Symbol
H5
Remarks
This is attached to the rear side of the laser
unit.
6. Electrical parts
No.
NOTE
The laser unit heater is not attached depending on the machine.
6159
1/1
6161
Personal computer section (disposition and description of electrical parts)

(QSS-3001)
The personal computer section (disposition and description of electrical parts) differs depending on the model, refer to the following.
For QSS-3011, refer to Personal computer section (disposition and description of electrical parts) (QSS-3011).
! Disposition (QSS-3001)
10
11
12
16
13
20
19
9
18
1
17
5
6
14
6. Electrical parts
2
7
15
G057394
Personal computer section

No.
Symbol
Part No.
Manual No.
Floppy disk drive
Name
I090237
CD-ROM drive
I090234
CD-R/RW drive
W408254
6528
6528
6161
Remarks
Option
When the CDR/RW drive is
attached, the CDROM drive
cannot be
attached.
1/4
No.
6161
Name
Symbol
Part No.
Manual No.
6528
6528
6528
6528
6527
DVD-RAM drive
W408253
Zip drive
W408264
MO drive
W408265
Card reader
Z808686
Hard disk drive
I090238
I090291
Motherboard unit
W408266
J390343
10
SCSI card
I090228
11
J390342
12
System control PCB
J390642
13
Keyboard switch PCB
J390510
14
J390645
15
SW/LED PCB
J390643
16
ATX power supply
PS11
I038337
6521
6401
6524
6402
6442
6441
6403
6517
6526
17
Chassis fan
FAN
I040355
18
Battery pack
I085024
19
PS2 PCB
J490281
20
PU control PCB
J307103
6526
6443
6516
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
6. Electrical parts
Remarks
6161
2/4
6161
Personal computer section (disposition and description of electrical parts)

(QSS-3011)
Disposition (QSS-3011)
19
11 6
17
18
23
20,21
22
12
6. Electrical parts
13
14
8
16
24
9
10
15
G057674
6161
3/4
6161
Personal computer section

Name
Symbol
Part No.
Manual No.
Floppy disk drive
I090237
CD-R/RW drive
I090319
Zip drive
W408264
MO drive
W408265
Card reader
I090123
Hard disk drive 1
I090303
6528
6528
6528
6528
6527
Hard disk drive 2
Motherboard unit
J390343
10
J390342
11
System control PCB
J390739
12
Keyboard switch PCB
J390510
13
J390645
14
SW/LED PCB
J390643
15
ATX power supply
PS11
I038354
6521
6401
6402
6442
6441
6403
6517
6526
16
Chassis FAN 1
FAN
I040358
17
Chassis FAN 2
FAN
18
Chassis FAN 3
FAN
W408721
19
Speaker
I090318
20
Battery pack
I085024
6526
21
Battery pack
22
PS2 PCB
J490281
23
PU control PCB
J307103
24
Video board
I090301
6443
6516
6525
6161
Remarks
Option
Option
There are same

two battery
packs.
6. Electrical parts
No.
Option
4/4
6181
Processor section (disposition and description of electrical parts) [N]

For the SM specification, refer to Processor section (disposition and description of electrical parts) [SM].
6. Electrical parts
! Disposition
G058353
Processor section
No.
1
Name
Symbol
CD processing solution float switch
Remarks
FS1
CD refilling water level

CD processing solution level
CD safety thermostat
2
BF processing solution float switch
FS2
BF refilling water level

BF processing solution level
BF safety thermostat
3
FS4
STB1 refilling water level
6181
1/7
No.
4
6181
Name

Symbol
Remarks
FS5

5
FS6

6
FS3

STB4 processing solution level
STB4 safety thermostat
CD thermosensor
TH1S
BF thermosensor
TH2S
STB thermosensor
TH3S
10
CD replenishment solution level sensor
LSE1
11
BF replenishment solution level sensor
LSE2
12
STB replenishment solution level sensor
LSE3
13
Refilling water tank level sensor
LSE5
14
CD effluent float switch
FS7
15
BF effluent float switch
FS8
16
STB effluent float switch
FS9
17
CD digital flowmeter
FLS1
Option
18
LS1
For detecting the processor top cover

When the processor top cover is
opened, following electrical parts
turn off.
Drive motor (M1)
Dryer heater (H4)
Refilling water pump (P7-12)
19
Rack stopper sensor
LS5
20
CD heater
H1
21
BF heater
H2
22
STB heater
H3
23
CD circulation pump
P1
24
BF circulation pump
P2
25
STB1 circulation pump
P3
26
P4
27
P5
28
29
CD replenisher pump
RP1
30
BF replenisher pump
RP2
31
STB replenisher pump
RP3
32
PB replenisher pump
RP4
33
CD-W refilling water pump
P7
34
BF-W refilling water pump
P8
35
STB1-W refilling water pump
P9
36
P10
37
P11
38
P12
39
Cleaning pump 1
P13
40
Cooling fan (power supply)
Replenishment solution level sensors

and refilling water tank level sensors
detect the replenishment solutions
and water by using the difference of
heat conductivity between liquid and
gas.
6. Electrical parts
P6
FAN11
6181
This part isnot attached depending on

the specifications.
Continuous ON
2/7
No.
6181
Name

Symbol
Remarks
Continuous ON except when the
temperature adjustment is not carried
out while the Program Timer
operating
41
Exhaust fan
FAN2
42
Tank cooling fan 1
FAN3
43
Tank cooling fan 2
FAN4
44
Tank cooling fan 3
FAN5
45
Pump cooling fan 1
FAN6
46
Pump cooling fan 2
FAN7
47
Drive motor
48
CD cooling water solenoid valve
MV1
M1
Option
49
BF cooling water solenoid valve
MV2
Option
50
STB cooling water solenoid valve
MV3
Option
Dryer Section
51
Name
Symbol
Remarks
Dryer thermosensor
TH4S
52
STH1
53
LS2
For detecting the dryer cover

When the dryer cover is opened,
following electrical parts turn off.
Drive motor (M1)
Dryer heater (H4)
Dryer fan (FAN1)
54
Print sensor (left)
SE3
Far side viewing from the side shown

in the figure
55
Print sensor (right)
SE2
Near side viewing from the side

shown in the figure
56
Dryer fan
57
Dryer heater
6. Electrical parts
No.
FAN1
H4

No.
Name
Symbol
Remarks
58
Print full sensor
SE1
This is a reflex sensor. When this

sensor detects the paper, it turns
LIGHT by the light reflection.
59
Conveyor position sensor 1
SE4
Near side viewing from the side

shown in the figure
60
SE5
Far side viewing from the side shown

in the figure
61
Conveyor motor 1
M2
62
Conveyor motor 2
M3
63
M4
6181
3/7
6181
Processor section (disposition and description of electrical parts) [SM]
6. Electrical parts
! Disposition
G058364
Processor section
No.
1
Name
Symbol
CD processing solution float switch
Remarks
FS1
CD refilling water level

CD processing solution level
CD safety thermostat
6181
4/7
No.
2
6181
Name

Symbol
BF processing solution float switch
Remarks
FS2
BF refilling water level

BF processing solution level
BF safety thermostat
3
FS4

4
FS5

5
FS6

6
FS3

STB4 processing solution level
7
CD thermosensor
TH1S
BF thermosensor
TH2S
TH3S
STB thermosensor
10
CD effluent float switch
FS7
11
BF effluent float switch
FS8
12
STB effluent float switch
FS9
13
FLS1
Option
14
LS1
For detecting the processor top cover

When the processor top cover is
opened, following electrical parts
turn off.
Drive motor (M1)
Dryer heater (H4)
Refilling water pump (P7-9)
15
Rack stopper sensor
LS5
16
CD heater
H1
17
BF heater
H2
18
STB heater
H3
19
CD circulation pump
P1
20
BF circulation pump
P2
21
P3
22
P4
23
P5
24
25
Exhaust fan
FAN2
26
Tank cooling fan 1
FAN3
27
Tank cooling fan 2
FAN4
28
Tank cooling fan 3
FAN5
29
Pump cooling fan 1
FAN6
30
Pump cooling fan 2
FAN7
6. Electrical parts
STB4 safety thermostat
P6
Continuous ON except when the
temperature adjustment is carried out
while the Program Timer operating
31
Drive motor
32
CD cooling water solenoid valve
MV1
M1
Option
33
BF cooling water solenoid valve
MV2
Option
34
STB cooling water solenoid valve
MV3
Option
35
Cooling fan (power supply)
FAN11
6181
Continuous ON
5/7
6181

No.
Name
Symbol
Remarks
36
CD-A replenisher pump sensor
Attached in CD-A replenisher pump
37
CD-B replenisher pump sensor
Attached in CD-B replenisher pump
38
CD-C replenisher pump sensor
Attached in CD-C replenisher pump
39
CD-W water supply pump sensor
Attached in CD-W water supply

pump
40
BF-A replenisher pump sensor
Attached in BF-A replenisher pump
41
BF-B replenisher pump sensor
Attached in BF-B replenisher pump
42
STB replenisher pump sensor
Attached in STB replenisher pump
43
44
CD-A replenishment solution sensor
SE6
45
CD-B replenishment solution sensor
SE7
46
CD-C replenishment solution sensor
SE8
47
STB replenishment solution sensor
SE9
48
BF-A replenishment solution sensor
SE10
49
BF-B replenishment solution sensor
SE11
50
Replenishment package sensor P-1
LS3
51
Replenishment package sensor P-2
LS4
52
CD-A replenisher pump
RP5
53
CD-B replenisher pump
RP6
54
CD-C replenisher pump
RP7
55
CD-W water supply pump
RP8
56
BF-A replenisher pump
RP9
57
BF-B replenisher pump
RP10
58
BF-W water supply pump
RP13
59
RP11
60
P7
61
P8
62
P9
63
RP12
64
Cleaning pump 1

detects the water by using the
difference of heat conductivity
between liquid and gas.
Replenishment solution sensor P-1
Replenishment solution sensor P-2
6. Electrical parts
LSE5
P13
Dryer Section
No.
65
Name
Symbol
Dryer thermosensor
TH4S
66
STH1
67
LS2
68
Print sensor (left)
SE3
69
Print sensor (right)
70
Dryer fan
71
Dryer heater
Remarks
For detecting the dryer cover

When the dryer cover is opened,
following electrical parts turn off.
Drive motor (M1)
Dryer heater (H4)
Dryer fan (FAN1)
SE2
FAN1
H4
6181
6/7
6181

No.
Name
Symbol
Print full sensor
SE1
73
SE4
74
SE5
75
Conveyor motor 1
M2
76
Conveyor motor 2
M3
77
M4
This is a reflex sensor. When this

sensor detects the paper, it turns
LIGHT by the light reflection.
6. Electrical parts
72
Remarks
6181
7/7
6301
Disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply

Scanner section (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply)

! Disposition
3
6. Electrical parts
1
4
5
G057395
Scanner section
No.
Name
Symbol
Part No.
Manual No.
J390546
J390721
6501
6502
LED PCB
W408055
Lamp Power Supply
PS21
I038325
PS22
I038324
PMD5
I043111
6801
6801
6801
6301
Remarks
1/1
6311
135/240 AFC (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply)

! Disposition
2
When the back cover is removed
3
6
1
8
5
G051054
No.
Name
Symbol
Part No.
Manual No.
6601
6602
6603
6604
6605
6606
6607
6608
6609
Connecting PCB 1
J390481
Connecting PCB 2
J390482
Connecting PCB 3
J490255
Driver PCB 1
J390368
Driver PCB 2
J390519
Sensor PCB
J390560
Power PCB
J390380
Magnetic head PCB
J390497
Connecting PCB 4
J390579
6311
6. Electrical parts
135/240 AFC
Remarks
1/1
6312
120 AFC (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply)

! Disposition
G051055
120 AFC
Part No.
Manual No.
Connecting PCB
Name
Symbol
J390371
Sensor PCB
J390385
6621
6622
6312
Remarks
6. Electrical parts
No.
1/1
6313

! Disposition
6. Electrical parts
G052691
110 AFC
No.
Part No.
Manual No.
Connecting PCB
Name
Symbol
J390372
Sensor PCB
J390394
6631
6632
6313
Remarks
1/1
6314
MMC (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply)

! Disposition
G052688
MMC
No.
Part No.
Manual No.
MMC connecting PCB
Name
Symbol
J390483
MMC sensor PCB
J390389
6636
6637
6314
Remarks
1/1
6. Electrical parts
6315

! Disposition
6. Electrical parts
G057668
135 AFC
No.
Part No.
Manual No.
Name
Symbol
J390708
135 AFC sensor PCB
J390709
6638
6639
6315
Remarks
1/1
6316
AMC (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply)

! Disposition
G058784
AMC
No.
Name
Symbol
Parts No.
AMC connecting PCB
J390700
MMC sensor PCB
J390389
6316
Manual No.
6640
6637
1/1
6. Electrical parts
6351
Printer section (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply)

! Disposition
The external view of the machine differs depending on the model.
Dual paper magazine specification
6. Electrical parts
Single paper magazine specification
Dual paper magazine specification
G057396
6351
1/2
6351
Printer section
Name
Symbol
Part No.
Manual No.
6405
6408
6410
6460
6461
6506
6551
6571
6572
6573
6574
J390577
D-ICE PCB
J390572
LVDS connecting PCB
J390651
Printer I/O PCB 1
J390590
Printer I/O PCB 2
J390574
J390551
Printer control PCB
J390578
Laser control PCB
J390640
Clock PCB
J390639
10
Laser I/O PCB
J390641
11
B laser driver
J390656
12
G laser driver
13
CVP PCB
J306324
14
J306820
15
16
J390592
17
PS3
I038256
18
PS4
I038256
19
PS6
I038338
20
PS7
I038339
21
PS8
I038293
22
Image processing PCB power supply
PS12
I038312
23
Image processing PCB power supply 2
PS13
I038338
24
PMD1
25
26
PM driver (paper supply motor A)
PMD3
I043087
27
PM driver (paper supply motor B)
PMD4
I043087
28
B-AOM driver
29
G-AOM driver
30
R-AOM driver
31
Hard disk drive 1
PS2
I038160
6581
6582
6552
6801
6801
6801
6801
6801
6801
6801
6801
Remarks
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option (compact
archive system)
I124001
6851
6851
6851
6851
6861
I090233
6583
Option (compact
archive system)
J380742
6575
This is not
attached
depending on the
machine.
I043087
J341040
Hard disk drive 2
6. Electrical parts
No.
Option
Hard disk drive 3

32
Laser temperature connecting PCB
6351
2/2
6381
Processor section (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply) [N]

For the SM specification, refer to Processor section (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply) [SM].
! Disposition
3
4
2
G057397
No.
Name
Symbol
Part No.
Manual No.
J306946
J306816
6701
6702
6703
J404493
I038256
6801
Processor I/O PCB
Main relay PCB
J390644
Processor relay PCB
Transistor PCB
Power Supply
PS1
6381
6. Electrical parts
Processor section
Remarks
Option (cooling
water solenoid
valve)
1/3
6381
Processor section (disposition of PCB, PM driver and power supply) [SM]

! Disposition
3
1
4
2
G057397
Processor section
Name
Symbol
Parts No.
Manual No.
J306946
J306816
6701
6702
6703
J404493
I038256
6801
Processor I/O PCB
Main relay PCB
J390644
Processor relay PCB
Transistor PCB
Power Supply
PS1
Remarks
6. Electrical parts
No.
Option (cooling
water solenoid
valve)
SM replenishment unit
G057398
6381
2/3
6381
SM replenishment unit
No.
Symbol
SM I/O PCB
Parts No.
Manual No.
J390534
6741
Remarks
6. Electrical parts
Name
6381
3/3
6401
Description of PCB (printer section)
PCI-LVDS conversion PCB (J390343)
G051019
! Function
Carries out the data communication between the image processing PCB and mother board.
! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

! 1. Disposition
6161
! 2. Precautions for replacement
6. Electrical parts
None
! 3. Adjustment after replacement

None
! Unused connector
None
! Component parts table

LED No.
Purpose
Status
LED501
DC+5 V input check
ON when power is supplied.
LED502
DC+3.3 V input check
Test point No.
Purpose
Measurement with voltmeter
TP501
DC+5 V voltage measurement
TP502
DC+3.3 V voltage measurement
Possible
TP503
Ground
Possible
TP504
Ground
Possible
Remarks
Possible
6401
1/1
6402
PCI-ARCNET conversion PCB (J390342)
PU control PCB
G050901
! Described for each model

The connecting position of the connector of PCI-ARCNET conversion PCB differs depending on the model, refer to the following.
QSS-3001
QSS-3011
P81, P82
Printer control PCB
P83, P84
Printer control PCB
6. Electrical parts
Connector No.
! Function
Carries out the data communication between the printer control PCB, scanner control PCB and PU control PCB, and mother
board.

! 1. Disposition
6161
None

None
! Unused connector
Connector No.
P80
Purpose
Remarks
Purpose
Status
Unused

LED No.
LED1
DC+5 V input check
6402
1/2
6402
Test point No.
Purpose
Ground
Possible
TP2
Ground
Possible
TP3
Ground
Possible
TP4
Possible
Remarks
6. Electrical parts
TP1
6402
2/2
6403
Keyboard connecting PCB (J390645)
G057402
! Function
Connects the operation keyboard.

6. Electrical parts
! 1. Disposition
6161
None

None
! Unused connector
None

None
6403
1/1
6404
Memory (I090231, I090232)
G052486
! Function
Memory module on the image processing PCB
Stores the program and image data.

6. Electrical parts
! 1. Disposition
6405
Mount them into the DIMM slot on the image processing PCB.
Connector No.
J66
J67
J68
When 120 film is not

corresponded
I090231
I090231
I090231
When 120 film is

corresponded
I090231
I090232
I090232

None
! Unused connector
None
6404
1/1
6405
G057506
! Function
Carries out the command communication with the HOST-PC and receives and sends data.
Carries out the command communication with the D-ICE PCB and receives and sends data.
Receives and sends data with the laser control PCB.

! 1. Disposition
6351
Backup the data of the machine.
3169
IMPORTANT
The height of the spacer which fixes the image processing PCB and D-ICE PCB are different from the places.
After removing the spacers, reattach them as the spacer list.
If the wrong spacers are attached, connector imperfect contact may occur.
6405
1/3
6. Electrical parts
Image processing PCB (J390577)
6405
Frame
7
3
Screw
1
Second
spacer
First spacer
4
7
1
Second spacer
First spacer
Frame
G057656
Spacer list
Number
First
Second
Third
8 mm
Screw
8 mm
14 mm
Screw
8 mm
15 mm
12.5 mm
12 mm
12.5 mm
11 mm
Screw
8 mm
15 mm
12.5 mm
12 mm
Set the DIP switch.

Set to the same positions as those on the PCB prior to replacement.
Check the jumper pin settings.

Read the data of the machine.
3169
Carry out the weekly setup.
6405
2/3
6. Electrical parts
D-ICE PCB
6405
! Unused connector
Connector No.
Purpose
CN1
Unused
Remarks
CN4
Unused
CN801
Unused
P74-P76
Connector for HDD control signal
P77
Compact archive system (option)
Connector for HDD control signal (spare)

LED No.
LED1
Purpose
Status
Unused
LED2
LED3
LED4
LED5
LED6
LED7
LED8
LED9
LED10
LED11
LED12
Purpose
TP6
Ground
TP7
Ground
TP8
Ground
TP9
Ground
TP10
Ground
TP11
Ground
TP12
Ground
Switch No.
Bit No.
Setting
DS1
OFF
Remarks
6. Electrical parts
Test point No.
Purpose
Unused
Remarks
Be sure to turn OFF.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Jumper No.
Setting
JP1
Open
Open
When operated
Short
Unused
6405
Remarks
Forcible reset of the hardware
3/3
6408
D-ICE PCB (J390572)
G052779
! Function
Corrects the scratch of scanned image.
Transfers the scanned image to the image processing PCB instead of image input PCB.
6. Electrical parts

! 1. Disposition
6351
Set the DIP switch.

Read the system program.
3172
! Unused connector
Connector No.
P1
Purpose
Remarks
Purpose
Status
Unused

LED No.
D1
Unused
D2
Unused
D3
Unused
D4
DC+3.3 V input check
6408
1/2
6408
Jumper No.
Bit No.
Setting
JP1
Open
Unused
Be sure to set to Open.
JP3
Open
Unused
Open
Unused
Open
Unused
Open
Unused
Open
Unused
Open
Unused
Open
Unused
Open
Unused
JP4
JP5
Purpose
Remarks
Open
Unused
Open
Unused
Open
Unused
Open
Unused
Open
Unused
Open
Unused
Open
Unused
Open
Unused
Open
Unused
Open
Unused
Open
Unused
Open
Unused
Open
Unused
Open
Unused
Open
Unused
Open
Unused
Open
Unused
Open
Unused
Open
Unused
6408
6. Electrical parts
2/2
6410
LVDS connecting PCB (J390651)
G057410
! Function
Relays data from the scanner to the D-ICE PCB.
NOTE
The image data is sent from P439 to J436.

! 1. Disposition
6. Electrical parts
6351
To prevent disconnection, be careful not to bend it when replacing.

None
! Unused connector
None
6410
1/1
6441
Keyboard switch PCB (J390510)
G050906
! Function
Carries out the communication between the mother board and operation keyboard or keyboard.

6. Electrical parts
! 1. Disposition
6161
None

None
! Unused connector
Connector No.
P170
Purpose
Remarks
Purpose
Status
Unused

LED No.
LED1
DC+5 V input check
Test point No.
Purpose

TP1
Unused
TP2
Possible
TP3
Ground
Possible
Remarks
Impossible
Fuse No.
Rating
F24
T3.15 A/125 V
Purpose
Remarks
DC+5 V power supply

protection
6441
1/1
6442
System control PCB (J390642) (QSS-3001)

The system control PCB differs depending on the model, refer to the following.
For QSS-3011, refer to System control PCB (J390739) (QSS-3011).
G057401
IMPORTANT
This system control PCB is for QSS-3001.
Carries out the communication and control between the mother board and SW/LED PCB, processor control PCB or colorimeter
control PCB.

! 1. Disposition
6161
None

! Unused connector
Connector No.
P955
Unused
P981
Unused
P989
Unused
Purpose
Remarks
Purpose
Remarks

Jumper No.
JP4
Sending the start signal from the Program Timer

to the mother board when the system starts
6442
1-2: short-circuit
1/3
6. Electrical parts
! Function
6442
System control PCB (J390739) (QSS-3011)
IMPORTANT
This system control PCB is for QSS-3011.
! Function
Carries out the communication and control between the mother board and SW/LED PCB, processor control PCB, colorimeter
control PCB or HDD 1 and 2.

! 1. Disposition
6161
None

! Unused connector
Connector No.
P996
Purpose
Remarks
Unused
P997
Unused
P42
For PU control PCB
Option
6442
2/3
6. Electrical parts
G057673
6442

JP4
Purpose
Remarks
Sending the start signal from the Program Timer

to the mother board when the system starts
1-2: short-circuit
6. Electrical parts
Jumper No.
6442
3/3
6443
PS2 PCB (J490281)
P992
P994
P993
G057451
! Function
Connects the keyboard and keyboard switch PCB
6. Electrical parts

! 1. Disposition
6161
None

None
! Unused connector
Connector No.
P994
Purpose
Remarks
Spare connector for keyboard

None
6443
1/1
6460
Printer I/O PCB 1 (J390590)
G057500
! Function
Drives of paper advance motors 1 and 2, arm move motor, exposure advance motors 1 and 2, cut motor, paper hold motor, and
pressure change motors 1 and 2.
6. Electrical parts

! 1. Disposition
6351
None

None
! Unused connector
Connector No.
Purpose
P209
Spare
P207
Dual paper magazine
Remarks
Option

Test point No.
Purpose
Remarks
TP1
Ground (DC+24 V)
Possible
TP2
Ground (DC+36 V)
Possible
TP3
Possible
TP4
Possible
TP5
Possible
TP6
Possible
OFF with the interlock
TP7
Possible
OFF with the interlock
6460
1/2
6460
Rating
F16
T3.15 A/125 V
DC+36 V power supply

protection
Purpose
Remarks
F17
T6.3 A/125 V
DC+24 V-1 power supply

protection
Printer control box cooling fan,

arm move motors (left, right)
F18
T6.3 A/125 V

protection
Paper advance motor 2, exposure

advance motors 1 and 2
F19
T6.3 A/125 V

protection
Cut motor, paper hold motor,

pressure change motors 1, 2
F20
T3.15 A/125 V
DC+5 V power supply

protection
6. Electrical parts
Fuse No.
6460
2/2
6461
Printer I/O PCB 2 (J390574)
G057501
! Function
Power supply and operation signal control of paper advance motor 3, pressure change motor 3, horizontal advance motors (left
and right), elevator motors (left and right)
6. Electrical parts

! 1. Disposition
6351
None

None
! Unused connector
None

Test point No.
Purpose
TP1
Possible
TP2
DC+24 V1 voltage
measurement
Possible
TP3
Ground
Possible
TP4
DC+24 V2 voltage
measurement
Possible
TP5
DC+24 V3 voltage
measurement
Possible
TP6
Ground
Possible
6461
Remarks
1/2
6461
Rating
F13
T6.3 A/125 V

protection
Purpose
Horizontal advance motor (left),

elevator motor (left)
Remarks
F14
T6.3 A/125 V

protection

(right), elevator motor (right)
F15
T6.3 A/125 V

protection
Pressure change motor 3, paper

advance motor 3
F32
T3.15 A/125 V
DC+5 V power supply

protection
Power supply for control the IC

in the PCB and motor driver
6. Electrical parts
Fuse No.
6461
2/2
6501
AFC/scanner control PCB (J390546)
G050908
! Function
Controls each AFC, MMC and AMC.
Controls the scanner unit and lamp unit.

! 1. Disposition
6301
3169
Set the DIP switch.
IMPORTANT
This PCB has connectors J11 (OUT) and J12 (IN) which are connected to optical fiber cables. Be sure to read the
Precautions for handling optical fiber cables, then start work properly. 6011

Upgrade the software.
3172
6501
1/3
6. Electrical parts
PCI-ARCNET
conversion PCB
6501

3169
Carry out the sensor standard adjustment for each AFC, MMC and AMC.
IMPORTANT
When the following AFC, MMC or AMC is set as option, carry out the adjustment.
135/240 AFC
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment
120 AFC
110 AFC
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment
DX Sensor Standard
Adjustment
3151
3152
135/240 MMC
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment
3153
135/240 AMC
Emission Lamp and

Detection Sensor
Position Correction
Check
Emission Lamp and

Detection Sensor
Position Correction
Check
3154
3156
135 AFC
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment
DX Sensor Standard
Adjustment
3155
! Unused connector
Purpose
P4
Unused
P7
Unused
P8
Unused
J10
Unused
P13
Unused
P14
Unused
P15
Unused
J45
Unused
P78
Unused
Remarks
6. Electrical parts
Connector No.

LED No.
Purpose
Status
LED1
DC+5 V input check
LED2
DC+15 V input check
LED3
Unused
Test point No.

TP1
Purpose
Unused
Remarks
Impossible
TP2
DC+5 V1 voltage measurement
TP3
Unused
Impossible
Possible
TP4
Ground
Possible
TP5
Ground
Possible
TP6
Ground
Possible
TP7
Ground
Possible
TP8
Unused
Possible
TP9
Ground
Possible
TP10
Possible
TP11
Possible
Switch No.
Bit No.
Setting
DS1
ON
RAM data backup
Purpose
ON
RAM data backup
6501
Remarks
Be sure to turn ON.
2/3
6501
Bit No.
Setting
Purpose
DS2
OFF
Unused
OFF
Unused
OFF
Unused
OFF
Unused
Remarks
6. Electrical parts
Switch No.
6501
3/3
6502
AFC/scanner driver PCB (J390721)
G057404
! Function
6. Electrical parts
Controls motors of the scanner section and lamphouse section, and relays each sensor.
Supplies power to each AFC, MMC and AMC.

! 1. Disposition
6301
None

None
! Unused connector
Connector No.
P46
Purpose
Remarks
+24 V power supply to the film cleaner
Option

LED No.
Purpose
Status
LED1
Filter motor status check
ON when the motor is excited.
LED2
Zoom motor 1 status check
LED3
Zoom motor 2 status check
LED5
Focus motor status check
LED6
Iris motor status check
LED8
Scanner lamp status check
ON when the scanner lamp is ON.
6502
1/2
6502
LED No.
Purpose
Status
LED9
DC+36 V2 (AFC) output check
ON when the power is supplied to AFC.
LED12
DC+36 V1 (AFC) input check
LED14
DC+24 V1 output check
LED17
DC+5 V1 input check
LED18
Interlock status check
ON when the interlock is ON.
TP1
Purpose
Unused
Remarks
Impossible
TP2
DC+5 V1 voltage measurement
TP3
Unused
Impossible
Possible
TP4
Ground
Possible
TP5
Ground
Possible
TP6
Ground
Possible
TP7
Ground
Possible
TP8
Unused
Possible
TP9
Ground
Possible
TP10
Possible
TP11
Possible
Fuse No.
Rating
F26
T6.3 A/125 V
DC+36 V1 power supply

protection
Purpose
F28
T3.15 A/125 V

protection
F31
T3.15 A/125 V

protection
6502
Remarks
6. Electrical parts
Test point No.
2/2
6506
Colorimeter control PCB (J390551)
G051026
! Function
Controls the colorimeter unit.

6. Electrical parts
! 1. Disposition
6351
Set the DIP switch.

3172
Correct the front end advance length and the error by the colorimeter unit adjustment.
3157
! Unused connector
None

LED No.
Purpose
Status
LED1
DC+5 V input check
LED2
DC+12 V input check
LED3
DC+24 V input check
Test point No.
Purpose
TP1
Possible
TP2
Possible
TP3
Possible
TP4
Ground
Possible
6506
Remarks
DC+5 V, DC+12 V
1/2
6506
Test point No.
Purpose
TP5
Ground
Possible
TP6
Paper sensor 1
Possible
TP7
Unused
TP8
Paper sensor 2
TP9
Unused
Remarks
DC+24 V
Impossible
Possible
Impossible
Bit No.
Setting
DS1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Purpose
Unused
Remarks
6. Electrical parts
Switch No.
6506
2/2
6516
PU control PCB (J307103)
PCI-ARCNET
conversion PCB
G050910
! Function
6. Electrical parts
Controls the pricing unit.

! 1. Disposition
6161
3169
Set the DIP switch.
IMPORTANT
This PCB has connectors P299 (IN) and P300 (OUT) which are connected to optical fiber cables. Be sure to read the

3172
3169
! Unused connector
Connector No.
Purpose
Remarks
P301
Pricing unit keyboard connection
P302
Pricing unit display connection
P303
PU data communication unit connection
6516
1/2
6516

LED No.
Purpose
Status
LED1
DC+24 V input check
LED2
DC+5 V input check
Test point No.
Purpose
TP1
DC+24 V voltage check
Possible
TP2
DC+5 V voltage check
Possible
TP3
Ground
Possible
TP4
Ground
Possible
Switch No.
Bit No.
Setting
DS1
OFF
Unused
Purpose
OFF
Unused
OFF
Unused
OFF
Unused
OFF
Unused
OFF
Unused
OFF
Unused
OFF
Unused
Remarks
Remarks
Rating
Purpose
F15
T3.15 A/125 V

protection
Remarks
6. Electrical parts
Fuse No.
6516
2/2
6517
SW/LED PCB (J390643)
G057417
! Function
Carries out the communication between the power switch, reset switch and LED, and mother board.

! 1. Disposition
6161
6. Electrical parts
None

None
! Unused connector
None

LED No.
Purpose
Status
LED1
PC power supply ON check
ON when the PC power supply is ON.
LED2
Hard disk drive operation check
ON when the hard disk drive operates.
6517
1/1
6521
ATX mother board (W408266), DIMM (I090236) (QSS-3001)

The ATX mother board and DIMM differ depending on the model, refer to the following.
6. Electrical parts
For QSS-3011, refer to ATX mother board (W408721), RIMM (I090302) (QSS-3011).
G057412
IMPORTANT
This mother board is for QSS-3001.
! Function
Controls the whole of system.
Controls the digital media drive such as a hard disk drive or floppy disk drive.
Controls the user interface.

! 1. Disposition
6161
6521
1/6
6521

Turn off the power switch of ATX power supply (PS11).
Attach DIMM to the ATX mother board.
Attach each board to the ATX mother board.
NOTE
Replace both the ATX mother board and CPU as a set.

Carry out CMOS Clear.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to turn off the power before doing the CMOS Clear. If the power is on, the ATX mother board might be
broken.
Make a short-circuit of RTC Reset on the mother board with a screwdriver or the like for a few seconds and carry out the CMOS
Clear.
Turn on the power switch of ATX power supply (PS11).
Carry out the BIOS setting.
3701
! 4. Replacement of lithium battery

Replace the lithium battery.
IMPORTANT
After replacing the lithium battery, carry out the adjustment after replacing ATX mother board 3. Adjustment
after replacement.

Connector No.
DIMM0
Purpose
Remarks
Memory
256 MB (Standard)
DIMM1
Memory
256 MB (Optional)
DIMM2
Unused
ATX POWER
Cable from ATX power supply
AGP Slot
Unused
PCI1 Slot
Unused
PCI2 Slot
PCI/ARCNET conversion PCB
PCI3 Slot
SCSI board
PCI4 Slot
Unused
PCI5 Slot
PCI/LVDS conversion PCB
IDE (PRIMARY)
Cable from Zip drive
IDE (SECONDARY) Cable from the hard disk drive and CD-ROM
(CD-RW) drive
FDD
Cable from floppy disk drive
FRONT PANEL
Cable from the system control PCB and SW/LED

PCB
CPU FAN
Cable of the CPU fan
PSU FAN
Unused
CHASSIS FAN
Cable of the chasis fan
KEYBOARD
Keyboard switch PCB cable
MOUSE
Cable of the mouse
USB1
Cable from the flatbed scanner
6521
2/6
6. Electrical parts
Use the same type lithium battery before replacement.

If another type one is is used, it causes ignition or damage.
6521
Connector No.
Purpose
USB2
Unused
LAN
LAN cable
CRT
Monitor cable
PARAREL
Unused
Remarks
*1
COM1
QSS-NET modem
COM2
Cable from the system control PCB
USB
Unused
WOL
Unused
INTRUDER
Unused
LI-BAT
Cable from the lithium battery
RTC RESET
For CMOS Clear
*1. Connection of the LAN cable

Lay the LAN cable as shown below.
Fix the LAN cable with a nylon clamp (4N).
LAN cable
G061792
6521
3/6
6. Electrical parts
Nylon clamp (4N)
6521
G057679
IMPORTANT
This mother board is for QSS-3011.
! Function
Controls the whole of system.
Controls the digital media drive such as a hard disk drive or floppy disk drive.
Controls the user interface.

! 1. Disposition
6161
Attach the RIMM and C-RIMM to the ATX mother board.
Attach each board to the ATX mother board.
IMPORTANT
When the optional RIMM is not attached, be sure to attach the C-RIMM to the empty slot. If it is not attached, the
machine does not operate normally.
6521
4/6
6. Electrical parts
ATX mother board (W408721), RIMM (I090302) (QSS-3011)
6521
NOTE
Replace both the ATX mother board and CPU as a set.

Carry out CMOS Clear.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to turn off the power before doing the CMOS Clear. If the power is on, the ATX mother board might be
broken.
Change the setting of JBT 1 on the mother board from 1-2 pin short-circuit to 2-3 pin short-circuit. Then wait a few seconds.
Change the setting of JBT 1 on the mother board from 2-3 pin short-circuit to 1-2 pin short-circuit.
Carry out the BIOS setting.
3701
! 4. Replacement of lithium battery

Replace the lithium battery.
IMPORTANT
Use the same type lithium battery before replacement.
After replacing the lithium battery, carry out the adjustment after replacing ATX mother board 3. Adjustment
after replacement.

Purpose
Remarks
RIMM 1
512 MB PC800 (Standard)
CHB-BANK 0
RIMM 2
512 MB PC800 (Standard)
CHA-BANK 1
C-RIMM
Dummy module (Standard), 512 MB PC800

(Optional)
CHB-BANK 1
C-RIMM
Dummy module (Standard), 512 MB PC800

(Optional)
CPU 1
CPU 1
CPU 2
CPU 2
J21
Cable from ATX power supply (24-pin)
J24
J23
AGP 4x PRO
Video card
PCI 64#1
Unused
PCI 64#2
Unused
PCI 1
Unused
PCI 2
Unused
PCI 3
PCI/LVDS conversion PCB
PCI 4
PCI/ARCNET conversion PCB
6. Electrical parts
Connector No.
CHA-BANK 0
UL TRA III LVD/SE Cable from hard disk drive

SCSI CHA
UL TRA III LVD/SE Unused
SCSI CHA
ULTRA SCSI (CH
B)
Cable from MO drive and card reader
IDE #1 (J6)
Cable from Zip drive
IDE #2 (J7)
Cable from CD-RW
6521
5/6
6521
Connector No.
Purpose
FLOPPY (JP5)
Cable from floppy disk drive
RAID PORT
Unused
CPU FAN1
Cable from CPU1 fan
CPU FAN2
Cable from CPU2 fan
CH FAN 1
Unused
CH FAN2
Unused
CH FAN 3
Unused
CH FAN 4
Chassis fan 1
FAN 5
Unused
OH FAN
Unused
PWR FAULT
Unused
JOH
Unused
J20
Unused
J29
Unused
J32
Unused
J/P37 PWR FAULT
Unused
CD 1
Unused
CD 2
Unused
WOR
Unused
KB / MOUSE (J17)
Keyboard switch PCB cable
KB / MOUSE (J17)
Cable of the mouse
USB 0 (J18)
Cable from the flatbed scanner
Remarks
USB 1 (J19)
Unused
USB (JF1)
COM 1 (J16)
COM 2 (J22)
QSS-NET modem
PARALLEL PORT
(J15)
Unused
LAN (J27)
LAN cable
Line Out (J30)
Unused
Line In (J30)
Unused
Mic (J31)
Unused
BT 1
Lithium battery
Jumper
JBT1
Purpose
6. Electrical parts
Remarks
1-2 is short-circuit. (CMOS Clear 2-3 is shortcircuit.)
JP2
1-2 is short-circuit.
JP2 A1
JPA1
Not set.
JPA2
Not set.
JPA3
JP4
JP34
JP35
JP36
JP38
Not set.
JP39
JPWAKE
JWOR
Not set.
6521
6/6
6524
SCSI card (I090228) (QSS-3001)
G057406
IMPORTANT
This SCSI card is for QSS-3001.
This is not used for QSS-3011.
! Function
6. Electrical parts
Carries out the communication between the mother board and MO drive, DVD-RAM drive, or card reader.

! 1. Disposition
6161
None

None
! Unused connector
Connector No.
Purpose
J2
Unused
J3
Unused
Remarks
6524
1/1
6525
Video board (I090301) (QSS-3011)
J2
J152
G054873
IMPORTANT
This video board is for QSS-3011.
This is not used for QSS-3001.
! Function
6. Electrical parts
Outputs the image of system status to the monitor.

! 1. Disposition
6161
Attach the video board to the AGP Slot.

None
! Unused connector
Connector No.
J2
Purpose
Remarks
Unused
6525
1/1
6526
ATX power supply (I038337), Battery pack (I085024) (QSS-3001)

The ATX power supply and battery pack differ depending on the model, refer to the following.
For QSS-3011, refer to ATX power supply (I038354), Battery pack (I085024) (QSS-3011).
Battery pack
ATX power supply
G057407
IMPORTANT
This ATX power supply is for QSS-3001. The battery pack is as same as for QSS-3011.
6. Electrical parts
! Function
! ATX power supply
Supplies power to the mother board, each media drive, keyboard switch PCB and battery pack.
DC+5 V, DC5 V, DC+3.3 V, DC+12 V, DC12 V, DC+27 V
IMPORTANT
The ATX power supply is equipped with the overvoltage protection function. If this function is operated, turn OFF
the circuit breaker of the machine and wait one moment, then turn ON again.
! Battery pack
Supplies power to the ATX power supply when power failure.
IMPORTANT
The estimated life of the battery pack is about 3 years.
The battery pack should be replaced with a new one within three years.
If the battery back is over discharged, there is a case that it deteriorates within three years.
If there is a symptom that the UPS does not work or hard disk breakage, carry out the voltage check explained as
follows. If the battery pack has deteriorated, replace it with a new one.

! 1. Disposition
6161
! 2. Check the voltage of the battery pack.
1. When measuring the voltage of the battery pack, be sure to connect it to the ATX power supply.
6526
1/7
6526
IMPORTANT
The voltage of battery pack measured without connecting to the ATX power supply differs from with connecting it
condition.
If the voltage of battery pack without connecting the ATX power supply is within the rated value, there is a case
that it cannot be used.
2. Change the BIOS of mother board from Disable to Diskette Device1 of FirstStart-Up Device in Start-Up Options.
3701
3. Shut down the machine.
4. Insert a floppy disk to the floppy disk drive and turn on the power switch.
IMPORTANT
Be sure not to insert the system floppy disk.
5. The message, Invalid system disk. Replace the disk, and then press any key. appears.
Turn off the circuit breaker. (To supply the power only from the battery pack.)
6. Measure the voltage of J/P352. Then leave it five minutes.
Diagnose in the following way.
Is 24 V to 26 V supplied to J/P352?
YES
The battery pack is not defective.
YES
The battery pack is not defective, but the charge is not

enough.
NO
Is the machine operate 5 minutes only with the power from

the battery pack?
The charge of the battery pack is not enough.

It might deteriorate.
7. when it is diagnosed that the charge of the battery pack is not enough or it deteriorates, check that there is output from ATX power
supply.
Disconnect the connector (J/P352) and turn on the circuit breaker.
When the power of the battery pack drains and the power is not supplied to the PC, wait until the message Invalid system disk.
Replace the disk, and then press any key. appears.
Measure the connector of ATX power supply and check that 27 V is supplied.
If 27 V is not supplied, replace the ATX power supply with a new one.
8. Remove the floppy disk and restart.
9. Change the BIOS of mother board from Diskette Device1 to Disable of FirstStart-Up Device in Start-Up Options.
3701

Turn off the power switch of ATX power supply (PS11) and replace the battery pack.
IMPORTANT
When replacing the ATX power supply (PS11), be sure to turn off the power switch. Even though the circuit
breaker of the main body is off, if the power switch of the ATX power supply (PS11) is on and the connector from
the battery pack is connected, power is supplied to the mother board and each media drive. If you connect the
connector when the power is supplied, there is a case that the machine is damaged.

6526
2/7
6. Electrical parts
NO
6526
Write the date of the replacement on the label after replacing.
For Japanese
For English
G057408
! Unused connector
! ATX power supply
See the illustration below.
6. Electrical parts
Unused
FDD
MO
Unused
Keyboard switch PCB
Zip
ATX power
supply
Card reader
CD, DVD
HDD
ATX mother board
Battery pack
G057409
! Battery pack
None
6526
3/7
6526
ATX power supply (I038354), Battery pack (I085024) (QSS-3011)

Battery pack
ATX power supply
G057678
IMPORTANT
This ATX power supply is for QSS-3011. The battery pack is as same as for QSS-3001.
In case for QSS-3011, there are two battery packs. Replace two battery packs with new ones at the same time.
! ATX power supply

Supplies power to the mother board, each media drive, keyboard switch PCB and battery pack.
DC+5 V, DC5 V, DC+3.3 V, DC+12 V, DC12 V
IMPORTANT
The ATX power supply is equipped with the overvoltage protection function. If this function is operated, turn OFF
the circuit breaker of the machine and wait one moment, then turn ON again.
! Battery pack
Supplies power to the ATX power supply when power failure.
IMPORTANT
The estimated life of the battery pack is about 3 years.
The battery pack should be replaced with a new one within three years.
If the battery back is over discharged, there is a case that it deteriorates within three years.
If there is a symptom that the UPS does not work or hard disk breakage, carry out the voltage check explained as
follows. If the battery pack has deteriorated, replace it with a new one.

! 1. Disposition
6161
! 2. Check the voltage of the battery pack.
1. When measuring the voltage of the battery pack, be sure to connect it to the ATX power supply.
IMPORTANT
The voltage of battery pack measured without connecting to the ATX power supply differs from with connecting it
condition.
6526
4/7
6. Electrical parts
! Function
6526
If the voltage of battery pack without connecting the ATX power supply is within the rated value, there is a case
that it cannot be used.
2. About mother board BIOS, change the setting of First Boot device of Boot from Disable to Floppy.
3701
3. Shut down the machine.
4. Insert a floppy disk to the floppy disk drive and turn on the power switch.
IMPORTANT
Be sure not to insert the system floppy disk.
5. Please insert another disk. appears.
Turn off the circuit breaker. (To supply the power only from the battery pack.)
6. Measure the voltage the battery pack. Then leave it 5 minutes.
Diagnose in the following way.
IMPORTANT
There are two battery packs for QSS-3011. Check the connectors of the battery pack by each in the following
way.
Is 24 V to 26 V supplied to connector of the battery pack?
YES
The battery pack is not defective.
YES
The battery pack is not defective, but the charge is not

enough.
NO
Is the machine operate 5 minutes only with the power from

the battery pack?
The charge of the battery pack is not enough.

It might deteriorate.
7. when it is diagnosed that the charge of the battery pack is not enough or it deteriorates, check that there is output from ATX power
supply.
Disconnect the connector of the battery pack and turn on the circuit breaker.
When the power of the battery pack drains and the power is not supplied to the PC, wait until the message Invalid system disk.
Replace the disk, and then press any key. appears.
Measure the connector of ATX power supply and check that 27 V is supplied.
If 27 V is not supplied, replace the ATX power supply with a new one.
8. Remove the floppy disk and restart.
9. About mother board BIOS, change the setting of First Boot device of Boot from Floppy to Disable.
3701

Turn off the power switch of ATX power supply (PS11) and replace the battery pack.
IMPORTANT
When replacing the ATX power supply (PS11), be sure to turn off the power switch. Even though the circuit
breaker of the main body is off, if the power switch of the ATX power supply (PS11) is on and the connector from
the battery pack is connected, power is supplied to the mother board and each media drive. If you connect the
connector when the power is supplied, there is a case that the machine is damaged.

6526
5/7
6. Electrical parts
NO
6526
Write the date of the replacement on the label after replacing.
For Japanese
For English
G057408
! Unused connector
! ATX power supply
6. Electrical parts
See the illustration below.
6526
6/7
6526
ATX mother board
Chassis fan 2
Unused
HDD 1
HDD 2
Chassis fan 3
Unused
Unused
Unused
Keyboard switch PCB
ATX power
supply
FDD
6. Electrical parts
MO
Card reader
Zip
Unused
Unused
CD-R/W
Battery pack
Battery pack
G057677
! Battery pack
None
6526
7/7
6527
Hard disk drive (I090238, I090291) (QSS-3001)

The hard disk drive differs depending on the model, refer to the following.
For QSS-3011, refer to Hard disk drive 1, 2 (I090303) (QSS-3011).
Jumper setting of the hard disk
I090238
I090291
Connector for power supply
Connector for signal
Connector for signal

G057411
NOTE
One of the two kinds of hard disk shown above has been attached.
! Function
Stores the operating system, application software, and the other data.

! 1. Disposition
6161
If the hard disk is often damaged, check whether the battery pack is deteriorate or not.
6526

3801
! Unused connector
None
6527
1/2
6. Electrical parts
Connector for power supply
6527
Hard disk drive 1, 2 (I090303) (QSS-3011)

Hard disk drive 1
Hard disk drive 2
G057676
! Function
Stores the operating system, application software, and the other data.
6. Electrical parts

! 1. Disposition
6161
IMPORTANT
The setting for the jumper pin of hard disk drive 1 is unecessary.
If the hard disk is often damaged, check whether the battery pack is deteriorate or not.
6526

3801
! Unused connector
None
6527
2/2
6528
Each media drive (QSS-3001)

Each media drive differs depending on the model, refer to the following.
For QSS-3011, refer to Each media drive (QSS-3011).
Setting for the jumper and switch of each drive
DVD-RAM drive
PC card reader
CD-ROM/RW drive
Zip drive
G057418
! Function
Reads and writes data from/to the storage media.

! 1. Disposition
6161
6528
1/4
6. Electrical parts
MO drive
6528

Make setting for the jumper and switch of each drive to the specified SCSI ID and IDE.
Setting of each drive

Drive
SCSI ID
MO
Remarks
Part No.
W408265
PC card
Z808686
SmartMedia
Compact Flash
DVD-RAM
SCSI board
CD-ROM
W408253
I090288
Secondary IDE (Slave)
CD-R/RW
Zip
Primary IDE (Master)
HD
Secondary IDE (Master)
I090234
W408254
W408264
I090238

Assign the drive.
3871
! Unused connector
6. Electrical parts
None
6528
2/4
6528
Each media drive (QSS-3011)

Setting for the jumper and switch of each drive
MO drive
PC card reader
G057675
! Function
Reads and writes data from/to the storage media.

! 1. Disposition
6161
Make setting for the jumper and switch of each drive to the specified SCSI ID and IDE.
Setting of each drive

Drive
SCSI ID
MO
PC card
SmartMedia
Compact Flash
Remarks
SCSI ch B
Part No.
W408265
Z808686
CD-R/RW
Secondary IDE (Slave)
Zip
Primary IDE (Master)
W408264
HD 1
SCSI ch A
I090303
HD 2
6528
3/4
6. Electrical parts
Zip drive
CD/RW drive
6528

Assign the drive.
3871
! Unused connector
6. Electrical parts
None
6528
4/4
6551
Printer control PCB (J390578)
PCI-ARCNET
conversion
PCB
Processor
Control PCB
G057507
! Function
Controls the paper advance in the Printer, sets the laser control PCB, and controls the laser temperature.
IMPORTANT
When the back space of the machine is as follows, remove the personal computer control unit. After removing the
personal computer control unit, open table cover 2. Then replace the PCB.
QSS-3001: 90 to 190 mm
QSS-3011: 90 to 460 mm
2152
When the back space of the machine is extensive than above, open the personal computer control unit. Then replace
the PCB.
2151
! 1. Disposition
6351
3169
Set the DIP switch.
IMPORTANT
This PCB has connectors P295 (OUT), P296 (IN), P245 (OUT), and P256 (IN) which are connected to optical fiber
cables. Be sure to read the Precautions for handling optical fiber cables, then start work properly. 6011

3172
3169
6551
1/2
6. Electrical parts
6551
! Unused connector
Connector No.
Purpose
Remarks
P242
Unused
P239
Used for dual paper magazine
Option
P237
Used when the CVP is attached
Option

Purpose
TP1
Ground (DC+5 V)
Possible
TP2
Ground (DC+5 V)
Possible
TP3
Ground (DC+5 V)
Possible
TP4
Possible
TP10
Memory backup
Possible
TP11
Unused
Impossible
TP12
Unused
Impossible
TP13
Unused
Impossible
TP14
Unused
Impossible
TP15
Unused
Impossible
TP16
Unused
Impossible
TP17
Unused
Impossible
TP18
Unused
Impossible
TP19
Unused
Impossible
TP20
Unused
Impossible
TP21
Unused
Impossible
TP22
Unused
Impossible
TP23
Unused
Impossible
TP24
Inner thermosensor power

supply
Possible
TP25
Inner thermosensor input
Possible
Switch No.
Bit No.
Setting
DS1
OFF
Purpose
Unused
Remarks
6. Electrical parts
Test point No.
Remarks
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6551
2/2
6552
Processor control PCB (J390592) [N]

For the SM specification, refer to Processor control PCB (J390592) [SM].
! Details of PCBs
G057505
! Function
Controls the paper advance section and the processor.
Changes the output signal of each temperature sensor in the processor from analog to digital.

! 1. Disposition
6351
3169
Set the DIP switch.
IMPORTANT
This PCB has connectors P795 (OUT) and P796 (IN) which are connected to optical fiber cables. Be sure to read the

6552
1/4
6. Electrical parts
Printer control
PCB
6552
3172
3169
! Unused connector
Connector No.
Purpose
P800
Unused
P791
Unused
Remarks

LED No.
Purpose
Status
LED1
DC+12 V input check
LED2
DC12 V input check
LED3
DC+5 V input check
LED4
DC+24 V input check
Purpose
TP1
Power supply for thermosensor
TP2
Unused
Impossible
TP3
Unused
Impossible
TP4
Ground
Possible
TP5
Unused
Impossible
TP6
Unused
Impossible
TP7
DC-12 V voltage measurement
Possible
TP8
Possible
TP9
Possible
TP10
Ground
Possible
TP11
Ground
Possible
TP12
Ground
Possible
TP13
Ground
Possible
TP14
Ground
Possible
Switch No.
Bit No.
Setting
DS1
OFF
Remarks
Possible
Purpose
Unused
6. Electrical parts
Test point No.
Remarks
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6552
2/4
6552
Processor control PCB (J390592) [SM]
G057505
! Function
Controls the paper advance section and the processor.
Changes the output signal of each temperature sensor in the processor from analog to digital.

! 1. Disposition
6351
3169
Set the DIP switch.
IMPORTANT
This PCB has connectors P795 (OUT) and P796 (IN) which are connected to optical fiber cables. Be sure to read the

3172
3169
6552
3/4
6. Electrical parts
! Details of PCBs
6552
! Unused connector
Connector No.
P800
Purpose
Remarks
Unused

Purpose
Status
LED1
DC+12 V input check
LED2
DC12 V input check
LED3
DC+5 V input check
LED4
DC+24 V input check
Test point No.
Purpose
TP1
Power supply for thermosensor
TP2
Unused
Impossible
TP3
Unused
Impossible
TP4
Ground
Possible
TP5
Unused
Impossible
TP6
Unused
Impossible
TP7
Possible
TP8
Possible
TP9
Possible
TP10
Ground
Possible
TP11
Ground
Possible
TP12
Ground
Possible
TP13
Ground
Possible
TP14
Ground
Possible
Switch No.
Bit No.
Setting
DS1
OFF
Remarks
Possible
Purpose
Unused
6. Electrical parts
LED No.
Remarks
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6552
4/4
6571
Laser control PCB (J390640)
G057502
! Function
Outputs and controls the data to AOM driver.
Controls the I/O on the laser I/O PCB and voltage for laser adjustment (serial communication)

IMPORTANT
QSS-3001: 90 to 190 mm
QSS-3011: 90 to 460 mm
2152
the PCB.
2151
! 1. Disposition
6351
None

None
! Unused connector
Connector No.
P289
Purpose
Remarks
Debug
6571
1/2
6. Electrical parts
NOTE
If the program of the printer control PCB is not activated, this PCB does not operate.
6571

Test point No.
Purpose
TP2
Ground
Possible
TP3
DC+3.3 V voltage measurement
Possible
TP4
Possible
Remarks
Possible
6. Electrical parts
TP1
6571
2/2
6572
Clock PCB (J390639)
G057503
! Function

IMPORTANT
QSS-3001: 90 to 190 mm
QSS-3011: 90 to 460 mm
2152
the PCB.
2151
! 1. Disposition
6351
None

None
! Unused connector
Connector No.
CN2
Purpose
Remarks
Unused
6572
1/2
6. Electrical parts
Generates the laser unit beating dots timing.
6572
6. Electrical parts
None
6572
2/2
6573
Laser I/O PCB (J390641)
G057504
! Function
Supplies power to the laser synchronous sensor, R laser driver, G laser driver, B laser driver, polygon mirror, R-AOM driver, GAOM driver, and B-AOM driver.
Adjustment of R laser temperature
Controls the power supply of laser due to the interlock circuit.

IMPORTANT
QSS-3001: 90 to 190 mm
QSS-3011: 90 to 460 mm
2152
the PCB.
2151
! 1. Disposition
6351
None

None
! Unused connector
None
6573
1/2
6. Electrical parts
Relays control signal from the laser control PCB to polygon mirror, fan, R, G and B laser drivers.
6573

Test point No.
TP1
Purpose
Blue synchronous signal
Remarks
Impossible
Green synchronous signal
Impossible
TP3
Red synchronous signal
Impossible
TP4
Red laser light intensity value

adjustment analog voltage
measurement
Possible
TP5
Analog +5 V voltage
measurement
Possible
TP6
Analog GND voltage

measurement
Possible
TP7
Blue laser light intensity value

measurement
Possible
TP8
Green laser light intensity value

measurement
Possible
TP9
Possible
TP10
Ground
Possible
TP11
Possible
TP12
Analog +12 V
Possible
TP13
AOM driver +12 V
Possible
TP14
R laser driver +5 V
Possible
Interlock circuit is used.
TP15
B and G laser drivers +5 V
Possible
Interlock circuit is used.
TP16
Analog -12 V
Possible
TP17
Peltier control analog voltage
Possible
TP18
Peltier voltage
Possible
TP19
Peltier control circuit power

supply
Possible
TP20
Thermosensor voltage
Possible
6. Electrical parts
TP2
Fuse No.
Rating
F40
T3.15 V/250 V

protection
Purpose
AOM driver (carrier section)
F41
T3.15 V/250 V

protection
AOM driver (temperature

control)
F42
T3.15 V/250 V

protection
Polygon mirror, DCDC

converter on the PCB
F43
T3.15 V/250 V

protection
Regulator on the PCB, DCDC

converter
F44
T3.15 V/250 V

protection
Fan
F45
T3.15 V/250 V

protection
Fan
6573
Remarks
2/2
6574
B laser driver and G laser driver (J390656)
B laser driver
G laser driver
G057414
! Function

IMPORTANT
QSS-3001: 90 to 190 mm
QSS-3011: 90 to 460 mm
2152
the PCB.
2151
! 1. Disposition
6351
The connector No. are not written on the connectors J/P816, J/P821 which are connected to the cable.
The colored seal are attached to the frame for installing the PCB and the connectors which are connected to the cable. A blue seal
is for the J/P816 and a green seal is for the J/P821. Check the color of the seal before connect the connectors.

None
! Unused connector
Connector No.
CN3
Purpose
Remarks
Unused
6574
1/1
6. Electrical parts
Controls B laser and G laser.
6575
Laser temperature connecting PCB (J390742)
G057672
NOTE
This PCB is not attached depending on the machine.
! Function
Switches ON/OFF of the laser unit heater with the printer control PCB control signal.
6. Electrical parts
Switches ON/OFF of the laser unit cooling fans 1, 2 and 3 with the printer control PCB control signal.
Relays the power supply from laser power supply 1 (PS4) to the laser unit heater.
Relays the power supply from laser power supply 1 (PS4) to the laser unit cooling fans 1, 2 and 3.

IMPORTANT
QSS-3001: 90 to 190 mm
QSS-3011: 90 to 460 mm
2152
the PCB.
2151
! 1. Disposition
6351
None
! Unused connector
None
6575
1/2
6575

Rating
F49
T3.15 A/125 V

protection
Purpose
Laser unit heater
Remarks
F50
T3.15 A/125 V

protection
Laser unit cooling fans 1, 2 or 3
6. Electrical parts
Fuse No.
6575
2/2
6581
CVP PCB (J306324)
G050917
! Function
Controls the correction value printer.

! 1. Disposition
6351
IMPORTANT
6. Electrical parts
Do not touch VR1 and VR2 which have been adjusted by the manufacturer before shipping.

None
! Unused connector
None

Test point No.
Purpose
TP1
Possible
TP2
Possible
TP3
Possible
TP4
Ground
Possible
TP5
Unused
Impossible
TP6
Unused
Impossible
Fuse No.
Rating
F25
T3.15 A/125 V
Purpose
Remarks
Remarks

protection
6581
1/1
6582
Dual paper magazine PCB (J306820)
G058391
! Function
Supplies power and relays the input signal to each sensor of paper supply unit.
Supplies power and relays the input signal to paper supply motors A and B.

! 1. Disposition
6351
6. Electrical parts

None

None
! Unused connector
None

Test point No.
Purpose
TP1
Possible
TP2
Ground
Possible
TP3
Possible
Fuse No.
Rating
Purpose
F20
T3.15 A/125 V
DC+5 V power supply

protection
F21
T6.3 A/125 V

protection
6582
Remarks
Remarks
1/1
6583
Hard disk drive (I090233)

The jumper is attached.
G059218
! Function
Hard disk drive for the compact archive system
Stores the image data temporarily to save the scanning operation when printing from negative.

6. Electrical parts
! 1. Disposition
6351

None
! Unused connector
None
6583
1/1
6601
Description of PCB (film carrier section)

Connecting PCB 1 (J390481)
G051011
! Function
Relays the AFC/scanner control PCB, the sensor PCB and the magnetic head PCB.

! 1. Disposition
6311
The flat cables are connected to connectors P1001 and P1002 on this PCB. Be sure to read the Precautions when
handling the flat cable, then start work properly. 6012

None
! Unused connector
None

None
6601
1/1
6. Electrical parts
IMPORTANT
6602
G051012
! Function
Changes the sensor of the film feed route when 135 and 240 lane are switched.

! 1. Disposition
6311
IMPORTANT
The flat cable is connected to connector P1010 on this PCB. Be sure to read the Precautions when handling the
flat cable, then start work properly. 6012

None
! Unused connector
None

Test point No.
Purpose
TP1
Possible
TP2
Possible
TP3
Possible
6602
Remarks
1/1
6. Electrical parts
6603
G051013
! Function
Relays the AFC/scanner control PCB and AFC driver PCB 2.

! 1. Disposition
6311

None
! Unused connector
None

None
6603
1/1
6. Electrical parts
IMPORTANT
6604
Driver PCB 1 (J390368)
G051014
! Function
Controls the light lock door motor and the film feed motor cooling fan.

! 1. Disposition
6311
None

6. Electrical parts
None
! Unused connector
None

Test point No.
Purpose
TP1
Possible
TP2
Possible
6604
Status
1/1
6605
Driver PCB 2 (J390519)
G051015
! Function
Controls the lane lock solenoid and spool key motor.
Inputs the limit switch of 135 or 240 lane.

! 1. Disposition
6311

None
! Unused connector
None

None
6605
1/1
6. Electrical parts
IMPORTANT
6606
Sensor PCB (J390560)
G051016
! Function
Amplifies the input signal of the film feed route and relays the other sensors.
Writes the magnetic data.

! 1. Disposition
6311
IMPORTANT

None
! Unused connector
None

None
6606
1/1
6. Electrical parts
6607
Power PCB (J390380)
G051017
! Function
Generates the power supply of DC+5 V and +12 V.
Controls the film ejection solenoid.
Controls the cleaner fan.

! 1. Disposition
6311
6. Electrical parts

None

None
! Unused connector
Connector No.
P1050
Purpose
Remarks
Unused

Test point No.
TP1
Purpose
Ground
Remarks
Possible
6607
1/1
6608
Magnetic head PCB (J390497)
G051018
! Function
Reads the magnetic data.

! 1. Disposition
6311
IMPORTANT

None
! Unused connector
None

None
6608
1/1
6. Electrical parts
6609
G052481
! Function
Relays the AFC/scanner control PCB and connecting PCB 2.

! 1. Disposition
6311

None
! Unused connector
None

None
6609
1/1
6. Electrical parts
IMPORTANT
6621
Connecting PCB (J390371)
G051020
! Function
Relays the AFC/scanner control PCB and 120 AFC sensor PCB.

! 1. Disposition
6312
None
6. Electrical parts

None
! Unused connector
None

Test point No.
TP1
Purpose
Ground
Remarks
Possible
6621
1/1
6622
G051021
! Function
Relays the input signals of the film feed route.

! 1. Disposition
6312
None
6. Electrical parts
None
! Unused connector
None

Test point No.
TP1
Purpose
Ground
Remarks
Possible
6622
1/1
6631
Connecting PCB (J390372)
G052692
! Function
Relays the sensor signals of the 110 AFC.

! 1. Disposition
6313
6. Electrical parts

None

None
! Unused connector
None

Test point No.
TP1
Purpose
Ground
Remarks
Possible
6631
1/1
6632
G056293
! Function
Detects the sensor of the 110 AFC.

! 1. Disposition
6313
6. Electrical parts
None

None
! Unused connector
Connector No.
P1084
Purpose
Remarks
Unused

Test point No.
TP1
Purpose
Ground
Remarks
Possible
6632
1/1
6636
MMC connecting PCB (J390483)
G052687
! Function
Detects the MMC sensor.
Controls (other than output checks) and drives of the AF motor.
6. Electrical parts

! 1. Disposition
6314
None

None
! Unused connector
None

Test point No.
Purpose
TP1
Possible
TP2
Possible
TP3
Possible
TP4
Ground
Possible
6636
Remarks
1/1
6637
MMC sensor PCB (J390389)
G052689
! Function
Relays the signal to the MMC or AMC sensor.
Relays the output signal to the MMC or AMC motor.

! 1. Disposition
135/240 MMC
6314
135/240 AMC
6316
6. Electrical parts

None

None
! Unused connector
None

Test point No.
TP1
Purpose
Ground
Remarks
Possible
6637
1/1
6638
135 AFC connecting PCB (J390708)
G057667
! Function
Controls the sensors (emission side) of the film feed route and relays the input signal.

! 1. Disposition
6315
IMPORTANT

None
! Unused connector
Connector No.
P1287
Purpose
Remarks
Unused

Test point No.
Purpose
TP1
Possible
TP2
Possible
TP3
Possible
TP4
Ground
Possible
6638
Remarks
1/1
6. Electrical parts
6639
135 AFC sensor PCB (J390709)
G057666
! Function
Amplifies the input signals of the film feed route.

! 1. Disposition
6315

None
! Unused connector
None

Test point No.
Purpose
TP1
Possible
TP2
Ground
Possible
6639
Remarks
1/1
6. Electrical parts
IMPORTANT
6640
AMC connecting PCB (J390700)
TP3
P1301 P1305
P1299 P1304
P1298 P1297 P1296

P1292
TP4
P1303
P1300
P1302
TP2
P1293 P1294 P1291
TP1
P1295
G060696
! Function
1. Relays the signal to the AMC sensor.
2. Relays the output signals to the AMC motor.

! 1. Disposition
6. Electrical parts
6316
None

None
! Unused connector
None

Test point No.
Purpose
TP1
Possible
TP2
Possible
TP3
Possible
TP4
Ground
Possible
6640
Remarks
1/1
6701
Description of PCB (processor section)
Processor I/O PCB (J306946) [N]

For the SM specification, refer to Processor I/O PCB (J306946) [SM].
! Details of PCBs
G058392
6. Electrical parts
! Function
Supplies the power and relays the input signal to each sensor of the processor section
Drives each fan, motor and pump on processor section and relays the output signal.

! 1. Disposition
6381
None

None
! Unused connector
Connector No.
Purpose
Remarks
P680
Option
P683
Effluent concentrator
Option
P684
Cooling water plumbing unit solenoid valve
Option
P702
Unused
P703
Cooling water unit chiller relay
P718
Unused
P711
Unused
Option
6701
1/4
6701

Purpose
Status
LED1
SSR7 operation check
ON during operation
LED2
ON during operation
LED3
ON during operation
LED5
Relay X8 operation check
ON during operation
LED6
Unused
LED7
Relays X9 and 10 operation check
ON during operation
LED8
ON during operation
LED9
DC+5 V input check
LED10
DC+24 V input check
LED11
CD replenishment solution level sensor LSE1

detection check
ON when replenishment solution is detected.
LED12
BF replenishment solution level sensor LSE2

detection check
LED13
STB replenishment solution level sensor LSE3

detection check
LED14
Refilling water tank level sensor LSE5 detection

check
ON when water is detected.
LED15
ON during operation
Test point No.

TP1
TP2
Purpose
Remarks
Possible
Possible
TPG1
Ground (DC+5 V)
Possible
TPG2
Ground (DC+24 V)
Possible
Fuse No.
Rating
F27
T6.3 A/125 V

protection
Purpose
F28
T6.3 A/125 V

protection
F29
T6.3 A/125 V

protection
F30
T6.3 A/125 V

protection
F31
T3.15 A/125 V
AC+24 V power supply

protection
6701
6. Electrical parts
LED No.
Remarks
2/4
6701
Processor I/O PCB (J306946) [SM]

! Details of PCBs
G058392
6. Electrical parts
! Function
Supplies the power and relays the input signal to each sensor of the processor section
Drives each fan, motor and pump on processor section and relays the output signal.

! 1. Disposition
6381
None

None
! Unused connector
Connector No.
Purpose
Remarks
P680
Option
P683
Effluent concentrator
Option
P684
Cooling water plumbing unit solenoid valve
Option
P687-690
P694-695
Unused
Unused
P703
Cooling water unit chiller relay
P704
Unused
P712
Unused
P718
Unused
Option
6701
3/4
6701

Purpose
LED1
LED2
Unused
LED3
Unused
Status
ON during operation
LED5
ON during operation
LED6
CD circulation amount control check
ON during CD circulation amount increases
LED7
ON during operation
LED8
ON during operation
LED9
DC+5 V input check
LED10
DC+24 V input check
LED11
Unused
LED12
Unused
LED13
Unused
LED14
Refilling water tank level sensor LSE5 detection

check
ON when water is detected.
LED15
ON during operation
Test point No.

TP1
TP2
Purpose
Remarks
Possible
Possible
TPG1
Ground (DC+5 V)
Possible
TPG2
Ground (DC+24 V)
Possible
Fuse No.
Rating
F27
T6.3 A/125 V

protection
Purpose
F28
T6.3 A/125 V

protection
F29
T6.3 A/125 V

protection
F30
T6.3 A/125 V

protection
F31
T3.15 A/125 V
AC+24 V power supply

protection
6701
Remarks
6. Electrical parts
LED No.
4/4
6702
Main relay PCB (J390644)
6. Electrical parts
G057403
! Function
Supplies the power (AC200-240 V) to each power supply, PCB, unit.
Supplies the power (DC24 V, 36 V) to the scanner section
Protects the appliance from surges in the power supply.
Changes the power specification.
Even if the circuit breaker of the machine is turned off, voltage is applied to terminal TA2 on the main relay PCB. If the
main relay PCB is to be replaced, be sure to turn off the main circuit breaker of the main power supply.
! 1. Disposition
6381
Insert connector J668 to the appropriate power specification's P668.
Wire the terminal strip TA2 according to the voltage specification of the main body.

None
! Unused connector
None
6702
1/2
6702

Fuse No.
Rating
FL1
T5 A/250 V
Protection circuit for power

surges
Cannot be replaced.
FL2
T5 A/250 V

surges
Cannot be replaced.
FL3
T5 A/250 V

surges
Cannot be replaced.
FL4
T5 A/250 V

surges
Cannot be replaced.
F22
T3.15 A/125 V
F23
T3.15 A/125 V
GT1
Purpose
Remarks
Status
Protects the appliance from surges in the power

supply.
ON when the surges voltage is applied.
6. Electrical parts
GT No.
Purpose
6702
2/2
6703
6. Electrical parts
Processor relay PCB (J306816)
G058393
! Function
Supplies power to the processor I/O PCB and each unit
Dryer heater, processing solution heater, dryer fan, and drive motor
Even if the circuit breaker of the machine is turned off, voltage is applied to terminal TA3 on power PCB1. If power
PCB 1 is to be replaced, be sure to turn off the main circuit breaker of the main power supply.
! 1. Disposition
6381
None
6703
1/2
6703

Replace the connector so that the voltage described on the connector lower part matches the desired one.
! Unused connector
None

Purpose
Status
LED1
Relay X15 operation check (printer main relay)
ON during operation
LED2
Relays X3, X4 and X5 operation check (dryer

heater)
ON during operation
LED4
Relay X6 operation check (drive motor)
ON during operation
LED5
SSR4 and 11 operation check
ON during operation
LED6
ON during operation
LED7
DC+24 V input check
LED8
Relay X15 operation check (printer main relay)
ON during operation
LED9
ON during operation
LED10
ON during operation
LED11
SSR1 operation check (air pump)
ON during operation
Fuse No.
Rating
F1
T5 A/250 V
AC 200-240 V power supply

protection
F2
T5 A/250 V

protection
F3
T6.3 A/250 V

protection
F4
T6.3 A/250 V

protection
F5
T10 A/250 V

protection
F6
T10 A/250 V

protection
F7
T10 A/250 V

protection
F8
T10 A/250 V

protection
F9
T5 A/250 V

protection
F10
T5 A/250 V

protection
F12
T5 A/250 V

protection
Purpose
6703
Remarks
6. Electrical parts
LED No.
2/2
6741
SM I/O PCB (J390534) [SM]
G058394
! Function
Supplies the power and relays the input signal to each sensor of the SM replenishment section.
Drives each replenisher/water supply pump of the SM replenishment section and relays the output signal.

6. Electrical parts
! 1. Disposition
6381
None

Calibrate the replenishment solution sensors.
2783
! Unused connector
None

LED No.
Purpose
Status
LED1
CD-A replenisher pump
ON during operation
LED2
CD-B replenisher pump
ON during operation
LED3
CD-C replenisher pump
ON during operation
LED4
CD-W water supply pump
ON during operation
LED5
BF-A replenisher pump
ON during operation
LED6
BF-B replenisher pump
ON during operation
LED7
ON during operation
LED8
ON during operation
LED9
DC+5 V input check
ON when power is supplied
LED10
CDA replenishment solution presence check
ON when there is replenishment solution
LED11
CDB replenishment solution presence check
6741
1/2
6741
LED No.
Purpose
Status
LED12
CDC replenishment solution presence check
LED13
STB replenishment solution presence check
LED14
BFA replenishment solution presence check
LED15
BFB replenishment solution presence check
Test point No.
Purpose
TP1
Possible
TPG
Ground
Possible
VR No.
Purpose
Remarks
Remarks
VR1
CD-A replenishment solution sensor
VR2
CD-B replenishment solution sensor
VR3
CD-C replenishment solution sensor
VR4
STB replenishment solution sensor sensitivity

adjustment
BF-A replenishment solution sensor
VR6
BF-B replenishment solution sensor
6. Electrical parts
VR5
Clockwise: The replenishment solution sensor

becomes more sensitive.
6741
2/2
6801
Description of power supply

Power supply
Power Supply

Lamp Power Supply
6. Electrical parts
Image processing PCB power supply

Image processing PCB power supply 2
G057415
! Function
Symbo
l
Name
Part No.
Function
PS1
Power Supply
I038256
Supplies the power to

each power PCB, drive
motor, and dryer fan.
PS2
Multi Power Supply

(printer)
I038160
Supplies the power to the DC+5 V, DC?12 V

processor control PCB,
printer control PCB,
printerI/O PCB 1, Printer
I/O PCB 2, dual paper
magazine PCB, and
processor I/O PCB.
6801
DC+24 V, DC+36 V
Cooling fan
FAN 11: Cooling fan (power
supply)
FAN 8, 9: Printer power supply
cooling fan 1, 2
1/4
Symbo
l
6801
Name
Part No.

Function
Cooling fan
PS3
I038256

each power PCB, drive
motor, and dryer fan.
DC+24 V, DC+36 V

cooling fan 1, 2
PS4
I038256

each PCB, cooling fan
and suction fan.
DC+24 V, DC+36 V

cooling fan 1, 2
PS6
I038338

laser I/O PCB.
DC+12 V
PS7
I038339

laser I/O PCB.
DC-5 V
PS8
I038293
Supplies the power to the DC+5 V

laser control PCB, laser
I/O PCB, D-ICE PCB
(option), image
processing PCB, and hard
disk drives 1, 2, and 3.
PS12

power supply
I038312
Supplies power to the

PU.
PS13

power supply 2
I038338

hard disk drives 1, 2 and
3 (option).
PS21
Lamp Power Supply
I038325

scanner lamp.
FAN 30, 32: Scanner unit

power supply cooling fan 1, 2
PS22
Multi Power Supply

(scanner)
I038324
Supplies the power to the DC+5 V, DC+15 V

AFC/scanner control
PCB.
FAN 30, 32: Scanner unit

power supply cooling fan 1, 2
6. Electrical parts
DC+3.3 V
IMPORTANT
Each power supply is equipped with the overvoltage and overheat protection functions. If these functions are
operated, turn OFF the circuit breaker of the machine and wait one moment, then turn ON again. If the overheat
protection function is operated, check if each cooling fan is in operation.

! 1. Disposition
6351

Power supply
Power Supply
Precautions for replacement

None
Multi Power Supply (printer) None

None
None
None
None
None
Image processing PCB power Adjust VR1 so that DC+3.3 V is output between TP14 and TP6 to TP12 (GND) on the image
supply
processing PCB.
Image processing PCB power None
supply 2
Lamp Power Supply
None
Multi Power Supply

(scanner)

If you connect the connector when the power is supplied, there is a case that the machine is
damaged.
6801
2/4
6801
IMPORTANT
Do not touch each potentiometer which has been adjusted by the manufacturer before shipping.

None
! Unused connector
Connector No.
Power Supply
CN63
Unused
CN64
Unused
CN4
Unused
None
CN6
Unused
CN63
Unused
CN64
Unused
None
None
None

supply
None

supply 2
None
Lamp Power Supply
None
Multi Power Supply

(scanner)
CN4
Purpose
Remarks
Purpose
Remarks
Unused
6. Electrical parts
Power supply

LED
Power supply
Power Supply
LED No.
D64
DC+36 V output check
ON when power is output
D65
None
D64
D65
D64
D65
None
None
None

supply
None

supply 2
None
Lamp Power Supply
D14
Multi Power Supply

(scanner)
None
6801
3/4
6801
Fuse
Fuse No.
Rating
Purpose
Power Supply
F1
T6.3 A/250 V
AC 200 V power
supply protection
F1
T6.0 A/250 V
AC 200 V power
supply protection
F1
T6.3 A/250 V
AC 200 V power
supply protection
F1
T6.3 A/250 V
AC 200 V power
supply protection
F1
T3.15 A/250 V
AC 200 V power
supply protection
F1
T3.15 A/250 V
AC 200 V power
supply protection
F1
T6.3 A/250 V
AC 200 V power
supply protection

supply
F1
T3.15 A/250 V
AC 200 V power
supply protection

supply 2
F1
T3.15 A/250 V
AC 200 V power
supply protection
Lamp Power Supply
F1
T3.15 A/250 V
AC 200 V power
supply protection
Multi Power Supply

(scanner)
F1
T3 A/3.15 A/250 V
AC 200 V power
supply protection
Remarks
6. Electrical parts
Power supply
6801
4/4
6851
Description of PM driver
G057416
! Function
Symbol
Name
Part No.
Function
PMD1
PM driver (paper advance

motor 1)
I043087
Controls the paper

advance motor 1.
PMD2
PM driver (exposure
advance motor)
J341040
Controls the exposure None

advance motor.
All connectors are

used.
PMD3
PM driver (paper supply

motor A)
I043087
Controls paper supply Do not touch each

motor A.
potentiometer which has
been adjusted by the
manufacturer before
shipping.
Sleever (option),
unused connectors
none
PMD4
PM driver (paper supply

motor 2)
I043087
Controls paper supply Do not touch each

motor B.
manufacturer before
shipping.
Sleever (option),
unused connectors
none
PMD5
PM driver (film feed

motor)
I043111
Controls the film feed None

motor.
All connectors are

used.
6851
Adjustments and
precautions for PCB
replacement
Do not touch each
manufacturer before
shipping.
Remarks
All connectors are

used.
1/1
6. Electrical parts
6861
AOM driver (I124001-00)
B-AOM driver
G-AOM driver
R-AOM driver
G057450
! Function
Formats the image data to exposure data.
Controls AOM (optoacoustic modulation) element.
the PCB.
2151
! 1. Disposition
6351
The flat cable is connected to connector P4 on this PCB.
Affix again the seal of connector No. or write connector No. with a felt-tip pen, and so on.

Carry out the initial setup.
! Unused connector
None

None
6861
1/1
6. Electrical parts
IMPORTANT
QSS-3001: 90 to 190 mm
QSS-3011: 90 to 460 mm
2152
6901
Replacing the computer

The work after replacing the computer is as follows.

2031

2152
3. Attach the new personal computer control unit.

4. When the optional drive and PCB are set, remove them and attach to the new personal computer control
unit.
NOTE
The pressure roller operation is referred to the following.
5. Turn on the circuit breaker to start the computer.

NOTE
There may be a case where Found New Hardware Wizard starts. Click Cancel.
6. Check the SCSI cable.

3861
NOTE
This is unnecessary for QSS-3001 that the SCSI card (option) is not attached and for QSS-3011.
7. Install the Zip driver.

3873
6. Electrical parts
NOTE
Skip this step when the Zip drive (optional) is not installed.

3870
NOTE
This is unnecessary for QSS-3001 that the DVD-RAM (option) is not attached and for QSS-3011.

3872
10. Assign the drive.

3871
11. Install the QSS software.

3850
12. Install the profile data.

3860
13. Read the backup data.

3169
NOTE
Install the optional software, logo data (special order) or Adobe Photoshop if necessary.
6901
1/1
Setup for service personnel

Setup during installation flow ................................................................................................. 7001
Setup during installation (Works to do until completing the temperature adjustment) .......................................7001
Setup during installation (Works after completing the temperature adjustment) ................................................7002
Other works after installation (Language setting except English and Japanese) ................................................7004
Check the processor setting [N] .........................................................................................................................7005
Check the processor setting [SM] ......................................................................................................................7005
7 Setup for service personnel
7.
7000
7000
1/1
7001
Setup during installation flow

Setup during installation (Works to do until completing the temperature

adjustment)
! Procedures
1. Prepare tools for the setup.

Prepare the following tools before setup during installation.
Service personnel floppy disk Type (F000472-01)
For 135 AFC (Z019786-01)
For 240 AFC (Z019039-01)
For 120 AFC (Z019787-01)
For 110 AFC (Z019041-01)
For MMC and AMC (Z019668-01)
Floppy disk for data backup
NOTE
The service personnel floppy disk Type B and the scanner adjustment chart are the service tools. Refer to Service
8031
2. Set the paper magazine code of paper magazine.

Set the paper magazine code to the paper width and paper surface to be used.
3. Loading paper into the paper magazine

Load the paper to be used for the initial setup into the paper magazine.
4. Clean the optical parts.

Clean the optical parts below.
" Auto film carrier
Clean each brush, peripheral cooling fan, each sensor, each roller, and film path surface.
" Scanner lamp light source unit
Clean the scanner lamp and heat absorbing filter.
" Cleaning the laser unit
Clean the laser dustproof glass and focal plane regulating guide tube face.
" Scanner
Clean the dust prevention glass.
For the cleaning procedures, refer to Maintenance Manual.
5. Enter the service personnel password.

Insert the service personnel floppy disk into the floppy disk drive and enter the service personnel password on the Menu
display.
(1) Press the

key to select Menu.
(2) Insert the service personnel floppy disk into the floppy disk drive on the Menu display.
(3) Press the
key.
(4) Enter the password (2260).
When it is in service mode, Service Mode is displayed on each display.
7001
1/6
7001
6. Upgrade the system program.

Extension Maintenance Software Upgrade Software Upgrade (CD-ROM)
7. Read the initial data.

Be sure to use the initial floppy disk provided with the machine and read the data in Reading Data (Floppy Disk -> CPU).
NOTE
Read the data from two initial floppy disks.
Extension Maintenance Reading and Writing Data Service Data Reading Data (Floppy Disk -> CPU) All Data
8. Register and check the machine specification.

Check that registration and settings of various items are correctly carried out.
Extension Maintenance Machine Specification
Check and setting contents

Entering the installation date
Program timer setting and time check
Click F: Functions, then click Program Timer Setting.
Check the process specification.
If the specification differs from the actual machine specification, change to the appropriate specification.
9. Check the registration of the options.

Check if the equipped options are registered.

Extension Option Registration
10. Check the processor setting.

7005
7001
2/6
7001
11. Check the position of the scanner filter.

(1) Check that the value on the scanner filter stop position label and that of the Scanner Filter Position Adjustment
display are same.
If the values are different, enter the value of the label to each item.
Label
G057662
(2) Check the position of the scanner filter.

3226
12. Adjust the sensor of the film carrier.

Carry out the adjustment of the film carrier.
The adjustment points varies depending on which film carrier is attached.
135 AFC
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment
DX Sensor Standard
Adjustment
DX Sensor Standard
Adjustment
3151
3155
120 AFC
110 AFC
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment
Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment
3152
135/240 MMC
Emission Lamp and
Detection Sensor
Position Correction
Check
3153
3154
135/240 AMC
Emission Lamp and
Detection Sensor
Position Correction
Check
3156

Extension Maintenance Various Adjustment Film Carrier Unit Adjustment
13. Check the swing and tilt and light axis of scanner unit.
Check if Swing and Tilt Adjustment and Light Axis Adjustment are in positions.
IMPORTANT
When there are not 135/240 AFC and 135 AFC, check with 120 AFC and 110 AFC.
(1) Check Swing and Tilt Adjustment.

Set the scanner adjustment chart to the 135/240 AFC (135 lane) or 135 AFC and carry out Swing and Tilt
Adjustment Check.
When the displayed values are less than the following values, it is in position. If the displayed values are more than the
values in the table, Swing and Tilt Adjustment is required.
IMPORTANT
When the value of the 135/240 AFC (135 lane) or 135 AFC is less than the following value, checkings
the Swing and Tilt Adjustment of the 120 AFC and 110 AFC are not required.
7001
3/6
135/240 AFC
7001
Priority*1

Value when checking the swing and tilt
adjustment
135/240 AFC (135 lane)*2
9/32 step
135 AFC
2
120 AFC
9/32 step
110 AFC
8/32 step
*1. Check the film carriers set when carrying out Swing and Tilt Adjustment of the scanner unit, according to the above priority.
*2. For the 135/240 AFC, be sure to use the 135 lane to check Swing and Tilt Adjustment.

Extension Maintenance Various Adjustment Scanner Unit Adjustment Swing and Tilt Adjustment
(2) Check Light Axis Adjustment.

Set the scanner adjustment chart to the 135/240 AFC (135 lane) or 135 AFC and check the display of Number of
Pixels Exceeding the Threshold.
Check the difference between G value of 0-2500 and G value of 2501-5000.
When the difference of the displayed values is less than the following values, it is in position. If the difference of the
displayed values is more than the values in the table, Light Axis Adjustment is required.
IMPORTANT
When the value of the 135/240 AFC (135 lane) or 135 AFC is less than the following value, checkings
the Light Axis Adjustment of the 120 AFC and 110 AFC are not required.
Priority*1
Difference of G values when adjusting the

light axis
37 pixels
135/240 AFC (135 lane)*2
135 AFC
2
120 AFC
28 pixels
110 AFC
28 pixels
*1. Check the film carriers set when carrying out Light Axis Adjustment of the scanner unit, according to the above priority.
*2. For the 135/240 AFC, be sure to use the 135 lane to check Light Axis Adjustment.

Extension Maintenance Various Adjustment Scanner Unit Adjustment Light Axis Adjustment
14. Light Source Registration

Register the light source.
Proceed the work according to the instructions on the Light Source Registration display.
Extension Maintenance Various Adjustment Scanner Unit Adjustment Light Source Registration
15. Scanner focus adjustment

Carry out the focus adjustment of all the film carriers and mount carriers to be used.
Carry out Focus Auto Adjustment for each film carrier and mount carrier, using the scanner adjustment chart prepared.
IMPORTANT
Carry out the focus adjustment of all the film carriers and mount carriers that the user uses.
For the film carrier and mount carrier, carry out the focus adjustment for the magnification rate.
Extension Maintenance Various Adjustment Scanner Unit Adjustment Focus Adjustment
7001
4/6
7001
16. Check the reverse unit lower stop position.

Check the exposure advance unit guide and reverse unit stop position error on the Reverse Unit Correction display. If there
is a difference, make corrections.
Extension Maintenance Various Adjustment Printer Mechanical Adjustment Reverse Unit Correction F:
Functions Reverse Unit (Right) Test Operation and Reverse Unit (Left) Test Operation or Reverse Unit (Right and Left)
Test Operation
17. Check the reverse unit upper stop position.

Check the reverse unit and processor insertion unit stop position error on the Reverse Unit Correction display. If there is a
difference, make corrections.
Functions Reverse Unit (Right) Test Operation and Reverse Unit (Left) Test Operation or Reverse Unit (Right and Left)
Test Operation
18. Check the reverse unit paper stop position.

Check that the distance between the guide end of exposure advance unit and the paper rear end is from 0 to 1 mm on the
Reverse Unit Correction display. If there is a difference, make corrections.
Functions Test Operation for the Paper Stop Position Correction
On the Paper Advance Length Correction display, advance the test paper and measure the paper length. When there is the
difference between the measured value and the input value to the machine, input the measured value.
Extension Maintenance Various Adjustment Printer Mechanical Adjustment Paper Advance Length Correction
F: Functions Test Paper Advance (Paper Magazine A)orTest Paper Advance (Paper Magazine B)
For details, refer to 3202.
20. Brightness adjustment

Make setting for monitor brightness according to the value displayed on the monitor.
For the adjustment procedure, refer to Operator's Manual provided with the display monitor.
Extension Setup Monitor Setup Brightness Adjustment
21. Calibrate the monitor profile.

Calibrate the monitor profile.
Extension Setup Monitor Setup Monitor Profile Calibration
7001
5/6
19. Check the paper advance length
7001
S1032-00-SM00
(1) Remove the colorimeter and click YES:> Next.
S1032-01-SM00
(2) Attach the hood to the colorimeter and set it to the display monitor.
Set the colorimeter with the hood to the display monitor according to the directions.
Display monitor
Place the hood of the

colorimeter on the circle of
the display monitor.
Hood of the colorimeter
Colorimeter
G050221
(3) Click YES: Colorimetry.

(4) Click YES: Save profile.
Remove the colorimeter from the display monitor and store the profile.
(5) Click YES: OK.

The work to do until the processing solution temperature is adjusted is now completed. After the temperature adjustment of the
processing solution has been completed, proceed to the next item 7002 Works after completing the temperature adjustment.
7001
6/6
7002
Setup during installation (Works after completing the temperature

adjustment)
! Procedures
1. Control strip processing

Process the control strip and check the condition of the processing solution.
Extension Maintenance Process Control Strip
For the processing procedure, refer to Operator's manual - Basic Operations - Control strip processing.
2. Check the Arm Unit Zigzagging Correction.

Make test prints via the Arm Unit Zigzagging Correction display and correct so that the zigzagging amount (A-B) for all
the two prints are within 0.3 mm.
IMPORTANT
Extension Maintenance Various Adjustment Printer Mechanical Adjustment Arm Unit Zigzagging Correction
Line A
Line B
G057657
3. Check the Exposure Image Correction, Exposure Start Timing Correction, Exposure Zoom Rate
Correction.
Carry out Test Print (Confirmation) in Functions of Exposure Image Correction, and check if it is normal for the
following three points. If it is out of the standard, adjust it.
NOTE
7002
1/6
7002

Extension Maintenance Various Adjustment Printer Mechanical Adjustment
Exposure Start Timing

Correction: 25.4 mm
Exposure Image Correction: 254 mm
Exposure Zoom Rate Correction:

G057648
(1) Check the Exposure Image Correction.

Confirm that the Exposure Image Correction value is 254 mm.
(2) Check the Exposure Start Timing Correction

(3) Check the Exposure Zoom Rate Correction

Check that the image size is specified one against the paper width direction.
IMPORTANT
Measure the dimension of the most outside line of the test print.
Check that it is 190 mm when 203 mm width test print is used.
4. Check the Exposure Center Correction, Exposure Position Adjustment and Exposure Zoom Rate Fine
Correction.
Carry out Test Print (Confirmation) in Functions of Exposure Position Adjustment, and check if it is normal for the
following three points. If it is out of the standard, adjust it.
NOTE
Extension Maintenance Various Adjustment Printer Mechanical Adjustment
7002
2/6
Confirm that the Exposure Start Timing Correction value is 25.4 mm.
7002
For checking exposure center correction master A/B Center line

A
For checking the main scanning

images
For checking the sub scanning

images
For checking the exposure

zoom rate fine adjustment
G057541
(1) Check the Exposure Center Correction (Master) A/B.

Check that the measured length (A) is half of the paper width.
IMPORTANT
Check both magazines A and B.
(2) Check the Exposure Position Adjustment.
Check that each line makes a straight line in the marks of exposure position adjustment 1 to 4 in the test prints.
(3) Check the Exposure Zoom Rate Fine Adjustment.

Check that the lines (cyan, magenta and yellow) make a straight line in the most outside chart for checking the
exposure zoom rate fine adjustment in the test prints.
5. Check the Paper Pressure Operation Correction

Adjust the banding for each paper type on the Paper Pressure Operation Correction display.
Extension Maintenance Various Adjustment Printer Mechanical Adjustment Paper Pressure Operation
Correction
7002
3/6
7002
+2
Bandings
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Input value
Test prints with no banding
G057645
6. Paper specification registration

Register the paper type used in the Initial Setup.
NOTE
When two or three paper types are to be used, register for each paper on the Paper Specification Registration/Setup
display.
Extension Setup Laser Setup Paper Specification Registration/Setup
For the operation procedures, refer to 3062.
7. Initial Setup
Follow the instructions on the Initial Setup display.When two or three paper types are to be used, carry out Paper
Specification Registration/Setup for each paper on the Paper Specification Registration/Setup display.
IMPORTANT
Initial Data Reading via Initial Setup is not used.
(No data to be read is in the machine.)
Do not use two initial floppy disks came with the machine in this mode.
Extension Setup Initial Setup
8. Paper Magazine Registration Setup

Use the paper type which the initial setup was carried out, and register the magazine for each paper width and carry out
Magazine Registration/Setup.
NOTE
When two or three paper types are to be used, register the magazine for each paper width and carry out Magazine
Registration/Setup.
Extension Setup Laser Setup Magazine Registration/Setup
9. Check the print color and density.

(1) Check the prints from media, negative and positive.
Make prints with the print channel 01CH.
7002
4/6
7002
Depending on type of the negative, the mode for setting the correction value is different. Refer to the following table,
set with the proper mode. When the same corrections are required for all prints of media, negative and positive, enter
the correction value in 00 CH.
IMPORTANT
When printing from a positive film, remove the check of Positive Film Auto Correction in the
Operator Selections and Correction tabs. The adjustment is carried out without the auto correction.
Negative
Input mode
135 negative
Master Data of Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)
135 positive
Master Data of Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)
240 negative
240 of Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)
240 positive
240 of Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)
120 negative
Each negative size of Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)
120 positive
Each negative size of Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)
For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations.

Extension Setup Scanner Setup Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)/Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)
NOTE
When the DSA correction is set to the all negatives or positives, set in DSA of Master Data.
When the DSA correction is set to the all media, set in DSA of Master Data.
10. Monitor gamma adjustment

Adjust so that the color and density of the image on the display monitor matches that of the actual print.
For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations - Adjusting the color of the image
on the display monitor.
Extension Setup Monitor Setup Gamma Adjustment
11. Check the setting of print channels.

If necessary, change the print channel setting.
Extension Setup Print Channel
12. Format a floppy disk for backup data.

Format a prepared floppy disk for backup data on the Format Floppy Disk display.
This floppy disk is used to save the internal data of the machine after the setup has been completed during installation.
Extension Maintenance Reading and Writing Data All Data Format Floppy Disk
13. Save the backup data.

Save backup data to the floppy disk formatted in Step 12.
Works are complete.
7002
5/6
7002
14. Install the CD Viewer Utility.

(1) Insert the QSS software CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive, or into the CD-R/RW drive.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the recording surface (opposite to the label side) of the disk, nor put a metal item, finger
print, scratch, dust or moisture to it. The recorded data may be damaged (erased).
(2) Double-click My Computer on the display.

(3) Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.
(4) Double-click the CD Viewer Utility folder.
(5) Double-click the Setup.exe file.
The Installshield Wizard display for CD Viewer Utility appears.
(6) Click Next.

(7) Set the program folder as CD Viewer Utility, the existing folder as Accessories, then click Next.
(8) Click Finish.
7002
6/6
7004
Other works after installation (Language setting except English and

Japanese)
The English messages are displayed on the monitor on the machines which are to be shipped outside Japan.
It is necessary to set the Regional Options and install the translated message data so that the messages in the local language are displayed
and text in the language can be input.
Change the setting according to the following procedure.
IMPORTANT
Prepare the following data in advance.
Translated message file (Save the data to a floppy disk.)
Translated HELP files (Save the data to a CD-R or a CD-R/W.)
! To bring up the Windows screen

Bring up the Windows screen when setting items relating to the Windows system.
Switch the screen according to the following procedure.
1. Bring up the Close Down Checks display.

Click F via Order Display. Menu Extension Close Down Checks
Close Down Checks display
S0009-00-UM02
2. Click F: Functions.
F: Functions display
S0009-00-UM15
3. Click Quit The Application.

The confirmation window to end the application appears.
4. Click YES: Execute.

The confirmation window reappears.
5. Click YES: Execute.

The Windows screen appears.
! To install the message file

Build the translated message file in the system. Carry out the operation according to the following procedure.
1. Insert the floppy disk in which the message data is saved into the floppy disk drive.
2. Double-click Setup.exe in the floppy disk.
7004
1/9
The F: Functions display appears.
7004
3. Click Next.
Example: InstallShield Wizard
G050657
4. Click Finish.
G050660
Installation of the message file is complete.

Next, install the HELP file.
! To install the HELP file

Build the translated Help file in the system. Carry out the operation according to the following procedure.
1. Insert the CD-R or the CD-R/W in which stores the HELP file into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Double-click the Setup.exe file in the CD-R or the CD-R/W.
7004
2/9
7004
3. Click Next.
G056142
4. Click Finish.
G056143
Installation of the HELP file is complete.

Next, make setting for the language.
! Setting the language
1. Select Start Settings
Control Panel.
Example: Windows screen
G050628
7004
3/9
7004
2. Double-click Regional Options.

Select the items in the following order.
Example: Control Panel display
G050683
The Regional Options display appears.
3. Click the General tab (index) and set the language.

Select the appropriate language and check the
box in the Language settings for the system list.
Example: Regional Options display
G050662
7004
4/9
7004
4. Select the region and click Apply.

G050612
IMPORTANT
For some languages, the font has not already been installed. In this case, click Apply to bring up the display
below. Then, install the required font.
If the display below is not brought up, go to Step 5.
G050664
The files are copied. After the copy, you are prompted to restart the system.
(2) Click No.

G050667
7004
5/9
(1) Insert the Windows 2000 Professional CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive and click OK.
7004
5. Click the Input Locales tab (index) and set the dictionary function.
(1) Select the language as default use.
G050663
(2) Click Set as Default.

The language is registered as the default.
G050663
G050663
7. Click OK.
G050663
7004
6/9
6. Click Apply.
7004
8. Restart the machine.

(1) Click Start and click Shut Down.
Example: Windows screen
G050604
(2) Click
(arrow button), and click Shut Down.
Example: Shut down Windows screen
G050605
(3) Click OK.

Windows is quitted and monitor display disappears.
(4) Confirm that the power lamp goes off.
Power lamp
G050220
7004
7/9
7004
(5) Turn off the circuit breaker.
Circuit breaker
G050190
(6) Turn on the circuit breaker in 10 seconds after it was turned off.
Circuit breaker
9. Select the appropriate language on the Machine Specification display.

Select the appropriate language and set it.
(1) Bring up the Machine Specification display.

Menu: 2260 Extension Maintenance Machine Specification
(2) Click
(arrow button) and select Language.
Example: The Machine Specification display
S3066-00-SM00
7004
8/9
G056065
The power supply of this machine becomes ON. Wait a few minutes until the Start Up Checks display appears.
The message Order Display appears after the works in the Start Up Checks mode is finished.
According to the power off time, it is necessary to adjust the temperature of this machine.
The time to be required for the adjustment will be displayed in the upper area of the Order Display. Wait a moment.
Printing operation from the storage media can be done while time to adjust is being displayed.
It takes about 20 minuets to stabilize the light source lamp even though time to adjust is not displayed.
This completes the operation.
(3) Click
7004
(arrow button) and select HELP Language.
Example: The Machine Specification display
S3066-00-SM00
(4) Click YES: Enter.
7004
9/9
7005
Check the processor setting [N]

For the SM specification, refer to Check the processor setting [SM].
! The work to do until the processing solution temperature adjustment is completed.
1. Check the measured value of the pump output amount.

Measure the pump output amount and check if the measured value is the same as the registered value.
If the measured value is different from the setting value, register the measured value.
For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations - Measuring the pump output
amount.
Extension Processor Settings Processor Standard Setting Pump Output Amount Setting
7005
1/2
7005
Check the processor setting [SM]

! The work to do until the processing solution temperature adjustment is completed.
1. Initial replenishment operation of the pump

Prepare the containers to receive the solutions from CD-A, CD-B, CD-C and STB replenishment pumps, and carry out the
initial replenishment operation.
To measure the accurate pump output amounts, this operation is carried out only for these pumps.
NOTE
When the initial replenishment is executed, all the replenisher pumps and water supply pumps operate simultaneously.
Extension Processor Settings Pump Output Amount Setting F: Functions Initial Replenishment Operation
7005
2/2
Appendix
Periodically replaced parts .................................................................................................... 8011
Periodically replaced parts [N] ..........................................................................................................................8011
Periodically replaced parts [SM] .......................................................................................................................8011
Positions of paper jam release labels .................................................................................... 8021

Positions of paper jam release labels ...................................................................................................................8021
Service personnel tool list ...................................................................................................... 8031

Service personnel tool list [N] ...........................................................................................................................8031
Service personnel tool list [SM] ........................................................................................................................8031
Operation keyboard correspondence list ............................................................................... 8101

Operation keyboard correspondence list .............................................................................................................8101
Condition list for replenishment solution sensors .................................................................. 8151

Condition list for replenishment solution sensors [SM] ....................................................................................8151
Table of wiring diagrams ....................................................................................................... 8900

Table of wiring diagrams .....................................................................................................................................8900
8 Appendix
8.
8000
8000
1/1
8011
Periodically replaced parts
Periodically replaced parts [N]

For the SM specification, refer to Periodically replaced parts [SM].
! Replacement cycle of the component

Check each part according to the processing time or number of prints, and replace them with new ones if necessary.
The useful life of each part is calculated in the following conditions.
1 year (3600 hours) = 12 hours (continuous use) for 300 days (25 days 12 months)
No. of prints per 1 day: 2200 (89 127BL)
Check the actual processing hours and number of prints using hour meter and print counter.
IMPORTANT
The values described below indicate standard periods rather than the guarantee periods.
! Consumable parts to be replaced by the user

Unit and block
names
Scanner section
Part name
Part No.
Replacement Processing
No. of
cycle
time
prints
(year)
(hour)
processed
(unit:
10,000)
Q'ty
Remarks
Air filter
A062587-01
Replace when it has

been seriously
damaged.
Air filter
A062361-01
Replace when it has

been seriously
damaged.
Scanner lamp
I061225-00
8 months
2400H
Air filter
A062604-01
Replace when it has

been seriously
damaged.
Air filter
A062471-01
Replace when it has

been seriously
damaged.
Air filter
A063413-01
Replace when it has

been seriously
damaged.
Air filter
A063412-01
Replace when it has

been seriously
damaged.
Personal computer
control unit
Air filter
H998406-00
Replace when it has

been seriously
damaged. (Only for
QSS-3011)
Correction value
printing unit
Ribbon cassette
H086035-00
10
Option
Printer main body
8011
1/8
8. Appendix
Printer section
8011
Processor section
Unit and block
names
Processor section
Processing rack
Part name
Part No.
No. of
cycle
time (hour)
prints
(year)
processed
(unit:
10,000)
Q'ty
Remarks
Filter cartridge
H029037-00
2 weeks
Air filter
A047653-01
Replace when the

power supply box
section has been
seriously damaged.
Lower turn belt
A035148-01
*1
CD, BF
Lower turn belt (3)
A050029-01
*1
STB
*1. The life span of lower turn belt may vary according to the chemical and usage environment. Recommend to users that they inspect every month to
check whether it should be replaced.
! Consumable parts to be replaced by the service personnel

Unit and block
names
Dryer rack
Part name
Pile cloth
Part No.
No. of
cycle
time (hour)
prints
(year)
processed
(unit:
10,000)
H039107-00
Q'ty
Remarks
! Replacement as required at regular check (every six months after one year has
elapsed.)
Unit and block
names
Processor section
Part name
Strainer
Part No.
No. of
cycle
time (hour)
prints
(year)
processed
(unit:
10,000)
H056009-00
Q'ty
Remarks
For adding
solutions and
automatic cleaning
! Replacement as required at regular check (every six months after two years have
elapsed.)
Printer section
Unit and block
names
Colorimeter unit
Part name
Part No.
Calibration plate
I090171-00
No. of
cycle
time (hour)
prints
(year)
processe
d
(unit:
10,000)
2
8011
Q'ty
Remarks
Replace, if the
quality has been
downgraded
according to the
storage conditions.
(including
calibration data FD)
2/8
8. Appendix
Processor section
Unit and block

names
Personal computer
control unit
8011
Part name
Battery pack
Paper supply unit A Paper cutter unit
Part No.
No. of
cycle
time (hour)
prints
(year)
processe
d
(unit:
10,000)
Q'ty
Remarks
I085024-00
Within 3 years
Differs
depending
on the
model. *1
Within three years

from the date
described in the
battery replacement
label
Z019746-01
150
Replace every two

years or 1,500,000
prints
*1. Q'ty of the battery pack is one for QSS-3001 and two for QSS-3011.
Processor section
Unit and block
names
Part name
Part No.
No. of
cycle
time (hour)
prints
(year)
processed
(unit:
10,000)
Q'ty
Processor section
Washing pipe
B011844-00
Processing rack
Gasket
A035127-01
Side roller (1)
A035168-00
48
Remarks
Turn roller (2)
A035167-00
10
Squeegee roller
ASSY
A041042-00
Squeegee roller
ASSY (2)
A041397-00
Turn roller (4)
A035192-00
Turn roller (5)
A041376-00
CPK-2-28: 36
! Replacement as required at regular check (every six months after three years have
elapsed.)
Unit and block
names
Processor section
Part name
Part No.
No. of
cycle
time (hour)
prints
(year)
processed
(unit:
10,000)
Q'ty
Remarks
Poppet valve
I091040-00
Only CP-47L
Poppet valve
I091003-00
CP-47L: 4
8011
8. Appendix
Processor section
3/8
Processing rack
Dryer rack
Part name
Part No.
No. of
cycle
time (hour)
prints
(year)
processed
(unit:
10,000)
Q'ty
Bearing (1)
A035075-01
Double gear
A047651-01
Remarks
CPK-2-28: 6
Bevel gear (22T)
A035155-01
30
CPK-2-28: 24
Bevel gear (2)
A220062-01
36
CPK-2-28: 30
Idle gear (23T)
A047719-01
Bushing (1)
B010247-01
12
Center bushing
A216227-01
48
Pressure bushing
(13)
A032741-01
30
Pressure bushing
(12)
A032742-01
30
Bearing (2)
A046045-01
Advance roller (1)
A035703-00
Advance roller (2)
A035706-00
Advance roller (3)
A035708-00
Advance belt
B010845-01
Bearing bushing
A116947-01
Center roller
bushing
A229139-01
12
Exit roller
A238067-01
Drive gear
A039877-01
Dryer advance
sprocket
A237076-01
Gear sprocket
A041041-01
CPK-2-28: 36
8. Appendix
Unit and block

names
8011
8011
4/8
8011
Periodically replaced parts [SM]

! Replacement cycle of the component
Check each part according to the processing time or number of prints, and replace them with new ones if necessary.
The useful life of each part is calculated in the following conditions.
1 year (3600 hours) = 12 hours (continuous use) for 300 days (25 days 12 months)
No. of prints per 1 day: 2200 (89 127BL)
Check the actual processing hours and number of prints using hour meter and print counter.
IMPORTANT
The values described below indicate standard periods rather than the guarantee periods.
! Consumable parts to be replaced by the user

Unit and block
names
Scanner section
Part name
Part No.
No. of
cycle
time (hour)
prints
(year)
processed
(unit:
10,000)
Q'ty
Remarks
Air filter
A062587-01
Replace when it has

been seriously
damaged.
Air filter
A062361-01
Replace when it has

been seriously
damaged.
Scanner lamp
I061225-00
8 months
2400H
Air filter
A062604-01
Replace when it has

been seriously
damaged.
Air filter
A062471-01
Replace when it has

been seriously
damaged.
Air filter
A063413-01
Replace when it has

been seriously
damaged.
Air filter
A063412-01
Replace when it has

been seriously
damaged.
Personal computer
control unit
Air filter
H998406-00
Replace when it has

been seriously
damaged. (Only for
QSS-3011)
Correction value
printing unit
Ribbon cassette
H086035-00
10
Option
Printer main body
8011
5/8
8. Appendix
Printer section
8011
Processor section
Unit and block
names
Processor section
Processing rack
Part name
Part No.
No. of
cycle
time
prints
(year)
(hour)
processed
(unit:
10,000)
Q'ty
Remarks
Filter cartridge
H029037-00
2 weeks
Air filter
A047653-01
Replace when the

power supply box
section has been
seriously damaged.
Lower turn belt
A035148-01
*1
CD, BF
Lower turn belt (3)
A050029-01
*1
STB
*1. The life span of lower turn belt may vary according to the chemical and usage environment. Recommend to users that they inspect every month to
check whether it should be replaced.
! Consumable parts to be replaced by the service personnel

Unit and block
names
Dryer rack
Part name
Pile cloth
Part No.
H039107-00
No. of
cycle
time
prints
(year)
(hour)
processed
(unit:
10,000)
-
Q'ty
Remarks
! Replacement as required at regular check (every six months after one year has
elapsed.)
Processor section
Processor section
Part name
Part No.
No. of
cycle
time
prints
(year)
(hour)
processed
(unit:
10,000)
Q'ty
Remarks
Poppet valve
I091040-00
For STB (fluoro

rubber)
Strainer
H056009-00
For adding
solutions, water and
automatic cleaning
Probe (1) ASSY
A054658-01
Other than CD-C
Probe (2) ASSY
A054659-01
For CD-C (EPDM)
8011
6/8
8. Appendix
Unit and block

names
8011
! Replacement as required at regular check (every six months after two years have
elapsed.)
Printer section
Unit and block
names
Part name
Part No.
No. of
cycle
time
prints
(year)
(hour)
processed
(unit:
10,000)
Colorimeter unit
Calibration
plate
I090171-00
Personal computer
control unit
Battery pack
I085024-00 Within 3 years
Paper supply unit A Paper cutter unit Z019746-01
Q'ty
Remarks
Replace, if the
quality has been
downgraded
according to the
storage conditions.
(including
calibration data FD)
Differs
depending
on the
model. *1
Within three years

from the date
described in the
battery replacement
label
150
Replace every two

years or 1,500,000
prints
*1. Q'ty of the battery pack is one for QSS-3001 and two for QSS-3011.
Processor section
Part name
Part No.
No. of
cycle
time
prints
(year)
(hour)
processed
(unit:
10,000)
Q'ty
Processor section
Washing pipe
B011844-00
Processing rack
Gasket
A035127-01
Side roller (1)
A035168-00
36
Turn roller (2)
A035167-00
10
Squeegee roller
ASSY
A041042-00
Squeegee roller
ASSY (2)
A041397-00
Turn roller (4)
A035192-00
Turn roller (5)
A041376-00
Remarks
8. Appendix
Unit and block

names
! Replacement as required at regular check (every six months after three years have
elapsed.)
Processor section
Unit and block
names
Processor section
Part name
Part No.
Replacemen
t cycle
(year)
Processin
No. of
g time
prints
(hour)
processed
(unit:
10,000)
Q'ty
Remarks
Poppet valve
I091003-00
For CD-C (EPDM)
Poppet valve
I091040-00
Other than CD-C

and STB (fluoro
rubber)
8011
7/8
Processing rack
Dryer rack
Part name
Part No.
Replacemen
t cycle
(year)
Processin
No. of
g time
prints
(hour)
processed
(unit:
10,000)
Q'ty
Bearing (1)
A035075-01
Double gear
A047651-01
Bevel gear (22T)
A035155-01
24
Bevel gear (2)
A220062-01
30
Idle gear (23T)
A047719-01
Bushing (1)
B010247-01
12
Center bushing
A216227-01
36
Pressure bushing
(13)
A032741-01
30
Pressure bushing
(12)
A032742-01
30
Bearing (2)
A046045-01
Advance roller (1)
A035703-00
Advance roller (2)
A035706-00
Advance roller (3)
A035708-00
Advance belt
B010845-01
Bearing bushing
A116947-01
Center roller
bushing
A229139-01
12
Exit roller
A238067-01
Drive gear
A039877-01
Dryer advance
sprocket
A237076-01
Gear sprocket
A041041-01
Remarks
8. Appendix
Unit and block

names
8011
8011
8/8
8021
Positions of paper jam release labels

! Explanation
The paper jam release label is put at the back of printer door 1.
G057549
The paper jam release label is put at the back of printer door 3. (When the dual paper magazine unit is attached.)
Printer door 3
G057550
8021
1/1
8. Appendix
Printer door 1
8031
Service personnel tool list

Service personnel tool list [N]

For the SM specification, refer to Service personnel tool list [SM].
! Service personnel tool of printer section

Tool
Tool No.
Explanation
Scanner adjustment chart (135)
Z019786-01
Z019039-01
Used for the scanner adjustment such as swing and tilt adjustment,
light axis adjustment, focus adjustment (including the card case).*1
Z019787-01
Z019041-01
Scanner adjustment chart (mount)
Z019668-01
Used to adjust the scanner focus (including the color soft clear
case).*1
A064841-01
Used to adjust the position of the emission lamp and detection

sensor of the 135/240 AMC.
A060553-01

sensor of the 135/240 MMC.
AMC emission adjustment chart
Z808669-01

sensor of the 135/240 AMC and MMC.
Head adjustment jig
A037410-01
Used to adjust the printing pressure of the CVP.
Cleaning sheet for densitometer
H089016-00
Used to clean the advance rollers of the colorimeter unit.
Service personnel floppy disk
F000472-01
Used to enter the service personnel password.
T-handle torque wrench set*2
L004488-00
This tool (socket wrench) is used to replace the laser unit.
Positioning pin
A063588-01
Used to position when replacing the laser unit. 2 pins are necessary.
Loupe
H099039-00
Check the line on the test print of exposure position adjustment.
Cable unit for measurement of grounding

resistance *3
W407756-01
Cable unit for measurement of grounding resistance between

scanner section and printer main body
*1. Since the scanner adjustment chart is very thin, keep it in the card case when handling.
*2. It is unnecessary if the socket wrench (width across flats of socket: 13) for 125 mm or more including nut has already prepared. When removing
the two places of rear side, use the ratchet type socket wrench because there is a PC computer control unit.
8. Appendix
Nut (M8) for fixing the laser unit
Laser unit
125 mm
G057544
*3. When the scanner section can placed near by the printer main body, the cable unit for measurement of grounding resistance is not necessary.
8031
1/4
8031
! Service personnel tool of processor section
8. Appendix
None
8031
2/4
8031
Service personnel tool list [SM]

! Service personnel tool of printer section
Tool
Tool No.
Explanation
Z019786-01
Z019039-01
Used for the scanner adjustment such as swing and tilt adjustment,
light axis adjustment, focus adjustment (including the card case).*1
Z019787-01
Z019041-01
Scanner adjustment chart (mount)
Z019668-01
Used to adjust the scanner focus (including the color soft clear
case).*1
A064841-01

sensor of the 135/240 AMC.
A060553-01

sensor of the 135/240 MMC.
AMC emission adjustment chart
Z808669-01

sensor of the 135/240 AMC and MMC.
Head adjustment jig
A037410-01
Used to adjust the printing pressure of the CVP.
Cleaning sheet for densitometer
H089016-00
Used to clean the advance rollers of the colorimeter unit.
Service personnel floppy disk
F000472-01
Used to enter the service personnel password.
T-handle torque wrench set*2
L004488-00
This tool (socket wrench) is used to replace the laser unit.
Positioning pin
A063588-01
Used to position when replacing the laser unit. 2 pins are necessary.
Loupe
H099039-00
Check the line on the test print of exposure position adjustment.
Cable unit for measurement of grounding

resistance *3
W407756-01
Cable unit for measurement of grounding resistance between

scanner section and printer main body
*1. Since the scanner adjustment chart is very thin, keep it in the card case when handling.
*2. It is unnecessary if the socket wrench (width across flats of socket: 13) for 125 mm or more including nut has already prepared. When removing
the two places of rear side, use the ratchet type socket wrench because there is a PC computer control unit cover.
8. Appendix
Personal computer control unit cover
Nut (M8) for fixing the laser unit
Laser unit
125 mm
G057544
*3. When the scanner section can placed near by the printer main body, the cable unit for measurement of grounding resistance is not necessary.
! Service personnel tool of processor section

Tool
Air exhaust tool (pipe type) assembly
Tool No.
A050400-01
Explanation
Used when installing the SM specification and replacing the
replenisher pump. (compatible with the conventional SM machines)
8031
3/4
Probe replacing jig
Tool No.
A053235-01

Explanation
Used when replacing the probe. (compatible with the conventional

SM machines)
8. Appendix
Tool
8031
8031
4/4
8101
Operation keyboard correspondence list


Operation keyboard have same functions as some keys on the full keyboard.
Operation keyboard
Corresponded full keyboard
F1
REPT
F2
ORDER
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
-1
F9
+1
F10
PASS
F11
NO/STOP
F12
YES/START
ENT
Remarks
G050097
8101
1/1
8. Appendix
Operation keyboard
8151
Condition list for replenishment solution sensors

Condition list for replenishment solution sensors [SM]

This list indicates the information relating to the suffix numbers in the No. 0700 and 0705 Replace the Replenishment Package with a
new one. P-# attention messages.
4041
4043
0 indicates that the replenishment solution sensor is in DARK status.
- indicates that the replenishment solution sensor is in LIGHT status.
Status of the replenishment solution sensor
P-1
CD-A
Attention message
P-2
CD-B
CD-C
STB
BF-A
BF-B
01
P-1
02
P-1
03
P-1
04
P-1
05
P-1
06
P-1
07
P-1
08
P-1
09
P-1
10
P-1
11
P-1
12
P-1
13
P-1
14
P-1
15
P-1
16
P-2
17
P-1
P-2
18
P-1
P-2
19
P-1
P-2
20
P-1
P-2
21
P-1
P-2
22
P-1
P-2
23
P-1
P-2
24
P-1
P-2
25
P-1
P-2
26
P-1
P-2
27
P-1
P-2
28
P-1
P-2
29
P-1
P-2
30
P-1
P-2
31
P-1
P-2
32
P-2
33
P-1
P-2
34
P-1
P-2
35
P-1
P-2
36
P-1
P-2
37
P-1
P-2
38
P-1
P-2
39
P-1
P-2
40
P-1
P-2
8151
8. Appendix
Suffix
number
1/2
8151
Suffix
number
Status of the replenishment solution sensor

P-1
CD-A
Attention message
P-2
CD-B
CD-C
STB
BF-A
BF-B
P-1
P-2
42
P-1
P-2
43
P-1
P-2
44
P-1
P-2
45
P-1
P-2
46
P-1
P-2
47
P-1
P-2
48
P-2
49
P-1
P-2
50
P-1
P-2
51
P-1
P-2
52
P-1
P-2
53
P-1
P-2
54
P-1
P-2
55
P-1
P-2
56
P-1
P-2
57
P-1
P-2
58
P-1
P-2
59
P-1
P-2
60
P-1
P-2
61
P-1
P-2
62
P-1
P-2
63
P-1
P-2
8. Appendix
41
8151
2/2
8900
Table of wiring diagrams

Item
Diagram No.
Remarks
LPP1-1
System connecting
J307572
LPP1-2
PC connecting
J307584
For QSS-3001
LPP1-2
PC connecting
J308354
For QSS-3011
LPP1-3
PC power source connecting
J307574
For QSS-3001
LPP1-4
Printer AC power source connecting
J307573
For QSS-3001
LPP1-4
Printer AC power source connecting
J308351
For QSS-3011
LPP1-5
DC power supply connecting 1
J307575
For QSS-3001
For QSS-3011
LPP1-5
J308350
LPP1-6
J307576
LPP1-7
J307577
LPP1-8
Around engine section 1
J307581
LPP1-9
Around engine section 2
J307580
LPP1-10
Around paper supply section
J307578
LPP1-11
Paper supply section A/Exposure advance section
J307579
LPP1-12
Around paper supply section
J307583
LPP1-13
Correction value print
J307582
LPP1-14
Colorimeter unit
J307641
For QSS-3001
LPP1-14
Colorimeter unit
J308364
For QSS-3011
LPP1-15
Pricing Unit
J308062
For QSS-3001
LPP1-15
Pricing Unit
J308365
For QSS-3011
LPP1-16
PC Power Supply connecting (1)
J308352
For QSS-3011
LPP1-17
PC Power Supply connecting (2)
J308353
For QSS-3011
Around ARCNET, LVDS
J307635
S2-1
S2-2
AC power source connecting
J307631
S2-3
DC power supply connecting
J307632
S2-4
Around AFC/Scanner control PCB
J307634
S2-5
Around AFC/scanner driver PCB
J307633
LPP3-1
AC power source connecting (Japan)
J307662
LPP3-1
AC power source connecting (outside Japan)
J307661
LPP3-2
Processor I/O PCB around (1) [N]
J307663
LPP3-2
Processor I/O PCB around (1) [SM]
J307684
LPP3-3
Processor I/O PCB around (2)
J307664
LPP3-4
Main relay PCB around
J307666
LPP3-5
Around SM I/O PCB [SM]
J307693
S4-1
135/240 AFC (1)
J307983
S4-2
135/240 AFC (2)
J307984
S5-1
120 AFC
J307985
S6-1
110 AFC
J307986
S7-1
135/240 MMC (1)
J307987
S7-2
135/240 MMC (2)
J307988
S8-1
135 AFC
J308271
8900
8. Appendix
Block No.
1/3
8900
S9-1
135/240 AMC (1)
J308367
S9-2
135/240 AMC (2)
J308368
LPP11-1
Interlock switch
J308010
LPP11-2
Paper supply section A (1)
J308011
LPP11-3
Paper supply section A (2)
J308012
LPP11-4
J308013
LPP11-5
Paper advance unit
J308014
LPP11-6
Paper supply unit B
J308015
LPP11-7
Laser tempearture section
J308357
Film carrier mount section/cooling fan
J308003
S12-2
Scanner light source section
J308004
S12-3
135/240 AFC (1)
J307989
S12-4
135/240 AFC (2)
J307990
S12-5
135/240 AFC (3)
J307991
S12-6
135/240 AFC (4)
J307992
S12-7
135/240 AFC (5)
J307993
S12-8
135/240 AFC (6)
J307994
S12-9
135/240 AFC (7)
J307995
S12-10
135/240 AFC (8)
J307996
S12-11
120 AFC
J307997
S12-12
110 AFC
J307998
S12-13
135/240 MMC (1)
J308001
S12-14
135/240 MMC (2)
J308002
S12-15
135 AFC (1)
J308277
S12-16
135 AFC (2)
J308278
S12-17
135/240 AMC (1)
J308369
S12-18
135/240 AMC (2)
J308370
S12-19
135/240 AMC (3)
J308371
S12-1
LPP13-1
Temperature control block (1) [N]
J308016
LPP13-1
Temperature control block (1) [SM]
J308027
LPP13-2
Temperature control block (2)
J308017
LPP13-3
Dryer section, Drive block
J308018
LPP13-4
Replenisher block [N]
J308019
LPP13-4
Waste solution collecting block [SM]
J308028
LPP13-5
Refilling water block [N]
J308020
LPP13-5
Refilling water block [SM]
J308029
LPP13-6
J308021
LPP13-7
Main relay PCB around
J308022
LPP13-8
Option
J308023
LPP13-9
Replenishment unit (1) [SM]
J308030
LPP13-10
Replenishment unit (2) [SM]
J308031
8900
8. Appendix
2/3
8900
8. Appendix
8900
3/3

QSS3001 Service Manual

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

QSS3001 Service Manual

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

www.minilablaser.

for service personnel only

1.Cautions for work

Notes to service personnel

Tapping truss head screw

Spike truss head screw (green)

Washer head screw (for ground)

This system consists of the following combination.

S-1200 (Film scanner)

S-1200 (Film scanner)

LPP-1200 (Laser printer processor)

LPP-1200 (Laser printer processor)

S-1200 (Film scanner)

LPP-1200SM (Laser printer processor)

LPP-1200SM (Laser printer processor)

System program: Ver. C

For the different procedures depending on the specifications

About the chapters

Marks and symbols used in this manual

This is called the alert symbol mark.

This indicates the manual or section which should be referred to.

This indicates functions or instructions which are convenient to know.

Abbreviations for processing solutions used in this manual

1. Cautions for work

Location of warning labels ........................................................................................................ 1002

For safe operation .................................................................................................................... 1003

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Adjusting the belt tension ......................................................................................................... 2011

Display monitor section ............................................................................................................ 2031

Scanner section ....................................................................................................................... 2061

Film carrier section (135/240 AFC) .......................................................................................... 2070

Table peripheral section ........................................................................................................... 2111

Personal computer control section ........................................................................................... 2151

Paper supply section A ............................................................................................................ 2518

Paper supply section B ............................................................................................................ 2541

Exposure advance section ....................................................................................................... 2581

Engine section .......................................................................................................................... 2601

Paper advance section ............................................................................................................. 2651

Dryer Section ........................................................................................................................... 2722

Order Classification Section ..................................................................................................... 2741

Replenishment package unit .................................................................................................... 2781

Mode structure chart ................................................................................................................ 3003

Daily Totals .............................................................................................................................. 3031

Setup ........................................................................................................................................ 3061

Processor Settings ................................................................................................................... 3101

NMC Setting ............................................................................................................................. 3131

Operator Selections ................................................................................................................. 3141

Maintenance ............................................................................................................................. 3151

Maintenance ............................................................................................................................. 3155

Printer Mechanical Adjustment ................................................................................................ 3201

Scanner Unit Adjustment ......................................................................................................... 3226

About PC .................................................................................................................................. 3701

Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. ........................................................................................4001

No. 0501 [N]

The replenisher switch is turned on. ..............................................................................................4001

No. 0502 [N]

Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. ................................................................4002

Empty the Effluent Tank. .....................................................................................................................4002

No. 0504 The Effluent Concentration Tank is full. ..............................................................................................4003

Attention message: SM replenishment .................................................................................... 4041

Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# .....................................................4041

No. 0701-## [SM]

Attach the Replenishment Package.P-# ................................................................................4041

Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# .....................................................4043